Home

Liverpool Owner`s Manual

1. CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 1 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 2 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 3 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 4 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 4 3 3 3 5 4 4 4 4 6 5 5 5 5 7 6 6 6 6 8 7 7 7 7 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 5 CC O CC 32 PC Bank 6 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 7 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 8 1 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 7 0 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 4 3 3 3 3 5 4 4 4 4 e 5 5 5 5 7 6 6 6 6 8a 7 7 7 7 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 9 CC O CC 32 PC Bank 10 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 11 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 12 1 1 8 0 1 9 0 1 10 0 1 11 0 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 4 3 3 3 5 4 4 4 4 6 5 5 5 5 7 6 6 6 6 8 7 7 7 7 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 13 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 14 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 15 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 16 1 1 12 0 1 13 0 1 14 0 1 15 0 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 4 3 3 3 3 5 4 4 4 4 6 5 5 5 7 6 6 6 6 8 7 7 7 7 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 17 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 18 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 19 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 20 1 1 16 0 1 17 0 1 18 0 1 19 0 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 4 3 3
2. e mje m e m e ee e Major 7th 4 note 3 note 2 note I e I IM I e m Sus 4 Sus 2 3 note 2 note 3 note eim jeje e jo eie Jol Dominant 7th 4 note 3 note 2 note i elm e er e m e r e z Dominant 7th Sus 4 Dominant 7th 5 4 note 3 note 4 note EIE Gn FEHI lm Ol n fol e nje ic Major 7th 5 Major 7th Sus 4 4 note Ime itt e z eje e constituent notes of the chord T can be used as tension 236 Recognized chords
3. Name ccoo CC32 PC Name ccoo CC32 PC Accordion 2 121 1 21 Nylon Bossa 121 4 24 Arab Accord 121 10 21 NylonKeyOff 121 2 24 Bank Organ 1 Steel Gtr 2 121 4 25 Jimmy Organ 121 10 18 AcGtrKeyOff 121 5 24 BX3 Velo Sw 121 1 18 Club J Gtr2 121 3 26 ClassiClick 121 4 18 Vintage S 121 4 27 M1 Organ 121 5 17 CleanMutGtr 121 6 28 Jazz Organ 121 8 16 Stereo Dist 121 8 30 Dist Organ 121 5 18 Nylon Gtr 2 121 3 24 RotaryOrgan 121 8 17 Gtr Strings 121 7 24 DarkJazzOrg 121 4 16 FingerK Off 121 7 25 Bx3ShortDec 121 7 17 St12Strings 121 5 25 SuperBXPerc 121 6 18 Jazz Guitar 121 0 26 Percuss BX3 121 4 17 SingleCoil 121 6 27 Killer B 121 2 18 Clean Funk 121 8 28 Drawb Organ 121 0 16 JoystGtr Y 121 3 30 DetDrawbOrg 121 1 16 Reso Guitar 121 12 25 It60 sOrgan 121 2 16 St Folk Gtr 121 9 25 DrawbOrgan2 121 3 16 Steel amp Body 121 3 25 Old Wheels 121 3 17 Hackbrett 121 6 25 Perc Organ 121 0 17 Jazz Man 121 3 28 Det PercOrg 121 1 17 DetCleanGir 121 1 27 Perc Organ2 121 2 17 R amp R Guitar 121 4 28 Rock Organ 121 0 18 OverdriveGt 121 0 29 Good Old B 121 10 16 SKUAS 121 1 24 Dirty B 121 3 18 Mandolin 121 2 25 IperDarkOrg 121 5 16 Mandol KOff 121 10 25 FullDrawbar 121 6 16 MandoTrem 121 1 25 DWGS Organ 12
4. Name ccoo CC32 PC Name ccoo CC32 PC Sitar 121 0 104 Grand Choir 121 11 52 Sitar 2 121 1 104 Slow Choir 121 10 52 SitarTambou 121 2 104 Symph Bows 121 10 48 IndianStars 121 3 104 Cyber Choir 121 2 85 Oud 121 2 105 Choir Light 121 12 52 Kanun 121 2 107 Vocalesque 121 2 54 Kanun Trem 121 3 107 Synth Voice 121 0 54 Kanun Mix 121 4 107 Voice Lead 121 0 85 Shamisen 121 0 106 Choir Pad 121 0 91 Koto 121 0 107 Halo Pad 121 0 94 Taisho Koto 121 1 107 FullVox Pad 121 9 91 IndianFrets 121 4 104 FreshBreath 121 7 91 Bank Strings amp Vocals EtherVoices 121 1 85 Solo Violin 121 2 40 DreamVoice 121 5 54 StringQuart 121 9 48 rumming TA 1 Ens amp Solo 121 7 78 AnalogVoice 121 1 54 St Strings 121 3 48 Mmmh Choir 121 8 52 Analog Str 121 2 50 StringChoir 121 13 52 i3 Strings 121 5 48 ClassicVox 121 4 54 Oh AhVoices 121 9 52 wai 121 29 Take Voices 121 4 52 ree si 91 Slow Violin 121 3 40 pee 124 3 iti Camera Str 121 12 48 Heaven li 2 91 ArcoStrings 121 7 48 Airways 121 i a LegatoStmg 121 4 48 Yang ehin 121 1 20 MasterPad 121 2 89 Bank Trumpet amp Trombone N Strings 121 6 48 MonoTrumpet 121 3 56 OhSlowVoice 121 3 52 Flugel Horn 121 T 56 TakeVoices2 121 5 52 TrumptPitch 121 5 56 SlowAttViol 121 1 40 TrumpetExpr 121 4 56 PizzEnsembl
5. Minor Minor 6th 3 note 2 note 4 note lm ajol l _ ejm m ejo Minor 7th Minor Major 7th 4 note 3 note 4 note 3 note LI i 1 1 J 1 je Diminished Diminished Major 7th 3 note 4 note e e elu ejm m je Minor 7th 5 4 note l 3 r Augmented Augmented 7th Augmented Major 7th 3 note 4 note 4 note b i i elnie eix e e lzje No 3rd No 3rd no 5th 2 note 1 note M Ini constituent notes of the chord T can be used as tension Error messages amp Troubleshooting 237 Error messages 23 ERROR MESSAGES amp TROUBLESHOOTING ERROR MESSAGES Your Liverpool can communicate with you using vari ous messages Here is the list of these messages Messages can be of two different types e Waiting for your confirmation Yes No Press ENTER YES to go on EXIT NO to stop e Revealing an error or failure Press any button on the front panel General Another Command Is Running Press Exit You can t execute a command until the one that is run ning is completed Are you sure Enter Exit This is a confirmation request before many operations Press ENTER YES to confirm EXIT NO to abort Generic error Some undefined err
6. PROFESSIONAL Log KORG CS 2 3 4 mme ET o TE LN su 0099 we ed s v 8 8 NEU 38 E m um tr mum gooo Ay CJ C3 E 8 ud 9 zn 0 11 12 13 14 31 E SEREEEK 36 37 44 oir Fula 41 42 43 LI miei COCOM T a COLI Solel oS 1 9Qoaoo 00000 JO z 16 17 48 19 20 21 22 425 26 45 46 475 1 Power switch 5 SONG PLAY This turns the Liverpool s power on or off This button enters Song Play mode Here 2 MASTER VOLUME you can play back 16 track Standard MIDI i 4s f Files SMF MID or KAR files from This slider controls the overall volume of the instru internal SSD or directly f ment both of the internal speakers the L MONO and cb dem t Fi e den eR RIGHT outputs and the HEADPHONES output oD care without lading tne de Anto no i internal memory Since the Liverpool is Warning At the maximum level with rich sounding Songs equipped with two sequencers you can Styles or Programs the internal speakers could distort dur en even play two Songs at the same time and ing signal peaks Should this happen lower the Master Vol mix them with the BALANCE slider ume a little In addition to the Song tracks you can 3 ACC SEQ VOLUME play one to four Realtime Keyboard This slider controls the accompaniment tracks volume tracks along with
7. CC00 CC32 PC Name Liverpool Bank GM2 CC00 CC32 PC Name Liverpool Bank GM2 121 0 60 French Horn Brass Y 121 1 68 Double Reed Woodwind 121 1 60 FrenchHorn2 Brass N 121 0 69 EnglishHorn Woodwind y 121 2 60 French Sect Brass 121 1 69 EnglisHorn2 Woodwind 121 3 60 ClassicHorn Brass 121 0 70 Bassoon Woodwind Y 121 4 60 Horns amp Ens Brass 121 0 71 Clarinet Woodwind Y 121 0 61 BrassSect 1 Brass Y 121 1 71 Jazz Clarin Woodwind 121 1 61 BrassSect 2 Brass Y 121 2 71 Clarinet G Woodwind 121 2 61 Tight Brass Brass 121 3 71 Sect Winds Woodwind 121 3 61 Glen amp Friend Brass 121 4 71 Sect Winds2 Woodwind 121 4 61 BigBandBrs Brass 121 5 71 ClarinetEns Woodwind 121 5 61 Sax amp Brass Brass 121 6 71 Woodwinds Woodwind 121 6 61 Glen amp Boys Brass 121 7 71 Folk Clarin Woodwind 121 7 61 Trp amp Brass Brass 121 0 72 Piccolo Woodwind y 121 8 61 AttackBrass Brass 121 1 72 Small Orch Woodwind 121 9 61 Trumpet Ens Brass 121 2 72 Nay Woodwind 121 10 61 TromboneEns Brass 121 0 73 Flute Woodwind Y 121 11 61 Trombones Brass 121 1 73 Jazz Flute Woodwind 121 12 61 TightBrass2 Brass 121 2 73 FluteSwitch Woodwind 121 13 61 Fat Brass Brass 121 3 73 FluteDyn5th Woodwind 121 14 61 Dyna Brass Brass 121 4 73 Flute Frull Woodwind 121 15 61
8. Chorus Flanger Normal i Output Mode Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Feedback Wet P Lefto A Cho Fing Wet Dry Wet Dry Righto Parametric 4Band EQ Phaser EEG Sine nein Phaser i o Output Mode E Trim i f 0 100 l Nat invart Sets the parametric EQ input level Phaser Wet Dry E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz mum E 7 Wet Dry Sets the center frequency of Band 1 b Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 Fx 006 E E Trim 0 100 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the parametric EQ input level Sets the gain of Band 1 E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz E Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Sets the center frequency of Band 2 E Q 0 5 10 0 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 Fx 006 c Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 18dB Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 1 Sets the gain of Band 2 E Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz E Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Sets the center frequency for Band 3 Q 0 5 10 0 4 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 Fx 006 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 18dB Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 2 Sets the gain of Band 3 E Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz E Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00k
9. and right LFOs from each other Stereo In Stereo Out Stereo In Stereo Out ten ua I Dry i usos Phaser 4 Phaser i g Ri ub i esonance g Z i Resonance i High Damp g LM Phaser i i B High Damp pf aser 7 TN Right Joss i LFO Phase Right jm ETN ase LFo Tri Sine LFO Shape a LFO Waveform Step Tri Step Sin Random Selects LFO Waveform Fx 010 LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform b LFO Phase degree 180 180 a Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed Fx 020 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Fx 010 Dime b LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 Src Off Tempo o Selects the modulation source commonly used for LFO speed and step LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Speed Sets the LFO speed Fx 009 Dame Amt 20 00 20 00Hz c Src Off Tempo Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed Selects the modulation source of LFO speed LFO Step Freq Frequency Hz 0 05 50 00Hz Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the LFO step speed gt Fx 010 prez Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed d Amt 50 00 50 00Hz BPMIMIDI Sync f _ Off On Sets th
10. 046 Modul Delay Stereo Modulation Delay This stereo delay uses an LFO to sweep the delay time The pitch also varies You will obtain a delay sound with swell and shimmering You can also control the delay time using a modulation source Stereo In Stereo Out Left o gt Wet Dry Delay t Feedback Wet Dry D2 gt Response UR s Leo sy lf LFO Tri Sine gt LFO Shape f e LFO Phase Modulation Mode Stereo In Stereo Out pens Wet Dry Pea AH Delay Input Level D mod High Damp Low Damp 1 Mode Tap Level Mode Spread ida Input Level D mod High Damp Low Damp 1 a 2 pen N H CONI Delay Richa Paiak Lx P Wet Dry Mode Normal Mode Cross Feedback Mode Cross Pan1 Mode Cross Pan2 oor PUEEZH x x OOo ni k Mode Normal Cross Feedback Cross Pan1 Cross Pan2 Switches the left and right delay routing b Tap1 Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Sets the Tap1 delay time c Tap2 Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Sets the Tap2 delay time d Tap1 Level 0 100 Sets the Tap1 output level gt Feedback Tap2 100 100 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount Dez Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the Tap2 feedback amount Amt 100 100 Sets the mod
11. PROGRAMS BANK ORDER Name ccoo cc32 Pc The following table enlists all Liverpool Factory Pro DW8000 EP 121 11 5 grams in the same order as they appear by pressing the El Piano 1 121 0 4 PROGRAM PERFORMANCE bank buttons El Piano 2 121 0 5 Legend The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely DetunedEP 1 121 1 4 select the Programs CC00 Control Change 0 or Bank Select EP1Veloc sw 121 2 4 MSB CC32 Control Change 32 or Bank Select LSB PC 60 sEIPiano 121 3 4 Program Change DetunedEP 2 121 1 5 EP2Veloc sw 121 2 5 Name ccoo cc32 PC EP Legend 121 3 5 R amp B E Piano 121 8 4 Bank Piano SynPiano X 121 5 5 Grad Pignd 121 3 ii Bank Mallet amp Bell Class Piano 121 4 0 Vibraphone 121 0 11 L R Piano 121 5 0 Vibraphone2 121 2 11 AcPianoWide 121 1 0 Vibrap Wide 121 1 11 Ac Piano 121 0 0 Marimba 121 0 12 BrightPian 121 0 1 MarimbaWide 121 1 12 ElGranPian 121 0 2 RimbaKeyOff 121 2 12 ElGrandWide 121 1 2 MonkeySkuls 121 3 12 AcPianoDark 121 2 0 Xylophone 121 0 13 BrPianoWide 121 1 1 Balaphon 121 6 12 90 s Piano 121 3 2 Celesta 121 0 8 M1 Piano 121 2 2 Glocken 121 0 9 2000 sPiano 121 4 2 Music Box 121 0 10 ChorusPiano 121 5 2 Sistro 121 1 9 Honky Tonk 121 0 3 Orgel 121 1 10 Honky Wide 121 1 3 Digi Bell 121 4 98 Piano Pad 121 2 1 Vs Bell Boy 121 2 98 Piano Pad 2 121 3 1 Steel Drums 121 0
12. i Wet Dry Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out M i RE lt Multitap Dalay ce Left o o i Routing Wet Dry EQ Trim LEQ HEQ Feedback now Overdrive Hi Galn Kx Amp Simulation H lt Exciter N H Delay i E High Damp 1 3 Band PEQ Mt Dly Wet Dry Driver Let NA gt Amp Simulation Filter i Output Level Right Ft DS A Mode Overdrive Hi Gain nate oS E X Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Fx 011 R EE O Drive Mode Overdrive Hi Gain b X Emphatic Point 0 70 Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion Sets the frequency range to be emphasized Fx 011 a E Drive 1 100 E X EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the degree of distortion Fx 006 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 O Output Level 0 50 X Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Sets the overdrive output level Fx 006 Des Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 d b Src Off Tempo Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 Amt 50 50 D Tap1 Time msec 0 680msec Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level Sets the Tap1 delay time e O Low Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Tap1 Level 0 100 Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type Sets the Tap1 output level Fx 045 c Gain dB
13. Dry Pre Delay ER Time 042 AutoReverse Auto Reverse This effect records the input signal and automatically plays it in reverse the effect is similar to a tape reverse sound Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Dry Auto Reverse Direc t Rec Reverse Play Li Control i ooo eo Paras Dese Dmod D22 77 So CEnvelops Control Envelope Select a Rec Mode Single Multi Sets the recording mode gt b Reverse Time msec 20 1320msec Sets the maximum duration of the reverse playback gt Envelope Select D mod Input Selects whether the start and end of recording is controlled via the modula tion source or the input signal level gt Dm c Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls recording when Envelope Select is set to D mod gt d Threshold 0 100 Sets the recording start level when Envelope Select is set to Input gt a Response 0 100 Sets the speed of the response to the end of recording Fx 031 f Direct Mix Always On Always Off Cross Fade Selects how a dry sound is mixed Fx 031 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 pom Src Off Tempo g Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100
14. Stereo In Stereo Out Frequency Bottom 0 100 Left fes Dry Sets the lower limit of the wah center frequency gt a T els T ep b a T Frequency Top 0 100 Trim Band Band2 Band3 Band4 Band5 Band6 Band7 Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency gt Sweep Mode Auto D mod LFO mog J e cL ce Selects the control from auto wah modulation source and LFO Band1 Bana Band3 Banda Bands Bands Band7 mi Dz Right Wein b Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the wah when Sweep Mode D mod Response 0 100 Type 1 Wide 1 2 Wide 2 3 Wide 3 4 Half Wide 1 5 Half Wide 2 6 Half Sets the response speed when Sweep Mode Auto or D mod a Wide 3 7 Low 8 Wide Low 9 Mid 10 Wide Mid 11 High 12 Wide High m Selects a combination of center frequencies for each band Envelope Sens Envelope Sensitivity 0 100 Sets the sensitivity of auto wah gt Trim 0 100 c b Sets the input level Envelope Shape 100 100 Sets the sweep curve of auto wah gt Band1 dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 1 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed gt Duer d Band2 dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 2 qd Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Band3 dB 18 0 18 0dB e Sets the gain of Band 3 Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed f Band4 dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 4
15. Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out tene Wet Dry EQ Trim LEQ HEQ H lt Pre Delay Early Reflections EQ Trim Righto Snare a Type Sharp Loose Modulated Reverse Selects the decay curve for the early reflection E b ER Time msec 10 800msec Sets the time length of early reflection c Pre Delay msec 0 200msec Sets the time taken from the original sound to the first early reflection d EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the input level of EQ applied to the effect sound Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 e Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dw f Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a Type This parameter selects the decay curve for the early reflec tion Early Reflections Type Sharp Loose Modulated Reverse
16. Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o gt o Wet Dry y Horn gt Rotary Speaker HorniRotor gt Mic Distance Balance gt Mic Spread 7 AAA Speaker Simulation Right o Wet Dry D z uode Switch Rotate Stop D z2 Speed Switch SlowlFast Dzet gt C Manual Speed Control Mode Switch Rotate Stop Switches between speaker rotation and stop Dz Src Off Tempo a Selects the modulation source that toggles between rotation and stop Sw Toggle Moment Selects switching mode of the modulation source that toggles between rota tion and stop gt Speed Switch Slow Fast Switches the speaker rotation speed between slow and fast Dz Src Off Tempo b Selects the modulation source that toggles between slow and fast Sw Toggle Moment Selects switching mode of the modulation source that toggles between slow and fast gt Manual Speed Ctrl Manual Speed Control Off Tempo c Selects the modulation source in case the rotation speed is changed directly Dzer Horn Acceleration 0 100 How quickly the horn rotation speed in the high range is switched gt d Horn Ratio Stop 0 50 2 00 Adjusts the high range side horn rotation speed Standard value is 1 00 Selecting Stop will stop the rotation Rotor Acceleration 0 100 Determines how quickly the rotor rotation speed in the low range is switched e
17. transpose J Tu L 8 tt E 1 F 1 cp irnack i Int FEL HET Mig Both Bath mU Both Both 0 amp Both External m Bath m tempo mmm J nu cog q octave T H Tad Em page Track Int 4 Ext Fe External Both E i External Both amp Both Both m Both Both c Parameters PERF STYLE STS Internal The track plays the sounds generated by the internal sound engine It does not play an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT The track plays an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT It does not play the internal sounds therefore saving polyphony When a track is set to External a strings of transmitted Control Change and Pro gram Change data is shown instead of the Program name assigned to the track In the following example CC 0 is the Con trol Change 0 Bank Select MSB CC 32 is the Control Change 32 Bank Select LSB PC is the Program Change External Benen CC O CC 32 PC Both The track plays both the internal sounds and an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT Style Play operating mode 47 Page 15 Track Internal External PAGE 16 R T CONTROLS DAMPER This page lets you enable disable the Damper pedal for each of the Realtime Keyboard tracks N transpose C gn Lou style play ee ee a a TTA r ee a NITE ET CLl bmertixver EB Eg
18. Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o gt Warn Routing Compressor Y Wah Auto Wah EQ Trim LEQ HEQ gt H Hom a A Output Level Right i i i Sweep Mode KT Dry C Sensitivity 1 100 Sets the sensitivity Fx 002 C Attack 1 100 Table Sets the attack level on page 178 Fx 002 b Output Level 0 100 Sets the compressor output level Fx 002 P C EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 C Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 d Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 W Frequency Bottom 0 100 Sets the lower limit of the wah center frequency Fx 009 e Frequency Top 0 100 Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency Fx 009 W Sweep Mode Auto D mod LFO Selects the control from auto wah modulation source and LFO f Fx 009 y nes Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the wah when Sweep Mode D mod W LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz g Sets the LFO speed W Resonance 0 100 Sets the resonance amount h Low Pass Filter Off On Switches the wah low pass filter on and off i Routing CMP WAH WAH CMP Switches the order of the compressor and wah connection Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177
19. At this point you can Create a new SET folder SET folder on page 139 see Creating a new e Save onto an existing SET folder 4 If you are saving into an existing folder move the desired SET folder to the first line of the display using the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Once the target folder is selected press F 2 SAVE to save the files The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Warning After confirming all data in the target folder is deleted When the operation is completed the Wait indi cator disappears the source page comes back in the display and you may perform further saving operations Saving all data of a specific type You can save all data of a specific type with a single operation 1 2 Insert the target card into the card slot The whole content All of the internal memory is already selected Press F 3 OPEN to open the All folder A list of User data types appear each type is a separate folder LE af style play m Fj as Ce ee ee LL pt GLOBAL i C3 PERFORM Co PROGRAM I SAVE OPEN CLOSE page Tr Myl p Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the data type you are looking for to the first line of the display Once you hav
20. CW Lern2 Meteo Orit Resol J Meter 44 Com HTT Sth Style name Track in record edit Style Play icon When this icon appears in the display you are in Style Play or Style Record mode Chord While in the Main and Style Tracks page this area shows the Original Key Chord see Original Key Chord on page 56 for the selected track Style name This is the name of the Style in record edit Measure counter This counter shows the measure in record The mea sure range is specified by the RecLen parameter see RL Recording Length on page 55 Track in record edit Most editing in this edit mode are executed on a single track While in the main page the currently selected track is shown on the upper right area of the display The abbreviations are DR Drums PC Percussion BS Bass A1 A5 Accompaniment 1 5 To select the track to edit press TRACK SELECT to jump to the Style Tacks page see Style Tracks page on page 56 and use the VOLUME VALUE buttons to select it E Style Element Use the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the line and the F 1 button to select this parameter This parameter lets you select the Style Element to put in edit Each Style Element corresponds to one of the buttons on the control panel carrying the same name Note When this parameter and the assigned value is in small letters e v1 the Style Element is empty when it is in capitals E V1 it is
21. Sai Dry P Trim 0 100 Sets the input level b Band1 Type Peaking Shelving Low Selects the type of Band 1 gt Band4 Type Peaking Shelving High Selects the type of Band 4 gt Band2 Dynamic Gain Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the Band 2 gain gt d Amt dB 18 18dB Sets the modulation amount of Band 2 gain gt Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 o Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 1 Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 2 f Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 2 gt De Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 3 Q 0 5 10 0 9 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 3 Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 4 h Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 4 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Daz i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page
22. c Cog P octave alitilsMiditut Fit Sue Excl Pitch Bend Hono Touch OFF B Bark Sel OF i Modi cx OFF Filters gt GBL Selected MIDI OUT filters Off No filter Pitch Bend Pitch Bend MonoTouch Mono or Channel After Touch PolyTouch Poly After Touch PrgChange Program Change SysExcl System Exclusive All CC All Control Change messages 0 127 Control Change message 0 127 See MIDI Controllers on page 230 for a list of available Control Change messages 16 CARD EDIT ENVIRONMENT The Card Edit environment is the place where you can manage files This edit environment overlaps the cur rent operating mode Style Play Song Play Backing Sequence Song Program THE WRITE CARD IN USE LED When the drive is reading or writing data on a card the WRITE CARD IN USE indicator lights up While in a Card page the Wait message appears in the display in this situation you can t select a different Card page you can however select a different operative mode gt i c i Warning Never remove a card when the WRITE CARD IN USE LED is turned on SUPPORTED CARDS You can use the following types of cards to save or load data to and from the Liverpool s internal memory e SD High Speed Ultra II SDHC e MMC e MicroSD with an SD adapter e MiniSD with an SD adapter Note Before you can use the SD MM
23. Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Dez Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the Exciter intensity Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the Exciter intensity Emphatic Point 0 70 Sets the frequency to be emphasized gt Ds b Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the frequency to be emphasized Amt 70 70 Sets the amount of modulation of the frequency to be emphasized Enhancer Dly L Enhancer Delay L msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the delay time for the Enhancer left channel d Enhancer Dly R Enhancer Delay R msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the delay time for the Enhancer right channel Enhancer Depth 0 100 Sets the determines to what degree the Enhancer effect is applied Dz e Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the Enhancer width Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the Enhancer width f EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the 2 band EQ input level Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 g Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Doae h Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177
24. C Co NEWNAME SET it C3 LIVE SET Co ETHNICA SET H SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE 3 Use the F 1 SD button to rescan the SD card 4 Load three banks of Styles to be transformed into the DIRECT SD bank 5 Go to the Save page C chord D empo p Dg L i tt octave style play oe a on meee ees page Landi sae T C paa i i SAE OFEN CLOSE 6 While the ALL item is selected press F 3 OPEN to open it 7 Use the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE section controls to move the STYLE item to the first line of the display and press F 2 SAVE 8 Select the SD card SD as the target using the F 1 button 9 The card directory appears Use the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE section controls to scroll the card content Move the first folder of the directory to the first line of the display 10 Press ENTER twice to save the banks MAIN PAGE This is the page you see after you turn the instrument on To access this page from another operating mode press the STYLE PLAY button Note When switching from Song Play to Style Play a Per formance is automatically selected and various track param eters may change To return to this page from one of the Style Play edit pages press the EXIT NO button To switch be
25. Here is the edit procedure 1 Usethe VOLUME VALUE E H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F 3 F 4 buttons to select the X or Y param eter for that track 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the status 48 Style Play operating mode Page 18 R T controls Dynamic range X PERF STS This enables disables the left right movement of the Joystick Pitch Bend and sometimes the sound param eter s control Y PERF STS This enables disables the front rear movement of the Joystick Y Modulation and sometimes the sound parameter s control Y Various controls or non active PAGE 18 R T CONTROLS DYNAMIC RANGE This page lets you program a dynamic range for each of the Realtime Keyboard tracks This is useful to cre ate a sound made of up to three dynamic layers assign ing each of the Upper tracks to a different dynamic range As an example you may assign the El Piano 1 Program to the Upper 1 and the El Piano 2 Program to the Upper 2 track Then set Upper 1 to L 0 H 80 and Upper 2 to L 81 H 127 The El Piano 1 will play when playing softer the El Piano 2 when playing louder f a3 OY EET EE m m 2I ai ET Chl DunRanae mip Lia Heir eases Lia Hitz M g m Lif Hi2 M Lid Hi7 m Here is the edit procedure 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE E H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F 3 F 4 buttons
26. a Exciter Blend This parameter sets the depth intensity of the Exciter effect Positive values give a frequency pattern to be emphasized different from negative values b Emphatic Point This parameter sets the frequency to be emphasized Higher values will emphasize lower frequencies c Enhancer Dly L msec d Enhancer Dly R msec These parameters set the delay time for the Enhancer left and right channel Specifying a slightly different delay time for the left and right channel will add a stereo image depth and width to the sound 012 Sub Oscill Stereo Sub Oscillator This effect adds very low frequencies to the input sig nal It is very useful when simulating a roaring drum sound or emphasizing powerful low range This effect is different from the equalizer in that you can add very low range harmonics You can also adjust the oscillator frequency to match a particular note number for use as an octaver Stereo In Stereo Out Lefto gi es Envelope Shape Envelope Sens Pre LPF Dm Fixed Frequency Fixed Sine Oscillator o i Note NIIT Note Interval Fine Note Key Follow Envelope Sens Pre LPF g XL Envelope Shape Jmn 2 Effects 185 Filter Dynamic 013 Talking Mod Talking Modulator This effect adds an unusual character like a human voice to the input signal Modu
27. page Card Load D pc LSERE STY I Co USERS ST Co USERS ST it SO LORD OPEN CLOSE Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the desired bank to the first line of the display Press F 2 LOAD to confirm the file selection The list of User banks in memory appears E transpose M i e xt Dass liz enn LH Li Lic e ig User It User Lenis iL Sp LORD PEH CLOSE In the page above the previously selected Style bank will be loaded into the bank 1 USER1 but ton in memory The existing Styles in memory will be deleted and overwritten 10 Card Edit environment Page 1 Load Scroll the available locations in memory using the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE con trols When the target bank is selected i e it is in the first line of the display press F 2 LOAD to load the bank The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Warning After confirming all User data contained in the bank in memory is deleted When the operation is completed the Wait indi cator disappears the source page comes back in the display and you may perform further loading operations Loading a single item You can load a single User item i e a single User Pro gram a single User Style or a single Performance with a single
28. If you press TRACK SELECT again you are back to the main page Press TRACK SELECT AGAIN to go to tracks 1 8 2 Select the track you wish to assign a different Pro gram using the VOLUME VALUE buttons Press Tutorial 33 Editing a Song one of the buttons corresponding to the track to select For example one of the A buttons to select track 1 J nue Oot E 0 e jiona 3 Fianol Pianol B B DkStrinas Guitar l B Legato Sirrakrnez BrassuHorn UoxPadl o 3 Select a Program You should know how to do If not what about going back for a little to the Basic operations chapter Selecting a Program sec tion page 25 It will be of a great help in the future Which Programs to choose With gt 662 Programs you will for sure find your preferred sound Just browse any Program bank and listen to them Turn on the DISPLAY HOLD LED to stay in the Selecting Window until you have found the right Program Then press EXIT or DISPLAY HOLD to exit the window 4 Execute as many changes as you like to the other tracks 7 Change the volume Yes this is another obvious change Press MENU to open the edit menu cx E am oz n Mem Li ADT ca 1 t ca LL OO ELL Edit MEHU A MixerzTun Traner We Effects fel Cut Trs Track Edit Copy uantize Event Edit Press one of the
29. Parameters gt PERF gt STYLE STS These parameters show the Pitch Bend range for each track in semitones 01 12 Maximum up down pitchbend range in semitones 12 1 octave Off No pitchbend allowed PAGE 7 FX A B SELECT This page enables you to select the A and B effects Usually the A effect is the reverb and the B effect is the modulating effect for the Style tracks Gum E enm nu cog eC oes a i age Fx AB Select oe HZ E 83 Compressor Reu aate ModT UP 1 BoBEendti2r A B PERF STYLE Effects assigned to the A and B effect processors Usu ally A is the reverb while B is the modulating effect chorus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see Effects on page 177 ModTrk Modulating Track PERF STYLE Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modulate an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller B gt Asend B gt A Send PERF gt STYLE Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect PAGE 8 FX C D SELECT This page lets you select the C and D effects Usually the C effect is the reverb and the D effect is the modu lating effect for the Realtime Keyboard tracks D iempo n n z d M EEDD prs qo eT d E FAI bs L amiet 3 Ba ez D 23 Compressor Reu
30. Rec Record mode Set this parameter to select a recording mode Overdub The newly recorded events will be mixed to any existing events Overwrite The newly recorded events will replace any existing events Auto Punch Recording will automatically begin at the S position and stop at the E position see the following line Note The Auto Punch function will not work on an empty Song At least one track must already be recorded PedalPunch Recording will begin when pressing a pedal set to the Punch In Out function and will finish when pressing the same pedal again Note The Pedal Punch function will not work on an empty Song At least one track must already be recorded StepDub Step Overdub This recording mode lets you enter events one at a time adding events to the existing events StepOwr Step Overwrite This recording mode lets you enter events one at a time overwrit ing all existing events Trk Track Track in record 1 16 One of the 16 tracks selected To select a track go to the Track pages see Tracks 1 8 page on page90 and Tracks 9 16 page on page 90 SIE Start End These parameters appear only when the Auto Punch recording mode is selected They set the starting and ending points of the Punch recording Metro Metronome This is the metronome heard during recording Off No metronome click will be heard during recording A one bar precount will be played before starting re
31. p LFO Phase degree 180 180 Ras os Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right gt e 5 I LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Fx 009 Dez I e j I i e pes amp amp rc Tempo E Selects the modulation source of LFO speed por PG i Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 009 aes BPM MIDI 40 240 d Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009 Base Note 3 25 2 Js J 45 4 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 035 Phaser Trem Stereo Phaser Tremolo This effect has a stereo phaser and tremolo LFOs linked together Swelling phaser modulation and tremolo effects synchronize with each other creating a soothing modulation effect It is suitable for electric piano type sounds fm Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Effects 199 Mod P Shift offset the timing of the phaser peak and control a subtle movement and rotation of the sound f Phaser WetDry i Wet Dry The Phaser Wet Dry parameter sets the balance between the phaser output and the dry sound The Wet Dry
32. D n E n M p ednas Diin Ein M E Dim Ein m D Eiin M D Damper gt PERF STS On When you press the Damper pedal and release the keys the track s sound is kept sustained Off The Damper pedal is not active on any track set to this status E Expression PERF STS This parameters allows you to switch the Expression control on off on each individual Realtime track The Expression control is a relative level control always subtracted from the Volume value of the track As an example imagine you have a Piano sound assigned to Upper 1 and a Strings sound assigned to Upper 2 If you turn the Expression switch on on Upper 2 and off on Upper 1 you can use a pedal to control only the Strings volume while the Piano remains unchanged To program a pedal or the Assignable Slider to act as an Expression control see Page 3 Assignable Pedal Footswitch Assignable Slider on page 127 You can only assign this function to a volume type pedal not to a switch type one Assign the KB Expression option to the pedal or Assignable Slider then press WRITE to save the setting into the Global PAGE 17 R T CONTROLS JOYSTICK This page lets you enable disable the Joystick for each of the Realtime Keyboard tracks transpose chord iene ng RT Ct1 Josstick Re Ein Vin MM 8 Wn Vin CU m mn on m an Yin m
33. 1 8 Full Strings BANKO02 PRF 2 1 Jazz Brass 2 8 Jazz Strings BANK PRF BANK10 PRF 2 1 Rock Brass 2 8 Rock Strings PROGRAM USERO1 PCG 1 Piano 1 64 SynBrass22 USERO2 PCG 1 SopranoSax 64 Noise USERDK PCG 1 Standard Kit 64 Orchestral Kit STYLE BANKO01 STY 1 1 Across Univ 1 8 Can tBuyMe BANK STY BANK16 STY 16 1 New Age 16 16 Baroque USERO1 STY U1 1 Foxtrot U1 16 Dance 80 USERO2 STY U2 1 16Beat John U2 16 LA R amp B USERO3 STY U3 1 Soul 2 U3 16 Fusion Funk FILE AND FOLDER SIZE DISPLAY The size of any file and folder in the card can be seen in the display The single file size is always shown on the right of the file chord tempo n C i i Et CardiLoac C J ETHICR MID MFU WALTZ SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE To see a folder size first move it to the first line of the display then keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the F 3 OPEN function button under the display A dialog box will appear showing the size of the folder Directory size 384 Kb Press EXIT to exit this dialog PAGE STRUCTURE Here is the typical structure of a Card page O
34. Off The metronome can be heard only during the precount On1 The metronome plays during recording Recording begins with a 1 bar precount Start recording after bar 1 On2 The metronome plays during recording Recording begins with a 2 bar precount Start recording after bar 1 RT Pads Ch Acc These parameters let you decide the track status during recording 86 Backing Sequence operating mode Chord Acc Step Recording page RT Pads This Backing Sequence track includes the four Realtime Keyboard tracks and the four Pads They will be Song tracks 1 8 as in the following table RT Pad track Song track Channel Upper 1 Upper 2 Upper 3 Lower Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 INI oO a AJ ww N gt Pad 4 Ch Acc This Backing Sequence track includes all Style tracks including recognized chords They will be Song tracks 9 16 MUTE The track is muted If this tracks has already been recorded it will not be heard during recording of the other Backing Sequence track PLAY The track is in play If there are recorded data they will be heard during recording of the other Backing Sequence track REC The track is in record All previously recorded data will be deleted CHORD ACC STEP RECORDING PAGE While you are in Backing Sequence mode press RECORD then one of the BVOLUME VALUE buttons to access the Chord Acc Step Recording mode The RECORD LED turns on
35. Wet Dry Routing Routing Compressor Chorus Flanger EQ Trim LEQ HEQ N H H e 17 DH lt Comp e CnorusiFlanger 6 Norital H Output Level i Output Mode t Comp SI D x f Output Level 7 s Feedback et Invert olFing Wet Dry R Wet Dry Right o i pom in Right o Envelope Control Envelope Control LFO Tii Sine 7 C Sensitivity 1 100 a C Sensitivity 1 100 Sets the sensitivity Fx 002 Sets the sensitivity Fx 002 C Attack 1 100 C Attack 1 100 Table Sets the attack level on page 178 Fx 002 E Table Sets the attack level on page 178 Fx 002 b Output Level 0 100 Output Level 0 100 Sets the compressor output level Fx 002 Sets the compressor output level Fx 002 c E Trim 0 100 c CI EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the parametric EQ input level Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz C Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Sets the center frequency of Band 1 i Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 d Q 0 5 10 0 Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 Fx 006 Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 Gain dB 18 18dB F Delay Time msec 0 0
36. 224 Effects Mono Mono Chain 084 Decim Amp S o D Output Level 0 100 1 1 1 Sets the decimator output level Fx 014 Decimator Amp Simulation R d C Sensitivity 1 100 This effect combines a mono type decimator and an Sets the sensitivity Fx 002 amp simulation You can change the order of the effect C Attack 1 100 Table Sets the attack level on page 178 Fx 002 connection Output Level 0 100 D Pre LPF Off On Sets the compressor output level Fx 002 Turn the harmonic noise caused by lowered sampling on and off 2Fx 014 Routing DECI gt CMP CMP5DECI a High Damp 0 100 f Switches the order of the decimator and compressor connection Sets the ratio of high range damping Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet D Sampling Freq Hz Sampling Frequency 4 00k 48 00kHz Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Sets the sampling frequency Dz Resolution 4 24 g Src Off Tempo Sets the data bit length Fx 014 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 c D Output Level 0 100 Amt 100 100 Sets the decimator output level Fx 014 Table Sets he modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page d A Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 Selects the type of guitar amplifie
37. Phaser 9f orusimlanger i s Feedback Dane Chorus Flanger Delay Phaser Cp Chorus Flanger EQ LEQ HEQ F Cho Fing 1 EQ LEQHEQ Normal Trim Wet Dry High Damp Trim 2 Output Mode Feedback Resonance phaser Feedback Wet Invert freee Cho Fing Right A Right i Merey Pss FOL TRTSins m CLEO TT Sine Cro Tr ISine 7 a F Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec P LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the delay time Sets the LFO speed a F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Sets the LFO speed Selects LFO Waveform b LFO Waveform Triangle Sine P Manual 0 100 Selects LFO Waveform Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied F Depth 0 100 b Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the depth of LFO modulation c Feedback 100 100 Resonance 100 100 Sets the feedback amount Fx 020 Sets the resonance amount Fx 023 d F EQ Trim 0 100 c P Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 Sets the phaser effect balance Fx 010 023 F Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 Sets the LFO speed e d Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 Selects LFO Waveform f F Cho FIng Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet F Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the eff
38. 0 c cece eee eens 78 Page 6 FX D editing eese 78 Page 7 Track Mode 00 cece ee eens 78 Page 8 Track Internal External 79 Page 9 Jukebox 2 ene 79 Page 10 Preferences 6 0 6 0 cece serar 80 Saving a list of Songs 0 eee eee 81 Backing Sequence operating mode 82 Transport controls 0 eee eee 82 The Backing Sequence Song and Song Play modes 82 How to playback a Song 1 eee eee eee 82 Realtime Recording mode 0000 82 Chord Acc Step recording 00000 83 Main Page Backing Sequence Play 83 Load Song page 6 cece eee eee eens 84 Save SONG Page eee eee 84 Realtime Recording page 000000 85 Chord Acc Step Recording page 86 How to delete a whole Song 88 Song operating mode 89 Transport controls 0 eee eee ee 89 Master Volume and Sequencer Volume 89 The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format 89 Fast track deletion 0c cee eee eee 89 How to delete a whole Song 89 Main page esce esaet rna bd dea 89 Tracks 1 8 page 6 cece cece 90 Tracks 9 16 page 6 cece eee eee ees 90 Load Song page xp ts ai oases Bae 90 Save SONG Page eee eee eee 91 Realtime Record procedure 000055 91 Ste
39. 100 100 Sets the Tap1 feedback amount Dzer f Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of Tap1 feedback amount and effect balance Amt 100 100 Sets the Tap1 feedback amount and modulation amount Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dz g Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 019 Ensemble This Ensemble effect has three chorus blocks that use LFO to create subtle shimmering and gives three dimensional depth and spread to the sound because the signal is output from the left right and center Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o gt f Wet Dry Ensemble 7 Right s I Dry Speed 1 100 Sets the LFO speed Due 5 Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Due b Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the LFO modulation depth Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth G Shimmer 0 100 Sets the amount of shimmering of the LFO waveform gt Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 pa d Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation s
40. 120 0 17 Power Kit2 Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 9 A 1 13 BD Squash Off 13 BD Squash O 24 BD Dance 99 Off 24 BD Dance 99 O 10 A 1 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 O 125 99 SD off 125 99 SD O 11 B 1 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD O 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD O 12 co 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD O 124 88 SD off 124 88 SD O 13 C 0 56 SD Hip 3 Off 56 SD Hip 3 O 65 SD Vintage4 off 65 SD Vintage4 9 14 DO 58 SD Hip 5 Off 58 SD Hip 5 O 64 SD Vintage3 Off 64 SD Vintage3 O 15 D 0 25 BD Ambi Kick off 25 BD Ambi Kick O 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 27 BD Amb Rocker O 16 E0 11 BD Gated off 11 BD Gated O 19 BD Hip 1 Off 19 BD Hip 1 O 17 F0 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo O 38 SD Off Center Off 38 SD Off Center O 18 F 0 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 93 HH2 Closed2 1 93 HH2 Closed2 1 19 G0 6 BD Pillow Off 6 BD Pillow O 13 BD Squash Off 13 BD Squash O 20 G 0 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry 9 73 SideStickAmb Off 73 SideStickKAmb 9 21 AO 47 SD Yowie Off 47 SD Yowie O 62 SD Vintage1 Off 62 SD Vintage1 O 22 A 0 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 g 69 SD Brasser Off 69 SD Brasser O 23 BO 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O
41. 4 Listen to the Song After loading you are back to the main page of the Song mode j nue wile d 04 e sona Load Sond Petro ff Save Sond Peter ded Sel Temra TemPo RHuto Press PLAY STOP SEQ1 to listen to the Song The LED on the button turns on Does it sound good If it is a General MIDI compatible midifile there is a good chance it does But we can fur ther improve on it 5 Stop the Song This one is easy press PLAY STOP SEQ1 The LED on the PLAY STOP button turns off Please always remember make any changes to the Song when the sequencer is not playing Otherwise a Stop command will reset all your changes Not funny huh 6 Select different Programs You can replace General MIDI Programs with KORG Programs It will sound more rich more lively 1 Press TRACK SELECT to see tracks 1 8 The LED turns on m E j nues cot C d 1 octave MeSona o Fianol Fiaol B B DeSteings Guitare B B Legato SirnaEnasz BrazsuHorn WexPadl You are watching at tracks 1 8 You can switch to tracks 9 16 by pressing the TRACK SELECT but ton again chora tempo rus OOF yo Gg o hd o e Hiong E B Strings UocaEns amp to DkStrings Bassi 4 Legata StrnaEnsz E BrassuHorn Strings
42. Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to be transposed If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track Since in a Drum Kit each instrument is assigned to a different note of the scale transposing a percussive instrument means assigning the part to a different instrument Note These parameters are available only when a Drum or Percussion track is selected PAGE 3 EDIT VELOCITY In this page you can change the velocity dynamics value of notes in the selected track chord tempo qmm Je n4 oot Lr g M Editt Velocita Esl CUCU Trk DRUM Value B SHA Gee ERTL oe BottomsG 1 Tor CS After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort E CV Style Element Chord Variation Non editable These read only parameters show which Style Element and Chord Variation are currently selected for editing See the Main page E Style Ele ment and CV Chord Variation parameters on page 55 for information on selecting a different Style Element and Chord Variation Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected The velocity for all notes of the whole selected Chord Varia tion will be changed D
43. D empo neasure nn i E J LL t u 2 Shere 4 OGL 61 008 Tenor ia 4 Chord Perf 1 1 SE DPT pE Hai A Side arrow The small arrow next to a parameter means that its value is effective at the current position For example if you are at the M003 01 000 position and an arrow lights up next to the Chord parameter this means that a chord change happens at the M003 01 000 position M easure This is the locator It shows the current position of the Step Editor To go to a different position within the Song select this parameter then use the TEMPO VALUE controls the A VOLUME VALUE buttons or the lt gt buttons while the lt lt gt gt buttons let you move to the previous or following measure When using one of these controls the locator moves in steps of 1 8 192 ticks or jumps to the next event The locator s format is as follows Measure Beat Tick Measure Measure or bar number Beat Divider in the Time Signature ratio e g a quar ter in a 3 4 time Tick Minimal sequencer s resolution The Liverpool internal sequencers feature a resolution of 384 ticks per quarter INSERT When the Measure parameter is selected press INSERT to insert a measure starting from the current position All Chord Acc events contained into the current measure will be moved to the following measure The event at the Mxxx xx 000 position i e exactly at the
44. Mono Connect a mono cable to the L MONO OUT PUT Connect the other end of the cable to a mono channel of your mixer a powered monitor or a channel of your TAPE AUX input of a hi fi system you will hear that channel only unless you can set the amplifier to Mono mode AUDIO INPUTS You can connect the output of another electronic musi cal instrument an unpowered mixer or any audio device to the rear panel input jack INPUT stereo mini jack Since this is a line level input you ll need to use a separately sold mic preamp or mixer if you re connect ing a mic Use the connected device s volume control to adjust the input level Be careful not to make it distort or clip Here is how to set the volume of the connected device e if the sound heard on Liverpool s outputs is too low you should increase the output level of the connected device e ifitsounds fine it s ok e if it distorts you should lower the level a little until the sounds is fine again MIDI CONNECTIONS You can play the internal sounds of your Liverpool with an external controller i e a master keyboard a MIDI guitar a wind controller a MIDI accordion or a digital piano 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of your controller to the MIDI IN connector on the Liver pool 2 Select a transmission MIDI channel on your controller Some controllers like the MIDI accordions usually transmit on more than one channel see more informa
45. Ramp Low 0 Ramp High 0 Ramp Low 99 Ramp High 99 KeyLow Key High Key Ramp Low With positive values of this parameter the volume will increase as you play notes below the Tracking Low note number With negative values the vol ume will decrease Ramp High With positive values of this parameter the volume will increase as you play notes above the Key High note number With negative values the volume will decrease Amplifier Modulation These parameters specify how the volume of the selected oscillator will be affected by velocity Velocity Intensity With positive values the volume will increase as you play more strongly With negative values the volume will decrease as you play more strongly Volume change with positive values of this parameter Note on Note on Il ll Softly played Strongly played 99 99 EG AMS Alternate Modulation Source Selects the source that will control the volume of the amp for the selected oscillator See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 124 Velocity can not be selected Intensity value Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have The actual volume will be determined by multiplying the value of the changes produced by the amp EG with the values of Alternate Modulation etc and if the levels of the amp EG are low the modulation applied by Alternate Modulati
46. Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Amt 100 100 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Sets the modulation amount of LFO2 modulation depth Fx 010 023 pmo Dz L Pre Delay msec 0 0 50 0msec Src Off Tempo 9 Sets the delay time for the left channel Fx 016 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 R Pre Delay j Em re Delay msec 0 50 0msec Amt 100 100 j Sets the delay time for the right channel Fx 016 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Feedb k TUA ance on page 177 eedbacl 100 d Sets the feedback amount Fx 017 i High Damp 96 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Fx 010 D ze Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 Bi Phase Modulation LFO e SNA al ww Depth2 Effects 193 Pitch Phase Mod 027 Vibrato d LFO Frequency Mod a AUTOFADE Src a Fade In Stereo Vibrato Rate b Fade In Delay msec This effect causes the pitch of the input signal to shim When LFO Frequency Mod is set to AUTOFADE you can mer Using the AutoFade allows you to increase or use the modulation
47. marking Dd d igg DIBOA continue holding C MENU From any page of the Style Record mode press MENU to open the Style Record edit menu This menu gives access to the various Style Record edit sections Note While the Style is in play you cannot access the Edit section pages from the Main page and the Style Tracks page see page 55 and page 56 Stop the playback before pressing MENU When in the menu select an edit section using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons select an edit page using PAGE or press EXIT to exit the menu When in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the main page or the Style Tracks page of the Style Record mode chord tempo qmm nn t n L J rit at LL oo L MW Pham min nl PL mecond MEN Duantize Cory Traree Wel S Elem Ct l Event Edit Style Chl Delete Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit sec tion Each edit section groups various edit pages Note When switching from the Edit section pages Quan tize Transpose Velocity Delete to the other pages or vice versa the Style if in play is automatically stopped Style Record mode 61 Menu EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE Select an edit section from the Menu and or use the PAGE buttons to reach the desired page Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Style Record mode All edit pages share the same structure Style Play icon Page header
48. value Note Intensity Pitch EG and AMS will be added to determine the depth and direction of the pitch modulation applied by the pitch EG Portamento Portamento This parameter turns the portamento effect smooth change in pitch from one note to the next on off and specifies how it will be applied Note Portamento will also be switched when CC 65 Porta mento SW is received On Portamento will be applied Off Portamento will not be applied Program operating mode 111 Page 4 Pitch LFO1 Portamento Time This parameter sets the portamento time Increasing the value will produce a slower change in pitch 000 127 Portamento time in MIDI value PAGE 4 PITCH LFO1 In this page you can set the LFO1 modulation parame ters for the selected oscillator tempo CoG i octave za itch LFOL soi F3 Selected Decl Intercity B Be Joystick i e Br Hits Channel ATI Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alternatively you can select oscillators using the F 1 F 4 buttons Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the pitch modulation applied by the LFO1 settings you made on Page 17 LFO1 With a setting of 12 00 a maximum of 1 octave of pitch modulation will be applied Nega tive values will invert the LFO waveform 12 00 12 00 Intensity depth and direction JS Y JoyStick
49. 23 General parameters Auto Octave Lock B m y Master Transpose Lock EI zi Chord Recognition Mode E m 24 Scale Mode EI Memory Mode V Velocity Control EI Song Play Mode Main Program Play Mute status d Separate tracks 1 Volume E 2 Pan m 3 FX Send Level FX Select A B C D i Z Y 4 Modulating Track Y General parameters B gt A or D gt C Send i Ri 5 6 FX Parameters A B C D d 7 Track Mode Separate tracks 8 Track Internal External m E 9 Jukebox List saved to card Link Mode Em EI m 10 S2 FX Mode Y General parameters Performance FX Mode EI Song Mode Song data See table Style and Song parameters Global Edit Environment Master Tune Scale Key lt 4 lt 4 Velocity Curve Y General parameters Speakers On Off Set to On at startup Metronome Volume 2j Master Transpose on Style Realtime tracks 2 Seq 1 2 Midi In Scale Transpose Position Pedal Switch Function Assignable Slider Function ALI oue Eo oW ut Damper Polarity Y General parameters Footswitch Polarity EN RI 4 MIDI Setup Preset a Local On Off Set to On at startup 5 Clock Set to Int at startup Clock Send Y General parameters
50. 8 After inserting a new event you may go back by 4 Press the second note and keep it pressed pressing the button This will delete the previ 5 Editthe Velocity value of the third note ously inserted event and set the step in edit again 4 Press the third note then release all notes 9 When the end of the pattern is reached the End Inserting a second voice You can insert passages Loop End of Loop event is shown in the first where one note is kept pressed and another voice two lines of the display a and the recording moves freely restarts from the M001 01 000 position Any note Ex 1 exceeding the pattern length inserted at its end will be reduced to fit the total length of the pattern At this point you may go on inserting new events in overdub mode the previously inserted events TNI will not be deleted This is very useful when on recording a drum or percussion track where you a may want to record the bass drum on a first cycle On oft the snare drum on the second cycle and the hi hat Press E ang c Please E continue holding C and cymbals during the following cycles 10 When finished recording press START STOP to Steptime 4 turn off its LED The Main page of the Style Record nm pakei mode appears di f hord tempo neasure Press G Release G and C niu UO DL a L diu Ex 2 Soft Beat TORE EW ORCI RRT RL 2 C L
51. B8 Sets the right channel delay time Sets the Voice2 Pitch for resonance g Depth 0 200 Fine cent 50 50 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Fine adjusts the voice 2 pitch for resonance Feedback 100 100 Voice2 Resonance 100 100 Sets the feedback amount Fx 020 Sets the intensity of resonance when Control Mode Manual h High Damp 0 100 High Damp 0 100 Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range Fx 020 Sets the damping amount of resonant sound in the high range gt Wet Dry Mod D mod AUTOFADE Voice2 Level 0 100 Switches between D mod and AUTOFADE for the effect balance modulation Sets the Voice2 output level Fx 027 Pan L6 R6 Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the Voice2 stereo image Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Fx 010 020 es Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet d d Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Src Off Tempo Dgr Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Src Off Tempo Amt 100 100 J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a Control Mode e Voice1 Resonance h Voice2 Resonance This parameter determines the resonance intensit
52. EC 4 Cards Saye pto Ui 1 i BesatHew d to Uli 2 SBeat to Wie Jaan ee ee il AE OPEH CLOSE Locations marked with a row of underscores ___ are empty locations Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the target location to the first line of the display Once the target location is selected press F 2 SAVE to save the file The Are you sure mes sage will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Warning If you confirm any data at the target location will be deleted When the operation is completed the Wait indi cator disappears the source page comes back in the display and you may perform further saving operations Creating a new SET folder When saving data Save operations you can save onto existing folders or you can create a new SET folder Here is how to do it 1 When the file list of the target card is in the dis play use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the NEW NAME SET item to the first line of the display Note A NEW NAME SET item is always the first item in any directory 2 When the NEW NAME SET item is selected press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons You are prompted to assign a name to the new folder 3 Move the cursor using the DOWN and UP but tons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button
53. Slope Time This parameter specifies the time over which the level will change after the decay time has elapsed until the sustain level is reached Release Time This parameter specifies the time over which the level will change after note on occurs until the release level is reached Filter EG Level modulation Filter 1 EG changes level AMS Velocity Intensity a positive value Note on Note off Note on Softly played note with Start Strongly played note with Start Strongly played note with Start Level Swing Attack Level Swing Level Swing Attack Level Swing Level Swing Attack Level Swing and Break Level Swing setto and Break Level Swing setto and Break Level Swing set to AMS L Alternate Modulation Source This parameter selects the source that will control the Level parameters of the filter EG AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 124 Intensity AMS Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect applied by AMS With a setting of 0 the levels spec ified by Frequency A Cutoff Frequency A will be used For example if AMS is Velocity and you set Start Level Swing Attack Level Swing and Break Level Swing to and set Intensity to a positive value the EG levels will rise as you play more strongly If Intensity is set to a negative values the EG levels will fall as you play more strong
54. Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 b Pre Delay msec b Pre Delay Thru The Pre Delay sets the delay time to the reverb input allow ing you to control spaciousness Using the Pre Delay Thru parameter you can mix the dry sound without delay emphasizing the attack of the sound Reverb Hall Plate Type Level Reverb Louder Pre Delay Thru Time Pre Delay Reverb Time 056 Rev Room This room type reverb emphasizes the early reflections that make the sound tighter Changing the balance between the early reflections and reverb sound allows you to simulate nuances such as the type of walls of a room 057 R BriteRoom This room type reverb emphasizes the early reflections that make the sound brighter See 056 Reverb Room Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Dry ER Level gt ERs EQ Trim LEQ HEQ Pre Delay Thru gt H gt Pre Delay Reverb Reverb Level gt ERs EQ Trim Right Reverb Time sec 0 1 3 0sec Sets the reverberation time a High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Pre Delay msec 0 200
55. Synchro City Synth 2 121 0 95 Sweep Pad Synth 1 y 121 3 84 Sync Kron Synth 2 121 1 95 AstralDream Synth 1 121 4 84 MetallicRez Synth 2 121 2 95 Meditate Synth 1 121 5 84 Brian Sync Synth 2 121 3 95 DarkElement Synth 1 121 6 84 Arp Twins Synth 2 121 4 95 Mellow Pad Synth 1 121 0 85 Voice Lead Strings amp Vocals y 121 5 95 Cinema Pad Synth 1 121 1 85 EtherVoices Strings amp Vocals 121 0 96 Ice Rain Synth 1 Y 121 2 85 Cyber Choir Strings amp Vocals 121 1 96 MotionOcean Synth 1 121 0 86 Fifths Lead Synth 2 y 121 2 96 Caribbean Synth 1 121 1 86 Crimson5ths Synth 2 121 0 97 Soundtrack Synth 1 Y 121 0 87 Bass amp Lead Synth 2 y 121 1 97 Air Clouds Synth 1 121 1 87 Soft Wrl Synth 2 y 121 2 97 Reso Down Synth 1 121 2 87 ElectroLead Synth 2 121 3 97 Tinklin Pad Synth 1 121 3 87 Rich Lead Synth 2 121 4 97 Pods In Pad Synth 1 121 4 87 ThinAnaLead Synth 2 121 5 97 Noble Pad Synth 1 121 5 87 EspressLead Synth 2 121 6 97 Rave Synth 1 121 6 87 HipHop Lead Synth 2 121 7 97 ElastickPad Synth 1 121 7 87 Square Bass Synth 2 121 0 98 Crystal Synth 2 y 121 8 87 Big amp Raw Synth 2 121 1 98 SynthMallet SFX Y 121 9 87 CatLead Synth 2 121 2 98 Vs Bell Boy Mallet amp Bell 121 0 88 New Age Pad Synth 1 y 121 3 98 KrystalBell Mallet amp Bell 121 1 88 VirtualTrav Synth 1 121 4 98 Digi Bell Mallet amp Bell 121 2 88 Arp Angeles Synth 1 121 5 98 Moving Bell Synth 1 121 0 89 Warm Pad Synth 1 Y 121 6 98 Bell Pad Mallet
56. The specified me cutoff frequency Stat Level Attack Decay Slope Release Time Time Time Time Start Attack Break Sustain Release Level These are the envelope segment levels The result will depend on the filter that was selected in Filter Type For example with the Low Pass Resonance filter positive values of EG Intensity will cause the tone to be brightened by positive levels and darkened by negative levels 99 499 Level value Start Level This parameter specifies the change in cutoff frequency at the time of note on Attack Level This parameter specifies the change in cutoff frequency after the attack time has elapsed Break Point Level This parameter specifies the change in cutoff frequency after the decay time has elapsed Sustain Level This parameter specifies the change in cutoff frequency that will be maintained from after the slope time has elapsed until note off occurs Release Level This parameter specifies the change in cutoff frequency that will occur when the release time has elapsed Attack Decay Slope Release Time These parameters specify the time over which the filter change will occur 0 99 Time value Attack Time This parameter specifies the time over which the level will change from note on until the attack level is reached Decay Time This parameter specifies the time over which the level will change from the attack level to the break point level
57. stick When a value for the modulation source is less than 64 off speed is selected and when the value is 64 or higher on is selected When Sw Toggle the wah effect is switched between on and off each time you press the pedal or operate the joystick The switch will be turned on off each time the value of the modula tion source exceeds 64 b Wah Sweep Range b Wah Sweep Src This parameter sets the sweep range of the wah center fre quency A negative value will reverse the direction of sweep The wah center frequency can be controlled by the modula tion source specified in the Wah Sweep Src parameter d Drive e Output Level The degree of distortion is determined by the level of input signal and the setting of Drive Raising the Drive setting will cause the entire volume level to increase Use the Output Level parameter to adjust the volume level The Output Level parameter uses the signal level input to the 3 Band EQ If clipping occurs at the 3 Band EQ adjust the Output Level parameter d Pre Low cut Cutting the signal in the low range before it is input to the Dis tortion will create a sharp distortion g Q h Q These parameters set the bandwidth of each equalizer The higher the value the narrower the band becomes ns Bandi Band2 Band3 Band4 PEQ PEQ PEQ PEQ mwm LH Hn o p T Dry P HEQ A z m o D De
58. tion in the MIDI chapter 3 On the Liverpool select the MIDI Setup that best fits your controllers type see Page 4 MIDI Setup on page 127 Start up 11 Audio Outputs DAMPER PEDAL Connect a Damper Sustain pedal to the DAMPER connector on the back panel Use a KORG PS 1 PS 3 or DS 1H footswitch pedal or a compatible one To switch the Damper polarity see Damper Pol Damper Polar ity on page 127 DEMO Listen to the built in Demo Songs to appreciate the power of the Liverpool 1 Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons together Their LEDs start blinking At this point if you don t press any other button all the Demo Songs will be played back 2 Choose a page using the PAGE buttons 3 Select a Demo Song by pressing the corresponding VOLUME VALUE button around the display The Demo will automatically start Stop the Demo by pressing START STOP 5 Exit the Demo mode by pressing one of the MODE but tons THE MUSIC STAND A music stand comes standard with your Liverpool Fit it into the two dedicated holes in the back panel 12 Front panel 3 FRONT PANEL O 1
59. tions 72 Release Release time 73 Attack Attack time cca CC Name Liverpool Function 74 F CutOff Filter cutoff Brilliance 0 Bank Select Program selection 75 Decay T Decay time 1 Mod1 Y Joystick forward 76 Lfo1 Sp Vibrato speed 2 Mod2 Y Joystick backward 77 Lfo1 Dpt Vibrato depth 3 Undef ctl 78 Lfo1 Dly Vibrato initial delay 4 Foot ctl T9 FilterEgp 5 Port time 80 Gen pc 5 6 Data ent 81 Gen pc 6 7 Volume Track volume 82 Gen pc 7 8 Balance 83 Gen pc 8 9 Undef ctl 84 Port ctl 10 Pan Pot Track panning 85 90 Undef ctl 11 Expression Expression 91 Fx A C A C reverb send level 12 Fx Ctl 1 92 Fx 2 ctl 13 Fx Ctl 2 93 Fx B D B D modul send level 14 15 Undef ctlp 94 Fx 4 ctl 16 Gen pc 1 95 Fx 5 ctl 17 Gen pc 2 96 Data Inc 18 Slider 97 Data Dec 19 Gen pc 4 98 NRPN Lsb 20 31 Undef ctlpp 99 NRPN Msb Control Change 32 63 are the LSB Least Significant Bytet of Control 100 RPN Lsb Grange 9 311 the MSE st Sct Bylo and re ange NN LEUTE 64 Damper Damper pedal 102 119 Undefined ctl 65 Portamento 120 AIISOff 66 Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal 121 Res Ctl Reset All Controllers 67 Soft pedal Soft pedal lin Locaici 68 Legato 123 NoteOff 69 Hold 2 124 OmniOff 70 Sustin level 125 Omni On 71 F Res Hp Filter resonance 126 Mono On 127 Poly On MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART MIDI Controllers 231 MIDI Implementation Chart KORG Liverpool OS Version 1 0 June 15 2015 Func
60. 00 99 Frequency rate 122 Program operating mode Page 17 LFO1 Key Sync This parameter specifies if the LFO is synchronized to key strokes On The LFO will start each time you play a note and an independent LFO will oper ate for each note Off The LFO effect that was started by the first played note will continue to be applied to each newly played note In this case Delay and Fade will be applied only to the LFO when it is first started Offset This parameter specifies the central value of the LFO waveform For example with a setting of 0 as shown in the following diagram the vibrato that is applied will be centered on the note on pitch With a setting of 99 the vibrato will only raise the pitch above the note on pitch in the way in which vibrato is applied on a guitar When Wave is set to Guitar the modulation will occur only in the positive direction even if you set Offset to 0 Here are offset settings and pitch change produced by vibrato Pitch offset 99 Pitch at note on 99 99 Delay This parameter specifies the time from note on until the LFO effect begins to apply When Key Sync is Off the delay will apply only when the LFO is first started 0 99 Delay time Fade In This parameter specifies the time from when the LFO begins to apply until it reaches the maximum ampli tude When Key Sync is Off the fade will apply only when the LFO is first started
61. 100 tempo and notes gt Fx 009 eye Sets the damping amount of the high range input to the ring modulator BPM MIDI 40 240 OSC Mode Fixed Note Key Follow c Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009 b Switching between specifying the oscillator frequency and using a note number Base Note D 25 2 dJa d dad o Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Fixed Frequency Hz 0 12 00kHz Times X1 x16 Sets the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is set to Fixed Fx m Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Src Off Tempo Phaser Manual 0 100 So source for the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode Sets the phaser frequency range d ae Amt 12 00 12 00kHz abs Teen Sets the modulation amount of the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is Sets the phaser resonance amount set to Fixed Phaser Depth 0 100 Note Offset 48 48 Sets the phaser modulation depth Dz Sets the pitch difference from the original note when OSC Mode is set to e Ste Off Tempo d Note Key Follow gt Selects the modulation source for the phaser modulation depth Note Fine 100 100 Amt 100 100 Fine adjusts the oscillator frequency gt Sets the modulation amount for the phaser modulation depth LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz f Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 99 Dry 2 99 Wet Sets the LFO speed of the oscillator frequency modulation Sets the balance between the phaser effect and dry sounds 3 Fx
62. 100 a LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Sets the noise level Daz Selects LFO Waveform d Src Off Tempo p LFO Phase degree 180 180 Selects the modulation source for the noise level Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 Amt 100 100 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of the noise level Sets the LFO speed Fx 009 prez Click Level 0 100 Src Off Tempo Sets the click noise level gt Daz Selects the modulation source of LFO speed e Src PET Off Tempo Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Selects the modulation source for the click noise level Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed Amt ma 100 100 BPM MIDI Sync Off On Sets the modulation amount of the click noise level Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the EQ Trim 0 100 tempo and notes Fx 009 eje f Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 BPM MIDI 40 240 Pre EQ Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz d Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009 Sets the EQ center frequency Base Note A ds 2 4 J ds d x Q 0 5 10 0 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 9 Sets the EQ band width Times x1 x16 Gain dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Sets the EQ gain L Pre Delay msec 0 0 50 0msec e Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the delay time for the left channel gt Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry so
63. 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet 9 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 Fx 006 Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger Fx 010 020 h Gain dB 18 18dB Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Sets the gain of Band 3 Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger Fx 067 E Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Routing LMT gt FLNG FLNG gt LMT Sets the center frequency for Band 4 Switches the order of the limiter and chorus flanger connection Fx 067 h Q 0 5 10 0 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 Fx 006 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 mode Gain dB 18 18dB Dz Sets the gain of Band 4 3 Src Off Tempo 7 J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Routing LMT5PEQ PEQSLMT Switches the order of the limiter and parametric EQ connection Amt 100 100 K th dulati t of the effect bal Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet a at a AORTO Me RUSO Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dez Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 8 Effects Mono Mono Chain 072 Lim Phaser 073 Lim MTapDly This effect combines a mono type limiter and a phaser Limiter Multitap Delay You can change the order of the effect connection This effect combin
64. 20 00kHz O Mid2 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type A Q 0 5 10 0 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 Fx 006 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 18dB Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz P LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz i Sets the LFO speed Sets the LFO speed LFO Waveform Triangle Sine LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform Selects LFO Waveform F Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec P Manual 0 100 Sets the delay time Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Depth 0 100 Depth 0 100 g Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the depth of LFO modulation Feedback 100 100 Resonance 100 100 Sets the feedback amount Fx 020 Sets the resonance amount Fx 023 F Cho Fing Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet P Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger Fx 010 020 Sets the phaser effect balance Fx 010 023 h Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger Fx 067 Selects the phaser output mode Fx 067 Routing OD FLNG FLNG gt OD Routing OD PHS PHS OD i Switches the order of the overdrive and chorus flanger connection Switches the
65. 3 Turn the instrument on A message appears in the display asking if you want to load the operating system 4 Press ENTER to load or EXIT to cancel the loading procedure If you press ENTER wait until the loading is finished When the operating system is finished loading a message appears asking you to remove the card and press any button Hint When done delete the operating system files to avoid Liverpool starts the upgrade procedure each time it is turned on with the same card in the drive 5 Remove the card and press any button RELOADING THE FACTORY DATA Should the internal memory content get damaged you can reload the original Factory Data from the backup card See Restore Data on page 142 9 10 Start up Connecting the AC power adapter 2 START UP CONNECTING THE AC POWER ADAPTER Connect the supplied AC power adapter to the dedi cated socket on the rear of the instrument Then plug it into a wall socket Warning Use only the supplied adapter or an adapter suggested by Korg Other adapters may look similar but they may damage your instrument TURNING THE INSTRUMENT ON AND OFF Turning the power on e Press the power button located on the upper right side of the front panel The startup screen will appear in the LCD and after a time it will display the main page in Style Play mode and the unit will be ready for sound output Turning the power off e Press the power button b
66. 4 Punch In Out Turns the Punch Recording on off FX CC12 Sw Standard FX controllers FX CC13 Sw Fx A mute Mute of the Internal FX A Fx B mute Mute of the Internal FX B Fx C mute Mute of the Internal FX C Fx D mute Mute of the Internal FX D All Fx mute Mute of all Internal FXs Drum mute Mute of the Drum track Perc mute Mute of the Percussion track Bass mute Mute of the Bass track Acc1 mute Mute of the Acc1 track Acc2 mute Mute of the Acc2 track Acc3 mute Mute of the Acc3 track Acc4 mute Mute of the Acc4 track Acc5 mute Mute of the Acc5 track Upper 3 Mute Mute of the Upper 3 track Acc 1 5 mute Mute of all Acc tracks Lower Mute Mute of the Lower track Ens on off Ensemble on off Song Melody Mute Mute of the Song s track 4 usually the Melody track Quarter tone Quarter Tone on off Song Drum amp Bass Mute of all tracks apart for track 2 usually Bass and 10 usually Drum Chord Latch Holds the recognized chord until the pedal is released Chord Latch Damper Holds the recognized chord until the pedal is released and sustains tracks where the Damper has been turned on 228 Assignable parameters List of functions assignable to the Pedal or Assignable Slider LIST OF FUNCTIONS
67. 5 332 Tambourin Mute 5 85 C 6 43 SD BrushTap1 Off 299 Cat Off 117 Orch Cymb 6 332 j Tambourin Mute 6 86 D6 42 SD BrushHit O 251 Bird 2 off 117 Orch Cymb 6 333 Tambourin Open 6 87 D 6 42 SD BrushHit Oo 308 Growl Off 336 Udu f open O 336 Udu f open Off 88 E6 42 SD BrushHit Off 243 Stadium Off 155 Orchestra Hi Off 175 Djembe Open Off 89 F6 45 SD BrushSwirl O 277 Telephone Ring off 155 Orchestra Hi O 183 MaracasPull O 90 F 6 45 SD BrushSwirl O 276 ChurchBell off 155 Orchestra Hi O 183 MaracasPull O 91 G6 45 SD BrushSwirl Oo 244 Applause Off 155 Orchestra Hi O 215 Cuica Hi Off 92 G 6 31 SD Dry 1 O 244 Applause off 155 Orchestra Hi O 180 Guiro Long 3 93 A6 33 SD Dry 3 O 243 Stadium off 155 Orchestra Hi O 181 Guiro Short 3 94 A 6 46 SD Big Rock O 281 Noise White Off 155 Orchestra Hi O 181 Guiro Short 3 95 B6 68 SD AmbiHop Off 258 GunShot 1 Off 155 Orchestra Hi O 216 Cuica Lo O 96 C7 54 SD Hip 1 Oo 266 Train Off 155 Orchestra Hi O 199 Claves O 97 C 7 62 SD Vintage1 Oo 155 Orchestra Hi O 234 SambaWhistle 4 98 D7 56 SD Hip 3 Oo 155 Orchestra Hi O 234 SambaWhistle 4 99 D 7 67 SD Vintage6 O 155 Orchestra Hi Off 323 Sagat HalfOpen 5 100 E7 143 Zap2 Oo 155 Orchestra Hi O 323 Sagat HalfOpen 5 101 F7 58 SD Hip 5 O 155 Orchestra Hi O 324 Sagat Close 5 102 F 7 71 SD Whopper Off 155 Orchestra Hi O 311 Jingle Bell Off 103 G7 69 SD Brasser Oo 155 Orchestra Hi O 231 Marc Tree off 104
68. C2 C7 natural touch mini keyboard with velocity Operating System KORG OPOS Objective Portable Operating System Multitasking Load While Play feature SSD Solid State Disk resident Upgradable from SD card Display Backlit custom LCD Data storage Internal Solid State Disk SSD SD MMC card slot Sound generation system KORG HI Hyper Integrated Polyphony 62 voices 62 oscillators Filters with resonance Multitimbricity 40 tracks 2 x 16 Sequencer 4 Realtime 4 Pads Sound memory 32 Mbyte of PCM ROM with Stereo Piano Programs 662 Single Oscillator Double Oscillator including a Stereo Piano and GM Level 2 compatible Programs 33 Drum Kits 128 User Programs 64 User Drum Kits Easy and Full Program Editing Effects 4 stereo digital multi effect systems with 89 effect types each Performances 160 Realtime Performance memories Up to 240 Styles Performances with 4 Single Touch Setting each Styles Up to 240 Styles Solid State Disk resident freely reconfigurable 8 Style tracks 4 Single Touch Settings per Style 48 User Styles programmable Style Performances and Single Touch Settings Direct Card reading feature Compatible with old i Series Styles Style Record with Edit functions Step Edit Event Edit Single Touch Settings STS 4 x 240 memorize Realtime tracks Song 100 songs in the Solid State Disk not editable Style controls 4
69. Current Style option to enter recording The LED on the RECORD button will turn on and the Main page of the Style Record mode will appear Style Element Chord Variation Er CUCU RRT PLZ CJ Lem 2 Meteo Ond Resol f Meter ded Com HTT Sth 2 Use the A VOLUME VALUE buttons and the F 1 and F 2 function keys to select the E Style Ele ment and CV Chord Variation parameters Note For more information on the Style Elements and Chord Variations and the Style structure in general see The Style s structure on page 52 3 Press MENU and use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select the Event Edit section The Event Edit page appears see Page 4 Event Edit on page 63 for more information chord tempo J measure L J nu oot 0 _ M pe nt E Uer Edi e 9 Trk DRU o E ui U oi Foz iT inn 4 Press START STOP to listen to the selected Chord Variation If you like play some chords on the key board to test the pattern Press START STOP to stop it 5 Press PAGE to go to the Event Filter page and turn Off the filters for the event types you wish to see in the display see Page 5 Event Filter on page 64 for more information Ctrl OFF 10 11 12 Style Record mode 65 Event Edit procedure Press PAGE
70. Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button 4 When you have finished writing a name for the new folder press F 2 SAVE to confirm The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Card Edit environment Page 3 Copy PAGE 3 COPY In this page you can copy single files i e midifiles of Jukebox files whole folders generic or SET fold ers or a generic folder s content Note that you can copy data only inside the same card To preserve the data structure integrity during Copy operations you can t open a SET folder and copy one of its files You can only open generic folders Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to reach this page cum com itl ctf CEE style play fs _ o F ds COPUFF Offi OET icurrent dir il J LIVE SET I ETHJICR SET iit sb COPY OPEN CLOSE Copying a whole folder or folder s content You can copy a folder generic or SET into a differ ent folder If selecting the lt current dir gt item you can copy the current folder s content without copying the folder itself If copying a whole folder a new folder with the same name is created at the target location Note During the Copy procedure you can t open a SET folder You can anyway open any generic folder 1 Insert the card into the card slot 2
71. EDIT TRANSPOSE In this page you can transpose the selected track s Note After transposing please don t forget to readjust the Original Key Chord parameter in the Style Record page see page 56 chord E amm nn t n J Ts oic oO M Ut us EE EE E EE A Edit TransrFose ES E Mi CUCU Trk DRUM Malue B Sei Eni gi 132 BotbomG 1 Toe C8 After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort E CV Style Element Chord Variation Non editable These read only parameters show which Style Element and Chord Variation are currently selected for editing See the Main page E Style Ele ment and CV Chord Variation parameters on page 55 for information on selecting a different Style Element and Chord Variation Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected apart for tracks set in Drum mode like the Drum and Percus sion tracks The whole selected Chord Variation will be transposed Drum Acc5Single selected track Value Transpose value 127 semitones S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to be transposed If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000
72. Even if you specify a higher value for the Feedback parameter the pitch shifted sound will be repeated at the same pitch 202 Effects Mod P Shift 039 PitShiftMod Pitch Shift Modulation This effect modulates the detuned pitch shift amount using an LFO adding a clear spread and width to the sound by panning the effect sound and dry sound to the left and right This is especially effective when the effect sound and dry sound output from stereo speak ers are mixed Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Wet Dry Pitch Shifter x Right a Pitch Shift cent 100 100cent Sets the pitch difference from the input signal gt b LFO Waveform Triangle Square Selects LFO Waveform LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Fx 009 D ze c Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 009 eje BPM MIDI 40 240 d Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009 Base Note 3 45 D Js J 4 4 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Depth 100 100 Sets the LFO modulation depth for pitch shift amount g
73. Feedback and Wet Dry g High Damp This parameter sets the amount of damping of the feedback in the high range Increasing the value will cut high range har monics 021 RandomFlang Stereo Random Flanger The stereo effect uses a step shape waveform and ran dom LFO for modulation creating a unique flanging effect fre Dry Y Stereo In Stereo Out Left o V V gt Flanger F g Feedback X i High Damp gt Flanger TK Right sA Wet Dry Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the delay time from the original sound 5 LFO Waveform Step Tri Random Selects LFO Waveform Fx 010 LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Fx 010 Dez d Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source used for both LFO speed and step speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed LFO Step Freq Frequency Hz 0 05 50 00Hz Sets the LFO step speed speed that changes in steps e Fx 010 D aes Amt 50 00 50 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO step speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 009 eye BPM MIDI 40 240 f Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009
74. G 7 62 SD Vintage1 Off 155 Orchestra Hi Off 231 Marc Tree Off 105 A7 125 99 SD Off 155 jOrchestra Hi Off 228 Sleigh Bell 2 106 A 7 71 SD Whopper Off 155 Orchestra Hi Off 340 Bongo Roll 6 107 B7 71 SD Whopper Off 155 Orchestra Hi Off 140 PR House05 Off 108 C8 50 SD Dance Off 155 Orchestra Hi Off 140 PR House05 Off 109 C 8 50 SD Dance Off 290 Dist Slide1 Off 17 BD House 1 Off 110 D8 125 99 SD Off 291 Dist Slide2 Off 125 99 SD Off 111 D 8 125 99 SD Off 286 GtCutNois1 Off 29 BD Deep 88 Off 112 E8 60 SD Ringy Off 287 GtCutNois2 Off 124 88 SD Off 113 F8 292 E GtrPick1 Off 39 SD Jazz Ring Off 114 F 8 293 E GtrPick2 Off 48 SD Processed Off 115 G8 294 Gtr Scratch1 Off 0 BD Dry 1 Off 115 G 8 295 Gtr Scratch2 Off 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 117 A8 289 Fret Noise Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 118 A 8 288 Power Chord Off 86 HH1 Closed1 Off 119 B8 288 Power Chord Off 6 BD Pillow Off 120 C9 296 Amp Noise Off 73 SideStickKAmb Off 174 Factory Data Drum Kit instruments 120 0 66 TRI Per KIT 120 0 67 i30 Perc Kit Note Sample Excl Sample Excl 0 C 1 1 C 1 2
75. Here is a short recap for the Performances 1 Press the PERFORM button to set the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section act as a Performance selector 2 Select one of the Performance Banks by pressing one of the buttons of the PROGRAM PERFOR MANCE section 3 Select a Performance using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons and for the Single Touch Settings STS e Press one of the SINGLE TOUCH SETTING but tons 6 Ok now we can go As you see both the RT track and the Ch Acc track are in RECord mode This means you can start recording everything you play in a realtime performance with the Styles PRESS START STOP WAIT FOR THE PRECOUNT TO REACH BAR 1 AND BEGIN PLAYING 7 Play as if you were playing live You can do exactly what you do when playing with the Styles select a different Style Performance STS differ ent Variation a Fill and Ending You can even start your recording with an Intro just press one of the INTRO buttons before pressing START STOP to start recording 8 Stop the Song To stop the Song press either START STOP or one of the ENDING buttons The Song will stop but the Recording will still be on So you can start with another Song to be recorded in the same session go back to step 6 if you like Otherwise finish the Recording Now for going to the next step 9 Finish the recording PRESS PLAY STOP SEQ1 and the Recording status will be gone Both Backing Sequence tracks RT and Ch Acc
76. Here is how Fade In affects the LFO when Key Sync is On Offset value Delay 00 99 Fade rate Frequency MIDI Tempo Sync MIDI Tempo Sync This parameter enables disables the LFO synchroniza tion with Sequencer 1 Tempo On The LFO frequency will synchronize to the tempo MIDI Clock of Sequencer 1 In this case the values you specified for Fre quency see page 121 and Frequency modulation see page122 will be ignored Base Note Times When MIDI Tempo Sync is On these parameters set a note length relative to J Tempo and the multiple Times that will be applied to it These parameters will determine the frequency of the LFO1 For example if Base Note is J quarter note and Times is 04 the LFO will perform one cycle every four beats Even if you change the J Tempo setting of Sequencer 1 the LFO will always perform one cycle every four beats Base Note DET This parameter is not available when editing a Drum Program A D d 15 dodi dos Note value Times E This parameter is not available when editing a Drum Program 01 16 Beats before restarting the cycle Frequency modulation You can use two alternate modulation sources to adjust the speed of the LFOI for the selected oscillator AMS1 F Alternate Modulation Source1 Selects the source that will adjust the frequency of the selected oscillator LFO1 see AMS Alternate Modula tion Source list on pa
77. If you want to select a song from internal mem ory SSD simply continue to the next step If you want to select a song from an SD card insert the SD card into the card slot 2 Press the SONG PLAY button to access the Song Play mode Ss 1 CS mem oi E o E E 5l Ho song Es Sh Pianoei M S2 Guitaral Lil Lyrics StrnaEnsz M Ue Pall m 32 Tutorial Editing a Song 3 Press the A S1 VOLUME VALUE button to open the Song Select window The songs in internal memory SSD are displayed chord tempo ID rH n Js 160 wai E a tt octave page i 9 Page commands Note You can also access the Song Select window by pressing the PAGE button from the main page You can exit this window either by pressing EXIT or PAGE 4 f you want to select a song from the SD card press the F 1 button to select the SD card SD The card content appears 5 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls or the VOL UME VALUE E H buttons to scroll the list The E F buttons are the Scroll Up while the G H buttons are the Scroll Down Move the file you are looking for to the first line of the display 6 Ifthe file you are looking for is in a folder a file whose name begins with j move the folder to the first line in the display then select the F 3 OPEN command Select the F 4 CL
78. Keep the SHIFT button pressed down and press either the DOWN or UP button to reset the Tempo to the value that s saved onto the selected Style 35 VALUE LED This LED shows the status of the DIAL and DOWN and UP buttons ON The DIAL and DOWN and UP buttons act as Value controls to change the value of the selected parameter in the display OFF The DIAL and DOWN and UP buttons control the Tempo 36 EXIT NO Use this button to perform various actions leaving from the current status e exit a dialog box e answer No to any question that appears in the display e exit the Menu window e go back to the main page of the current operating mode e exit the Global or Card Edit environment and go back to the main page of the current operating mode e exit from a Style Performance or Program Select window 37 ENTER YES Use this button to perform various actions agreeing the current selected status e answer Yes to any question that appears in the display e confirm a command 38 DISPLAY HOLD This button turns the Display Hold function on or off ON When you open a temporary window like the Program Select window it remains in the display until you press EXIT NO or an operating mode button OFF Any temporary window closes after a cer tain time or after selecting an item in the window 39 CHORD SCANNING section PERF gt STS In Style Play and Backing Sequence mode use these buttons to def
79. Keyboard settings 24 L Level Program Trim 113 LFO Waveform LFO waveform 121 Local Off 37 128 Lock 50 Low Pass amp High Pass 113 Low Pass Resonance 113 Lyrics 73 74 M Master Transpose 17 127 Master Tune 126 Master Volume 10 12 Menu 15 Message window 21 MIDI Chord channels 129 Clock 70 128 General MIDI 35 Global channel 35 IN channels 128 Interface 22 37 OUT channels 130 Setting a track for MIDI 79 100 Setup 36 127 Standard MIDI File 70 89 MIDI interface 22 37 MIDI Setup 36 127 Midifile 35 70 89 Mode Backing Sequence 82 88 Program 106 125 Song Play 70 81 Style Play 40 51 Mute 16 24 O Octave Transpose 18 Offset Offset LFO 122 Operating Modes 12 20 OS Operating System Backup 9 142 Update 9 Outputs 11 P Pads 17 50 Lock 50 Page 15 19 Pedal 127 Performance 40 Selecting 17 25 Pitch Bend 44 98 Portamento AMS 124 Program Editing 45 99 Selecting 17 25 Program Change 37 Program mode 106 125 R Resonance 113 S Scale Lock 50 Main scale 126 Selecting in realtime 34 Select MEX Effect Select 123 Selecting Windows 21 Sequencer Link mode 80 Selecting and switching 73 Sequencer 1 73 Sequencer 2 73 Sequencer 2 effects mode 80 Transport controls 18 Shift 16 Single Touch 13 16 26 Single Touch Settings STS 16 Selecting 26 Song Editing 32 Playback from disk 28 31 74 84 90 Recording 30 82 Selecting 74 84 90 Standard MIDI File 35 Song
80. OUT but cannot play the internal sound generator This is very useful when working with an external sequencer to send notes and con trollers from the keyboard to the external sequencer and then let the sequencer send them back to the sound generator without overlapping See the MIDI chapter Clock This parameter selects the MIDI Clock source Note The Clock parameter is always set to Int each time you turn the instrument on Internal Internal ie the clock generated by the Liverpool Sequencer 1 internal metro nome External from MIDI The Liverpool is slaved to an external instrument or sequencer connected to its MIDI IN port The Start Stop and Play Stop commands and the metronome Tempo cannot be selected from the control panel of the Liv erpool Use the external instrument to set the Tempo and start or stop the sequenc ers Song Song Play Backing Sequence modes and the arranger Style and Back ing Sequence modes MIDI Clock Send gt GBL This parameter turns the clock information on the MIDI OUT on or off Off The Liverpool cannot send the MIDI Clock signal You cannot slave another instrument to the Liverpool even when connected to the MIDI OUT The Liverpool can send the MIDI Clock signal You can slave another instrument to the Liverpool Tempo Start Stop and Play Stop commands Connect the other instrument to the Liverpool MIDI OUT port MIDI PAGE 6 MIDI IN CHANNELS In this page you c
81. Perc Kit McouBass Style tracks Program name Select a track using the VOLUME VALUE buttons Select a Program using the PROGRAM PERFOR MANCE section While in this page you can set the track s volume using the VOLUME VALUE buttons Since the track s vol ume is memorized in the Style Performance and not in the pattern this setting will not be recorded and saved However this will allow you to play back louder any reference track or the track you are recording Track status When in the Style Tracks page each track can be in one of three status Play Visible status icon This status is available only for non selected tracks When in play a track can play back the recorded pattern Hidden status icon When in this status you can play the track on the keyboard but you can t record on it This is useful to do some preliminary test before actually start recording To set a track in mute first select it then press both corresponding VOLUME VALUE buttons to hide the status icon To set the track in record again press again the corresponding VOLUME VALUE but tons Flashing status icon When in this status the track is ready to record Just select a track to set it in record status Mute Record STEP RECORD PAGE Access this page from the Main page of the Style Record mode by selecting the Stp recording mode R parameter and pressing START STOP Previous event Event to b
82. Pitch Bend Modulation 1 1 Modulation 2 2 Pan 10 Expression 11 CCiH2 12 CC 13 13 Damper 64 Filter Resonance 71 Low Pass Filter Cutoff 74 CC 80 80 CC 81 81 CC 82 82 Not allowed After Touch Volume 7 All other Control Change messages A Note Off will always be inserted at the end of the Chord Variation Note Some Control Change messages cannot be recorded directly using Liverpool integrated controls FAST DELETE USING THE CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS While in the Main page or the Style Tracks page you can use the control panel buttons to delete various ele ments of the Style DELETE note When a track is selected you can use this key sequence to delete a single note or a single percussive instru ment If the Style is playing this shortcut deletes the instru ment only while the key is kept pressed leaving all other notes untouched within the track DELETE Track While in the Style Tracks page you can delete a whole track with a single shortcut Keep the DELETE button pressed then press one of the VOLUME VALUE but tons corresponding to the track to be deleted The Are you sure message appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort MAIN PAGE After pressing the RECORD button and selected the Style to record edit the Main page of the Style Record mode appears Style Play icon Chord Measure counter chord tempo J nu D C d M style play
83. Press F 1 to scan the card and show the file list 3 Move the folder that you want to copy to the first line of the display If it is contained in another folder use the F 3 OPEN button to open it Press F 4 CLOSE to go back to the previous hierarchic level To copy just the current folder s content move the current dir item to the first line of the display 4 Oncethe item to copy is on the first line press F 2 COPY to confirm the item selection The win dow s header changes from Copy from to Copy to tempo om n C i ett ee Card Corsyo Scurrent dir y LIVE SET C3 ETHNICH SET BS 5D COPY OPEN CLOSE 5 Move the target folder to the first line in the dis play e To copy into an existing generic folder not a SET folder select that folder e To copy into the current folder select the current dir item 139 140 Card Edit environment Page 4 Erase Once the target is selected press F 2 COPY The Overwrite message appears D uerunrite on Dog Enter amp les Exit 4Ha Press ENTER to confirm overwriting EXIT to avoid it When you decide to overwrite the data you are copying will replace the existing data on the tar get For example if the same midifile exists on the target folder it will be overwritten If a USER bank exists it will be overwritten Data that doesn t exist on the sour
84. StFolk Gtr Guitar 121 5 34 Bass Mute Bass 121 10 25 Mandol KOff Guitar 121 0 35 Fretl Bass Bass Y 121 11 25 MandoTrem Guitar 121 1 35 Fret Bass2 Bass 121 12 25 Reso Guitar Guitar 121 2 35 Fretless Sw Bass 121 0 26 Jazz Guitar Guitar Y 121 3 35 Sweet Fret Bass 121 1 26 PedSteelGtr Guitar Y 121 4 35 DarkR amp BBass Bass 121 2 26 Club J Gtr1 Guitar 121 0 36 Slap Bass 1 Bass V 121 3 26 Club J Gtr2 Guitar 121 1 36 SuperSwBass Bass 121 4 26 Ped Steel 2 Guitar 121 2 36 SuperSwBas2 Bass 121 0 27 CleanGuitar Guitar N 121 0 37 Slap Bass 2 Bass y 121 1 27 DetCleanGtr Guitar V 121 1 37 Thumb Bass Bass 121 2 27 MidToneGtr Guitar N 121 2 37 Dyna Bass Bass af ei e T8 M PES LE Programs Program Change order 159 CC00 CC32 PC Name Liverpool Bank GM2 CC00 CC32 PC Name Liverpool Bank GM2 121 0 38 SynthBass 1 Bass y 121 3 50 AnalogVelve Strings amp Vocals 121 1 38 SynBassWarm Bass y 121 4 50 Odissey Strings amp Vocals 121 2 38 SynBassReso Bass N 121 0 51 SynStrings2 Strings amp Vocals Y 121 3 38 Clav Bass Bass Y 121 0 52 Choir Aahs Strings amp Vocals y 121 4 38 Hammer Bass y 121 1 52 Choir Aahs2 Strings amp Vocals Y 121 5 38 30303 Bass Bass 121 2 52 Oooh Voices S
85. Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a Rec Mode b Reverse Time When Rec Mode is set to Single you can set up to 1320msec for Reverse Time If recording starts during the reverse playback the playback will be interrupted When Rec Mode is set to Multi you can make another recording during the reverse playback However the maxi mum Reverse Time is limited to 660msec If you wish to record a phrase or rhythm pattern set Rec Mode to Single If you record only one note set Rec Mode to Multi The Reverse Time parameter specifies the maximum dura tion of the reverse playback The part in excess of this limit will not be played in reverse If you wish to add short pieces of the reverse playback of single notes make the Reverse Time shorter Rec Mode Reverse Time Rec Reverse Rec t t Reverse Envelope Select Input Input 1 Rec Mode Single Rec Mode Multi te 1 Reverse Time te Reverse Time c Envelope Select c Src d Threshold These parameters select the source to control the start and end of recording When Envelope Select is set to D mod the input signal will be recorded only when the value of the modulation source selected by the Src parameter is 64 or higher When Envelope Select is set to Input the input signal will be recorded only when its level exceeds th
86. Trbn Y 121 5 48 i3 Strings Strings amp Vocals 121 1 57 Trombone 2 Trp amp Trbn Y 121 6 48 N Strings Strings amp Vocals 121 2 57 BrightTromb Trp amp Trbn Y 121 7 48 ArcoStrings Strings amp Vocals 121 3 57 HardTrombon Trp amp Trbn 121 8 48 Oct Strings Strings amp Vocals 121 4 57 SoftTrombon Trp amp Trbn 121 9 48 StringQuart Strings amp Vocals 121 5 57 PitchTromb Trp amp Trbn 121 10 48 Symph Bows Strings amp Vocals 121 0 58 Tuba Trp amp Trbn y 121 11 48 Ens amp Solo Strings amp Vocals 121 1 58 Ob Tuba Trp amp Trbn 121 12 48 Camera Str Strings amp Vocals 121 2 58 Tuba Gold Trp amp Trbn 121 13 48 ArabStrings Strings amp Vocals 121 3 58 Dynabone Trp amp Trbn 121 0 49 StringsEns2 Strings amp Vocals Y 121 0 59 Muted Trp Trp amp Trbn Y 121 1 49 SweeperStr Strings amp Vocals 121 1 59 Muted Trp 2 Trp amp Trbn Y 121 0 50 SynStrings1 Strings amp Vocals Y 121 2 59 Wha Trumpet Trp amp Trbn 121 1 50 SynStrings3 Strings amp Vocals y 121 3 59 MutEnsemble Trp amp Trbn 121 2 50 Analog Str Strings amp Vocals 121 4 59 MutEnsembl2 Trp amp Trbn 160 Factory Data Programs Program Change order
87. Tunina Detune wi 6 E amp m en m Bg m m 60 m chord tempo cx UM Fem i i Turina Detune Fi Se ee Hae 2 Bo 00 HW B z g n He c Detune PERF STYLE gt STS This is the fine tuning value 64 Lowest pitch 00 Standard tuning 63 Highest pitch PAGE 5 TUNING SCALE This page lets you program the alternative scale for the selected tracks see Scale Mode on page 51 The remaining tracks use the Scale set in the Global mode see Scale on page 126 chord tempo c J nu Cog l Tunina Scale as Scale Leer Kew C Hote Dd Detune T63 Scale PERF STS Selected scale See Scales on page 229 for a list of the available scales Key PERF STS Parameter required for some Scales when you should select a preferred key Note PERF STS Note in edit to be detuned This parameter can be accessed when a User Scale is selected Detune PERF STS Note detune relative to the standard Equal tuning This parameter can be accessed when a User Scale is selected PAGE 6 TUNING PITCHBEND SENSITIVITY This page lets you program the Pitch Bend range for the Realtime Keyboard tracks tempo J emm riu CoG 7 I octave Turina PE sere Mi PE 2 D FE 2 D B Fe 2 o FE 2o
88. You can load all User data of a specified type User Pro grams User Styles Performances with a single opera tion 1 2 3 Insert the source card into the card slot Press F 1 to scan the card and show the file list Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the SET folder con taining the data you wish to load Move the folder to the first line of the display If the folder you are looking for is in another folder use the F 3 OPEN button to open it Use the F 4 CLOSE button to go back to the parent folder Press F 3 OPEN to open the SET folder A list of User data appears Performance Program Style Global Ku n ctf ott octave CP ele mel Lass Lisa e m CO p Ca PERFORM It C3 PROGRAM C3 SLE m Sp LOAD OPEN CLOSE Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the data type you are looking for to the first line of the display Press F 2 LOAD to confirm your selection The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort When the operation is completed the Wait indi cator disappears the source page comes back in the display and you may perform further loading operations Note Data loaded from card and data already in mem ory are merged For example if there is data in all three USER Style banks in memory USERO1 USERO2 USERO3 and there is onl
89. bb is the beat e ccc is the tick each quarter beat 384 ticks You can edit this parameter to move the event to a dif ferent position Ev Event Type and values of the event shown in the display Depending on the selected event the value may change This parameter also shows the non editable End Of Track marking when the end of the track is reached Here are the events contained in ordinary tracks 1 16 Event First value Second value Note Note name Velocity Prog Program Change number Ctrl Control Change number Control Change value Bend Bending value Aft Mono Channel After touch value PAft Note to which the After touch is applied Poly Aftertouch value 104 Song operating mode Page 25 Event Filter And here are the events contained in the Master track Event First value Second value Tempo Tempo change Volume Master Volume value Meter Meter change Scale One of the available pre Root note for the set Scales selected Scale UScale User Scale QT Quarter Tone Altered note Root note for the selected Scale One of the available User Scales Note alteration QT Clear Quar Reset of all Scale ter Tone Clearing changes FXType One of the four available Effect number FX processors FXSend Feedback Send B gt A or Feedback send D gt C level a Meter changes ca
90. itive value setting this parameter to will allow AMS to increase the EG level and setting this parame ter to will allow AMS to decrease the EG level With a setting of 0 no change will occur Break Point Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS will change Break Level If Intensity is set to a pos itive value setting this parameter to will allow AMS to increase the EG level and setting this parame ter to will allow AMS to decrease the EG level With a setting of 0 no change will occur Amp EG Time modulation These parameters let you use an alternate modulation source to modify the amp EG times that were specified in Attack Decay Slope Release Time on page 120 Amp 1 EG changes Time AMS Amp KTrk Intensity a positive value When Amp Keyboard Track Low Ramp a positive value and High Ramp a positive value Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off IMA Ad p Low pitched note played with High pitched note played with Attack Decay Slope and Attack Decay Slope and Release Time Swing at Release Time Swing at Amp 1 EG changes Time AMS Velocity Intensity a positive value Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off IAS UNA Wo Softly played note with Strongly played note with Attack Decay Slope and Attack Decay Slope and Release Time Swing at Release Time Swing at AMS1 T Alternat
91. located on the upper right side of the front panel to turn off the power Warning When turning the instrument off all data contai ned in RAM a volatile memory used for Song editing will be lost On the contrary data contained in the SSD disk a non volatile memory used for Factory and User data will be pre served Note Never turn off the power while the SD card data is being read or written ABOUT THE AUTO POWER OFF FUNCTION With the factory settings this instrument will automat ically power off when four hours have passed since you last played the keyboard or used the buttons If desired you can turn off disable this function The power will also turn off automatically after four hours pass with only songs or demo songs being played To adjust power on off settings press the GLOBAL button to enter the GLOBAL page and adjust the set tings on the Pagel Gen Controls page AutoOff on page 126 CONTROLLING THE VOLUME e Use the MASTER MASTER ACC SEQ ASSIGN VOLUME slider to control SS oum the overall volume of the instrument This slider controls the volume of the sound going to the internal speakers the L MONO amp RIGHT OUTPUTS and the HEADPHONES connector Note Start at a moderate level then raise the MASTER VOLUME up Don t keep the volume at an uncomfortable level for too long e Use the ACC SEQ VOLUME slider to control the Style tracks drums percussion bass volume This slider also c
92. msec Setting the left and right delay time individually allows you to control the stereo image 188 Effects Pitch Phase Mod 017 Harm Chorus Stereo Harmonic Chorus This effect applies chorus only to higher frequencies This can be used to apply a chorus effect to a bass sound without making the sound thinner You can also use this chorus block with feedback as a flanger Stereo In Stereo Out Left o V lt Low Level fus 1 Dry a _Chonusirlanger DN T High Level H A High Damp High Low Split Point A Feedback Y i High Damp f a d gt Chorus Flanger DS 7 eo oe NS i Low Iy Bian i oe LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform b LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Fx 009 Drez 6 Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 009 ee BPM MIDI 40 240 d Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009 Base Note A d d Js 45 d a Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Times x1 x16 Sets the number o
93. n OVERII Tap4 Pan L 1 99 R jopay the error message if the right channel delay time exceeds the upper Sets the panning of Tap4 imi gt Feedback 100 100 L Delay Base Note D Ds d da J 45 4 o Sets the feedback amount Dz Selects the type of notes to specify the left channel delay time Fx 049 ege q Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of feedback amount b Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes to specify the left channel delay time Amt 100 100 Fx 049 Sets the modulation amount of the feedback Adjust 96 2 50 2 5096 High Damp 96 0 100 Fine adjust the left channel delay time Sets the damping amount in the high range Fx 043 e R Delay Base Note ds D Js i ds 2 M Low Damp 96 0 100 Selects the type of notes to specify the right channel delay time Sets the damping amount in the low range Fx 043 Fx 049 eer Input Level Dmod 96 100 100 Times x1 x16 Sets the modulation amount of the input level Fx 037 Dyz Sets the number of notes to specify the right channel delay time f 3Fx 049 Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level Fx 037 Adjust 96 2 50 2 5096 7 Fine adjust the right channel delay time Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 L Feedback 100 100 Dier Sets the feedback t for the left ch mod ets the feedback amount for the left channe D ERE Off T
94. on page 79 PAUSE MENU From any page press MENU to open the Song Play edit menu This menu gives access to the various Song Play edit sections When in the menu select a section using the VOLUME VALUE buttons press PAGE to select a page or press EXIT to exit the menu When in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the Song Play mode main page chord tempo measure z nn t n J pu g cen aut JE Lu at Song Flay MENU E Miner Preferences Effects Track Chrls Jukebox Song Play operating mode 75 Menu Each item of this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups many edit pages EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE Select an edit section from the Menu and or use the PAGE buttons to reach the desired page Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Song Play mode All edit pages share the same structure Selected Sequencer Song Play icon Page header Page number an m e IE Era B B Baa ga B goa zs tim GZA ooo 117 6 Song Play icon When on this icon indicates that the instrument is in Song Play mode Page header The header shows the name of the current edit page Usually the header is divided into a first word identi fying the section name e g Mixer FX Send is a Mixer section page and a second word referring to the page name e g FX
95. parame ter sets the balance between the final phaser and tremolo output level and the dry sound 036 RingModulat Stereo Ring Modulator gt Phaser T gt Tremolo z Phaser Wet Dry This effect creates a metallic sound by applying the pasas oscillators to the input signal Use the LFO or Dynamic Jj Resa Ll Spi 1 Triiolo Modulation to modulate the oscillator to create a radi E DA r r uu i E cal modulation Matching the oscillator frequency with ig ae lx a note number will produce a ring modulation effect in ype ope Ciro 5 specific key ranges Stereo In Stereo Out Type Phs Trml Phs LR Trml LR Left f Wet Diy Selects the type of the tremolo and phaser LFOs gt Pre LPF CN gt Ring Modulator a LFO Phase degree 180 180 F Sets the phase difference between the tremolo and phaser LFOs gt Pre LPF LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz IN 7 Ring Modulator Sets the LFO speed Fx 009 Dame Rin y ig i p Ste Off Tempo ed Sins Oscilator j Tan Selects the modulation source of LFO speed OSC Mode Pitch vow ED Note Offset Fine Amt 20 00 20 00Hz EF Hore e Fo Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the Pre LPF 0
96. point simply by playing the split point note on the key board Then release the SPLIT POINT button To memorize the selected split point note press the GLOBAL button then press WRITE to save the Global into memory see The Write window on page 126 Front panel 13 This button doubles as a PREVIOUS EVENT func tion for the Backing Sequence and Song modes see chapters 12 and 13 12 G QUANTIZE gt Press this button to open the Groove Quantize window where you can select a realtime groove quantization to be applied to the Song only Sequencer 1 See Groove Quantize window on page 71 This button doubles as a NEXT EVENT function for the Backing Sequence and Song modes see chapters 12 and 13 13 TEMPO LOCK This button turns the Tempo Lock function on or off ON When you select a different Style or Per formance the tempo doesn t change You can still change it using the DIAL or the TEMPO buttons OFF When you select a different Style or Per formance the memorized tempo value is automatically selected 14 Blichaieje This button turns the Single Touch function on or off ON When a different Style or the same again is selected a Single Touch Setting STS1 is automatically selected meaning that the Realtime tracks and effects will change together with the Style tracks and effects OFF When you select a different Style or the same again the Style tracks and effects are changed while
97. see Selecting a Song composing its progressive number on page 70 16 FADE IN OUT gt STYLE When the Style stoped press this button to start it with a volume fade in the volume goes from zero to the maximum When the Style is playing press this button to stop it with a volume fade out the volume gradually decreases You don t need to press START STOP to start or stop the Style 17 VARIATION 1 4 NOTE LENGTH buttons PERF STYLE Each of these buttons will select one of the four varia tions of the current Style Each variation can vary in patterns and sounds These buttons double as a NOTE LENGTH function for the Song mode see chapter 13 18 FILL 1 2 NOTE LENGTH buttons PERF STYLE These two buttons trigger a fill in Press them twice LED blinking to let them play in loop and select any other Style element Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop They also double as a NOTE LENGTH function for the Song mode see chapter 13 19 COUNT IN BREAK gt PERF gt STYLE While the Style is not running press this button then press START STOP This combination triggers a one bar initial count then the Style starts playing While the Style is already in play this button triggers a break an empty measure beginning with a kick crash shot Press it twice to let it play in loop and select any other Style element Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop 20 ENDING 1 2 DOT TRIPLET buttons
98. selected If you prefer select a different Perfor mance or STS See Selecting a Performance on page 25 and Selecting a Single Touch Setting STS on page 26 6 Select the status of the Backing Sequence tracks using the G RT and H Ch Acc button pairs RT stays for Realtime Keyboard Ch Acc stays for Chord Accompaniment i e the Style tracks To record all you play on the keyboard plus the auto matic accompaniment leave their status to REC see Realtime Recording page on page 85 Warning Tracks set to REC are automatically deleted when starting recording Set a track to the PLAY sta tus when you don t want to delete it For example if you are recording a Realtime Keyboard part on and existing Style track set the Ch Acc parameter to PLAY and the RT track to REC 7 Start recording by pressing the left PLAY STOP button or the START STOP button After a count in see Metro Metronome on page 85 you can start recording Play a solo intro or start the auto accompaniment with the START STOP button To start with the Style playing right from bar 1 keep the chord pressed during the precount and press START STOP before the end of the precount Otherwise the Style will start playing from the next bar fol lowing the one where you pressed START STOP Since you can use any Style control you could start with the usual combinations INTRO ENDING FILL see Playing a Style Automatic Accompanim
99. that we hope may be useful to learn the basics in the field PLAYING A STYLE Automatic Accompaniment A Style will be your virtual band for your best solos Select one of the 240 Styles we fitted in this machine 1 OK select your favorite musical Style There are plenty of Styles to choose from We will go with a LIVERPOOL STYLES the HalloGoodby 1 Select the second row of Styles Press the leftmost STYLE button to switch the lower LED on LIVERPOOL STYLES CET EE E ME O sou ark JAzz LATIN FANE IN AUT 2 Now you are free to press button number 3 called Ler H o LIVERPOOL STYLES The Style Select window appears The selected Style chora tempo ni E ett 3 Press one of the D VOLUME VALUE buttons to select HalloGoodby KI transpose l J I E Ut Tutorial 27 Playing a Style Automatic Accompaniment 2 Callan Intro You can engage an Intro to be played before the Style Press INTRO1 or INTRO2 The former plays more freely without letting you decide the chords The latter lets you play a chord progression while it s playing moe mon Ores 20 TT JO e cC CO OO oco 3 Start the Style Play a chord and iiid the START STOP button YNCHRO TAP TEMPO B INTRO START STOP RESET o o O1 20
100. units for each oscillator By setting the LFO1 or LFO2 Intensity to a negative value for Pitch Filter or Amp you can invert the LFO waveform chord tempo ac LFOR Oecd fro Selected Qscill Waves Triangle Rand Frespencur 3i deu Sunes Drill Wave This parameter selects the LFO waveform The num bers that appear at the right of some of the LFO wave forms indicate the phase at which the waveform will begin Triangle 0 Av Step Triangle 4 h Triangle 90 AV Triangle wave Step Triangle 6 uA i O04 Phase will change Triangle GNU randomly at each key in Step Saw 4 oC Saw 0 Tw Step Saw 6 T Sawtooth down Saw 180 A Random S H Me Conventional sample amp hold S H in which the level changes randomly at fixed intervals of Square T Square wave time Random2 S H Both the levels and the time intervals will change randomly Random3 S H The maximum level and minimum level will alternate at random intervals of time i e a square wave with random period Sine Das Sine wave Guitar L Guitar vibrato Exponential Triangle Fi Exponential Saw Down Exponential J Saw Up Random Vector Random5 Vector Random6 Vector These types cause Random 1 3 to change smoothly They can be used to simulate the instability of acoustic instruments etc Frequency Set the LFO frequency A setting of 99 is the fastest
101. 0 BD Dry 1 Off O0 BD Dry 1 O 16 E0 6 BD Pillow off 12 BD Tight Off 12 BD Tight O 17 F0 121 FingerSnaps off 31 SD Dry 1 Off 31 SD Dry 1 O 18 F 0 86 HH1 Closed1 1 87 HH1 Closed2 1 87 HH1 Closed2 1 19 G0 2 BD Dry3 off 2 BD Dry3 off 2 BD Dry3 O 20 G 0 72 SideStickDry off 73 SideStickAmb off 73 SideStickAmb O 21 A0 43 SD BrushTap1 7 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 22 A 0 43 SD BrushTap1 7 283 Tubular Off 283 Tubular O 23 B0 74 DrumStickHit Off 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell O 24 C1 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch T 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell O 25 c 1 119 SD Orch Roll T 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll Off 119 SD Orch Roll O 26 D1 121 FingerSnaps off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps O 27 D 1 143 Zap2 off 86 HH1 Closed1 Off 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 O 28 ET 281 Noise White Off 88 HH1 Foot O 87 HH1 Closed2 off 87 HH1 Closed2 O 29 F1 145 DJ Scratch2 T 89 HH1 Open 1 7 145 DJ Scratch2 Off 145 DJ Scratch2 O 30 F 1 145 DJ Scratch2 T 112 Ride Edge 1 Off 145 DJ Scratch2 Off 145 DJ Scratch2 O 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 32 G 1 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 off 165 CongaHi Slap2 Off 165 CongaHi Slap2 O 33 A1 249 Click Off 249 Click O 249 Click Off 249 Click O 34 ATH 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 249 Click Off 249 Click O 35 B1 5 BD Jazz Off 4 BD SoftRoom O 2 BD Dry3 Off 2 BD Dry3 Off 36 C2 34 BD Normal
102. 0089 ze Tremolo Shape 100 100 e Src Off Tempo 9 Sets the degree of the tremolo LFO shaping Fx 020 Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Tremolo Depth 0 100 Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the tremolo modulation depth Da Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed h Src Off Tempo BPM MIDI Sync Off On Selects the modulation source for the tremolo modulation depth Switches urit using the frequency of the LFO speed m bu pm tempo and notes Fx s Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the tremolo modulation depth BPM MIDI 40 240 Wa eee soa es f Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009 et Dry ry 1 99 99 1 We Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Base Note ds J Js d ds J o gt Drez Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Src Off Tempo Times x1 x16 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Amt 100 100 LFO Depth 0 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Sets the depth of LFO modulation for the oscillator frequency D ance on page 177 Src Off Tempo g Selects the modulation source of the depth of modulation a Type a LFO Phase degree por em m 100 Select the type of phaser LFO and tremolo LFO for the Type parameter How the effect sound moves or rotates depends on the type of LFO Selecting LFO
103. 010 Base Note A 3 2 Js dads dha Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Step Base Note A As A D D Js J ds 4 6 Selects the type of notes to specify the LFO step speed Fx 010 ce g Times x1 x32 Sets the number of notes to specify the LFO step speed Fx 010 h Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount Fx 020 i High Damp 96 0 100 Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range Fx 020 Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Fx 010 020 Dez Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 022 Envel Flang Stereo Envelope Flanger This Flanger uses an envelope generator for modula tion You will obtain the same pattern of flanging each time you play You can also control the Flanger directly using the modulation source Stereo In Stereo Out Lefto Pas 758 Flanger t f i Feedback Fa High Damp Flanger J m Right e CATIN DEZ So i EG AttackiDecay Swe
104. 114 PnoStrngPad 121 4 1 Warm Steel 121 1 114 Pno amp Strings 121 7 0 TubularBell 121 0 14 PianoLayers 121 6 2 Church Bell 121 1 14 Piano amp Vibes 121 6 0 Carillon 121 2 14 Harpsichord 121 0 6 KrystalBell 121 3 98 Harpsi Oct 121 1 6 o ChurchBell2 121 3 14 Harpsi Wide 121 2 6 Tinkle Bell 121 0 112 HarpsiK Off 121 3 6 Dulcimer 121 0 15 Harpsi Korg 121 4 6 Santur 121 1 15 Clav 121 0 7 Kalimba 121 0 108 Pulse Clav 121 1 7 VeloKalimba 121 1 108 Clav Wah 121 2 7 MalletClock 121 5 12 Clav Snap 121 3 7 Gamelan 121 1 112 Sticky Clav 121 4 7 BaliGamelan 121 2 112 Bank E Piano GarbageMall 121 3 112 ClubEIPiano 121 11 4 Bank Accordion DynoTine EP 121 10 4 Sweet Harm 121 1 22 Vintage EP 121 4 4 Harmonica 121 0 22 Pro Dyno EP 121 5 4 Harmonica 2 121 2 22 ProStage EP 121 6 4 Cassotto 121 9 21 Studio EP 121 7 4 Fisa Master 121 8 21 StereoDigEP 121 6 5 Fisa 16 8 121 6 21 ClassDigiEP 121 7 b Fisa 16 4 121 7 21 EP Phase 121 4 5 MusetteClar 121 5 21 Hybrid EP 121 8 5 Musette 1 121 3 21 Class Tines 121 9 5 Musette 2 121 4 21 PhantomTine 121 10 5 Accordion 121 0 21 Sweeping EP 121 12 5 TangoAccord 121 0 23 WhitePad EP 121 13 5 Fisa Tango 121 1 23 ThinEIPiano 121 9 4 Akordeon 121 2 21 Factory Data 151 Programs bank order
105. 127 The selected Style or Song cannot Make sure that the Clock parameter is set to Int If you are using the MIDI Clock of another device you must 128 start set the MIDI Clock parameter to MIDI and make sure that the external device transmits MIDI Clock data Does not respond to MIDI messages Make sure that all MIDI cables are connected correctly 22 Make sure that the external device is transmitting through MIDI channels enabled to receive in the Liverpool i Make sure that the MIDI IN Filters of the Liverpool do not prevent the reception of messages 130 Percussive instruments are not Make sure that the Percussion and Drum Track is set to Drum Mode and the 46 played correctly external device has not transposition applied 78 Some clicks can be heard when This is part of the sound and not a problem playing a percussive instrument A background noise can be heard The selected Performance Style or STS recalled the effect 15 Analog Record simulating the noise of a old after selecting a Performance Style vinyl recording or STS Card related problems Cannot format a card Is the card inserted correctly 131 Cannot save data to a card Is the card formatted 141 Is the card inserted correctly 131 Cannot load data from a card Is the card inserted correctly 131 Does the card contain data compatible with the Liverpool 132 Technical specifications 241 24 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Model KORG Liverpool Keyboard 61 keys
106. 1365msec If this is exceeded the recorded data will start being erased from the top e Response This parameter enables you to set the speed of the response to the end of recording Set a smaller value when you are recording a phrase or rhythm pattern and set a higher value if you are recording only one note f Direct Mix With Always On a dry sound is usually output With Always Off dry sounds are not output With Cross Fade a dry sound is usually output and it is muted only when scratching Set Wet Dry to Wet to use this parameter effectively MOD P SHIFT Other modulation and pitch shift effects 032 Tremolo Stereo Tremolo This effect modulates the volume level of the input sig nal The effect is stereo and offsetting the LFO of the left and right phases from each other produces a trem olo effect between left and right Stereo In Stereo Out Left o gt o Wet Dry Tremolo Right 4 LFO TrilSin Vintage Up Down gt LFO Shape R o Wet Dry LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Vintage Up Down Selects LFO Waveform a LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed Fx 020 b LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right gt LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Fx 009 D zes Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO
107. 146 17 FACTORY DATA Factory Data Styles STYLES Note You can remotely select Styles on the Liverpool by sending it Bank Select MSB CC 0 Bank Select LSB CC 32 and Program Change messages on the Control channel see page 129 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank A C CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank C G CC O CC 32 PC Bank G H 1 0 0 0 Across Univ 0 1 0 CarryWeight 0 2 0 Girl 2 1 All l veGot 1 ComeTogethr 1 GotToGetYou 3 2 AllMyLoving 2 Day Tripper 2 AHardDay s 4 3 AndiLoveHer 3 Don tLetMe 3 HelloGoodby 5 4 AndYourBird 4 DriveMyCar 4 Help 6 5 BackInUSSR 5 Eight Days 5 HelterSkelt 7 6 BalladJohn 6 Get Back 6 HereThere 8 7 Can tBuyMe 7 GettingBett 7 Hey Jude CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank H I CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank l L CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank L O 1 0 3 0 Honey Pie 0 4 0 I m SoTired 0 5 0 Lovely Rita 2 1 ImTheWalrus 1 In My Life 1 Maxwell s 3 2 Feel Fine 2 It Won t Be 2 Michelle 4 3 want you 3 lveJustSeen 3 NightBefore 5 4 IshouldHave 4 l veGotFeel 4 No Reply 6 5 Will 5 LadyMadonna 5 Nowhere Man 7 6 If Fell 6 Let It Be 6 Ob La Di 8 7 I m Down 7 LongAndWind 7 Oh Darling CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank P T CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank T Y C
108. 18 18dB D Tap2 Time msec 0 680msec Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 Sets the Tap2 delay time f O Mid1 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Feedback Tap2 100 100 Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Sets the Tap2 feedback amount d Q 0 5 10 0 D High Damp 0 100 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 Fx 006 g Sets the damping amount in the high range Fx 043 Gain dB 18 18dB h D Mt Delay Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 Sets the multitap delay effect balance O Mid2 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Drez Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 Fx 006 Src Off Tempo I Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Gain dB g DOS 18 18dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal A Amplifier Type a SS EL84 6L6 ance on page 177 Selects the type of guitar amplifier Routing OD AMP AMP gt OD g Switches the order of the overdrive and amp simulation connection Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 D h Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance o
109. 5 DetunedEP 2 E Piano Y 121 2 17 Perc Organ2 Organ 1 Y 121 2 5 EP2Veloc sw E Piano Y 121 3 17 Old Wheels Organ 1 121 3 5 EP Legend E Piano N 121 4 17 Percuss BX3 Organ 1 121 4 5 EP Phase E Piano Y 121 5 17 M1 Organ Organ 1 121 5 5 SynPiano X E Piano 121 6 17 TeknoOrgBas Organ 1 121 6 5 StereoDigEP E Piano 121 7 17 Bx3ShortDec Organ 1 121 7 5 ClassDigiEP E Piano 121 8 17 RotaryOrgan Organ 1 121 8 5 Hybrid EP E Piano 121 0 18 Rock Organ Organ 1 Y 121 9 5 Class Tines E Piano 121 1 18 BX3 Velo Sw Organ 1 121 10 5 PhantomTine E Piano 121 2 18 Killer B Organ 1 121 11 5 DW8000 EP E Piano 121 3 18 DirtyB Organ 1 121 12 5 Sweeping EP E Piano 121 4 18 ClassiClick Organ 1 121 13 5 WhitePad EP E Piano 121 5 18 Dist Organ Organ 1 121 0 6 Harpsichord Piano N 121 6 18 SuperBXPerc Organ 1 121 1 6 Harpsi Oct Piano Y 121 7 18 DirtyJazOrg Organ 1 158 Factory Data Programs Program Change order CC00 CC32 PC Name Liverpool Bank GM2 CC00 CC32 PC Na
110. 50 0msec Sets the gain of Band 1 Sets the delay time E Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Sets the LFO speed S Q 0 5 10 0 LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 Fx 006 Selects LFO Waveform Gain dB 18 18dB F Depth 0 100 Sets the gain of Band 2 Sets the depth of LFO modulation g E Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Feedback 100 100 Sets the center frequency for Band 3 Sets the feedback amount Fx 020 f Q 0 5 10 0 F Cho FIng Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 Fx 006 i Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger Fx 010 020 Gain dB 18 18dB Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Sets the gain of Band 3 Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger gt E Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz i Routing CMP FLNG FLNG CMP Sets the center frequency for Band 4 Switches the order of the compressor and chorus flanger connection gt Q 0 5 10 0 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet 9 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 Fx 006 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 mod Gain dB 18 18dB Dz Sets the gain of Band 4 Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 h Routing CMP PEQ PEQ CMP Switches the order of the compressor and parametric EQ connection Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modu
111. 6 Midi In Channels 1 16 Y Separate tracks Chord 1 Channel zs NI Z 7 Chord 2 Channel NI n Velocity Input RI zm beber Pide T 7 7 General parameters 8 Octave Transp on the Midi In EI Mute In E d 9 Midi In Filters 1 8 NI 10 Midi Out Channels 1 16 Y Separate tracks 11 Midi Out Filters 1 8 Y General parameters Card Edit Environment 9 Global Protect Not saved to card 234 Parameters Style and Song parameters The following table is a list of data saved to memory or card when editing a Style or a Song Note When saving a Song to card as a Standard MIDI File SMF all parameters are converted to ordinary track parameters Pa80 exclusive data are converted to SysEx or Meta Events that will be ignored when reading the SMF on a different keyboard or seguencer Style Song Parameter Header Tracks Master Track Header Tracks Master Track Volume GM Master Volume Tempo Meter Time Signature 2j Programs 2j LEE A Note On Off Pitch Bend EX EST After Touch Control Change m Ajaa a i Quarter Tone Quarter Tone Reset Chord Variation Length Original Key Chord NTT Expression Keyboard Range Chord Variation Table Retrigger Mode e e e e elese 11 Tension Y Play Mute
112. 62 D4 163 CongaHiMtSlap off 134 88 Conga Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap O 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 63 D 4 161 CongaHi Open Off 133 88 Tom Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open O 64 E4 158 CongaLo Open Off 133 88 Tom Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open O 65 F4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 66 F 4 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell O 68 G 4 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell O 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up O 70 A 4 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush O 102 HH Hip Off 209 Tambourin Push Off 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 72 C5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 73 C 5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 75 D 5 199 Claves Off 135 88 Clave Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 78 F 5 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 239 Uhh Off 215 Cuica Hi 4 79 G5 216 Cuica Lo 4 215 Cuic
113. 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 24 C1 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 25 C 1 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll T 119 SD Orch Roll 7 26 D1 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps O 121 FingerSnaps off 121 FingerSnaps O 27 D 1 143 Zap2 off 143 Zap2 O 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 O 28 E1 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White O 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White O 29 F1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 30 F 1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 32 G 1 142 Zap1 off 142 Zap1 O 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 O 33 A1 249 Click Off 249 Click O 249 Click Off 249 Click O 34 A 1 213 Triangle Open off 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open O 35 B1 23 BD Pop Kick Off 23 BD Pop Kick O 11 BD Gated Off 23 BD Pop Kick O 36 C2 17 BD House 1 Off 17 BD House 1 O 9 BD Terminator off 11 BD Gated O 37 C 2 126 88 Rimshot off 140 PR House05 Off 73 SideStickAmb Off 72 SideStickDry Off 38 D2 52 SD Noise Off 70 SD Chili Off 50 SD Dance Off 48 SD Processed Off 39 D 2 127 88 Claps Off 127 88 Claps Off 122 Hand Claps Off 122 Hand Claps Q 40 E2 143 Zap2 off 124 88 SD O 49 SD CrackerRoom off 60 SD Ringy O 41 F2 133 88 Tom Off 257 Tribe O 82 Tom Processed off 82 Tom Processed O 42 F 2 99 HH Ol
114. 79 Syn Brass 5 121 62 Bag Pipe 121 0 109 Brass Fall 121 26 61 Zurna 121 1 111 BassHitPlus 121 1 55 Hichiriki 121 2 111 Dbl Brass 121 24 61 Shanai 121 0 111 Bank Sax Flute Click 121 1 121 Tenor Noise 121 1 66 Bank Synth 1 Alto Breath 121 1 65 The Pad 121 4 89 Sweet Sprno 121 1 64 Future Pad 121 5 91 Barit Growl 121 1 67 Air Clouds 121 1 97 BreathyBari 121 2 67 Dark Pad 121 6 89 Soft Tenor 121 2 66 Tinklin Pad 121 3 97 SaxEnsemble 121 2 65 Pods In Pad 121 4 97 Folk Sax 121 5 66 Analog Pad 121 8 89 Tenor Sax 121 0 66 Analog Pad2 121 9 89 Alto Sax 121 0 65 Money Pad 121 5 89 Soprano Sax 121 0 64 TsunamiWave 121 6 91 BaritoneSax 121 0 67 RavelianPad 121 8 91 TenorBreath 121 3 66 AstralDream 121 1 95 Tenor Growl 121 4 66 Meditate 121 2 95 BreathyAlto 121 3 65 Reso Down 121 2 97 AltSaxGrowl 121 4 65 Sky Watcher 121 2 90 Bank Woodwind Super Sweep 121 4 90 154 Factory Data Programs bank order Name ccoo CC32 PC Name ccoo CC32 PC Wave Sweep 121 5 90 TecnoPhonic 121 10 90 Cross Sweep 121 6 90 DarkElement 121 3 95 Digi IcePad 121 2 101 Band Passed 121 3 102 Crim
115. 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the dry and reverb sounds of the gate control sig g nal gt Threshold 0 100 Sets the gate threshold level gt G Polarity h Switches between non invert and invert of the gate on off state Fx 005 G Attack 1 100 Sets the attack time Fx 005 i Release 1 100 Sets the release time Fx 005 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dz Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 f Envelope Select f Src g Input Reverb Mix g Threshold The Envelope Select parameter enables you to select whether turning the gate on and off is triggered by the input signal level or controlled directly by the modulation source You can select from Off to Gate2 Dmpr for the Src parameter to specify the modulation source When Envelope Select is set to Input the gate is controlled by the level of signals that are the combination of the dry sound and the reverb sound When the signal level exceeds the threshold the gate opens and the reverb sound is output Normally set Input Reverb Mix to Dry the gate is controlled only by the dry sound If you wish to extend the gate time set the Input Reverb Mix value higher and adju
116. ASSIGNABLE TO THE Function Meaning PEDAL OR ASSIGNABLE SLIDER E TN The following functions can be assigned to a continu Joystick S Joystick left ous pedal or to the Assignable Slider Joystick Y Joystick forward Joystick Y Joystick backward Function Meaning Vdf cutoff RT tracks Filter cutoff on the Programs assigned to the Master volume Master Volume Realtime tracks Accomp Volume Accopaniment Volume FACGIZCH Standard FX controllers Kb Expression Keyboard Expression FA CCIS CU LIST OF SOUNDS ASSIGNABLE TO THE PADS You can assign the following sounds to the Pads SOUND NAME SOUND NAME SOUND NAME SOUND NAME 1 ChinaGong 36 DistSlid2 71 Darbuka1 106 HeartBeat 2 Crash 1 37 Sticks 72 Darbuka2 107 Footstep1 3 Crash 2 38 Cowbell 73 Darbuka3 108 Footstep2 4 88 Crash 39 Agogo 1 74 Darbuka4 109 Stadium 5 Ride 1 40 Agogo 2 75 Darbuka5 110 DoorCreak 6 Ride 2 41 Whistle 1 76 Darbuka6 111 DoorSlam 7 China 42 Whistle 2 77 Darbuka7 112 CarEngine 8 Ride Bell 43 Sh Guiro 78 Darbuka8 113 Car Stop 9 Splash 44 LongGuiro 79 DoufRimAk 114 Car Pass 10 RevCymbal 45 Cuica 1 80 Tef 1 115 Car Crash 11 DragonGng 46 Cuica 2 81 Tef 2 116 Crickets 12 OrchCymb1 47 Triangle1 82 Tef 3 117 Train 13 OrchCymb2 48 Triangle2 83 Tef 4 118 Helicopt 14 OrcSdRoll 49 88Cowbell 84 Tef 5 119 Gun Shot 15 OrchSnare 50 TimbLow 85 Tef 6 120 MachinGun 16 Timpani 1 51 TimbHi 86 Rik 1 121 Laser Gun 17 Timpani 2 52 TimbRim1 87 Rik 2 122 Explosion 18 Timpani 3 53 TimbRim2 88 Rik 3 123 D
117. All Tempo changes made during record ing will be recorded to the Master Track Auto The Sequencer plays back all recorded Tempo events No new Tempo events are recorded Manual The latest manual Tempo setting made using the TEMPO VALUE controls is considered the current Tempo value No Tempo change will be recorded This is very useful to record the Song much slower than its actual Tempo STEP RECORD PAGE Access this page from the Main page of the Song Record mode by selecting the StepDub or Ste pOwr recording mode Rec parameter and press ing SEQ1 PLAY STOP Previous event Event to be inserted tempo Emm Gm nice Coa 1 Current position Step value Waiting for a keystroke a section Previously inserted event You may delete this event and set it in edit again by pressing the lt button b section Event to be inserted See the following parameters for information on each element of this section M Measure This is the position of the event note rest or chord to be inserted Meter Meter of the current measure This parameter can t be edited You can set a Meter change by using the Insert function of the Edit menu and inserting a new series of measures with a different Meter see Page 22 Edit Insert Measures on page 102 key This is a prompt asking for a note or chord to be played o
118. B a octave Meter dad Start d Length i After selecting the Meter Start and Length parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Note You cannot append measures after the end of the Song To append measures use the Record or Copy function Note You cannot use this function on an empty Song Meter Meter of the measures to be inserted Start First of the inserted measures Length Number of measures to be inserted PAGE 23 EDIT COPY Here you can copy tracks or phrases cma e amm ruis E B ME ir EE zia s rf e Edit Cory RES Made Merge FromTrk Bll Totrk All Sil Esl SA Tal After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Note If you copy too many events on the same tick the Too many events message appears and the copy operation is aborted Mode Use this parameter to select the Copy mode Merge Copied data are merged with the data at the target position Overwrite Copied data replace all data at the target position Warning Deleted data cannot be recovered FromTrk From Track ToTrk To Track Use these parameters to select the source and target track to copy All All tracks The target track cannot b
119. BPM MIDI Sync i Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the Band5 dB 18 0 18 0dB tempo and notes 3 FAS 9 Sets the gain of Band 5 BPM MIDI 40 240 h Band6 dB 18 0 18 0dB Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo gt Sets the gain of Band 6 Base Note KR ee ee i Band7 dB 18 0 18 0dB Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed gt Sets the gain of Band 7 Times x1 x16 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed gt Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dae Resonance 0 100 Sets the resonance amount y Sre Off Tempo f J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Low Pass Filter Off On Switches the Wah Low Pass Filter on and off Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet ance on page 177 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dz lt a Type j Src Off Tempo This parameter selects a combination of center frequencies Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 for each band Each center frequency is shown on the right Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal edge of the LCD ance on page 177 a Frequency Bottom a Frequency Top The sweep width and direction of the wah filt
120. Base Note parameter by the Times value in relation rhythm pattern to set up each tap to the tempo specified by the BPM parameter or the MIDI ECT Gi Soa iano Gk Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI Left ey a4 050 BPM Delay input Level D mod Stereo BPM Delay High Damp Low Damp This stereo delay enables you to set the delay time to Il INS p Zt back match the song tempo Input Level D mod en Note With extreme values the sync may be lost Right aloe Temp Stereo In Stereo Out E pen Wet Dry CRythm Pattern High Damp Low Damp Py DD Delay NAM mE Input Level D mod F z Feedback 2 eedbaci A BPM MIDI 44 240 Input Level D mod High Damp Low Damp Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo gt eje Delay TNI E Y b Rhythm Pattern 5 5s Right o Danio Selects a rhythm pattern gt eje Temp Tap1 Pan L 1 99 R BE p Ease Note x Times Adjust TA Sets the panning of Tap1 gt Base Note x Times Adjust Tap2 Pan L 1 99 R Sets the panning of Tap2 c BPM MIDI 40 240 Tap3 Pan L 1 99 R Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 049 ege Sets the panning of Tap3 a R
121. C 5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 75 D 5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 78 F 5 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 79 G5 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 80 G 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 81 A5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 82 A 5 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 85 C 6 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 87 D 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off af ei e T8 M PES LET Drum Kit instruments 167 120 0 14 Techno Kit2 120 0 15 Techno Kit3 120 0 16 Power Kit1
122. Channels on page 130 for more information SOUND PROGRAMS AND DRUM PROGRAMS Liverpool features two different kinds of Programs e Sound Programs These are normal instrument Programs like pianos strings basses e Drum Programs These are drum and percussion kits where each note of the keyboard is a different percussive instrument You can find Drum Pro grams in the DRUM KIT and USER DK banks Before pressing MENU to enter the edit environment you should select a Program of the type you wish to edit or create Notes pointing to special Drum Program features are marked by the ff icon MENU While in any other page of the Program operative mode press MENU to open the Program edit menu This menu gives access to the various Program edit sections When in the menu select an edit section using the VOLUME VALUE A G buttons select an edit page using PAGE or press EXIT to exit the menu When in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Program operating mode cm tempo g J s rod Edit MEM Basic Ame Sam Les LF s Pitch Effects Filter Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE Select an edit section from the Menu and or use the PAGE buttons to reach the desired page Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Program mode All edi
123. D 1 3 D 1 4 E 1 5 F 1 6 F 1 7 G 1 8 G 1 9 A 1 10 A 1 11 B 1 12 co 322 Rik3 O 13 C 0 321 Rik2 O 14 DO 320 Rik1 O 15 D 0 319 Rek Jingle Ofi 16 E0 318 Rek dom ak O 17 F0 303 Djembe Bass O 18 F 0 195 Taiko Open O 19 G0 317 Pand Pattern4 O 20 G 0 316 Pand Pattern3 O 21 A0 315 Pand Pattern2 O 209 Tambourin Push off 22 A 0 314 Pand Pattern1 O 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 23 B0 313 Pand Open O 189 Tabla Na Off 24 C1 196 195 Taiko Rim Taiko Open O 233 Flexatone Off 25 Ci 197 Tsuzumi Tsuzumi O 230 Finger Cymbal Off 26 D1 175 3175 Djembe OpenDjembe Open O 197 Tsuzumi Off 27 D 1 177 176 Djembe Slap Djembe Mute O 172 BongoHi Slap Off 28 E1 185 184 Baya GheBaya Open O 173 BongoHi Stk1 off 29 F1 186 187 Baya Mute1 Baya Mute2 O 170 BongoLo Stk off 30 F 1 1885303 Baya Mute5 gt Djembe Bass O 211 Tambourin Acc1 off 31 G1 190 190 Tabla Open Tabla Open O 224 Agogo Bell off 32 G 1 191 194 Tabla Tin Tabla Mute3 O 273 Wind Off 33 A1 192 193 Tabla Mute1 Tabla Mute2 O 224 Agogo Bell Off 34 A 1 1895193 Tabla Na Tabla Mute2 6 174 BongoHi Stk2 Off 35 B1 192 Tabla Mute1 O 200 Woodblock1 off 36 C2 116 BD Orch O 199 Claves Off 37 C 2 257 Tribe O 201 Woodblock2 off 38 D2 121 FingerSnaps O 225 Cowbell Off 39 D 2 122 Hand Claps O 200 Woodblock1 Off 40 E2 214 Triangle Mute 1 179 CastDouble off 41 F2 213 Triangle Open 1 184 Baya Open Off 42 F 2 179 CastDouble O 217 Shaker1 Off 43 G2 178 Cast
124. DELETE INSERT Then begin playing Usually when the SPLIT LED is on chords are recognized under the split point i e on the Lower part of the keyboard With the UPPER or FULL Chord Scanning mode you must play three or more notes to have a chord recognized KORG OD DISPLAY CHORD SCANNING KEYBOARD MODE HOLD LOWER UPPER SPLIT FULL UPPER o o o fe o 4 Play your chords and your melody Go on playing As you may notice the Liverpool fea tures a very sophisticate chord recognition engine Rec ognized chords are shown in the display 5 Make a break or should we say a fill During your playing you are free to call a one bar break Try it PRESS BREAK Do you see Music stopped for one bar Then it is back again After a while let s go for something different PRESS FILL1 OR FILL2 No silence this time Liverpool plays a complex pas sage to let you take a breath FILL1 is the simpler one where FILL2 is more sophisticated Usually you will use FILL1 when playing with Variations 1 and 2 the most easy FILL2 when working with Variations 3 and 4 more complex ones O1 20 O1 20 6 Select other Variations There are four VARIATION buttons These are four dif ferent versions of the same Style Try them all mI PENT N PRENK o o C cC C OO Vote can go to a Variation after a Fill Just press a FILL button then immediately after press a VARIATION button 28 Tutorial Playing in Realtime Wit
125. EXP2 or XVP10 To program it see P S Pedal Switch on page 127 6 MIDI interface The MIDI interface allows your Liverpool to be con nected to an external controller master keyboard MIDI guitar wind controller MIDI accordion to an expander or to a computer running a sequencer or an editor For more information on how to use the MIDI interface see the MIDI chapter IN This connector receives MIDI data from a computer or a controller Connect it to an external controller s or computer s MIDI OUT OUT This connector sends MIDI data generated by the Liverpool s keyboard controllers and or the internal sequencer Connect it to an expander s or computer s MIDI IN 7 DC 12V AC power adapter connector Plug the supplied power adapter into this connector 8 SD Card Slot s gt To insert an SD card or SDHC card push it into the slot until it clicks into place To remove the SD card push it in the card will pop out slightly allowing side the instructions regarding care and han dling you to pull it out Note Carefully read the owner s manual that came with your SD card and observe Note Take care to insert the SD card in the correct direction and orientation and be sure to press it all the way into the slot Do not use excessive force 24 Basic operations Playing on the keyboard 6 BASIC OPERATIONS PLAYING ON THE KEYBOARD Just play on the keyboard You will hear the Realtime
126. File that are not yet on card are always copied Overwrite Protected Files Enter Exit Protected files cannot usually be overwritten By press ing ENTER you can overwrite them during the current operation Rename Invalid Name Press Exit You can t use the name you entered Please retry and select a different name Rename New Name Must Be a SET You can t modify a SET folder extension Rename Failed Press Exit An error occurred during Rename Rename operation aborted Save Failed Press Exit An error occurred during Save Save operation aborted Some Files Missing Press Exit This message may appear at the end of a Restore opera tion Some User file may be missing This is not a prob lem for the Factory Data integrity Unit Not Found Press Exit You were trying to access a storage device not available on your instrument Unformatted medium You have selected a medium card that is not yet for matted or is in a format that Liverpool can t recognize Format the medium using the Format procedure see Page 5 Format on page 141 Wait Liverpool is busy with a card operation 240 Troubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING Error messages amp Troubleshooting Problem Solution Page General problems Power does not turn on Make sure that 1 the power cable is plugged into the outlet 2 the cable is plugg
127. Fx 003 Sets the level above which the compressor is applied Fx 003 L Attack 1 100 L Attack 1 100 Sets the attack time Fx 003 Sets the attack time Fx 003 b b Release 1 100 Release 1 100 Sets the release time Fx 003 Sets the release time Fx 003 c L Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB L Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB Sets the limiter output gain Fx 003 Sets the limiter output gain Fx 003 d E Trim 0 100 F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the parametric EQ input level Sets the LFO speed d E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Selects LFO Waveform Q 0 5 10 0 F Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 Fx 006 Sets the delay time Gain dB 18 18dB S Depth 0 100 Sets the gain of Band 1 Sets the depth of LFO modulation E Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz Feedback 100 100 Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Sets the feedback amount Fx 020 f Q 0 5 10 0 i F EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 Fx 006 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 Gain dB 18 18dB F Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Sets the gain of Band 2 Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 g E Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Sets the center frequency for Band 3 Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 Q 0 5 10 0 F Cho FIng Wet Dry Wet
128. GbliMidiln Ctl 1 Chord 1 channel OFF Chord 2 channel OFF Velocity In Hormal There are two separate Chord channels This is very useful when you must send chords to Liverpool on two channels like with some MIDI Accordions Chord1 channel GBL Notes entering this channel are sent to the Chord Rec ognition engine Chord2 channel gt GBL Notes entering this channel are sent to the Chord Rec ognition engine Velocity Input gt GBL Use this parameter to set a fixed velocity dynamics value for all MIDI notes entering This is useful when playing the Liverpool with an organ or a MIDI Accor dion Normal 40 127 Normal velocity values are received All received velocity values are converted to the selected value Global edit environment 129 Page 7 MIDI IN Controls 1 PAGE 8 MIDI IN CONTROLS 2 This is another page containing various MIDI IN set tings like note transposition for the Realtime tracks The transpose parameters are useful to many MIDI accordion players whose MIDI interface may transmit on an unexpected octave iempo Ji L D le T a am L1 7 am em aDl iMidiln Ctl 2 Fa Ure Octit 1 ct In OFF Lou ctit B ube In PP UppOct Upper Octave gt GBL Octave transposition of data received on the MIDI IN for the Upper tracks For example if you select the 1 value a received C4 will play a C5 on the Liverpool L
129. Kit1 120 0 12 Room Kit2 120 0 13 HipHop Kit2 120 0 14 Techno Kit2 120 0 15 Techno Kit3 120 0 16 Power Kit1 Y 120 0 1 Power Kit2 120 0 18 23 remap to 16 120 0 24 Electro Kit Y 120 0 25 Analog Kit Y 120 0 26 House Kit1 164 Factory Data Drum Kit instruments DRUM KIT INSTRUMENTS Legend In the Drum Kit tables the numer 120 x x before each Drum Kit name is the Bank Select MSB CC00 Bank Select LSB CC32 Program Change PC number Sample enlists both the sample num ber in memory and the sam ple name Excl is the Exlcusive parameter when a note is struck all notes with the same Exclusive number are stopped A right point ing arrow indicates a velocity switch 120 0 0 Std Kit1 120 0 1 Std Kit2 120 0 2 Std Kit3 Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 8 G 1 O0 BD Dry 1 Off 9 A 1 17 BD House 1 O 17 BD House 1 Off 17 BD House 1 Off 10 A 1 125 99 SD O 125 99 SD Off 125 99 SD Off 11 B 1 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD Off 12 co 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD Off 13 C 0 37 SD Full Room O 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 38 SD Off Center Off 14 DO 48 SD Processed 1 48 SD Processed Off 48 SD P
130. LFO modulation control and modulation source contro D mod Modulation L R L R Reversed L R control by modulation source gt Dm c b Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls delay time Response 0 30 Sets the rate of response to the modulation source LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform c LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed Fx 020 d LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed LFO Sync Off On Switches LFO reset off on gt Dm Bop EES SS__Z _ Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that resets the LFO L LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the phase obtained when the left LFO is reset gt R LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the phase obtained when the right LFO is reset gt L Depth 0 200 Sets the depth of the left LFO modulation g R Depth 0 200 Sets the depth of the right LFO modulation L Delay Time msec 0 0 500 0 Sets the left delay time h R Delay Time msec 0 0 500 0 Sets the right delay time L Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount of left delay i R Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount of right delay Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Fx 010 Daz Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amou
131. Mid1 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Amt 100 100 Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 f Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 O Mid2 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Q 0 5 10 0 9 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 h Routing CMP OD OD CMP Switches the order of the compressor and overdrive connection Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dz r Src Off Tempo l Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 Effects 215 Mono Mono Chain 066 Cmp Par 4Eq 067 Cmp ChorFlg Compressor Parametric 4 Band EQ Compressor Chorus Flanger This effect combines a mono type compressor and a This effect combines a mono type compressor and a four band parametric equalizer You can change the chorus flanger You can change the order of the effect order of the effect connection connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Left
132. Mod 194 029 2Voice Res This effect resonates the input signal at a specified pitch You can set the pitch output level and pan set tings for two resonators individually You can control the resonance intensity via an LFO 028 AutoFadeMod Stereo Auto Fade Modulation This stereo chorus flanger effect enables you to control the LFO speed and effect balance using auto fade and you can spread the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Stereo In Stereo Out Left r TDry Left E Wet 1 Dry High Damp Resonator N Level Pan Trim Resonance f x f i Resonator 4 Hg A High Damp Trim T T High Damp Level Pan Righto Em IT Right Snape DIZ i ie 22 CPitch Fine cent CEO THT Sine LEG Shape TO Contr Mode C WerDy Control Mode Manual LFO D mod Switches the controls of resonance intensity Daves AUTOFADE Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that starts AutoFade a LFO D mod Invert Off On Fx 027 Drez Reverses the Voice 1 and 2 control when LFO D mod is selected Rate 1
133. Open O 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open Off 62 D4 159 CongaLoMtSlp O 159 CongaLoMtSlp Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap O 63 D 4 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open O 64 E4 158 CongaLo Open O 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 65 F4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 O 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 O 66 F 4 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 68 G 4 224 Agogo Bell O 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up O 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 70 A 4 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush Off 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 72 c5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 73 C 5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 75 D 5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 78 F 5 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 79 G5 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 80 G 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 81 A5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 82 A 5 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh B
134. PERF STYLE While the Style is running these two buttons trigger an Ending and stop the Style Press one of them and the Style will stop running with an Ending If pressed while the Style is stopped they act as an additional couple of Intros Press them twice LED blinking to let them play in loop and select any other Style element Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop ENDINGI also doubles as a DOT function and ENDING2 doubles as a TRIPLET function to be used in Song mode see chapter 13 Note Ending 1 plays a short sequence with different chords while Ending 2 plays on the last recognized chord 21 INTRO 1 2 buttons gt PERF STYLE These two buttons set the arranger in Intro mode After pressing one of these buttons start the Style and it will begin with the selected intro The INTRO LED will automatically go off at the end of the intro Press them twice LED blinking to let them play in a loop and select any other Style element Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop Note Intro 1 plays a short sequence with different chords while Intro 2 plays on the last recognized chord 22 START STOP Starts or stops the Style that s running You can reset all frozen notes and controllers on the Liverpool and any instrument connected to its MIDI OUT by using the Panic key combination Just press SHIFT START STOP to stop all notes and reset all controllers 23 SYNCHRO START STOP DELETE This
135. Phase enables you to Sets the modulation amount of the depth of modulation 200 Effects Mod P Shift Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dze h Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a Pre LPF This parameter enables you to set the damping amount of the high range sound input to the ring modulator If the input sound contains lots of harmonics the effect may sound dirty In this case cut a certain amount of high range b OSC Mode This parameter determines whether or not the oscillator fre quency follows the note number c Fixed Frequency Hz This parameter sets the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is set to Fixed d Note Offset d Note Fine These parameters for the oscillator are used when OSC Mode is set to Note Key Follow The Note Offset sets the pitch difference from the original note in semitone steps The Note Fine parameter fine adjusts the pitch in cent steps Matching the oscillator frequency with the note number pro duces a ring modulation effect in the correct key 037 Detune Using this effect you can obtain a detune effect that offsets the pitch of the effect sound slightly from the pitch of the input signal Compared to
136. Pillow Off 12 BD Tight O 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 21 BD Hip 3 O 37 C 2 73 SideStickAmb off 73 SideStickAmb O 72 SideStickDry Off 126 88 Rimshot O 38 D2 35 36 SD Ghost f2SD Ghost p Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo O 49 SD CrackerRoom Off 60 SD Ringy O 39 D 2 122 Hand Claps Off 127 88 Claps O 127 88 Claps Off 127 88 Claps O 40 E2 35 36 SD Ghost f2SD Ghost p Off 37 SD Full Room O 37 SD Full Room Off 67 SD Vintage6 O 41 F2 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor O 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 75 Tom 1 Hi 9 42 F 2 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 86 HH1 Closed1 1 97 HH OldClose1 1 43 G2 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor O 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 75 Tom 1 Hi O 44 G 2 94 HH2 Foot 1 94 HH2 Foot 1 94 HH2 Foot 1 100 HH OldClose2 O 45 A2 78 Tom 2 Lo off 78 Tom 2 Lo O 78 Tom 2 Lo off 75 Tom 1 Hi O 46 A 2 89 HH1 Open 1 1 89 HH1 Open 1 1 96 HH2 Open 1 98 HH Old Open1 1 47 B2 78 Tom 2 Lo off 78 Tom 2 Lo O 78 Tom 2 Lo off 75 Tom 1 Hi O 48 C3 77 Tom 2 Hi off 77 Tom 2 Hi O 77 Tom 2 Hi off 75 Tom 1 Hi O 49 C 3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 O 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 O 50 D3 77 Tom 2 Hi off 77 Tom 2 Hi O 77 Tom 2 Hi off 75 Tom 1 Hi O 51 D 3 113 Ride Edge 2 off 113 Ride Edge 2 O 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 O 52 E3 106 China Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal O 106 China Cymbal Off 108 CymbalReverse O 53 F3 115 Ride Cup Off 114 Ride Jazz O 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz O 54 F 3 212 Tambo
137. Play mode 70 81 Speakers On Off 126 Split Point 13 36 Standard MIDI File 35 70 89 Style Ending 14 Fill 14 Intro 14 Recording 52 69 Selecting 13 26 Style Performance 40 Variation 14 Style Change 25 Style Play mode 40 51 Sync Key Sync LFO 122 MIDI Tempo LFO 122 Synchro Start Stop 14 T Tap Tempo 15 Tempo 40 Tempo Value section 16 Track Select 16 73 74 Tracks Drum mode 78 Drum Percussion 46 100 Keyboard Realtime tracks 24 40 70 Octave Transpose 18 Programs 17 Selecting 15 24 73 Volume 19 43 Transpose 17 18 Tune Tune Program 109 U User Interface 20 Edit Environments 21 Operating Modes 20 Selecting Windows 21 V VALUE slider AMS 124 Variation 14 Velocity AMS 124 Velocity Intensity Amp Mod 119 Velocity Filter EG 115 Velocity Curve 126 Volume Acc Seq 10 12 71 89 Balance 10 Individual tracks Song Play 76 Individual tracks Song 96 Individual tracks Style Play 43 Master 10 12 71 89 Volume Value section 15 19 W Write 15 Global 126 Style Play mode 42 Alphabetical Index KOR KORG INC 4015 2 Yanokuchi Inagi City Tokyo 206 0812 JAPAN 2015 KORG INC www korg com
138. Poly Tracks of this kind are polyphonic i e they can play more than one note at the same time Mono Tracks of this kind are monophonic i e each new note stops the previous note Mono Right A Mono track but with priority assigned to the rightmost highest note PAGE 8 TRACK INTERNAL EXTERNAL This page lets you set the Internal or External status for each track It is very useful to let a Song track drive an external expander Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 chord tempo T cm gre om racks Ikar Erta o Internal Internal B B Internal Internal B 8 Internal External B Internal Internal B chord tempo mm cm at 9 es ex Track Irka Ent Fa H Internal Internal E Internal Internal 4 Internal External E B Internal Internal D Parameters Internal The track plays the sounds generated by the internal sound engine It does not play an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT External The track plays an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT It does not play the internal sounds therefore saving polyphony When a track is set to External a strings of transmitted Control Change and Pro gram Change data is shown instead of the Program name assigned to the track In the following example CC 0 is the Con trol Change 0 Bank Select MSB
139. Pre LPF High Damp Toutput Level Sets the LFO speed A d T Depth 0 100 Righto i i it Sets the depth of LFO modulation i Wet Dry Envelope Control Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 pa D Pre LPF Off On Src Off Tempo Turn the harmonic noise caused by lowered sampling on and off 3Fx 014 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 a Amt 100 100 0 0 High Damp 7o r 0 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Sets the ratio of high range damping E ance on page 177 D Sampling Freq Hz Sampling Frequency 1 00k 48 00kHz Sets the sampling frequency b Resolution 4 24 Sets the data bit length Fx 014 Effects 225 Mono Mono Chain 087 Ch FI MTDly 088 Phser ChoFl Chorus Flanger Multitap Delay Phaser Chorus Flanger This effect combines a mono type chorus flanger and a This effect combines a mono type phaser and a chorus multitap delay flanger Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out ef Wet Dry cen Wet Dry ey Chorus Flanger
140. Real El Tom O 139 Real El Tom Off 83 Tom Jazz Hi Off 85 Tom Brush Hi O 49 C 3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 O 132 88 Crash Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 50 D3 139 Real El Tom O 139 Real El Tom off 83 Tom Jazz Hi Off 85 Tom Brush Hi O 51 D 3 113 Ride Edge 2 O 111 CYM 99 Ride Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 112 Ride Edge 1 Off 52 E3 108 CymbalReverse O 108 CymbalReverse Off 106 China Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off 53 F3 114 Ride Jazz g 114 Ride Jazz Off 115 Ride Cup Off 114 Ride Jazz Off 54 F 3 212 Tambourin Acc2 O 211 Tambourin Acc1 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 O 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal O 107 Splash Cymbal Off 105 Crash Cymbal 2 Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 56 G 3 225 Cowbell O 136 88 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 O 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 O 58 A 3 198 Vibraslap O 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 59 B3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 O 112 Ride Edge 1 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 60 C4 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open O 171 BongoHi Open off 171 BongoHi Open O 61 C 4 168 BongoLo Open off 168 BongoLo Open O 168 BongoLo Open off 168 BongoLo Open O 62 D4 163 CongaHiMtSlap off 163 CongaHiMtSlap O 165 CongaHi Slap2 Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 63 D 4 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open O 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open O 64 E4 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open O 158 Cong
141. Release Release time This is the time during which the sound goes from the sustaining or Decay phase to zero The Release is triggered by releasing a key Cutoff Filter cutoff This sets the sound bright ness Resonance Use the Filter Resonance to define the width of the frequency range affected by the Filter Vibrato RateSpeed of the Vibrato Vibrato Depth Intensity of the Vibrato Vibrato Delay Delay time before the Vibrato begins after the sound starts 100 Song operating mode Page 15 Track Mode Drum tracks When a track is set in Drum Mode like the Drum and Percussion tracks you can adjust the volume for each of the Drum and Percussion categories Kick V Kick drums volume Snare V Snare drums volume Tom V Toms volume HiHat V Hi Hat volume CymbalV Ride Crash and other cymbals volume Percus1V Classic percussion set volume Percus2V Ethnic percussion set volume SFX V Special effects volume Reset You can reset the parameters value by keeping the SHIFT button pressed while pressing the selected track VOLUME VALUE button When you press the above combination the Reset window appears RESET HieCancel SHE T VES H11 Press ENTER YES to reset the currently selected track Keep SHIFT pressed and press ENTER YES to reset all tracks Press EXIT NO to abort and leave all parame ters unchanged VES Trk PAGE 15 TRACK MODE This page lets you set the polyphony mode for
142. SD Jazz Ring O 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo 9 18 F 0 87 HH1 Closed2 1 87 HH1 Closed2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 19 G0 5 BD Jazz Off 2 BD Dry 3 O 6 BD Pillow off 6 BD Pillow O 20 G 0 72 SideStickDry off 72 SideStickDry O 72 SideStickDry off 72 SideStickDry O 21 A0 120 SD Orch 7 32 SD Dry 2 O 47 SD Yowie 7 47 SD Yowie O 22 A 0 119 SD Orch Roll 7 31 SD Dry 1 O 59 SD Hip 6 T 59 SD Hip 6 O 23 B0 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 24 C1 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch T 25 C 1 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 26 D1 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps O 121 FingerSnaps off 121 FingerSnaps O 27 D 1 143 Zap2 off 143 Zap2 O 143 Zap2 off 143 Zap2 O 28 E1 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White O 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White O 29 F1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 30 F 1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit Off 7A DrumStickHit O 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 32 G 1 142 Zap1 off 142 Zap1 O 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 O 33 A1 249 Click Off 249 Click O 249 Click off 249 Click O 34 A 1 213 Triangle Open off 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open O 35 B1 3 BD Normal off 2 BD Dry3 O 10 BD Tubby Off 28 BD Pop 99 Off 36 C2 06 BD Dry 15BD
143. STOP PAUSE See SEQUENCER TRANSPORT CONTROLS SEO1 and SEQ2 on page 18 for more information THE BACKING SEQUENCE SONG AND SONG PLAY MODES The Backing Sequence and Song modes are linked together go to Backing Sequence mode to record a Song and switch to Song mode to edit it Since they use the same sequencer and memory area recording a new Song in Backing Sequence mode deletes the Song loaded in Song mode Note The Song is kept in RAM so save it before turning the instrument off or it will be lost Warning When switching to Song Play the Song is deleted since Backing Sequence Song and Song Play share the same sequencer Sequencer 1 The Erase Song message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to stay in Backing Sequence mode and avoid deleting the Song HOW TO PLAYBACK A SONG You can load a Standard MIDI File and play it back while in Backing Sequence mode Note Songs on the internal SSD cannot be selected Note When in the Main page Backing Sequence Play the keyboard doesn t play 1 Enter the Backing Sequence mode The Backing Sequence Playback page appears see page 83 chord tempo measure J Ine DiE d O ILLI octave cackino sea BAD WEERT ae a Pi im Load Sona Metros Of Save Sond Meter ded Sel Teneo Tempo Auto 2 Press one of the B Load Song VOLUME VALUE buttons to load a Song see Load Song page on page 84 Y
144. Seq 2 Press Exit You can t load a Jukebox JBX file to Sequencer 2 Juke box files can only be loaded to Sequencer 1 Juke Box List Empty Press Exit You are trying to start playing back a Jukebox list but the list is empty Please add some Songs to the list Juke Box List Full Press Exit A Jukebox list may contain up to 127 Songs You were trying to add one Song more Save Song List Insert Card and Press Enter You are saving a list of Songs Please insert a card and press ENTER Save JBX List Insert Card and Press Enter You are saving a list of Songs as a JBX file Please insert a card and press ENTER Wait Please You were trying to load a file while Liverpool is still loading another one Song Too Many Events You have tried to copy too many events on the same tick Out of Memory The memory limit for a Song 300KB has been reached Incompatible Meter You were trying to copy a track on a track with a differ ent meter Sequencer is Running Press Exit While in Song Record mode this message may appear when you try to select a different track or execute an edit operation while the Sequencer is running Song Play and Song mode Cannot load Jukebox file on Seq 2 You can load a Jukebox file only on Sequencer 1 Damaged Standard Midi File The Standard MIDI File you are trying to load is dam aged and cannot be played back Jukebox list is empty You tried to delete a Song in an empty Jukebox list
145. Sets the LFO speed h Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Resonance 0 100 Sets the resonance amount Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal LPF Off On ance on page 177 Switches the wah low pass filter on and off Routing PEQ WAH WAH PEQ Changes the order of the parametric equalizer and wah connection Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dc Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 212 Effects Mono Mono Chain 060 4EqPhsrChFl However if a mono input type effect is connected after this Parametric 4 Band EQ Chorus Flanger effect the left and right sounds may cancel each other elimi nating the chorus flanger effects This effect combines a mono type four band paramet ric equalizer and a chorus flanger 061 Par4Eq Phsr Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Parametric 4 Band EQ Phaser Left o Wet Dry This effect combines a mono type four band paramet ric equalizer and a phaser
146. Sets the LFO speed E d Envelope Amount Hz 20 00 20 00Hz Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a LFO Waveform This parameter selects the LFO waveform Vintage wave simulates the characteristics of the tremolo created on a gui tar amplifier Combining this effect with the Amp Simulation will make a realistic vintage tremolo amplifier sound Tremolo LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Vintage Up Down MAIL LLY f _Selects MIDI Clockand assigns tempo E Ra Sets the changes of the LFO speed according to the input signal level Base Note 9 25 2 35 4 45 4 Depth 0 100 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Sets the depth of LFO modulation 5 Times x1 x16 e j j Envelope Amount 100 100 Sets the numberof notes tha sea Ihe LFO Bere TODO Sets the changes of the modulation depth according to the input signal level Depth 0 100 gt j mod Sets the depth of LFO modulation D Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Src Off Tempo Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 9 Selects the modulation source of the depth of modulation Dae Amt 100 100 f Src Off Tempo Sets the modulation amount of the depth of modulation Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Amt 100 100 Table Sets the balan
147. Sets the sensitivity Fx 002 C Attack 1 100 C Attack 1 100 Table Sets the attack level on page 178 Fx 002 Table Sets the attack level on page 178 Fx 002 b b Output Level 0 100 Output Level 0 100 Sets the compressor output level Fx 002 Sets the compressor output level Fx 002 n C EQ Trim 0 100 O Drive Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion c C Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Drive 1 100 Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 Sets the degree of distortion Fx 006 d Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB O Output Level 0 50 Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 Sets the overdrive output level Fx 006 ze A Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 d Src Off Tempo Selects the type of guitar amplifier Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level t Routing CMP AMP AMP gt CMP Amt 50 50 Switches the order of the compressor and amp simulation connection Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet O Low Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type mod e Dz Gain dB 18 18dB Src Off Tempo Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 T O
148. Stand Accessory Discs Options XVP 10 Exp Volume Pedal EXP 2 Foot Controller DS 1H damper pedal PS 1 PS 3 Pedal switch Specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice for improvement Alphabetical Index 25 ALPHABETICAL INDEX A Acc Seq Volume 10 12 AMS Alternate Modulation Source Resonance 113 Arabic Scale 34 Assignable Slider 127 Attack 120 Attack Level Amp EG 120 Attack Time Filter EG 117 Audio Inputs 11 Audio Outputs 11 B Backing Sequence mode 30 82 88 Backup 9 142 Balance 10 18 32 Bank Select 37 BPM MIDI Tempo Sync LFO 122 C Chord Recognition Mode 51 Chord Scanning 17 Cutoff Frequency 114 D Damper 11 47 Polarity 127 Decay Time Filter EG 117 Delay LFO 122 Demo 11 Direct SD 40 Disk 131 143 Backup 142 Format 141 Display 19 21 F 1 F 4 buttons 16 19 Page buttons 19 Volume Value buttons 15 19 Display Hold 16 Double Sequencer 31 70 Drum mode 78 Drum tracks 46 100 E Edit Environment 21 Effects Song mode 96 98 Song Play mode 71 76 Style Play mode 43 44 Ending 14 Ensemble 48 F F 1 F 4 buttons 16 19 Fade LFO 122 Fill 14 Filter Cutoff Frequency 114 Filter Type 113 Low Pass amp High Pass 113 Low Pass Resonance 113 Footswitch 127 Polarity 127 Format 141 G General MIDI 35 Global 126 130 Global channel 35 Groove Quantize 71 j Inputs 11 Intro 14 J Joystick 47 Jukebox 74 79 K Keyboard Mode 17
149. Style structure we can use a tree struc ture as shown in the following diagram Pop Ballad Variation 1 CV1 i Drum 8E Perc Bass Acc1 Acc2 Acc3 Acc4 Acc5 CV2 CV3 CcV4 CV5 CV6 Variation 2 Variation 3 Variation 4 Intro1 CV1 CV2 Intro 2 Fill 1 Fill 2 Ending Ending2 Each Style Element is made up of smaller units called Chord Variations CV but not all of them have the same number of CVs Variations 1 4 have up to 6 CVs each while the other Style Elements have only up to 2 CVs When you play on the chord recognition area Lower Upper or Full depending on the Chord Scanning sec tion on the control panel the arranger scans the key board and determines which chord you are playing Then depending on the selected Style Element it determines which Chord Variation CV should be played for the scanned chord Which Chord Variation corresponds to each scanned chord is a setting of the Style the Chord Variation Table Each Style Element contains a Chord Variation Table whose prototype is the following Chord Chord Variations CVs Variation 1 4 Intro 1 2 Fill 1 2 Ending 1 2 Maj 6 M7 M7b5 Sus4 Sus2 M7sus4 min m6 m7 m7b5 mM7 7 7b5 7sus4 dim dimM7 CV1 CV6 CV1 CV2 aug aug augM7 no 3rd no 3rd no 5th After deciding what CV to play the arranger triggers the
150. This page lets you set the pan position in the stereo front for each track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Real time Keyboard tracks to the Style tracks and vice versa cD my cog a lt aa om E mia page Mixer Fan e co lig cua m amp 20 s CHAG m m 18 m CHAA T 4 ic ios D page Mixers Pari ci umm E4d Cen z if TB Cea amp Cen i l g Cea Cen c Pan PERF STYLE STS L 64 Hard Left C 00 Center Style Play operating mode 43 Page 1 Mixer Volume R 63 Hard Right Off The direct uneffected signal does not go to the outputs only the FX signal is heard for this track PAGE 3 MIXER FX SEND This page lets you set the level of the track s direct uneffected signal going to the Internal FX processors The effect processors included in Liverpool are con nected in parallel so you can decide which percentage of the direct signal should be effected Output There are four Internal FX processors in Style Play mode You can assign them any kind of available effects but we found it convenient to arrange them in the following way for all the Styles included with the Liverpool A Reverb processor for the Style tracks B Modulating FX processor for the Style tracks C Reverb processor for the Realtime Keyboard tracks D Modulating FX proce
151. To avoid this reset see Prog Program on page 49 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE E H buttons on the right side of the display to select the Realtime Keyboard track you wish to assign a different Program to econo ma un MENU HO m P Bossa Pro IET HE DrumPerc MusetteClar QU Class Piano Rc Piano G Acone 15 Ac Piano i3 Strings PAGE VOLUME VALUE UPPER 1 ACC 2 VOLUME VALUE DRUM PERC DRUI 3 Lad F2 Fa F4 E EI LM NM M SINGLE TOUCH SETTING 2 Press the PROGRAM button This changes the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section into a Pro gram selector 26 Basic operations Selecting a Style 3 Use the leftmost PROGRAM PERFORMANCE button to select a row of Program banks upper lower Ot O sax 4 Select the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE bank con taining the Program you are looking for Program banks are identified by instrument names REE iss ACCOR PROGRAM PERFORMANCE 5d IANO T amp ACCORDION ORGAN 1 ORGAN2 GUITAR STRINGS amp TRUMPET amp BRASS wart VOCALS TROMBONE Geceogooeaq 7 8 9 SPR USER Sp USER 2 USERDK The Program Select window appears See Pro grams Program Change order on page 157 for a list of Factory Programs Last selected Program Selected track z IP 4 Grand FianofiT U Grand Piano Ac Fiano Class Piano BrightPianc L R Pi
152. Troubleshooting cece cece eee eee 240 Technical specifications 241 Alphabetical Index s 242 8 Welcome Useful links 1 WELCOME Thank you for purchasing the Korg Professional Arranger Liverpool This instrument is an ideal keyboard for song produc tion itlets you select a desired musical style and gen erate a high quality band accompaniment simply by playing chords and then you can play the melody yourself to easily create an original song Here are some of the features of your new instrument e Powerful HI Hyper Integrated KORG sound gen eration system as seen in our best professional synthesizers e OPOS Objective Portable Operating System mul titasking operating system to let you load data while playing your instrument e Operating System updates to load new features from card Don t let your instrument get old e Solid State Disk SSD for any system update a smart way to replace the usual ROM memory e SD card slot capable of reading and writing on SD and MMC memory types Directly access Styles stored in internal memory SSD or on an SD card e General MIDI Level 2 Sounds compatible e More than 662 Sound Programs e 4multieffect processor each with 89 effect types e 160 Performances and 960 Single Touch Settings STS for fast setting of keyboard sounds and effects e 240 Styles e XDS Double Sequencer with Crossfader e St
153. Wi uapa DEW Caen page e Hse r5 aen le 40 Aiga B58 Bien Bind B B Reiz B28 BiBn Bind a Arile B58 Bien Bind Aria B58 BiBn Bind B chord tempo measure J nus Ooi E 6 Ut e fixer FA Send B mpiBea BS Aree Bo E Arif Er28 Arlo E56 Aiia B58 Ariat E56 B B HriBB Esse Aric Boe D Here is the edit procedure 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F 1 F 4 buttons to select a parameter for that track 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the parameter s value Parameters 000 No effect Only the direct uneffected sig nal goes to the outputs 127 100 effect The direct uneffected and effected signals go to the outputs with the same level Song operating mode 97 Page 4 Mixer FX Send A B or C D PAGE 5 TUNING DETUNE This page is where you can set the fine tuning for each track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again KE D om i M J nus oor D 0 tt e furina Detune 00 E B B 00 00 B 00 00 00 00 e j ye D ID B l e Turina betune B 00 na amp 00 00 00 00 E i2 00 00 fiel Detune This is the fine tuning 64 Lowest pitch 0 Standard tuning 63 Highest pitch PAGE 6 TUNING
154. Y This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that joystick movement in the Y direction away from yourself will have on the pitch modulation applied by the LFO1 As this value is increased moving the joystick in the Y direction will cause the LFO1 to produce deeper pitch modulation With a setting of 12 00 a maximum of 1 octave of pitch modulation will be applied Negative values will invert the LFO waveform 12 00 12 00 Joystick action depth Pitch LFO1 Level modulation AMS Alternate Modulation Source This parameter selects the source that will control the depth of pitch modulation produced by the LFO1 See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 124 Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have With a setting of 0 modula tion will not be applied With a setting of 12 00 the LFO1 will apply a maximum of 1 octave of pitch modulation Negative settings will invert the LFO waveform For example if AMS is set to Joystick Y and push the joystick a positive setting of this parameter will cause the pitch modulation created by LFO1 to be applied with the normal phase and a negative setting will cause the LFO to be applied with inverted phase 112 Program operating mode Page 5 Pitch LFO2 The LFOI Intensity JS Y and AMS settings will be added to determine the depth and direction of
155. an offset to the selected sample s EG Decay Velocity Switch This is the velocity value dividing the High and Low layers for the selected sample key Notes stricken harder than this value will be played by the High multisample Single Trigger Use this parameter to set the sample as a single trig gered one Yes When the same key note is played repeatedly the previous note will be stopped before the new note is triggered so that they will not overlap No When the same key note is played repeatedly the previous note will not be stopped before the new note is triggered Receive Note On Use this parameter to enable disable the reception of the Note On Key On message Yes The Note On message is normally received No The Note On message is not received Therefore the corresponding key is muted Receive Note Off Use this parameter to enable disable the reception of the Note Off Key Off message Yes The sound will stop as soon as you release the key No The sound will continue playing up to the end of the sample The Note Off message is ignored Warning If the Single Trigger parameter is set to No and the sound is looped the sound will play endlessly In an emergency situa tion use the Panic command see START STOP on page 14 Exclusive Group Exclusive Groups are sets of mutually exclusive keys stopping each other For example if the Open Hi Hat and Closed Hi Hat are assigned the same Exclusive G
156. ate ModT iLP 1 EoBsendtl2 C D gt PERF STS Effects assigned to the C and D effect processors Usu ally C is the reverb while D is the modulating effect chorus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see Effects on page 177 ModTrk Modulating Track PERF STS Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modulate an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller D Csend D C Send PERF STS Amount of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect PAGE 9 FX A EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the A effect usually reverb for the Style tracks chord n n ria Coa style play J LI pnan n OE Fe A Edit Stu ER Mix mad sources Toy i Mix mad amt 127 Reverb Time 3 7 sec vis HF Damping 3B X iL Use the E and H VOLUME VALUE buttons to scroll the parameter list Parameters gt PERF STYLE See Effects on page 177 for a list of available parame ters for each effect type PAGE 10 FX B EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the B effect usually modulating effect for the Style tracks For more details see Page 9 FX A editing above Parameters PERF gt STYLE PAGE 11 FX C EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the C effect usually reverb for the Realtime tracks For more details see
157. bal ance on page 177 210 Effects Reverb REVERB Reverb effects These effects simulate the ambience of reverberation in concert halls 052 Rev Hall This hall type reverb simulates the reverberation of mid size concert halls or ensemble halls 053 RevSmthHall Smooth Hall This hall type reverb simulates the reverberation of larger halls and stadiums and creates a smooth release 054 RevWetPlate This plate reverb simulates warm dense reverbera tion 055 RevDryPlate This plate reverb simulates dry light reverberation Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o gt Wet Dry Pre Delay Thru EQ Trim LEQ HEQ gt lt Pre Delay Reverb EQ Trim Right I Wet Dry Reverb Time sec 0 1 10 0sec Sets the reverberation time a High Damp 96 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Pre Delay msec 0 200msec Sets the delay time from the dry sound gt b Pre Delay Thru 0 100 Sets the mix ratio of non delay sound EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 d Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 paz
158. beat 5 If the DISPLAY HOLD LED is on press EXIT to exit this window The SINGLE TOUCH button When you select a Style the Realtime Keyboard tracks can be changed e If the SINGLE TOUCH LED is on the Single Touch Setting STS 1 is automatically selected and the Realtime tracks are changed Programs and the Keyboard Mode may change e Ifthe SINGLE TOUCH LED is off Realtime tracks don t change SELECTING A SINGLE TOUCH SETTING STS A Single Touch Setting STS contains Realtime Key board tracks settings Four STS are included in each Style and can be recalled by pressing the SINGLE TOUCH SETTING F 1 F 4 buttons under the display Note You can select a STS only when you are in the main page of the Style Play or Backing Sequence operating mode CHANGING ALL KEYBOARD TRACKS AT ONCE Select a Performance or a Single Touch Setting F 1 F 4 buttons when you are in the Style Play main page to change keyboard Programs and effects at the touch of a button SHORTCUT TO SEE THE ORIGINAL BANK FOR A STYLE PERFORMANCE OR PROGRAM You can see the original bank where your Style Perfor mance or Program came from Just keep the SHIFT but ton pressed and press the lefmost button of the STYLE or PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section A message window will appear showing the name of the original bank Release the SHIFT button to exit the window 7 TUTORIAL This chapter is fully devoted to step by step instruc tions
159. beginning of the measure like a Time Signature or Style change will not be moved When the Measure parameter is selected press DELETE to delete the current mea sure All Chord Acc event contained into the following measures are moved to the current measure SHIFT DELETE When the Measure parameter is selected press SHIFT DELETE to delete all events in the Style tracks starting from the cur rent position to the end of the Song To delete all events in the Style tracks go back to the M001 01 000 position and press SHIFT DELETE Note All events on the very first tick M001 01 000 like Style Tempo Chord Style Element selection cannot be deleted DELETE Tempo This is the Tempo Change parameter To insert a Tempo Change event at the current position select this param eter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change its value DELETE When the Tempo parameter is selected and the side arrow showing that a Tempo Change event has been selected at the current position appears next to it press DELETE to delete the Tempo Change at the current position Note If the side arrow doesn t appear the event was not selected at the current position and will not be deleted SHIFT DELETE When the Tempo parameter is selected press SHIFT DELETE to delete all Tempo Change events starting from the current position to the end of the Song To delete all Tempo Change events in the Song go back to the M001 01 000 pos
160. by some scales to set the pre ferred key see Scale on page 44 Speakers This parameter turns the internal speakers on or off Note Speakers are always turned on again each time you turn the instrument on Met Vol Metronome Volume gt GBL Volume of the metronome 40 127 Relative volume from minimum to maxi mum AutoOff This parameter sets the auto power off setting Yes The power will automatically turn off if you dont play the keyboard or operate the instrument s buttons for a period of four hours No Auto power off will not occur PAGE 2 MASTER TRANSPOSE This page is where you can turn the Master Transpose on or off chord j co Taft mn Spe mme S EEN rogram em GOLEM T Ie Hi es ol E a Stule4Realtime Sunc Sesuencerle i Un Midi In OFF Scales Post kB Style Realtime gt GBL This is a flag to turn the Master Transpose on or off on the Style and Realtime Keyboard tracks Off No Master Transpose is applied to the Style and Realtime tracks Sync Sync mode When you press either the TRANSPOSE p or 4 buttons the new transpose setting will not take effect until the first beat of the next measure is reached The Realtime tracks sounding at the time of the transpose will be stopped Realtime mode When you press either the TRANSPOSE p or 4 buttons the new transpose setting will occur when the next note is played
161. card You can save files banks or all the A04 enu User files of the internal memory Emus dal mud Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons Lans Loan d to reach this page jul 1 l amp BeatHeu il S Ul 2 Beat A Ul 3 Walzerhlarch i i cam Sp LOAD OPEN CLOSE gt cual J ial ago 9 Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO Doa VALUE controls to move the desired item to the i first line of the display e 10 Press F 2 LOAD to confirm the file selection The pe ee ae ene 01 E cen oe Here are the various types of files contained in mem formances you are prompted to choose a ory destination in memory For example when load ing a single Style after selecting the Load com The file folder ontains and will create on mand a page similar to the following appears in Ypes E the display ALL ao User data in mem A SET folder chord tempo emm Style The USER 01 03 Styles A STYLE folder inside a A014 SET folder Program The USER Programs and A PROGRAM folder inside Cardi oa a Drum Kits a SET folder to Ui 1 igBeatNey i ooo The Performances ptt papi folder inside to Ul 2 GBL file The Global All parameters A GLOBAL folder inside a Te Sox AE iL marked with GBL within SET folder D LOD OPEN CLOE a L are saved in the Global In the page above the previously selected Style will be loaded into the location U1 1 USER1 but Saving the whole memory content ton Style 01 in
162. chord aD GD Cu jy Tuyen 005 DO 1 u e Haewsora Load Sond Metros Ort Save Sond Meter 44 Sel Tempo Temro Buta 2 Insert in the card slot the card containing the midifile you wish to edit Midifiles are files generated by a computer sequencer or a musical instrument usually after a conversion For example if working with a computer you should find a command whose name could sound a little like Con vert to MID A midifile has a MID or KAR extension 3 Load the Song Press one of the B VOLUME VALUE buttons corre sponding to the Load Song command As expected the Load page will appear Hex am com anes og Load Song Ca BALLADS It La AVS0Hes FACH HIP n 5D LORD OPEN CLOSE If you replaced the card press F 1 SD to read the SD card again Move the midifile to load to the first line of the display Use the DIAL or the UP and DOWN buttons to scroll the list or use the E F Scroll Up or G H Scroll down VOLUME VALUE buttons When the midifile is on the first line of the display press F 2 LOAD to load it The Are you sure mes sage will appear Press ENTER to confirm Note When loading a Standard MIDI File the first MIDI events are converted to the Song Performance events You will see them as the Programs Volume Pan Effect settings assigned to the tracks
163. connection Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 pa h Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 Effects 219 Mono Mono Chain 075 Exc Limiter Exciter Limiter This effect combines a mono type exciter and a limiter You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left gt o Routing Wet Dry Exdter dimer EQ Trim LEQ HEQ J X Exeiter Limiter 4 H x Gain Adjust Right i o i Wet Dry Envelope Control X Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Fx 011 b X Emphatic Point 0 70 Sets the frequency range to be emphasized Fx 011 X EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 X Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 d Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 L Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Fx 003 f L Threshold dB 40 0dB Sets the level above which the compressor is applied Fx 003 L Attack 1 10
164. copy of the instrument s Operating System on a card Note Should you not do a back up and your internal data is changed you can download the data from http www korgpa com or ask your local KORG dealer 1 Select the Save OS command 2 Inserta card and press ENTER The following files are created on the card BLIVR SYS NBLIVR SYS LIVR LZX If the card is not formatted Liverpool asks if you want to format it Ho Card Urnformatted Enter to format Keep SHIFT pressed and press ENTER to format the card Backup Data This command starts a backup of all internal factory data Styles Programs Performances excluding the Operating System itself Note Should you not do a back up and your internal data is changed you can download the data from http www korgpa com or ask your local KORG dealer 1 Selectthe Backup Data command 2 The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to continue EXIT to abort If the card is not formatted Liverpool asks if you want to format it Ha Card Unformattet SetEnter to format Keep SHIFT pressed and press ENTER to format the card Restore Data This command restores the backup of the internal fac tory data executed with the Backup Data command Note Should your Factory Data card become corrupt you can download the data from http www korgpa com or ask your local KORG dealer Warning Don t play on the keyboard while restoring data and stay in
165. data to an external expander or sequencer connected Liver pool s MIDI OUT To hear only the expander s sounds you can lower the MASTER VOLUME control on the Liverpool or set the Realtime Tracks to the External status see Page 15 Track Internal External on page 47 The Sequencer Any Sequencer s track can drive a channel on an exter nal instrument To set each track s MIDI output chan nel see Page 10 MIDI OUT Channels on page 130 To hear only the expander s sounds you can lower the MASTER VOLUME control on the Liverpool or set the Song tracks to the External status see Page 8 Track Internal External on page 79 Select the Sequencer 1 or Sequencer 2 MIDI Setup depending on the Sequencer you are using on the Liv erpool to set the channels as follows Track Out Channel Song 1 16 1 16 The Arranger One of the most interesting aspect of MIDI is that you can use your Liverpool to play an external instrument with its onboard arranger Yes it s hard to beat the audio quality of Liverpool but you could wish to use that old faithful synth you are still accustomed to To assign some of Liverpool Style tracks to an external instrument set them to the External status see Page 15 Track Internal External on page 47 Select the Default MIDI Setup to set the channels as fol lows this is the default status of Liverpool Track Out Channel Bass 9 Drums 10
166. each track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again chord KI Je Rue BODL B tt e Track Mode a Poly Palu B B Poly Poly B B Poly Poly Palu Palu B chord com com nuces OI EL B EE E e Track Mode B Palu Palu B D Drum Poly D Deum Palu B Poly Palu D Parameters Drum This is a Drum Percussion track No Mas ter or Octave Transpose applies to this track You can set a different volume for each class of percussive instruments Page 14 Track Easy edit on page 99 Poly Tracks of this kind are polyphonic i e they can play more than one note at the same time Mono Tracks of this kind are monophonic i e each new note stops the previous note Mono Right A Mono track but with priority assigned to the rightmost highest note PAGE 16 TRACK INTERNAL EXTERNAL This page lets you set the Internal or External status for each track It is very useful to let a Song track drive an external expander Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again f chora E measure 2 nuce Da i H mt e Track Int Ext o Both Bath B B Bath Bath G B Bath External
167. emphasizes the overtone components that lie in the region of the cutoff frequency specified by Frequency producing a more distinctive sound Increasing this value will produce a stronger effect 00 99 Resonance value Cutoff frequency value 113 114 Program operating mode Page 8 Filter Modulation Resonance modulation The effect of resonance Low Pass Level F t t Low resonance value Wf 9 High resonance value AMS Alternate Modulation Source Selects the source that will control the Resonance level See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 124 Intensity AMS Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS Alternate Modulation Source will have on the resonance level specified by Resonance A For example if Velocity has been selected changes in keyboard velocity will affect the resonance With positive values the resonance will increase as you play more strongly and as you play more softly the resonance will approach the level specified by the Resonance setting With negative values the resonance will decrease as you play more strongly and as you play more softly the resonance will approach the level specified by the Resonance setting The resonance level is determined by adding the Res onance and Intensity AMS Intensity values 99 99 Paramet
168. f LC N Measure Beat Tick Use the C VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Event line You may use the C VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event type Use the G VOLUME VALUE but tons and the F 3 and F 4 function keys to respec tively select the first and second value of the parameter Use the G VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to modify the selected value z i d Li Pee es int ii Mu PRILET Vul dh SUE Event Type Fit value In the case of a Note event use the D VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Length line and use the same buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event s length Second value N Beat Tick Measure e After having modified the shown event you may scroll to the next event with the H VOLUME VALUE buttons Scroll to next or to the previous event with the E F VOLUME VALUE buttons Scroll to previous You may use the SHIFT lt lt or gt gt shortcut to go to a different measure see SHIFT lt lt or gt gt on page 104 While the sequencer is running you may use the SHIFT PAUSE shortcut to move the current event in the display see SHIFT PAUSE on page 104 e As described in step 3 you may press SEQ1 PLAY STOP to listen to the Song and press SEQ1 PLAY STOP again to stop the sequencer Use the INSERT button to insert an event at the Position shown in the display a Note event with default values will be
169. for both the Style and Real time tracks individually Note that any notes sounding from the Realtime tracks will be stopped when you press the TRANSPOSE button The next key or chord you press will sound with the new transpose setting Note that if you play a Realtime track prior to a new chord the Realtime track will play in the new key as the Style will continue to play in the old key until a new chord is entered RTime Seq 1 2 gt GBL This is a flag to turn the Master Transpose on or off on the two onboard Sequencers tracks Midi In gt GBL This is a flag to turn the Master Transpose on or off on the received MIDI messages Scales The Scale Transpose Position allows you to decide the relation between the Scale and the Master Transpose Post KB When this option is selected notes will be transposed immediately after they leave the keyboard The Scale will be applied to the transposed notes For example if you altered an E and then set the Master Transpose to 1 the E key will play F and the altered key will be F that will play an altered E generator Global edit environment 127 Page 2 Master Transpose Pre OSC When this option is selected all notes are transposed immediately before they enter the internal tone generator Therefore the Scale will be applied before transposition For example if you altered an E and then set the Master Transpose to 1 the altered key will still be E that wi
170. from a to i u i then a Stereo Decimator Talking Modulator Control Cepo eT Vaieg Top This effect creates a rough sound like a cheap sampler f A by lowering the sampling frequency and data bit length You can also simulate noise unique to a sampler aliasing Stereo In Stereo Out mode JSX l i Left xi D EL Ribbon Max Zero Wet Dry Jedy i j Pre LPF Resolution High Damp Output Level js Y ias ea Decimator A etc x Drz Sampling Frequency 4 h Formant Shift d l This parameter adjusts the frequency level to which the effect LN EH LA HH Decimator H S g jf Pre LPF Resolution High Damp cana Righto EATI is applied If you wish to apply the effect to a higher range sound set this parameter to a higher value to apply the effect to a lower range sound set this to a lower value h Resonance A Off On A Selects whether the harmonic noise caused by a decrease in sampling fre This parameter sets the intensity of resonance for the voice a quency is generated or not it pattern A larger value will add more character to the sound High Damp 0 10096 Sets the ratio of cut of the high range Sampling Freq Sampling Frequency Hz 1 00k 48 00kHz Sets the sampling frequency Ds b Src Off Tempo S
171. gray in the display i e with a ghost texture Here is an example of a grayed out parameter compared to a normal parameter eee TP eel Peg B E LT none aln B Ua U5 uaa ua Text in gray chori empo ni tl LL Ca NEWMAME SET It 3 LIVE SET 3 ETHNICR SET H SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE Edit pages PAGE 22 Rear panel 9 REAR PANEL Liverpool oureut ASSIGN PHONES INPUT R L MONO DAMPER PDL SW 12 3 45 6 IN MiDI QUT 1 PHONES Use this jack to connect a pair of headphones You can use headphones with an impedance of 16 2000 500 suggested Use a headphone distributor to connect more than one pair of headphones 2 INPUT Use these unbalanced connectors to input another key board synthesizer a non powered mixer s output or a CD tape player line impedance The signal is auto matically routed to the speakers the Audio Outputs and the Phones 3 OUTPUTS Use these unbalanced connectors to send the audio sig nal sound to a mixer a PA system a set of powered monitors or your hi fi system Set the output level with the MASTER VOLUME slider 4 DAMPER Use this to connect a Damper pedal like the KORG PS1 PS3 or DS1H To change its polarity see Damper Pol Damper Polarity on page 127 5 ASSIGN PDL SW Use this to connect a continuous or footswitch pedal like the KORG
172. i Toggles between on off of the trigger signal s EQ m Trigger Monitor Off On Switches between effect output monitor and trigger signal monitor gt Side PEQ Cutoff Hz 20 12 00kHz Sets the EQ center frequency for the trigger signal gt Q 0 5 10 0 9 Sets the EQ bandwidth for the trigger signal Gain dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the EQ gain for the trigger signal Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dae h Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a Envelope Select When L R Mix is selected for this parameter the left and right channels are linked to control the Limiter using the mixed sig nal If L Only or R Only is selected the left and right chan nels are linked and the Limiter is controlled via only the left or right channel With L R individually the left and right channels control the Limiter individually b Ratio c Threshold dB e Gain Adjust dB This parameter sets the signal compression Ratio Com pression is applied only when the signal level exceeds the Threshold value Adjust the output level using the Gain Adjust parameter since compression causes the entire level to be reduced Limiter Threshold Ratio Ratio 1 0 1 Output Level Ratio 2
173. is selected press F 2 SELECT to select it 6 Once the Jukebox file is selected press MENU and select the Jukebox page 7 While you are in the Jukebox page press SHIFT F 2 to save the list 8 A dialog box will appear asking you to insert a new card into the card slot Insert the card and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Note When saved the text file will be named after the selected Jukebox file For example a Jukebox file named Dummy jbx will generate a Dummy txt file A new unnamed Jukebox file will generate a New name txt file If a file with the same name already exists on the card it will be overwritten without waiting for any confirmation The list will include the progressive number assigned to each Song file names in MS DOS format 8 3 the total number of files in the list For the correct display and printing of the list on a personal computer use a fixed size i e non proportional character in your text editor 82 Backing Sequence operating mode Transport controls 12 BACKING SEQUENCE OPERATING MODE The Backing Sequence mode lets you record a live per formance with the Styles The front panel controls work mostly as in Style Play mode but here you are recording what you are playing After recording the result is a new Song made of the Realtime tracks and the Style tracks TRANSPORT CONTROLS When in Backing Sequence mode use SEQ1 transport controls PLAY
174. keep the SHIFT button pressed and press these buttons to scroll to the previous or next Song in the Jukebox list see Page 9 Jukebox on page 79 Pauses the Song at the current position Press PAUSE or PLAY STOP to start the Song playing again PLAY STOPStarts or stops the current Song When you stop the Song the Song Position goes back to measure 1 In Song Play mode pressing this button while keeping SHIFT pressed starts both sequencers at the same time PAUSE Display and User Interface Display controls 4 DISPLAY AND USER INTERFACE The display shows the current status of the Liverpool and its performance and editing parameters You can select each parameter by using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons on the side of the display or each page command appearing along the last line using the F 1 F 4 buttons You can vary many of the parameter s val ues by pressing the left or right button of any VOLUME VALUE pair Status icons area ORD chord E anspo MD hl C ME D VOLUME VALL A Posas Pro BATA OLUME VA C OMMC 2 a i Drum Perc Musetteclad 0 E RE ce C B Class PianofAc Piano F Cac C Become 1S Ac Piano GLC M D Deae HOM C DEC Style accompaniment backing tracks Realtime Keyboard tracks DISPLAY CONTROLS In the Card Edit environment the F 1 F 4 buttons can VOLUME VALUE A H buttons a
175. line in the dis play Press F 3 OPEN to open a folder F 4 CLOSE to close it Once the target is selected press F 2 COPY The Overwrite message appears Duerurite on Cops Enter es Exit Ho Press ENTER to confirm overwriting EXIT to avoid it When you decide to overwrite the data you are copying will replace the existing data on the tar get For example if the same midifile exists on the target folder it will be overwritten Data that doesn t exist on the source folder is left unchanged For example if the MYSONG01 MID midifile exists on the target folder but not in the source folder it is left untouched after copying the other data When you decide not to overwrite data existing on the target folder is left unchanged therefore are not copied The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort the copy PAGE 4 ERASE The Erase function lets you erase files and folders from cards tempo n L dd Card Erase E C3 PSFILES SET iit L3 LIVE SET L3 ETHHICA SET i SD DEL OPEN CLOSE Tr p Erase procedure 1 2 If the file to be deleted is contained in a card insert the card into the card slot Press F 1 to select a device Devices are selected in this order SD SSD SD Device Type SD SD or MMC Card SSD Solid State Dis
176. memory The existing Style in memory will be deleted and overwritten You can save the whole content of the memory with a 11 Scroll the available locations in memory using the single aperaHon E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE con 1 Insertthe target card into the card slot trols When the target location is selected i e it is 2 The whole content All of the internal memory in the first line of the display press F 2 LOAD to is already selected Press F 2 SAVE to confirm the load the file selection Locations marked with a row of underscores _ 3 Thecontent of the target card appears _ are empty locations mz a cm 12 Once the target location is selected press F 2 jt D m LOAD to load the file The Are you sure mes EEG sage will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT Cards Saye Card Edit environment Page 2 Save to abort t HELLHAME SET i Warning After confirming the item you are overwrit 3 LIVE SET ing in memory will be deleted 3 ETHHICR SET i When the operation is completed the Wait indi SAUE OPEN CLOSE cator disappears the source page comes back in the display and you may perform further loading operations
177. name using the UP DOWN buttons to move the cursor and the DIAL to select a character Press INSERT to insert a character at the cursor posi tion or DELETE to delete it To Location number Use the B VOLUME VALUE buttons to select a differ ent User Program location in memory Otherwise select this parameter and use the VOLUME VALUE controls to select the location Note You can t save over a Factory Program location 107 108 Program operating mode Page 1 Basic PAGE 1 BASIC Here you can make basic settings for the Program such as basic oscillator settings the oscillator count and the polyphonic mode empo mm Coa ea pasic scillatora zl Modes Folu Single Trigger Ha Legato Holl Oscillators Use this parameter to specify the basic Program type whether it will use one or more oscillators up to four ET Drum Programs use only one oscillator 1 4 Number of oscillators the Program will use The total amount of polyphony varies depending on the number of oscillators used by the Program a maximum of 62 with only 1 oscillator or a maximum of 15 with 4 oscillators Mode This is the polyphonic mode of the Program Poly The Program will play polyphonically allowing you play chords Mono The Program will play monophonically producing only one note at a time Single Trigger This parameter is available when the Mode parame ter is set t
178. off 189 Tabla Na O 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 343 Darbuka 1 Tek5 Off 191 Tabla Tin O 72 c5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 359 Tef 1 Off 318 Rek dom ak Off 73 C 5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 360 Tef 2 Off 321 Rik2 Off 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 320 Rik1 Off 320 Rik1 Off 75 D 5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 322 Rik3 Off 322 Rik3 Off 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 360 Tef 2 Off 322 Rik3 Off 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 359 Tef 1 Off 319 Rek Jingle Off 78 F 5 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 360 Tef2 off 360 Tef2 off 79 G5 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 318 Rek dom ak off 318 Rek dom ak off 80 G 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 359 Tef1 Off 359 Tef 1 Off 81 A5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 321 Rik2 Off 321 Rik2 Off 82 A 5 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 361 Tef 3 Off 322 Rik3 Off 83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 360 Tef 2 Off 319 Rek Jingle Off 84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 312 Bells Open 2 312 Bells Open 2 85 C 6 178 CastSingle off 178 CastSingle off 323 Sagat HalfOpen 2 323 Sagat HalfOpen 2 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 324 Sagat Close 2 324 Sagat Close 2 87 D 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 351 Davul Off 351 Davul Off 88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 357 Ramazan DVL2 3 175 Djembe Open 3 continues on the next page lar
179. or to save an empty Jukebox list Jukebox list is full The Jukebox list already contains 127 Songs 238 Error messages amp Troubleshooting Error messages Not a Standard Midi File The selected file is not a Standard MIDI File and can not be played back Select a MID or KAR file Liv erpool can play back Standard MIDI Files in 0 and 1 format Standard Midi File format 2 You have tried to read a Format 2 Standard MIDI File Liverpool can t play this kind of file Select a Standard MIDI Files in 0 and 1 format Program Overwrite Program Enter Exit You are trying to store a Program to a memory location already occupied by a Program Press ENTER to over write it or EXIT to abort Card mode Can t Read Card Press Exit The card is probably damaged Try again If the mes sage appears again try with a different card Can t Read File Press Exit The file you are trying to load copy erase or rename is damaged or has a null size 0 kb thus can t be read This message during a New Dir operation means there are problems on the card Try loading the file from a different card Copy Failed Press Exit An error occurred during Copy Copy operation aborted Copy Invalid Destination Press Exit You tried to copy an ordinary file or folder into a SET folder Corrupted Style Perf Save it again The Style Performance is damaged Save it again by pressing WRITE and selecting the Cur
180. order of the overdrive and phaser connection Fx 067 Fx 067 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dust Dz 3 Src Off Tempo Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 ance on page 177 Effects 223 Mono Mono Chain 082 OD HG MTDIy 083 Wah AmpSim Overdrive Hi Gain Multitap Delay Wah Auto Wah Amp Simulation This effect combines a mono type overdrive high gain This effect combines a mono type wah and an amp distortion and a multitap delay simulation You can change the order of the effect con nection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o gt o Wet Dry Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Overdrive Hi Gain Multitap Delay Left o xg o UTER M d Routin
181. page 82 This is the Backing Sequence Play page where you can load play or save a Song 2 Now press RECORD You are prompted to select either the Realtime record ing mode or the Chord Acc Step recording mode f chord tempo J neasure aa Dna n j 1G UL t L Lu ILLI eum mpl dE Realtime Recording hord Aco Ster Mode 3 Select the Realtime recording mode Simply press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons The Record page appears tempo measure transpose ad nni n Cea uui cog LI octave Rec Hetong E Style Soft Beat EE Ferf 1 1 MetroiDP Rezal Hi RT Fad REC Sel Tempo CheAoct REC 4 f you think the selected Style is not what you like for your backing tracks select a different one see Selecting a Style on page 26 Here is a fast reminder 1 Select one of the Style rows in the STYLE section using the leftmost button 2 Select one of the Style Banks by pressing one of the buttons of the STYLE section 3 Select one of the pages using the PAGE buttons 4 Select a Style using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons The Style Bank and number appear after the Style parameter in the display 5 And what about changing the Performance or Single Touch Setting see Selecting a Performance on page 25 or Select ing a Single Touch Setting STS on page 26
182. parameter selects the effects mode for the Perfor mance Off When selecting a Performance no effect is selected CD The Performance selects the C and D effect pair Note When both this parameter and the S2 FX Mode parameter are set to CD Sequencer 2 shares its effects with the Realtime Key board tracks so these effects can be changed either selecting a Song for Sequencer 2 or selecting a Performance SAVING A LIST OF SONGS How to save a list of Songs contained in a folder 1 Press SONG PLAY to select the Song Play opera tive mode 2 Press one of the A S1 VOLUME VALUE button to select the Load Song page 3 Use the F 3 OPEN and F 4 CLOSE buttons to browse through the folders inside the card 4 Move the folder you are looking for to the first line of the display Use the TEMPO VALUE controls or the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOL UME VALUE buttons 5 Once the folder is selected press SHIFT F 2 6 A dialog box will appear asking you to insert a new card into the card slot Insert the card and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Note The text file will contain a list of mid kar and jbx files only i e the files you can select using the numeric keypad see Selecting a Song composing its pro gressive number on page 70 Folders and different kinds of files will not be included When saved the text file will be named after the selected folder
183. plus many other parameters together with the Programs Data type Parameters Realtime Upper 1 Upper 2 Master Transpose Program Tracks Upper 3 Lower Volume Pan Octave Scale Detune Pitch Bend Poly Mono Drum Int Ext Damper Dynamic Range Joystick C amp D Effect Send level Type Parameters Program parameters Pads Style Drum Percussion Program Volume Pan Tracks Bass Acc1 Acc2 Octave Detune Pitch Bend Acc3 Acc4 Acc5 Poly Mono Drum Int Ext Wrap Around Keyboard Range A amp B Effect Send level Type Parameters Program parameters Drum Mapping Kick amp Snare Assignation Other performance parameters are saved in the Global Global Chord Recognition Mode Memory Mode Velocity Trigger Lock 1 Press the PERFORM button This changes the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section into a Per formance selector 2 Use the leftmost button of the PROGRAM PER FORMANCE section to select the first row of ten banks 1 10 upper LED turned on or the second row of ten banks 11 20 lower LED turned on 3 Press one of the 1 0 buttons to select the PRO GRAM PERFORMANCE bank containing the Per formance you are looking for PROGRAM PERFORMANCE T amp ACCORDION ORGAN 1 ORGAN2 GUITAR STRINGS amp TRUMPET amp BRASS oc PONAM VOCALS TROMBONE C CC C 1 2 3 8 9 O sax WOODWIND SYNTH i _SYNTH 2 C SFX USER 1 USER2 USER DK Basi
184. pressed and press one of these buttons to jump to the previous alphabetical sec tion G H Scroll Down Scroll the list down Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these buttons to jump to the next alphabetical sec tion TEMPO VALUE section These controls scroll the list up or down F 1 SD Press this button after replacing a card in the card slot After pressing this button the new card will be scanned and the file list shown on the display will be updated F 2 Data transfer command Executes the shown operation F 3 OPEN Opens the selected folder or bank files whose name mt begins with the Y icon F 4 CLOSE Closes the current folder returning to the parent upper folder 134 Card Edit environment Menu MENU From any page press MENU to open the Card Edit menu This menu gives access to the various Card Edit pages When in this menu select a section using the VOL UME VALUE buttons press PAGE to select a page or press EXIT to exit the menu When in any page press EXIT to go back to the current operating mode pni C i tt style play m E LIP 1 Lard HEMI E Load Format Sas Heu Dir Cory Rename Erase Utilities PAGE 1 LOAD In this page you can load files from a card to the inter nal memory Press SD CARD and use the MENU button to reach this page chord tem
185. right sequence for each track Since each sequence is written in a particular key for example CMajor GMajor or Emin the arranger transposes it according to the scanned chord Notes in the sequence are care fully transposed according to the Note Transposition Tables NTT to make them work fine with all recog nized chords The NTT allows you to record just some Chord Variations and have all the notes play in the right place avoiding dissonances and transposing the pattern notes to the notes of the recognized chord Going deeper into the Style structure we can see that each Chord Variation is made up of Track Sequences and the Liverpool supports 8 different tracks DRUM and PERC are used for drum and percussion sequences BASS for bass and ACCI1 5 are for accom paniment sequences string guitar piano or other accompaniment instruments Just to summarize when you play a chord on the chord recognition area the arranger determines which Style Element is used then determines which Chord Varia tion should be used for the played chord then Style sequences for every track of that Chord Variation are transposed from the original chord to the recognized chord using the NTT and so on every time you play a chord Note The Break and the Count In are not Style Elements and cannot be programmed by the user While in record edit the BREAK COUNT IN button does not work What to record Recording a Style is a matter of recording trac
186. section F 1 SD Press this button after replacing a card in the card slot The new card will be read and the file list shown on the display will be updated F 2 SELECT Selects the item on the first line in the display Song or Jukebox file If a Song is already playing it stops and the new Song starts playing You are returned to the Main page F 3 OPEN Opens the selected folder item whose name begins with 1 F 4 CLOSE Closes the current folder returning to the parent upper folder THE LYRICS PAGE This page shows the lyrics and chord abbreviations included in the midifile if any To access this page select the Lyrics command or press PAGE twice from the main page of the Song Play mode see Main page on page 73 Chords tempo J tore Dat E E M e id EIN 1 ex S Michelle EI b Michelle ma belle Exit from this display and go back to the main page of the Song Play mode by pressing the EXIT button While the Song is playing the text flows in the display and the chord abbreviations if any will appear on the chords area of the display The lyrics at the current position are underlined Michelle ma belle A 1 Press this button pair to show Lyrics and Chords of Sequencer 1 B 2 Press this button pair to show Lyrics and Chords of Sequencer 2 PLAYING A JUKEBOX FILE With Sequencer 1 you can select a Jukebox
187. the pitch modulation applied by LFO1 12 00 12 00 Parameter value PAGE 5 PITCH LFO2 In this page you can set the LFO2 modulation parame ters for the selected oscillator See Page 4 Pitch LFO1 for information on the various parameters chora C n d Didh mhe PETE I eof lho LEU Usci e Selected Qecill Intercity B ee Joystick 4 Hg Hr Channel ATI PAGE 6 PITCH EG Here you can make settings for the pitch EG which cre ates time variant changes in the pitch of the oscillators The depth of pitch change produced by these EG set tings on the oscillators is adjusted by the Intensity AMS1 2 Intensity parameter see page 112 chori tempo cr l C octave wa Fitch EB Start Level l Attack Time 33 Attack Levels H Decau Time All Pitch envelope Time varying pitch settings when Pitch EG Intensity 12 00 99 approximately 1 octave Attack Level Note on 0 pitch when key is held sustained Time Release Level Start Level Attack Decay Time Time E 99 approximately 1 octave Release nme Start Attack Decay Release Level These parameters specify the amount of pitch change The actual amount of pitch change will depend on the Intensity AMS1 2 Intensity parameter see below For example with an Intensity se
188. the Card mode Wait until the Wait message disappears and the WRITE CARD IN USE LED turns off 1 Prepare a card containing the Backup folder and insert it into the drive Select this command 3 The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to continue EXIT to abort 4 Wait until the backup card has been read 5 When the Wait message has disappeared and the WRITE CARD IN USE LED has turned off turn the instrument off then on again Note At the end of a Restore Data operation the Some files missing error message may appear This is due to the lack of Performance banks 11 20 on older versions of the operating system of Pa80 whose data you are probably reading How ever this is not a problem Press EXIT to close the message window m PAGE 9 UTILITIES 2 This page includes the Protect functions f chord tempo com ni ctl Ut Cardi til 2 F P Global Protect oft Global Protect gt GBL When loading a SET file this parameter if On pro tects the Global from being reprogrammed by the loaded data All Global parameters are therefore left unchanged When loading a single GLB file this parameter is ignored and the Global is overwritten by the loaded data Note This parameter is automatically set to Off when turn ing the instrument off Card Edit environment Page 9 Utilities 2 143 144 cathe it environment
189. the Realtime tracks are not changed 15 STYLE section NUMERIC KEYPAD Use these buttons to open the Style Select window and select a Style See Selecting a Style on page 26 The leftmost button lets you select the upper or lower row of Style banks Press it until you ve selected the row you re looking for After both LEDs have turned on press the button again to turn them off UPPER LED ON Upper row Styles selected LOWER LED ON Lower row Styles selected A word about Style banks and names DIRECT SD Styles are Styles directly accessed from the memory card no need to load from card See The DIRECT SD bank on page 40 Styles from USERI to USERS are locations where you can load new Styles from the memory card Each of the Style bank keys has one or two pages with up to eight Styles in each page Browse through the Styles using the PAGE buttons There is a shortcut to see the original bank for a Style You can see the original bank where a Style is con tained Just keep the SHIFT button pressed and then press the lefmost button of the STYLE section A mes sage window will appear showing the name of the original bank Release the SHIFT button to exit the win ow 14 Front panel There is a shortcut to see all pages of the selected bank To cycle all pages for a selected bank press the bank s button until you see the page that you re looking for These buttons double as a numeric keypad on certain pages
190. the Song s In the main Style Play mode or the Song tracks volume excluding page Realtime Keyboard tracks are the Realtime tracks Song and Song Play modes This shown on the right half of the display You is a relative control where the effective maximum can reach the main page by pressing EXIT value is determined by the MASTER VOLUME slider from any of the Song Play edit pages If position you are in a different operating mode 4 ASSIGN SLIDER press SONG PLAY to recall the Song Play This is a freely programmable slider see Sld Slider mode It the TRACK SELECT LED is on or on page 127 By default it acts as the Keyboard flashing press TRK SELECT one or two Expression control to let you balance the relative vol times to turn it off and see the Realtime ume of the Realtime Keyboard tracks tracks 5 MODE section B SEQ rii cic ina T a Each of these buttons recalls one of the operating modes Mood eo PNE Uu E E Each mod lud E h 8 and Style tracks and save it as a new Stan of the instrument Each mode excludes the others dard MIDI File STYLE ELAY SONG Song mode where you can play record or Style Play mode where you can play edit a Song Styles automatic accompaniments and or play up to four Realtime tracks on the keyboard In the main page Realtime Keyboard tracks are shown on the right half of the display You can reach the main page by pressing EXIT from any of the Style Play edit pages If you are in a differe
191. the Style mY I mt a page St Ll Crum Er Wi Dr Marrs KickDess Of US Dr Maer S Srarbess OFT WS De Maes Filli ff Wd Dr Maes Fillz ff V1 V4 Drum Map PERF STYLE The Drum Mapping lets you select an alternative arrangement of percussive instruments for the selected Drum Kit without any additional programming Just select a Drum Map and some percussive instruments will be replaced with different instruments 0 7 Drum Map number Number 0 is the stan dard mapping Kick D esignation PERF STYLE The Kick Designation replaces the original Kick Bass Drum sound with a different Kick of the same Drum Kit Off 1 3 Kick replacing the original one Off corre sponds to the original Kick Snare D esignation PERF STYLE The Snare Designation replaces the original Snare Drum sound with a different Snare of the same Drum Kit Off 1 3 Snare replacing the original one Off corre sponds to the original Snare Fill1 2 PERF STYLE These parameters set a Variation to be automatically selected at the end of the Fill Off The same Variation playing before select ing a Fill will be selected again The specified Variations will be alterna tively selected For example with the 1 amp 2 option Variation 1 and Variation 2 will be alternatively selected after the end of the Fill The next higher lower numbered Varia tion is selected in cycle After V
192. the chorus effect a more natural sound thickness will be created Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o gt Wet Dry Input Level High Damp gt Detune X Delay H UN Feedback Input Level Right A IDA Pitch Shift cent 100 100cent Sets the pitch difference from the input signal Diz 4 Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the pitch shift Amt 100 100cent Sets the modulation amount of the pitch shift b Delay Time msec 0 1000msec Sets the delay time Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount c High Damp 96 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Input Level Dmod 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the input level gt Dz d Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level gt Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dons Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 d Input Level Dmod d Src This parameter sets the dynamic modulation of the input level Input Level D mod Input Level Input Level xt xt Amt 50 Amtz 50 2 Amt 100 Amt 100 x05 Louder Ds Z
193. the event currently in edit ready to be inserted The Empty event marks the beginning of the Song when there are no events inserted It is auto matically inserted when entering the Record mode It will be removed when an event is inserted 4 The Maaa bb ccc parameter in b is the current position This is the place where the note in edit will be inserted If you don t want to insert a note at this posi tion insert a rest instead as shown in step 6 To jump to the next measure filling the remain ing beats with rests press the gt gt button 5 To change the step value use the NOTE VALUE buttons on the lower left area of the control panel VARIATION 22 O3 FILL COUNT IN BREAK ENDING O 20 Oo O1 20 J 3 ra O4 JL 0 0oag 4 23 Ad 6 Inserta note rest or chord at the current position To insert a single note just play it on the key board The inserted note length will match the step length You may change the velocity and relative duration of the note by editing the V Velocity and D Duration parameters See V Velocity and D Duration on page 95 To insert a rest just press the REST button Its length will match the step value To tie the note to be inserted to the previous one press the TIE button A note will be inserted tied to the previous one with exactly the same name You don t need to play it on the keyboard again To insert a
194. the output level of TapR pus Feedback C Delay 100 100 n 9e Off Tempo Sets the feedback amount of TapC Dze Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Src Off Tempo Amt 100 100 Selects the modulation source for the TapC feedback Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the TapC feedback High Damp 0 100 A Sets the damping amount in the high range Fx 043 Low Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range Fx 043 Input Level Dmod 96 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the input level Fx 037 prez g Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level Fx 037 h Spread 0 50 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound Fx 043 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dz i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 Effects 209 ER Delay a BPM b L Delay Base Note b Times c C Delay Base 051 Seq Delay Note Sequential Delay c Times d R Delay Base Note d Times The delay time is the length of the note obtained by multiply This four tap delay enables you to select a tempo and ing the
195. the same Sequencer the new Song will start playing While this parameter is selected you can select a Song by composing its progressive number see Selecting a Song composing its progressive number on page 70 C Lyrics Open the Lyrics page see The Lyrics page on page 74 Lyrics will be shown only if included into the selected Song and compatible with a standard format that Liverpool can recognize E Upper 1 Program F Upper 2 Program G Upper 3 Program H Lower Name of the Programs assigned to the Realtime Key board tracks Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the volume of the corresponding tracks TRACKS 1 8 PAGE To see and edit tracks 1 8 press TRACK SELECT from the main page The TRACK SELECT LED turns on Press the TRACK SELECT button twice to go back to the main page ff transpose chord KI measure sgg ex 5 Haonga 5 Pianal Pianol B B Dk5trinas Guitar l B B Legato Stress n BraszoHorn UowPadli B A H Tracks 1 8 Programs Name of the Programs assigned to tracks 1 8 Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the vol ume of the corresponding tracks 74 Song Play operating mode Tracks 9 16 page TRACKS 9 16 PAGE To see and edit tracks 9 16 press TRACK SELECT once from the Tracks 1 8 page or twice from the main page The TRACK SELECT LED begins flashing Press the TRA
196. the window doesn t close after selecting an item Press EXIT to close the window and go back to the underlying page MESSAGE WINDOWS Sometimes a message might appear in the display warning about an error or an incorrect operation Press ENTER or EXIT to exit one of these windows Other messages ask for an answer as in the Are you sure window below Bre uud sure EHTEF S k EX T Cancel Press ENTER YES for Yes or EXIT NO for No Edit environment P by i Hd Card HEHU Load Format Save Heu Dir Cory Rename Erase Utilities Display and User Interface 24 Message windows SYMBOLS AND ICONS Many icons and symbols on the custom display show the status of a parameter or the display content M Realtime Keyboard track Upper 1 3 Lower let Drum track Style track view d Percussion track Style track view d let Grouped Drum and Percussion tracks amp Bass track Style track view Grouped accompaniment tracks This symbol indicates the five grouped accom paniment tracks Acc1 5 Sequencer tracks o D Accompaniment tracks Style track view Selected track or parameter When this symbol appears you can execute any available operation on the selected item The track is in mute and can t play on the keyboard no icon GRAYED OUT NON AVAILABLE PARAMETERS Currently non available parameters are now shown in
197. to adjust the pitch of the selected oscillator in octave units The normal octave of the mul tisample is 0 2 1 Octave transposition Transpose Use this parameter to adjust the pitch of the selected oscillator in semitone steps over a range of 1 octave 12 412 Transposition in semitones Tune Use this parameter to adjust the pitch of the sample in one cent steps a semitone is 100 cents over a range of 1 octave 1200 1200 Fine tune value in cents Delay ms This parameter sets a delay time from the note on to the real beginning of the sound With a setting of KeyOff the sound will begin when note off occurs This is use ful to create sounds such as the click that is heard when a harpsichord note is released In this case set the Sustain Level parameter to 0 see page 116 Key Off The sound will begin when the note is released 0 5000 Delay time in milliseconds Program operating mode 109 Page 2 DK Samples Drum Programs PAGE 2 DK SAMPLES DRUM PROGRAMS This page appears when you edit a Drum Program Here you can select a different percussive sample for each layer High and Low on each key chora Ex transpose L Js Pus meme amu hb ciim e eg Reus C28 Resigned ves M5 Hi Bark Mum ROH ED SoftRaon 4 Key Key in edit You can press a key on the keyboard to select a key Assigned Use this parameter to turn th
198. to match the delay time This stereo delay effect pans the delay sound left and with the song tempo You can also synchronize the right using the LFO delay time with the arpeggiator or sequencer If you program the tempo before performance you can achieve a delay effect that synchronizes with the song in real time Delay time is set by notes Stereo In Stereo Out Left o High Damp Low Damp Delay T Pan PM Note With extreme values the sync may be lost eedbac g Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Delay H SHZ Left High Damp Low Damp Wet Dry Right 4 Wet Dry Input Level D mod L Delay LFO Phase H Eme High Damp Low Damp Spread Input Level D mod L Delay Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Sets the delay time for the left channel Right e uos a emp L Feedback 100 100 Ei lot ciscus 89 gt Base Note x Times Sets the feedback amount for the left channel BPM i Base Note x Times R Delay Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Base Note x Times Sets the delay time for the right channel b R Feedback 100 100 a BPM MIDI 40 240 Sets the feedback amount for the right channel Select
199. tracks playing There are four Realtime tracks Upper 1 3 and Lower They may play all at the same time or just one or a few of them depending on their Mute sta tus If you cannot hear a track check the mute status of that part Tracks can be set in different ways use the KEY BOARD MODE section to select the way they are con figured on the keyboard e Press FULL UPPER to play the Upper 1 3 tracks on the full range of the keyboard just as you would on a piano KEYBOARD MODE i O COS e Press SPLIT to let the Upper 1 3 tracks play on the right of the Split Point and the Lower track on the eum DERIT Ee mm Vh Split Point e Keep the SPLIT POINT button pressed and play a note to change the point where the keyboard is divided in an Upper and a Lower part LOWER V UPPER To save the selected split point note press the GLOBAL button then press WRITE to save the Global in mem ory see The Write window on page 126 SELECTING MUTING UNMUTING AND SOLOING A TRACK Selecting Use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track RECORD m 2 AMD mue I em me C MIC S0 Bossa Fra iTi E EJ Bi 3 gt J JJ Pe E Drumerc MusetteClan gt f Class Piano Ac Piano iC Q Z Become 145 Rc Piano JACE KD i3 Strings e TRK SELECT The selected track is shown with a solid square sur rounding its status icons E Piano2 9 If you can t see the track that you re l
200. your file to the card 3 L chord tempo measure mt nn i n d paren wi E d ex JEn Save C_ NELLNAME JE t MEDLEY1 TER 4 b SAE ABORT Note You can save your JBX file only in the same folder as the Songs in the list You can create a new file or overwrite an existing one 1 Move to the first line of the display the JBX file you want to save your list into Select an existing file if you want to overwrite it Select the NEW_NAME JBX item to create a new file Use the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to scroll the list 2 If you are making a new file when the NEW_NAME JBX item is on the first line of the display press one of the A VOLUME VALUE but tons You are prompted to assign a name to the selected item 3 Move the cursor using athe DOWN and UP but tons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a 80 Song Play operating mode Page 10 Preferences character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button 4 When you have finished writing a name press F 2 SAVE to confirm The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort F 2 Add Adds a Song at the end of the current list You can add up to 127 Songs in a list Note A Jukebox list can include only S
201. 0 1 Ratioz4 0 1 Threshold E Ration Inf 1 Louder Louder Input Level Level Threshold Ratio lnf 1 Time d Attack d Release These parameters set the attack time and release time A higher attack time will cause the compression to be applied more slowly Limiter Attack Release T2 Threshold Dry NL ARI Il Ratio Inf 1 y Attack 1 Release 1 we Mii TIT ji TR Wet il Ratio Inf 1 kd il i i Attack 100 Release 100 Release Attack f Side PEQ Insert g Side PEQ Cutoff Hz g Q g Gain dB These parameters are used to set the EQ applied to the trig ger signal The Limiter determines whether the compression is applied or not based on the post EQ trigger signal Setting the equalizer allows you to set the L
202. 0 100 Selects LFO Waveform Sets the Tap1 output level Fx 045 f P Manual 0 100 D Tap2 Time msec 0 680msec Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Sets the Tap2 delay time P Depth 0 100 Feedback 100 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the Tap2 feedback amount g Resonance 100 100 D High Damp 0 100 Sets the resonance amount gt Fx 023 Sets the damping amount in the high range Fx 043 P Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet D Mt Delay Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the phaser effect balance Fx 010 023 Sets the multitap delay effect balance h Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Routing CMP gt DLY DLY gt CMP Selects the phaser output mode Fx 067 Switches the order of the compressor and multitap delay connection Routing CMP gt PHS PHSSCMP Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet i Switches the order of the compressor and phaser connection Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Fx 067 Drez Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Src Off Tempo Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 mod D Amt 100 100 Src Off Tempo Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 ance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the
203. 0 Sets the attack time Fx 003 g Release 1 100 Sets the release time Fx 003 h L Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB Sets the limiter output gain Fx 003 i Routin XCT LMT LMT gt XCT Switches the order of the exciter and limiter connection Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 ps Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 220 Effects Mono Mono Chain 076 Exc ChorFlg 077 Exc Phaser Exciter Chorus Flanger Exciter Phaser This effect combines a mono type limiter and a chorus This effect combines a mono type limiter and a phaser flanger Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left gt coiii Wet Dry gr Exciter Phaser Wet Dry EN QE LM MG I E Gherus Flanger EQTrim LEQ HEQ Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Hp Exciter Normal E 9 9 Output Mode 3 i Phaser Wet Dry Feedback Wet Inve Right i A T GholFina Wet Dry omae let Dry Righto gt CrO TATSine gt EY X Exciter Bl
204. 1 5 54 DreamVoice Strings amp Vocals 121 1 40 SlowAttViol Strings amp Vocals y 121 0 55 Orches Hit Brass Y 121 2 40 Solo Violin Strings amp Vocals 121 1 55 BassHitPlus Brass Y 121 3 40 Slow Violin Strings amp Vocals 121 2 55 6th Hit Brass Y 121 0 41 Viola Strings amp Vocals y 121 3 55 Euro Hit Brass y 121 0 42 Cello Strings amp Vocals y 121 4 55 Brasslmpact Brass 121 0 43 Contrabass Strings amp Vocals y 121 5 55 Hitlnindia SFX 121 0 44 Tremolo Str Strings amp Vocals y 121 6 55 Wild Arp Synth 2 121 0 45 PizzicatoSt Strings amp Vocals Y 121 7 55 Flip Blip Synth 2 121 1 45 PizzEnsembl Strings amp Vocals 121 0 56 Trumpet Trp amp Trbn y 121 2 45 PizzSection Strings amp Vocals 121 1 56 DarkTrumpet Trp amp Trbn Y 121 3 45 Dbl Strings Strings amp Vocals 121 2 56 Trumpet 2 Trp amp Trbn 121 0 46 Orches Harp Strings amp Vocals V 121 3 56 MonoTrumpet Trp amp Trbn 121 1 46 Yang Chin Strings amp Vocals y 121 4 56 TrumpetExpr Trp amp Trbn 121 0 47 Timpani Drum amp Perc y 121 5 56 TrumptPitch Trp amp Trbn 121 0 48 StringsEns1 Strings amp Vocals Y 121 6 56 Dual Trump Trp amp Trbn 121 1 48 String amp Bras Strings amp Vocals y 121 ie 56 Flugel Horn Trp amp Trbn 121 2 48 60s Strings Strings amp Vocals y 121 8 56 Warm Flugel Trp amp Trbn 121 3 48 St Strings Strings amp Vocals 121 9 56 BeBopCornet Trp amp Trbn 121 4 48 LegatoStrng Strings amp Vocals 121 0 57 Trombone Trp amp
205. 1 7 16 Banjo 121 0 105 GospelOrgan 121 9 16 BanjoKeyOff 121 1 105 PercShorDec 121 8 18 Bouzouki 121 5 104 Perc Wheels 121 9 18 Tambra 121 6 104 DirtyJazOrg 124 7 18 Finger Tips 121 8 25 VOX Legend 121 1 16 MidToneGtr 121 2 27 TeknoOrgBas 121 6 17 Snoras Gir 121 3 27 ArabianOrg 121 12 16 ProcesEIGtr 121 5 27 NewStra Gtr 121 7 27 sac ade DistRhytmGt 121 2 30 PipeMixture 121 3 19 WetDistGtr 121 6 30 FlautoPipes 121 3 20 SoloDistGtr 121 7 30 Pipe Tutti 121 6 19 L amp R El Gtr 121 9 27 Positiveorg 121 7 19 L amp R El Gtr2 121 10 27 Ghurehorg 1 121 0 19 RhythmElGtr 121 7 28 ChurchOcMix 121 1 19 Guitarish 121 8 27 DetunChurch 121 2 19 Country Nu 121 m 27 ChuichPipes 121 4 19 Stra Chime 121 5 28 Full Pipos 121 5 19 MuteMonster 121 5 30 Reed Organ 12 0 20 Disto Mute 121 9 28 Puff Organ 121 1 20 FunkyCutGtr 121 1 28 small Pipe 124 2 20 MuteVeloGtr 121 2 28 Bank Guitar FeedbackGtr 121 1 30 NylonGuitar 121 0 24 Guitar Pinc 121 1 29 Spanish Gtr 121 6 24 Ped Steel 2 121 4 26 SteelGuitar 121 0 25 PedSteelGtr 121 1 26 12StringGtr 121 1 25 GtrFeedback 121 1 31 Club J Gtr1 121 2 26 PowerChords 121 4 30 CleanGuitar 121 0 27 FunkyWhaSw 121 12 27 MutedGuitar 121 0 28 VoxWahChick 121 3 120 DistortionG 121 0 30 EGHarmonics 121 2 31 GtrHarmonic 121 0 31 152 Factory Data Programs bank order
206. 1 and Sequencer 2 When one of the sequencers is selected the sequencer number is also shown at the right of the metronome Tempo In FD Lt J pa L LA se 2 When a Jukebox file is in play its name appears on the page header Selected Sequencer These indicators show if the currently selected sequencer is Seq1 or Seq2 Use the A and B VOLUME VALUE buttons to select a sequencer Song Play operating mode 73 Main page Bar number This counter shows the current bar number position of the selected Song A S1 SongName Pressed a first time with a Song already selected this button pair selects Sequencer 1 Pressed a second time or with no Song selected it opens the Song Selection page see Song Select page on page 74 allowing for selection of a single Song or a Jukebox file for Sequencer 1 If you select another Song while a Song is in play within the same Sequencer the new Song will start playing While this parameter is selected you can select a Song by composing its progressive number see Selecting a Song composing its progressive number on page 70 B S2 SongName Pressed a first time with a Song already selected this button pair selects Sequencer 2 Pressed a second time or with no Song selected it opens the Song Selection page see Song Select page on page 74 allowing for selection of a single Song for Sequencer 2 If you select another Song while a Song is in play within
207. 100 dd Sets the rate of fade in Fx 027 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Fade In Dly Fade In Delay msec 00 2000msec b Sets the fade in delay time Fx 027 D mod Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls resonance intensity LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform Mod Depth 100 100 Sets the amount of resonance intensity control via LFO D mod LFO Shape 100 100 Ca M Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed Fx 020 Trim 0 100 Sets the input level at the resonator LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 Voice Pitch CO B8 Sets the voice1 Pitch for resonance LFO Frequency Mod D mod AUTOFADE d Switches between D mod and AUTOFADE for the LFO frequency modula Fine cent 50 50 tion Fx 027 Fine adjusts the voice 1 pitch for resonance LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Voice1 Resonance 100 100 Sets the LFO speed Drez Sets the intensity of resonance when Control Mode Manual e Sre Off Tempo High Damp 0 100 Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Sets the damping amount of resonant sound in the high range gt Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Voice1 Level 0 100 Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed i Sets the Voice1 output level L Delay Time msec 0 0 500 0msec Pan L6 R6 Sets the left channel delay time Sets the Voice1 stereo image R Delay Time msec 0 0 500 0msec Voice2 Pitch CO
208. 121 1 30 FeedbackGtr Guitar Y 121 9 21 Cassotto Accordion 121 2 30 DistRhytmGt Guitar y 121 10 21 Arab Accord Accordion 121 3 30 JoystGtr Y Guitar 121 0 22 Harmonica Accordion Y 121 4 30 PowerChords Guitar 121 1 22 Sweet Harm Accordion 121 5 30 MuteMonster Guitar 121 2 22 Harmonica 2 Accordion 121 6 30 WetDistGtr Guitar 121 0 23 TangoAccord Accordion N 121 7 30 SoloDistGtr Guitar 121 1 23 Fisa Tango Accordion 121 8 30 Stereo Dist Guitar 121 0 24 NylonGuitar Guitar N 121 0 31 GtrHarmonic Guitar y 121 1 24 Ukulele Guitar V 121 1 31 GtrFeedback Guitar Y 121 2 24 NylonKeyOff Guitar N 121 2 31 EGHarmonics Guitar 121 3 24 Nylon Gtr 2 Guitar N 121 0 32 Acous Bass Bass y 121 4 24 Nylon Bossa Guitar 121 1 32 AcBass Buzz Bass 121 5 24 AcGtrKeyOff Guitar 121 2 32 Bass amp Ride Bass 121 6 24 Spanish Gtr Guitar 121 0 33 Finger Bass Bass y 121 7 24 Gtr Strings Guitar 121 1 33 Finger Slap Bass y 121 0 25 SteelGuitar Guitar N 121 2 33 Fing ElBass Bass 121 1 25 12StringGtr Guitar N 121 3 33 FingEIBass2 Bass 121 2 25 Mandolin Guitar N 121 4 33 FingEIBass3 Bass 121 3 25 Steel amp Body Guitar N 121 5 33 Stick Bass Bass 121 4 25 Steel Gtr 2 Guitar 121 0 34 Picked Bass Bass Y 121 5 25 Sti2Strings Guitar 121 1 34 Pick ElBass Bass 121 6 25 Hackbrett Guitar 121 2 34 PickElBass2 Bass 121 7 25 FingerK Off Guitar 121 3 34 Stein Bass Bass 121 8 25 Finger Tips Guitar 121 4 34 Gtr Bass Bass 121 9 25
209. 121 1 45 HardTrombon 121 3 57 Fiddle 121 0 110 SoftTrombon 121 4 57 PizzSection 121 2 45 Wha Trumpet 121 2 59 Sweeperstr 121 1 49 Muted Trp 121 0 59 AnalogVelve 121 3 50 Dual Trump 121 6 56 Aaah Choir 121 7 52 Warm Flugel 121 8 56 Oooh Voices 121 2 52 Trumpet 121 0 56 Violin 121 0 40 Trumpet 2 121 2 56 Viola 121 0 41 Trombone 121 0 57 Cello 121 0 42 Trombone 2 121 1 57 Contrabass 121 0 43 PitchTromb 121 5 57 Tremolo Str 121 0 44 BeBopCornet 121 9 56 PizzicatoSt 121 0 45 DarkTrumpet 121 1 56 Choir Aahs 121 0 52 Tuba 121 0 58 Voice Oohs 121 0 53 Tuba Gold 121 2 58 StringsEns1 121 0 48 Ob Tuba 121 1 58 StringsEns2 121 0 49 Dynabone 121 3 58 Orches Harp 121 0 46 BrightTromb 121 2 57 60s Strings 121 2 48 Muted Trp 2 121 1 59 Oct Strings 121 8 48 Bank Brass SynStrings3 121 1 59 BigBandBrs 121 4 61 Saah enoi bs ia Tight Brass 121 2 61 Choir Aahs2 121 1 52 Trp amp Brass 121 7 al Siring amp Bras 121 1 48 Glen amp Friend 121 3 61 Dbl Strings Ted 3 iis MutEnsemble 121 3 59 ArabStrings 121 13 48 Homs amp Ens 121 a 60 SynStrings1 121 0 50 Syn Brass 121 0 62 erieuiide te 21 Orches Hit 121 0 55 Odissey 12i 4 20 BrassSect 1 121 0 61 Factory Data Programs bank order 153 Name ccoo CC32 PC Name ccoo CC32 PC Fat Br
210. 177 b Band1 Type c Band4 Type Selects a filter type for Band 1 and 4 Parametric 4EQ Band1 Band4 Type Band4 Type Peaking 0dB Band Type Shelving Low N Band1 T akin Band4 Cutoff Bandi Cutoff 182 Effects Filter Dynamic d Band2 Dynamic Gain Src d Amt dB f Gain dB You can configure a 21 Band Graphic EQ ranging from 80Hz You can control the gain of Band 2 using the modulation to 18kHz if you route three Graphic 7Band EQ effects in source series with a setting of 7 Low 9 Mid and 11 High for each Parametric 4EQ Band2 Dynamic Gain Control EQ DE 009 Wah AutoWah ns Band cutoff Stereo Wah Auto Wah es This stereo wah effect allows you to create sounds from Band2Dymamis Gain AmtB e 90 Band2 Dynamic Gain Amt dB 15 0 vintage wah pedal simulation to auto wah simulation and much broader range settings 008 Graph 7B Eq iol In Stereo Out Wet Di Stereo Graphic 7 Band EQ T ic 2 This is a stereo 7 band graphic equalizer The bar graph d gt creatine af Paso of the gain setting for each band gives you a clear visual idea of frequency responses You can select a i wis center frequency setting for each band from twelve L y types according to the sound dd Seto
211. 2 6 Harpsi Wide Piano Y grams in order of Bank Select Program Change num 121 3 6 HarpsiK Off Piano Y ber 121 4 6 Harpsi Korg Piano Legend The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely 121 0 7 Clav Piano y select the Programs CC00 Control Change 0 or Bank Select 121 1 7 Pulse Clav Piano y MSB CC32 Control Change 32 or Bank Select LSB PC 121 2 7 Clav Wah Piano Program Change 121 3 7 Clav Snap Piano 121 4 7 Sticky Clav Piano ccoo CC32 PC Name Liverpool Bank GM2 121 0 8 _ Celesta Mallet amp Bel y 121 0 9 Glocken Mallet amp Bel Y 121 0 0 Ac Piano Piano Y 121 1 9 Sistro Mallet amp Bel 121 1 0 AcPianoWide Piano Y 121 0 10 Music Box Mallet amp Bel Y 121 2 0 AcPianoDark Piano V 121 1 10 Orgel Mallet amp Bel 121 3 0 Grand Piano Piano 121 0 11 Vibraphone Mallet amp Bel Y 121 4 0 Class Piano Piano 121 1 11 Vibrap Wide Mallet amp Bel Y 121 5 0 L R Piano Piano 121 2 11 Vibraphone2 Mallet amp Bel 121 6 0 Piano amp Vibes Piano 121 0 12 Marimba Mallet amp Bel Y 121 7 0 Pno amp Strings Piano 121 1 12 MarimbaWide Mallet amp Bel Y 121 0 1 BrightPiano Piano Y 121 2 12 RimbaKeyOff Mallet amp Bel 121 1 1 BrPianoWide Piano V 121 3 12 MonkeySkuls Mallet amp Bel 121 2 1 Piano Pad Piano 121 4 12 Log Drum Drum amp Perc 121 3 1 Piano Pad 2 Piano 121 5 12 MalletClock Mallet amp Bel 121 4 1 PnoStrngPad Piano 121 6 12 Balaphon Ma
212. 2 measures 1 2 s 4 s e Eo y i 2 s 4 e e D2 Note Avoid copying on a Chord Variation with a different meter for example a 4 4 Chord Variation onto a 3 4 one PAGE 9 STYLE ELEMENT CONTROLS PROGRAMS In this page you can assign a different Program to each track of the selected Style Element Each Style Element can have different Programs after saving the new Style please don t forget to set the Prog parameter to Original see Prog Program on page 49 to let the Style select the Program bypassing the Style Perfor mance settings as am mm nn it n J nu UL i L u EXTA n SECtL Program Ul lt StandandDE Jazz GT e ig PercKit 1 Brass FingmerBass Wibe cg HhcPiano UoPac c J When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element VARIATION1 ENDING2 To copy the settings of this page to another Style Ele ment keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the button of the target Style Element Program Use the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section to assign a Program to the selected track PAGE 10 STYLE ELEMENT CONTROLS EXPRESSION In this page you can modify the Expression CC 11 value for each of the Style tracks This lets you reduce the relative level of a track in a single Style Element without reducing the overall Volume of the Style This is a very useful control whe
213. 20 0 25 Analog Kit 120 0 26 House Kit1 120 0 27 House Kit2 Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 9 A 1 19 BD Hip 1 Off 271 Explosion Off 23 BD Pop Kick Off 23 BD Pop Kick O 10 A 1 125 99 SD Off 59 SD Hip 6 Off 67 SD Vintage6 Off 125 99 SD O 11 B 1 123 88 BD Off 3 BD Normal Off 29 BD Deep 88 Off 29 BD Deep 88 O 12 co 124 88 SD Off 47 SD Yowie Off 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD O 13 C 0 38 SD Off Center Off 39 SD Jazz Ring Off 50 SD Dance Off 50 SD Dance 9 14 DO 64 SD Vintage3 Off 71 SD Whopper O 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo O 15 D 0 23 BD Pop Kick Off 23 BD Pop Kick O 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 16 E0 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 24 BD Dance 99 O 9 BD Terminator off 9 BD Terminator O 17 F0 59 SD Hip 6 Off 69 SD Brasser O 65 SD Vintage4 off 65 SD Vintage4 O 18 F 0 128 88 HH Close 1 86 HH1 Closed1 1 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 O 19 G0 17 BD House 1 Off 19 BD Hip 1 O 22 BD Hip 4 Off 22 BD Hip 4 Off 20 G 0 143 Zap2 Off 142 Zap1 O 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 21 AO 48 SD Processed Off 59 SD Hip 6 O 66 SD Vintage5 Off 66 SD VintagedS Off 22 A 0 65 SD Vintage4 Off 61 SD Tiny O 310 Mouth Harp Off 310 Mouth Harp Off 23 BO 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 24 C1 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 25 Ci 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll T 119 SD Orch Roll 7 26 D1 121 Finge
214. 3 5 4 4 4 4 6 5 5 5 5 7 6 6 6 6 8 7 7 7 7 18 EFFECTS Liverpool is equipped with four powerful Effect Pro cessors A B C D You can send them the internal tracks DIAGRAMS The following instructions show the signal path dia gram for each of the effect types The signal coming from the tracks Send is mono Before entering an effect processor it is split in two wires Left and Right and processed in stereo The signal is then out put in stereo from the effect processor and sent to the Mix output Left amp Right the heaphones or the internal speakers Effect Block Left DYNAMIC MODULATION SOURCES When the pzz symbol is encoutered a Dynamic Mod ulation can be applied to the corresponding parameter The following table shows the available modulation sources Modulation source Note Gate1 Gate2 Note Nr Note Number ATouch After Touch JS Y CC 01 Joystick Forward MIDI CC 04 MIDI CC 13 MIDI CC 18 Effects Diagrams 177 Modulation source Note MIDI CC 19 MIDI CC 21 Prta SW 65 Portamento Switch MIDI CC 80 MIDI CC 82 Tempo Filter and dynamics control effects 000 No Effect Select this option when you do not use any effects When this option is selected the effect is muted 001 Amp Simulat Stereo Amp Simulation This effect simulates the frequency response character istics o
215. 3 Press GLOBAL to enter the Global mode then go to Page 4 MIDI Setup see page 127 4 Selectthe Master Keyboard Setup Note The settings can change when new data is loaded from a card To protect the settings from loading use the Global Protect function see Global Protect on page 143 5 Press WRITE select Global and press ENTER to save the Global The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort 6 Pressone ofthe buttons in the MODE section to go to the desired operative mode CONNECTING THE LIVERPOOL TO A MIDI ACCORDION There are different types of MIDI accordion and each type requires a different configuration of the Liverpool Select one of the MIDI Accordion Setups to configure the module properly see page 127 Connection and settings To connect the accordion to the Liverpool follow this procedure 1 Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the accordion to the MIDI IN connector of the Liverpool 2 Press GLOBAL to enter the Global mode then go to Page 4 MIDI Setup see page 127 3 Select one of the Accordion Setups Note The settings can change when new data is loaded from a card To protect the settings from loading use the Global Protect function see Global Protect on page 143 4 Press WRITE select Global and press ENTER to save the Global The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort 5 Pressone of the buttons i
216. 32 CC127 Single Control Change events Double Control Change numbers like 00 32 are MSB LSB bundles S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to delete If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be posi tioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to delete If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum track Note These parameters are available only when the All or Note options are selected PAGE 21 EDIT CUT MEASURES In this page you can cut measures from the Song chord tempo neasure j nues OOF E 0 q octave Edit Cut Meas Start 1 Length 1 After selecting the Start and Length parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort After the cut the following measure are moved back to fill the cut measures Start First measure where to begin cutting Length Number of measures to be cut PAGE 22 EDIT INSERT MEASURES In this page you can insert measures in the Song You can also use this function to insert measures with a dif ferent meter time signature chord tempo neasure J Tues DIE
217. 4 Event Edit 0 0 0 cece eee 103 Page 25 Event Filter 0000000 104 Event Edit procedure 00 e cece eens 105 Program operating mode M mpag pT Sound Programs and Drum Programs Menu ueilweel4due aoed e 4 EROR Edit page structure 00 eee eee eee The Compare function 000 How to select oscillators 000005 Erase Program Oscillator The Write window sees Page l Basie ves ences tS RE Page 2 Sample Sound Programs Page 2 DK Samples Drum Programs Page 3e Pitch iios seen her nee Page 4 Pitch LFOL iiec Page 5 Pitch LFO2 i eese eme Page6 Pitch EG 0 eee eee Page7 EFiltef cessio baad ean wean eeeans Page 8 Filter Modulation Page 9 Filter LFOL 2 0 ccs c cess temm mme Page 10 Filter LFO2 000 Page 11 Filter EG 0 eee eee eee Page 12 AMp iid ices iiss ese ee sins Dales Page 13 Amp Modulation Page 14 Amp LFO1 004 Page 15 Amp LFO2 000 Pagel6 Amp EG 0 eee Page TZ LEOT dde memes Page18 LFO2 kee eee eee Page 19 Effects 20 00 06 0c cence e cece stius Page 20 FX1 editing 000 Page 21 FX2 editing 0000 AMS Alternate Modulation Source list Global edi
218. 70 When saving a Song as a SMF an empty measure in automatically inserted to the beginning of the Song This measure contains various Song initialization parameters When a SMF is loaded the empty measure is automati cally removed FAST TRACK DELETION When you are in the Main page of the Song Record mode and the Song tracks are shown in the display keep the DELETE button pressed and press one of the VOLUME VALUE buttons corresponding to the track to delete The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to delete the track or EXIT to abort HOW TO DELETE A WHOLE SONG While in the Main page you can delete a whole Song with the simple SHIFT DELETE button sequence 1 Enter the Song mode You must be in the Main page of the mode If you are in Record mode go back to the Playback mode 2 Press SHIFT DELETE Song operating mode 89 Transport controls 3 The Delete Song message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort MAIN PAGE Press SONG to access this page from another operating mode Note When switching from Style Play to Song the Song Setup is automatically selected and various track parameters may change Press EXIT NO to access this page from the Menu or any of the Song Play edit pages To see the Song s tracks use the TRK SELECT button to switch from the Main page to the Tracks pages Pressed a first time you will see tracks 1 8 enlightened TRK SELECT LED a second p
219. 79 Tom 2 Floor O 11 B 1 29 BD Deep 88 Off 29 BD Deep 88 O 29 BD Deep 88 Off 79 Tom 2 Floor O 12 co 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD O 124 88 SD off 78 Tom 2 Lo O 13 C 0 50 SD Dance off 50 SD Dance O 39 SD Jazz Ring Off 77 Tom 2 Hi 9 14 DO 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo O 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 32 SD Dry 2 O 15 D 0 25 BD Ambi Kick off 25 BD Ambi Kick O 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 5 BD Jazz O 16 E0 9 BD Terminator off 9 BD Terminator O 6 BD Pillow off 6 BD Pillow O 17 F0 65 SD Vintage4 off 65 SD Vintage4 O 37 SD Full Room Off 121 FingerSnaps O 18 F 0 143 Zap2 off 143 Zap2 O 87 HH1 Closed2 1 86 HH1 Closed1 1 19 G0 22 BD Hip 4 off 22 BD Hip 4 O 0 BD Dry 1 Off 2 BD Dry 3 O 20 G 0 142 Zap1 off 142 Zap1 O 73 SideStickAmb off 72 SideStickDry O 21 A0 66 SD Vintage5 off 66 SD Vintage5 O 32 SD Dry 2 Off 43 SD BrushTap1 T 22 A 0 310 Mouth Harp Off 310 Mouth Harp g 42 SD BrushHit Off 43 SD BrushTap1 7 23 BO 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 74 DrumStickHit off 74 DrumStickHit O 24 C1 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 25 Ci 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll T 119 SD Orch Roll 7 26 D1 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps O 121 FingerSnaps off 121 FingerSnaps O 27 D 1 143 Zap2 off 143 Zap2 O 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 O 28 E1 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White O 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White O 29 F1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Sc
220. 80 Finger Bass 121 0 33 Seq Lead 121 7 81 Picked Bass 121 0 34 Old amp Analog 121 8 80 Fretl Bass 121 0 35 PhatSawLead 121 8 81 Slap Bass 1 121 0 36 Glide Lead 121 9 81 Slap Bass 2 121 0 37 Gliding Sq 121 9 80 SynthBass 1 121 0 38 Flip Blip 121 7 55 SynthBass 2 121 0 39 Power Synth 121 3 89 AcBass Buzz 121 1 32 Sine Switch 121 10 80 Fing ElBass 121 2 33 Reso Sweep 121 1 90 Pick ElBass 121 1 34 Syn Sweeper 121 3 90 Fret Bass2 121 1 35 Cosmic 121 1 93 SuperSwBass 121 1 36 MotionRaver 121 1 101 SuperSwBas2 121 2 36 Sync Kron 121 3 84 SynBassWarm 121 1 38 Fire Wave 121 10 81 SynBassReso 121 2 38 Dig PolySix 121 7 90 Bass amp Ride 121 2 32 Pop Syn Pad 121 4 91 FingElBass2 121 3 33 Noisy Stabb 121 8 90 PickElBass2 121 2 34 Mega Synth 121 9 90 Fretless Sw 121 2 35 Factory Data 155 Programs bank order Name ccoo CC32 PC Name ccoo CC32 PC Thumb Bass 121 1 37 Percus Kit1 120 0 64 Finger Slap 121 1 33 Latin P Kit 120 0 65 Attack Bass 121 1 39 TRI Per KIT 120 0 66 Rubber Bass 121 2 39 ArabianKit1 120 0 116 FingElBass3 121 4 33 ArabianKit2 120 0 117 DarkR amp BBass 121 4 35 Timpani 121 0 47 Sweet Fret 121 3 35 Agogo 121 0 113 Dyna Bass 121 2 37 Log Drum 121 4 12 Stick Bass 121 5 33 Woodblock 121 0 115 G
221. A VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Mixer Tuning item Suddenly a Volume edit page appears chord E measure jy nue 0006 E GO 1 Jolume BJA mmm GIA B SES ga B HJA manum GE BJA comm 112 B Select a track and use the DIAL or the UP and DOWN buttons or the VOLUME VALUE buttons to change the track s volume Modify all tracks you think need to be modified 8 Save the Song Your changes will be lost when you load a new Song switch to the Song Play mode or turn the instrument 34 Tutorial The Arabic Scale off So press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Song mode chord tempo E nn i n Er ea e sona Load Sora Metro ttt Save Sona eter 4d Sel Teneo TenporAuto Press one of the C VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Save Song command Save your Song with a new name How to accomplish this simple operation is described in great details on page 91 Save Song page Note When saving a Song the Song Performance events initial Program Volume Pan Effect Send settings are saved at the beginning of the Standard MIDI File Effect set tings are saved as Liverpool SysEx events ignored by other musical instruments Other editings The Volume is not the only parameter you can edit You can edit a lot more things like the Pan the Effects the Tun
222. BD5SoftRoom Off 116 BD Orch Off 17 BD House 1 Off 12 BD Tight O 37 C 2 43 SD BrushTap1 Off 73 SideStickAmb Off 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry 9 38 D2 4344 SD BrushTap1SD BrushTap2 Off 120 SD Orch Off 33 SD Dry 3 Off 33 SD Dry3 O 39 D 2 39 42 SD Jazz Ring SD gt BrushHit Off 178 CastSingle Off 337 Alkis Off 122 Hand Claps O 40 E2 45 45 SD BrushSwirl SD BrushSwirl Off 120 SD Orch off 68 SD AmbiHop Off 33 SD Dry 3 O 41 F2 85 Tom Brush Hi Off 118 Timpani O 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 42 F 2 90 HH1 Open 2 1 118 Timpani Off 88 HH1 Foot 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 43 G2 85 Tom Brush Hi Off 118 Timpani O 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 44 G 2 94 HH2 Foot 1 118 Timpani Off 94 HH2 Foot 1 94 HH2 Foot 1 45 A2 85 Tom Brush Hi Off 118 Timpani Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 78 Tom 2 Lo O 46 A 2 95 HH2 FootOpen 1 118 Timpani Off 89 HH1 Open 1 1 89 HH1 Open 1 1 47 B2 85 Tom Brush Hi Off 118 Timpani Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 78 Tom 2 Lo O 48 c3 85 Tom Brush Hi Off 118 Timpani O 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 77 Tom 2 Hi O 49 C 3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 118 Timpani Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 O 50 D3 85 Tom Brush Hi Off 118 Timpani O 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 77 Tom 2 Hi O 51 D 3 112 Ride Edge 1 Off 118 Timpani Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 O 52 E3 106 China Cymbal Off 118 Timpani Off 352 Hollo 1 Off 301 Dbk Tky Open O 53 F3 114 Ride Jazz off 118 Timpani Off 353 Hollo 2 Off 300 Dbk
223. Bath Bath B Dori cD cmp om m Finem DD l m e Track Int 4Ext E B Bath Bath E D Both Both Both Esterna E B Bath Bath iB Parameters Internal The track plays the sounds generated by the internal sound engine It does not play an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT The track plays an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT It does not play the internal sounds thus saving polyphony When a track is set to External a strings of transmitted Control Change and Pro gram Change data is shown instead of the Program name assigned to the track In the following example CC 0 is the Con trol Change 0 Bank Select MSB CC 32 is the Control Change 32 Bank Select LSB PC is the Program Change External CCHO CC 32 Both The track plays both the internal sounds and an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT PAGE 17 EDIT QUANTIZE The quantize function corrects any rhythm error after recording chord tempo cam j nues BL D EE E e Edit Quantize Trk All Rezol d S11 GS Eal 51 192 BotLomG l Toe CS After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected 1 16 Selected track Resol Resolution This parameter sets the quantization after recording For example whe
224. Bird Tweet2 121 3 123 Electro Kit 120 0 24 Telephone 2 121 1 124 Analog Kit 120 0 25 Door Creak 121 2 124 House Kit1 120 0 26 Door 121 3 124 House Kit2 120 0 27 Scratch 121 4 124 House Kit3 120 0 28 Wind Chime 121 5 124 House Kit4 120 0 29 Car Engine 121 1 125 Jazz Kit 120 0 32 Car Stop 121 2 125 Brush Kit1 120 0 40 Car Pass 121 3 125 Brush V S 2 120 0 41 Car Crash 121 4 125 OrchestraK 120 0 48 Siren 121 5 125 Bdrum amp Sdrum 120 0 50 Train 121 6 125 SFX Kit 120 0 56 Jetplane 121 7 125 156 Factory Data Programs bank order Name ccoo CC32 PC Starship 121 8 125 Burst Noise 121 9 125 Laughing 121 1 126 Screaming 121 2 126 Punch 121 3 126 Heart Beat 121 4 126 Footsteps 121 5 126 Machine Gun 121 1 127 Lasergun 121 2 127 Explosion 121 3 127 Ice Rain 121 0 96 Jaw Harp 121 3 105 HitlnIndia 121 5 55 Stadium 121 6 126 Factory Data 157 Programs Program Change order PROGRAMS PROGRAM CHANGE ORDER ccoo cca2 PC Name Liverpool Bank GM2 The following table enlists all Liverpool Factory Pro 121
225. Bossa To Ugi i Bossa Peart e To save the Style to the internal memory press the A or B VOLUME VALUE buttons then press ENTER The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort e To return to the previous Style Record page leav ing all untouched and the Style unsaved press EXIT e To delete all changes to the Style press one of the D VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Abort command The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm deletion or EXIT to return to the Write page Style name Use this parameter to change the Style s name Press the right A VOLUME VALUE button to enter editing and modify the name using the UP DOWN buttons to move the cursor and the DIAL to select a character Press INSERT to insert a character at the cursor posi tion or DELETE to delete it To Style number Use the B VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a different User Style loca tion in memory Note Only User locations are available Abort Select this command to delete any change to the Style LIST OF RECORDED EVENTS The Style Record mode filters out some events that may damage the right operation of the Style Here are the recorded events and the most important filtered out events Control function CC Control Change Number Allowed Note On Note Off
226. Brass Expr Brass 121 5 73 Orch Flute Woodwind 121 16 61 Brass Band Brass 121 6 73 Flute Muted Woodwind 121 17 61 Film Brass Brass 121 ri 73 WoodenFlute Woodwind 121 18 61 Brass Slow Brass 121 8 73 Bambu Flute Woodwind 121 19 61 Fanfare Brass 121 9 73 Flute 2 Woodwind 121 20 61 Movie Brass Brass 121 0 74 Recorder Woodwind Y 121 21 61 Power Brass Brass 121 1 74 Recorder 2 Woodwind 121 22 61 Dyna Brass2 Brass 121 0 75 Pan Flute Woodwind y 121 23 61 Sfz Brass Brass 121 1 75 Kawala Woodwind 121 24 61 Dbl Brass Brass 121 0 76 BlownBottle Woodwind Y 121 25 61 Brass Hit Brass 121 0 77 Shakuhachi Woodwind Y 121 26 61 Brass Fall Brass 121 1 77 Old Shaku Woodwind 121 0 62 Syn Brass 1 Brass N 121 2 77 Shaku2 Woodwind 121 1 62 SynBrass 3 Brass N 121 0 78 Whistle Woodwind y 121 2 62 AnalogBras1 Brass N 121 1 78 Whistle 2 Woodwind 121 3 62 Jump Brass Brass N 121 0 79 Ocarina Woodwind y 121 4 62 ElectrikBrs Brass 121 0 80 Lead Square Synth 2 y 121 5 62 Syn Brass 5 Brass 121 1 80 LeadSquare2 Synth 2 N 121 0 63 SynBrass2 Brass N 121 2 80 Lead Sine Synth 2 y 121 1 63 Syn Brass 4 Brass N 121 3 80 Old Portam Synth 2 121 2 63 AnalogBras2 Brass N 121 4 80 Dance Lead Synth 2 121 3 63 Brass Pad Brass 121 5 80 Wave Lead Synth 2 121 4 63 Big Panner Synth 1 121 6 80 Sine Wave Synth 2 121 0 64 Soprano Sax Sax N 121 7 80 Analog Lead Synth 2 121 1 64 Sweet Sprno Sax 121 8 80 Old amp Analog Synth 2 121 0 65 Alto Sa
227. C 0 CC 32 PC Bank POP 1 0 6 0 Paperback 0 7 0 TicketToRid 0 8 0 Soft Beat 2 1 Penny Lane 1 WeCanWorklt 1 Pop Beat 3 2 Revolution 2 Whenl m64 2 Unplug8Bt 4 3 Sexy Sadie 3 WithALittle 3 UK 8 Beat 5 4 Sgt Pepper 4 YellowSub 4 PopBallad 1 6 5 She Came In 5 YouCan tDo 5 ClassicBeat 7 6 Tell Me Why 6 YoureMother 6 Guitar Bld 8 7 ThingsWeSay 7 You reGoing 7 8Bt Analog 9 8 Analogyst 10 9 Standard 8beat 11 10 Trendy Beat 12 11 Slow Ballad 13 12 6Strings Bt 14 13 Std 16Beat 15 14 Pop 16Beat 16 15 Cinema Bld Factory Data Styles CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank Rock CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank Soul Funk CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank JAZZ 1 0 9 0 Open Rock 1 0 10 0 Rubber Funk 0 11 0 Jazz Brush 2 1 Open Rock 2 1 Groove Funk 1 Med Swing 3 2 Pop Rock 2 Acid Jazz 1 2 Slow Swing 4 3 Fire Rock 3 Double Beat 3 JazzWaltz 5 4 Hard Rock 4 Groove 4 5 4 Swing 6 5 Heavy Rock 5 Jazz Funk 1 5 Be Bop 7 6 R
228. C card you must format it on the Liverpool Don t use your computer or digital camera to format initialize a card you plan to use with the Liverpool If the card was formatted on a different device it may not work correctly with the Liverpool Note The SD MMC card is not included It must be purchased separately Note The Liverpool supports SD cards with a power supply voltage of 2 7 3 6V SD and MMC card handling Do not remove the card from the drive while the Liv erpool is reading or saving data The SD MMC card may be hot immediately follow ing use Power off the Liverpool and wait for the card to cool before removing it SD MMC cards are precision parts Do not bend them drop them or subject them to physical shock Avoid using or storing SD MMC cards in locations of extremely high or low temperature such as in direct sunlight a closed automobile or near a heater or in locations of high humidity or excessive dust Card Edit environment 131 The WRITE CARD IN USE LED Avoid using or storing SD MMC cards in locations where they may be subject to strong static electricity or electrical noise Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to adhere to the contacts of an SD MMC card If the contacts should become soiled gently wipe them off using a dry cloth When you are not using an SD MMC card keep it in the protective case that was included with the card to prevent it from being damaged by static electric
229. CC 32 is the Control Change 32 Bank Select LSB PC is the Istogitum Change d 3H CC O CC 32 PC Both The track plays both the internal sounds and an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT Song Play operating mode 79 Page 8 Track Internal External PAGE 9 JUKEBOX The Jukebox function lets you play a list of Songs 127 max at the simple touch of a button You can play a Jukebox file by selecting it in the Song Select page see Playing a Jukebox file on page 74 just as if it was a normal Song chord tempo measure mew dd 8 ttt octave Dm i at s Kill 11 i page Ai L mina HE Mi ie ii ike e 32 b l Sunda mid i B2 Likeaurg mid i SAVE AED IHS DEL In this page you can create edit and save a Jukebox file If a Jukebox file is already selected into a Sequencer you will enter this page with that file ready to be edited Otherwise you will enter this page with an empty NEW_NAME JBX file To create a new file even when a Jukebox file is already selected press SHIFT F 4 Del and confirm with ENTER see below the F 4 Del paragraph When you press PLAY STOP from this page the Juke box playback begins from the currently selected Song i e the Song on the fist line of the display F 1 SAVE Press this button to save the Jukebox file to the card The Jukebox Save page appears allowing you to save
230. CK SELECT button again to go back to the main page T igne DB IE d 43i E Mi earum ex 5 Por i F3 B Stringi UacaEns B D DkStrings Bassi 4 Legato Sirnagnez E B BrassuHorn 5tringsz te A H Tracks 9 16 Programs Name of the Programs assigned to tracks 9 16 Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the vol ume of the corresponding tracks SONG SELECT PAGE This page appears when you press either the A S1 or B S2 button while you are in the main page You can also access the Song Select page by pressing PAGE Press EXIT or PAGE to go back to the main page of the Song Play operating mode without selecting a Song transpose While in this page select a Song for the selected Sequencer or a Jukebox file for Sequencer 1 Note There is a separate working directory for each onboard sequencer A C File folder Move the MID KAR or JBX file or folder to be selected to the first line of the display To select a file press the F 2 SELECT button To open a folder press the F 3 OPEN button The symbol identifies a folder E F Scroll Up Scroll the list up Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these buttons to jump to the previous alphabetical section G H Scroll Down Scroll the list down Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these buttons to jump to the next alphabetical
231. Control Target This parameter selects no level control delay output control effect balance or feedback amount control a Polarity b Threshold b Offset c Attack d Release The Offset parameter specifies the value for the Control Target parameter that is set to None expressed as the ratio relative to the parameter value the Wet Dry value with Control Target Out or the Feedback value with Control Target FB When Polarity is positive the Control Target value is obtained by multiplying the parameter value by the Offset value if the input level is below the threshold or equals the parameter value if the input level exceeds the threshold When Polarity is negative Control Target value equals the parameter value if the input level is below the threshold or is obtained by multiplying the parameter value by the Offset value if the level exceeds the threshold The Attack and Release parameters specify attack time and release time of delay level control Dynamic Delay Dry j Threshold H Release Envelope NA m Attack Wet Ducking Delay rd NANA Polarity MANDO i i Ma Ma Delay Time Wet Control Target Out Polarity 4 Ach M taa Time 208 Effects ER Delay 048 AutoPan Dly 049 LCR BPM Dly Stereo Auto Panning Delay The L C R delay enables you
232. EMPO VALUE controls Press F 2 SAVE to confirm A list of banks on the target card appears Only banks of the selected type are shown Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the target bank to the first line of the display Once the target bank is selected press F 2 SAVE to save the files The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Warning If you confirm any data in the target bank will be deleted When the operation is completed the Wait indi cator disappears the source page comes back in the display and you may perform further saving operations Saving a single item You can save a single User item with a single operation 1 2 5 Insert the target card into the card slot The whole content All of the internal memory is already selected Press F 3 OPEN to open the All folder A list of User data types appear each type is a separate folder n ni Cc i tt octave COED m page Card Save t eo LL p amp GLOBAL i L3 PERFORM 3 PROGRAM HN SAE UPEH CLOSE Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the data type you are looking for to the first line of the display Once the data type is selected press F 3 OPEN to open the folder and gain access to the separate banks chord tempo transp
233. ENU button opens the current operating mode or edit environment s Menu When in a Menu you can use the VOLUME VALUE buttons to select an edit section to jump to TRACK SELECT Each of the operating modes have a different number of tracks Style Play 4 Realtime tracks 8 Style tracks 4 Pads 19 20 Display and User Interface Interface structure Song Play 4 Realtime tracks 2 x 16 Song Tracks 4 Pads Backing Sequence 4 Realtime tracks 8 Style tracks 4 Pads Song 16 Song tracks You can only see up to 8 tracks in the display So use the TRACK SELECT button to switch to the other hid den tracks For example when in Style Play you can use this button to switch from the Realtime tracks and the Style tracks INTERFACE STRUCTURE Thanks to its multitasking operating system the Liver pool user interface is structured in overlapping active layers From the lower level e operating modes Style Play Backing Sequence Song Play Song Program e edit environments Global Card e selecting windows Style Select Song Select Pro gram Select Performance Select Operating modes am emm i ni i When opening an edit environment or a selecting page the current operating mode is still working in the back ground SACSCANG SNR S Edit environments Operating modes Operating modes See diagram at the bottom of this page At the lowest level an operating mode i
234. EQ input level Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0dB Sets the gain of Low EQ e Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0dB Sets the gain of High EQ Output Level 0 100 Sets the output level of the compressor gt Dez f Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the compressor output level Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the compressor output level Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Daz Src Off Tempo 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a Envelope Select This parameter selects whether the left and right channels are linked to control both signals simultaneously or whether each channel is controlled independently b Sensitivity f Output Level The Sensitivity parameter sets the sensitivity of the com pressor If this parameter is set to a higher value lower level sounds will be boosted With a higher Sensitivity the overall volume level is higher To adjust the final volume level use the Output Level parameter Compressor Sensitivity Level _Sensitivity 100 _Sensitivity 40 Louder Dry c Attack This parameter controls the attack level Compressor Attack Level A Attack 80 Attack 20 a Time 003 Limiter Ster
235. EVENT FILTER This page is where you can select the event types to be shown in the Event Edit page You can access this page by pressing the PAGE button while you are in the Event Edit page chord tempo am coo nu D E d L M 58s og octave PP Edi e 59 Turn Off the filter for all event types you wish to see in the Event Edit page Note Some of the events are ghosted and non editable since the corresponding events are not editable in a Style Note Notes Ctrl Control Change events Only the follow ing Control Change numbers are allowed Control function CC Control Change Number Modulation 1 1 Modulation 2 2 Pan 10 Expression 11 CCiH2 12 CC H13 13 Damper 64 Filter Resonance 71 Low Pass Filter Cutoff 74 CC 80 80 CC 81 81 CC 82 82 a Expression events cannot be inserted at the starting Position 001 01 000 An Expression value is already among the default header parameters of the Style Element Bend Pitch Bend events EVENT EDIT PROCEDURE The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each sin gle MIDI event of the selected Style Element You can for example replace a note with a different one or change its playing strength i e velocity value Here is the general event editing procedure 1 Select the Style to edit and press RECORD Select the
236. Envelope Select D mod L R Mix L Only R Only Selects from Control via the modulation source mixing the left and right sig nals Only left and Only right gt D a Src Off Gate2 Dmpr Selects the modulation source that controls the gate when Envelope Select D mod b Polarity R Switches between non reversed and reversed Gate on off gt B Threshold 0 100 Sets the level to which the Gate is applied gt Attack 1 100 Sets the attack time gt d Release 1 100 Sets the release time gt a Delay Time msec 0 100msec Sets the delay time of the gate input gt Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Duis f Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a Envelope Select a Src The Envelope Select parameter selects whether the gate on off is triggered by the level of the input signal or controlled directly by the modulation source The Src parameter speci fies the modulation source selected from Off to Gate2 Dpmr With Envelope Select L R Mix the left and right channel signal mixture will trigger the gate on off When L Only or R Only is selected the gate is controlled by either of the chan nel signals b Polarity This parameter reverses the Gate on off operation With a negative v
237. FX B EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the B effect usually modulating effect for Sequencer 1 For more details see Page 5 FX A editing above PAGE 5 FX C EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the C effect You can access this page only when the S2 FX Mode parameter is set to C D see S2 FX Mode on page 80 For more details see Page 5 FX A editing above Note C and D effects are used also by the Realtime Key board tracks PAGE 6 FX D EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the D effect You can access this page only when the S2 FX Mode parameter is set to C D see S2 FX Mode on page 80 For more details see Page 5 FX A editing above Note C and D effects are used also by the Realtime Key board tracks PAGE 7 TRACK MODE This page lets you set the polyphony mode for each Song track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 KB amm com L V Di 1 om Track Hode ETa a Fal J Fal J B B Falu Poly B Poly Poly 4 Poly Poly B chord tempo cam co gne D ID B exe Track Hode B Foly Hono Right o Drum Foly D Drum Poly B B Poly Foly D Parameters Drum This is a Drum Percussion track No Mas ter or Octave Transpose applies to this track
238. For example a folder named Dummy will generate a Dummy txt file If a file with the same name already exists on the card it will be overwritten without waiting for any confirmation A file containing the list of all valid files contained into the root of the card will generate a Root txt file The list will include the progressive number assigned to each Song file names in MS DOS format 8 3 the total number of files in the list For the correct display and printing of the list on a personal computer use a fixed size i e non proportional character in your text editor Warning While the list may contain more than 9999 files you can t select Songs outside the 0001 9999 range when using the numeric keypad Song Play operating mode 81 Saving a list of Songs How to save a list of Songs contained ina Jukebox file 1 Press SONG PLAY to select the Song Play opera tive mode 2 To select an existing Jukebox file press one of the A S1 VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Load Song page If you are creating a new Jukebox file press MENU instead select the Jukebox page and jump to step 7 3 Use the F 3 OPEN and F 4 CLOSE buttons to browse through the folders inside the card 4 Move the folders and files to select to the first line of the display Use the TEMPO VALUE controls or the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOL UME VALUE buttons 5 When the Jukebox file you are looking for
239. Freq Mod AUTOFADE LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Amato Selects LFO Waveform udis on m Ki ois o LFO Shape 100 100 LFO Frequency Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed Fx 020 AUTOFADE eect 71 063 074 0Hz LFO Frequency Mod D mod AUTOFADE msc DEN ANEY d Switches between D mod and AUTOFADE for the LFO frequency modula tion gt LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Fx 009 Dze Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 009 eje BPM MIDI 40 240 f Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009 Base Note 2 25 2 24 5 dia Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Dz Src Off Tempo g Selects the modulation source of the LFO modulation depth Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dus h Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 Effects Pitch Phase
240. HIFT DELETE Note All events on the very first tick M001 01 000 like Perf Style Tempo Chord Style Element selection cannot be deleted Perf This is the last selected Performance Select a Perfor mance to recall the Style it memorizes To insert a Per formance change at the current position follow the standard selecting procedure using the buttons of the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section Note The STYLE CHANGE LED is automatically turned on when entering the Chord Acc Step Mode This means that selecting a Performance automatically selects the Style mem orized into the Performance The SINGLE TOUCH and STS buttons are automatically disabled meaning that you can t change the Realtime Key board tracks while in Chord Acc Step Mode DELETE When the Perf parameter is selected and the side arrow showing that a Perfor mance Change event has been selected at the current position appears next to it press DELETE to delete the Performance Change at the current position Note If the side arrow doesn t appear the event was not selected at the current position and will not be deleted Backing Sequence operating mode 87 Chord Acc Step Recording page SHIFT DELETE When the Perf parameter is selected press SHIFT DELETE to delete all Perfor mance Change events starting from the current position to the end of the Song To delete all Performance Change events in the Song go back to the M001 01 000 po
241. Hi Gain O Drive Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion a Drive 1 100 Drive 1 100 Sets the degree of distortion Fx 006 Sets the degree of distortion Fx 006 O Output Level 0 50 O Output Level 0 50 Sets the overdrive output level Fx 006 Duez Sets the overdrive output level Fx 006 Dez b Src Off Tempo Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level Amt 50 50 Amt 50 50 Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level O Low Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz O Low Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type c Gain dB 18 18dB Gain dB 18 18dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 O Mid1 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz O Mid1 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type d Q 0 5 10 0 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 Fx 006 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 18dB Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 O Mid2 Cutoff Hz 500
242. Hz Sets the center frequency for Band 3 Sets the center frequency for Band 4 Q 0 5 10 0 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 Fx 006 e Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 18dB Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 3 Sets the gain of Band 4 E Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz i F Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the center frequency for Band 4 Sets the delay time Q 0 5 10 0 F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 Fx 006 J Sets the LFO speed Gain dB 18 18dB LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Sets the gain of Band 4 Selects LFO Wavefarm P LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz F Depth 0 100 Sets the LFO speed Sets the depth of LFO modulation LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Feedback 100 100 Selects LFO Waveform Sets the feedback amount Fx 020 P Manual 0 100 F Cho Fing Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet 9 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger Fx 010 020 P Depth 0 100 Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Sets the depth of LFO modulation Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger h p g Resonance 100 100 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the resonance amount Fx 023 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page uod P Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Dz Sets the phaser effect balance Fx 010 023 i j Src T Off Te
243. L Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB d Sets the limiter output gain Fx 003 LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform 9 D Tap1 Time msec 0 680msec Sets the Tap1 delay time P Manual 0 100 d e 1 Tap1 Level 0 100 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Sets the Tap output level Fx 045 P Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation D Tap2 Time msec 0 680msec f Sets the Tap2 delay time Resonance 100 100 e Feedback Tap2 100 100 Sets th t Fx 023 See oco TO make Sets the Tap2 feedback amount P Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet 7 7 Sets the phaser effect balance Fx 010 023 D Mt Delay Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet g Sets the multitap delay effect balance Output Mode Normal Wet Invert i High Damp 0 100 Selects ihe phaser output mode rms Sets the damping amount in the high range Fx 043 Routing LMT5PHS PHS gt LMT n Switches the order of the limiter and phaser connection Fx 067 g Routing s z LMT DLY Detar Switches the order of the limiter and multitap delay connection Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet it Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance petweenithe effect and diy sounds on pago 177 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dz Diez i Src Off Tempo Src Off Tempo Table Selects th dulati f the effect bal E 177 F i ae SEES ME OSEAN ON SOUTER OL FIG STSCLDarane es OM Page n
244. LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 009 ae BPM MIDI 40 240 g Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009 Base Note 4 43 2 da J d3 d 0 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Formant Shift 100 100 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied gt h Resonance 0 100 Sets the Level of resonance of the voice pattern gt Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Daz i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 c Voice Top d Voice Center e Voice Bottom These parameters assign vowels to the top center and bot tom position of the controller E g When Voice Top A Voice Center I and Voice Bot tom U If Sweep Mode is set to D mod and Ribbon is selected as the modulation source moving your finger from the right to left of the ribbon controller will change the sound from a to er i then u 186 Effects Filter Dynamic If Sweep Mode is set to LFO the sound will change cyclically 014 Decimator
245. LIT LED is lit up The Chord channels are not affected by the split point and the KEYBOARD MODE section of the control panel All the notes both above and below the split point will be sent to the chord recognition The buttons of the CHORD SCANNING section have a particular effect on the Chord channels e if you have selected LOWER the chord recognition mode will be set by the Chord Recognition Mode parameter in the Style Play mode see page 51 e if you have selected UPPER or FULL the chord recognition mode will always be Fingered 2 you need to play at least three notes in order for the chord to be detected These two channels are especially useful for accordion players to assign a different Chord channel to the chords and the bass played with the left hand In this way chords and bass will participate to the creation of chords for the chord recognition of the automatic accompaniment THE CONTROL CHANNEL You can set a MIDI IN channel as the Control channel see page 129 to select Styles and Performance from an external device See the Appendix for a list of messages corresponding to Liverpool internal data MIDI SETUP You can play Liverpool with an external controller and use it simply as a gorgeous sound generator To help you configure the MIDI channels we have provided a set of MIDI Setups Go to Global mode to select the one that fits your MIDI needs See Page 4 MIDI Setup on page 127 for
246. Liverpool PROFESSIONAL ARRANGER Owner s Manual KO RG El PRECAUTIONS LOCATION Using the unit in the following locations can result in a malfunction In direct sunlight Locations of extreme temperature or humidity Excessively dusty or dirty locations Locations of excessive vibration Close to magnetic fields POWER SUPPLY Please connect the designated AC adapter to an AC outlet of the correct voltage Do not connect it to an AC outlet of voltage other than that for which your unit is intended INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER ELECTRICAL DEVICES Radios and televisions placed nearby may experience reception interference Operate this unit at a suitable distance from radios and televisions HANDLING To avoid breakage do not apply excessive force to the switches or controls CARE If the exterior becomes dirty wipe it with a clean dry cloth Do not use liquid cleaners such as benzene or thinner or cleaning
247. Low Damp Right pom T Delay 7 StercalGress icd Puan L Delay Time msec 0 1360msec Sets the delay time of TapL a Stereo Cross Stereo Cross rium 0 50 Switches between stereo delay and cross feedback delay ets the output level of Tap z b L Delay Time msec 0 0 680 0msec A rigid Vus md E 0 1360msec Sets the delay time for the left channel ets the delay time of Tap b R Delay Time msec 0 0 680 0msec coit necite 0 50 Sets the delay time for the right channel ets the output level of Tap L Feedback 100 100 E aed pos ass 0 1360msec Sets the feedback amount for the left channel De ets the delay time of Tap o d Src Off Tempo ree n TEN 0 50 Selects the modulation source of feedback amount ets the output level of Tap Amt L 100 100 PEA E Delay Has 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the left channel feedback ets the feedback amountof Tap fede D R Feedback 100 100 d Src Off Tempo Sets the feedback amount for the right channel Dez Selects the modulation source of the TapC feedback amount e Amt R 100 100 e M 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the right channel feedback ets the modulation amount of the TapC feedback amount f High Damp 96 0 100 a id 75 sais 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Fx 043 ets the damping amount in the high range gt e Low Damp 0 100 FM T a 0 100 9 Sets the damping amount in the low ran
248. MICHELLE Can t Buy Me Love CANT BUY Mother Nature s Son MOTHER Carry That Weight CARRY TH The Night Before NIGHTBEF Come Together COME TOG No Reply NOREPLY A Day In The Life DAY IN Norwegian Wood This Bird Has Flown NORWEGIA Day Tripper DAY TRIP Nowhere Man NOWHERE Dear Prudence DEARPRUD Ob La Di Ob La Da OB LA DI Don t Let Me Down DONT LET Oh Darling OHDARLIN Drive My Car DRIVE MY One After 909 ONEAFTER Eight Days A Week Eleanor Rigby EIGHTDAY ELEANOR Paperback Writer Penny Lane PAPERBAK PENNY Fixing A Hole FIXING A Rain RAIN The Fool On The Hill FOOL ON Revolution REVOLUTI For No One FORNOONE Rocky Raccoon ROCKYRAC Getting Better GETTING Sexy Sadie SEXYSADI Get Back GET BACK Sgt Pepper s Lonely Hearts Club Band SGT PEPP Girl GIRL She s a woman SHEWOMAN Golden Slumbers GOLDEN She Came In Through The Bathroom SHE CAME Good Night GOODNITE She s Leaving Home SHE LEAV Got To Get You Into My Life GOTO GET She Said She Said SHE SAID Happiness Is A Warm Gun HAPPINES Strawberry Fields Forever STRAWBER A Hard Day s Night HARDDAYS Sun King SUN KING Hello Goodbye HELLO GB Tell Me Why TELLME Y Help HELP The Word THE WORD Helter Skelter HEL
249. NT button held down and play the new split point on the keyboard You can even save this setting in memory see The Write window on page 126 LIVERPOOL SONGS MOI SONG PROGRAM GLOB o o Tutorial 29 Playing in Realtime Without using Automatic Accompaniment 7 Mute unmute various tracks Press both H VOLUME VALUE buttons You will mute the Lower track n Cog g chora transpose l i r oct ME Drum Perc Grand Piano M Fret Bass Dark Pad 0 D Accome 145 Stein z Analog Str Press the H VOLUME VALUE buttons Press them again to unmute the Lower track Try also with the Upper tracks using the E F and G VOLUME VALUE buttons You will notice the sound becomes more or less fuller sounding depending on the number of tracks muted or unmuted _ it L 7 L i DS BY Drum Perc Fret Bass D Accore 1S Press the E G VOLUME VALUE buttons 8 Set the relative volume of the Realtime tracks Use each E H VOLUME VALUE button pair to set the volume of the Realtime tracks Press one of the VOL UME VALUE button to select a track Then press the right one to increase the volume the left one to lower it Press the left one to lower co c3 and the right one to raise 9 Press FULL UPPER on the KEYBOARD MODE section and play Again the U
250. O VALUE controls to change the parameter s value Parameters 000 No effect Only the direct uneffected sig nal goes to the outputs 127 10096 effect The direct uneffected and effected signals go to the outputs with the same level Song Play operating mode 77 Page 3 Mixer FX send C D PAGE 4 FX A B SELECT This page lets you select the A and B effects Usually the A effect is a reverb while the B effect is a modulat ing effect Effects A and B are usually reserved to Sequencer 1 You can however create Songs by using all four effects in Song mode Depending on the status of the S2 FX Mode parameter this effect pair could be reserved to Sequencer 2 too see page 80 chord J tempo neasure J mnes OIL B tt p nsum oT 1 FA HAB Select F Compressor Reu Bate MedTiUP 1 Eofisendii27 Note When playing back a Song that makes use of all four effects A D you can t edit any effect parameter These parameters appear greyed out in the display Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again Edit the Song in Song mode to permanently change the effects A B Effects assigned to the A and B effect processors Usu ally A is the reverb while B is the modulating effect chorus flanger delay For
251. OSE command to close a folder and go back to the upper level 7 When the file you are looking for is in the first line of the display press the F 2 SELECT but ton 8 When the Song appears in the S1 line on the main page of the Song Play mode press the left SEQ 1 PLAY STOP button to start the playback Note If the BALANCE slider is all the way to the right Sequencer 1 is at the minimum volume and can t be heard If you wish to play a different Song on Sequencer 2 at the same time press the B 52 VOLUME VALUE button press it twice if a Song is already selected for Sequencer 2 and repeat the above procedure to select a Song for Sequencer 2 Use the right SEQ 2 PLAY STOP button to start stop the second Song Use the BALANCE cursor to mix between Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 Stop the Song s using the PLAY STOP button for the corresponding Sequencer Need more information Go to Backing Sequence operating mode on page 82 The Reference Guide includes all the information you need EDITING A SONG You can edit a Song either a Standard MIDI File bought at the shop or one of your Songs made in Back ing Sequence mode Note Songs on the internal SSD cannot be edited What about changing those boring General MIDI sounds with those gorgeous original KORG sounds You can do it in Song mode 1 Press SONG to go to the Song mode This is the Song garage where you may find tools to reshape your Song
252. Off 13 C 0 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 14 DO 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 181 Guiro Short Off 15 D 0 24 BD Dance 99 Off 209 Tambourin Push O 16 E0 23 BD Pop Kick Off 210 Tambourin Pull O 17 FO 22 BD Hip 4 Off 211 Tambourin Acc1 O 18 F 0 21 BD Hip3 Off 211 Tambourin Acc1 O 240 Hit It Off 19 G0 19 BD Hip 1 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 O 238 Yeah Solo Off 20 G 0 18 BD House 2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 O 237 Yeah O 21 AO 16 BD Dance 3 Off 209 Tambourin Push O 241 Uhhhh Solo O 22 A 0 15 BD Dance 2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 O 214 Triangle Mute 7 23 B0 13 BD Squash off 319 Rek Jingle O 213 Triangle Open 7 24 C1 30 BD Klanger Off 233 Flexatone O 233 Flexatone O 25 C 1 29 BD Deep 88 Off 230 Finger Cymbal O 230 Finger Cymbal Off 26 D1 29 BD Deep 88 Off 0 BD Dry 1 O 197 Tsuzumi O 136 88 Cowbell Off 27 D 1 123 88 BD Off 296 Amp Noise O 172 BongoHi Slap Off 179 CastDouble Off 28 E1 12 BD Tight Off 235 Chinese Gong 9 173 BongoHi Stk1 O 178 CastSingle Off 29 F1 29 BD Deep 88 Off 153 DJ BD Rub O 170 BongoLo Stk O 121 FingerSnaps O 30 F 1 17 BD House 1 Off 148 DJ Scratch3c O 211 Tambourin Acc1 Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 31 G1 14 BD Dance 1 Off 154 DJ SD Rub O 224 Agogo Bell O 99 HH Old TiteClos O 32 G 1 16 BD Dance 3 Off 145 DJ Scratch2 O 273 Wind O 236 Metal Hit Off 33 A1 20 BD Hip 2 Off 286 GtCutNois1 Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 197 Tsuzumi Off 34 A 1 26 BD Amb Crackle Off 287 GtCutNois2 O 174 BongoHi Stk2 Off 197 Tsuzumi
253. Off 35 B1 29 BD Deep 88 Off 292 E GtrPick1 O 200 Woodblock1 off 197 Tsuzumi Off 36 C2 17 BD House 1 O 294 Gtr Scratch1 Off 199 Claves Off 116 BD Orch 1 37 C 2 23 BD Pop Kick Off 290 Dist Slide1 O 201 Woodblock2 O 116 BD Orch 1 38 D2 12 BD Tight O 291 Dist Slide2 O 225 Cowbell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 39 D 2 1 BD Dry 2 O 143 Zap2 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 40 E2 2 BD Dry 3 O 258 GunShot 1 Off 179 CastDouble Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 41 F2 7 BD Woofer Off 144 DJ Scratch1 T 184 Baya Open Off 159 CongaLoMtSlp Off 42 F 2 3 BD Normal O 145 DJ Scratch2 7 217 Shaker1 off 164 CongaHi Slap1 off 43 G2 0 BD Dry 1 O 74 DrumStickHit Off 186 Baya Mute1 Off 165 CongaHi Slap2 Off 44 G 2 10 BD Tubby Off 143 Zap2 O 182 MaracasPush Off 137 88 Maraca Off 45 A2 3 BD Normal O 249 Click O 184 Baya Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 46 A 2 0 BD Dry 1 O 224 Agogo Bell Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 214 Triangle Mute 2 47 B2 3 BD Normal O 289 Fret Noise Off 190 Tabla Open Off 213 Triangle Open 2 48 C3 6 BD Pillow O 286 GtCutNois1 O 192 Tabla Mute1 Off 159 CongaLoMtSlp Off 49 C 3 116 BD Orch O 287 GtCutNois2 Off 198 Vibraslap Off 162 CongaHiMute Off 50 D3 11 BD Gated Off 286 GtCutNois1 O 189 Tabla Na O 165 CongaHi Slap2 Off 51 D 3 10 BD Tubby Off 121 FingerSnaps O 214 Triangle Mute 3 211 Tambourin Acc1 O 52 E3 8 BD Mondokill off 246 Laughing O 116 BD Orch O 161 CongaHi Open Off 53 F3 10 BD Tubby Off 245 Sc
254. PT Eu Hote Bi 34 Lengha ma iia M4 Press SEQ1 PLAY STOP to listen to the Song Press SEQ1 PLAY STOP again to stop it Press PAGE to go to the Event Filter page and turn Off the filter for the event types you wish to see in the display see Page 25 Event Filter on page 104 for more information cord measure nn t n J mgc iE D Ut octave va Filter e ARLE DFF m e Edit Hote FF Frog OFF PAE DPP Ctrl OFF Berd DPP Teeter WF PaCtl Off Press PAGE to go back to the Event Edit page Press the A VOLUME VALUE button Trk to select the track to edit The Go To Track window appears Go to Track 1 Enterz k Exit Lancel Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a track and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort The list of events contained in the selected track will appear in the display tempo measure com J mye oic d d tt octave Event Edit H Trk 1 Position BiBi GEA It Eu Hote Gi d Lenght GAA mm 1i8 M4 10 11 12 13 Song operating mode Event Edit procedure For more information on the event types and their values see Page 24 Event Edit below Use the B VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Position line Use these buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event s position 1 15i E 5i n
255. Page 9 FX A editing above Parameters PERF STS Style Play operating mode 45 Page 8 FX C D Select PAGE 12 FX D EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the D effect usually modulating effect for the Realtime tracks For more details see Page 9 FX A editing above Parameters PERF STS PAGE 13 TRACK EASY EDIT In this page you can edit the main parameters of the Programs assigned to each track Note All values are relative to the value of the original Pro gram You can also change the volume for each class of Drums and Percussion if the selected track is set in Drum mode see below Page 14 Track Mode chord Eu J mu c D tt octave Track Easy Edit WE fttack amp m Atak G Aitak ma M B Atak lt 8 M Attack 8 M cr E n J WY NS Track Easy Edit lt Kick Worl Attack iH 3 4 Percl iz Attack 18 E Attack 8 Attack 8 fc Attack Attack 8 facs Here is the edit procedure 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F 1 F 4 buttons to select a Program parameter or its value For the Drum and Percus sion tracks see below the Drum tracks section 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the Program parameter or its value Parameters Attack PERF STYLE
256. Page number amm nn i E i s sve nay J m p Edit Quantize Fa Enji CUCM Trk All Rezal J 5001 61 G08 EBBI B1 192 BothomG 1 Tor CS Style Play icon When on this icon indicates that the instrument is in Style Play mode Page header The header shows the name of the current edit page As a general rule the header is divided in a first word identifying the section name e g Edit Quantize is an Edit section page and a second word referring to the page name e g Quantize Section name Page name SS SS eee THERE Edit Duantize Page number This area shows the current page number A H Each pair of VOLUME VALUE A H buttons selects a different parameter of command depending on the edit page After selecting a parameter you can change its value by pressing one of the two buttons in a pair or using the TEMPO VALUE controls 62 Style Record mode Page 1 Edit Quantize PAGE 1 EDIT QUANTIZE The quantize function may be used to correct any rhythm error after recording or to give the pattern a groovy feeling c aap om enm nn i n E j mu toi E d sve J Edit Guarbize fo EU CUCU Trk All Peso zh SHEL G1 GG EBBI 01 15z BottomsG 1 Tor CS After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm E
257. Percussion 11 Acc1 5 12 16 40 Style Play operating mode What s a Style 9 STYLE PLAY OPERATING MODE The Style Play mode is the boot up operating mode When in this mode you can play Styles i e automatic accompaniments or just play with one to four Real time tracks on the keyboard Upper 1 3 and Lower WHAT S A STYLE A Style is a rhythm accompaniment structure that sim ulates a band backing your solos In a vertical direction it is composed of 8 different tracks Drums Percussion Bass and 5 different har monic or melodic instruments You can play on the keyboard with 4 more Realtime tracks Upper 1 3 and Lower In a horizontal direction it is a series of Style Elements ie the various sets of patterns for each chord and each of the Intros Variations Fills Breaks and End ings STYLES AND PERFORMANCES Styles and Performances are linked in many ways e When the SINGLE TOUCH LED is on selecting a Style also changes the Realtime Keyboard tracks a Single Touch Setting is selected The Perfor mance settings are overridden e When the STYLE CHANGE LED is on selecting a Performance also selects a Style the one whose number is memorized with the Performance e When pressing the WRITE button you can save the track s settings either in a Performance a Style Performance or a Single Touch Setting STS CHANGING AND RESETTING THE TEMPO While in the main page of the Style Pl
258. Pop Syn Pad Synth 1 121 3 105 Jaw Harp SFX 121 5 91 Future Pad Synth 1 121 0 106 Shamisen Guitar y 121 6 91 TsunamiWave Synth 1 121 0 107 Koto Guitar Y 121 7 91 FreshBreath Synth 1 121 1 107 Taisho Koto Guitar Y 121 8 91 RavelianPad Synth 1 121 2 107 Kanun Guitar 121 9 91 FullVox Pad Synth 1 121 3 107 Kanun Trem Guitar 162 Factory Data Programs Program Change order CC00 CC32 PC Name Liverpool Bank GM2 CC00 CC32 PC Name Liverpool Bank GM2 121 4 107 Kanun Mix Guitar 121 2 122 Thunder SFX Y 121 0 108 Kalimba Mallet amp Bell Y 121 3 122 Wind SFX Y 121 1 108 VeloKalimba Mallet amp Bell 121 4 122 Stream SFX Y 121 0 109 Bag Pipe Woodwind Y 121 5 122 Bubble SFX Y 121 1 109 War Pipes Woodwind 121 0 123 Bird Tweet SFX Y 121 0 110 Fiddle Strings amp Vocals Y 121 1 123 Dog SFX Y 121 0 111 Shanai Woodwind N 121 2 123 HorseGallop SFX Y 121 1 111 Zurna Woodwind 121 3 123 Bird Tweet2 SFX Y 121 2 111 Hichiriki Woodwind 121 0 124 Telephone 1 SFX y 121 0 112 Tinkle Bell Mallet amp Bel Y 121 1 124 Telephone 2 SFX Y 121 1 112 Gamelan Mallet amp Bel 121 2 124 Door Creak SFX Y 121 2 112 BaliGamelan Ma
259. ROGRAM PERFOR MANCE section to select a Program See Selecting a Program on page 25 for more information Tempo This is the tempo of Sequencer 1 The Tempo is one of the AMSs see AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 124 Use the SHIFT DIAL combination to change it A Group This non editable parameter shows which group the Program is included into A group is the equivalent of a PROGRAM PERFORMANCE button B CC00 This non editable parameter shows the value of the Control Change CC 00 message or Bank Select MSB for the selected Program C CC32 This non editable parameter shows the value of the Control Change CC 32 message a k a Bank Select LSB for the selected Program D PC This non editable parameter shows the value of the Program Change PC message for the selected Pro gram Values are in the standard 0 127 MIDI number ing format Note Some manufacturers could use the 1 128 numbering system when connecting your Liverpool to an instrument of this kind increment the PC value by 1 unit Effects In Program mode the Program uses its own effects instead of relying on A D effects Two effect processors FX1 and FX2 are available The MIDI channel In Program mode Liverpool receives and transmits on the same channel of the Upper 1 track If the Global channel is assigned notes can be received also on this channel See Page 6 MIDI IN Channels on page 128 and Page 10 MIDI OUT
260. Rename procedure 1 Insert the card that contains the file to be renamed into the card slot 2 Press F 1 to scan the card 3 Move the item to rename to the first line Then press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons You are prompted to change the name Si lerem LT dle mL Move the cursor using the DOWN and UP but tons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button 4 Press F 2 RENAME to confirm The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort 142 Card Edit environment Page 8 Utilities 1 PAGE 8 UTILITIES 1 This page includes a set of card utilities Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to reach this page tempo transpose nt octave Maajah 4 Largiuinii i E Bo Loo p Sb Cardinfo SED Info Save 0 5 Backur Data RestorebData SD info Select this command to see the name of the inserted card and the free space on it If pressed without a card inserted the No card Unformatted Press Exit warning appears Please insert a card and press ENTER or EXIT to abort SSD info Select this command to see the free space on the Solid State Disk SSD used as the system s internal memory Save OS This command starts an Operating System backup to save a
261. Rotor Ratio Stop 0 50 2 00 Adjusts the low range side rotor rotation speed Standard value is 1 00 Selecting Stop will stop the rotation f Horn Rotor Balance Rotor 1 99 Horn Sets the level balance between the high range horn and low range rotor Mic Distance 0 100 Sets the distance between the microphone and rotary speaker gt g Mic Spread 0 100 Sets the angle of left and right microphones Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 D327 h Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a Sw This parameter sets how the modulation source switches between rotation and stop When Sw Toggle the speaker rotates or stops alternately each time you press the pedal or operate the joystick Each time the value for the modulation source exceeds 64 the speaker rotates or stops alternately When Sw Moment the speaker is rotating It stops only when you press the pedal or operate the joystick Rotation will occur when the value of the modulation source is less than 64 and will stop when the value is 64 or greater b Sw This parameter sets how the rotation speed slow and fast is switched via the modulation source When Sw Toggle the speed is switched between slow and fast each time you press the p
262. SCALE This page lets you program the alternative scale for the Song tracks chord tempo com com J mye awilc d t octave e Tuning Scale Scale User Kew C Hote DH Detune 63 Scale Alternative scale for the Song tracks See Scales on page 229 for a list of available scales To enable disable the alternative scale for each Song track see Page 7 Tuning PitchBend Scale on page 98 Key Parameter required for some Scales when you should set a preferred key Note Note in edit to be detuned This parameter can be accessed when a User Scale is selected Detune Note detune compared to the standard Equal tuning This parameter can be accessed when a User Scale is selected 98 Song operating mode Page 7 Tuning PitchBend Scale PAGE 7 TUNING PITCHBEND SCALE This page lets you program the Pitch Bend range for the Song tracks Furthermore it lets you activate deac tivate the alternative scale for each track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again D npo amm nus Dui du e juniF Bend scale fo Pe 2 SoH PE 2 SeH B B PE 2 Sor FE 2 SoH B PE 2 Sor PER 2 SoH PE 2 SoH FE 2 SoH tempo Cmm cm J nyem oic g e Tu
263. SMF Note When saving a Song as a SME an empty measure in automatically inserted to the beginning of the Song This measure contains various Song initialization parameters 1 Ifyou are in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the Main page 2 Select the Save Song button The Save Song page appears Myce BILE B 5 octave e amp Save Sona LL P HEW_NAME MID It EISOES MY SONG MID Tm Sb LOAD OPEN CLOSE 3 Move the folder where you wish to save your Song to the first line of the display using the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Press F 3 OPEN to open it Close the current folder by pressing F 4 CLOSE 4 Whenin the selected folder you can save the Song over an existing midifile a file with a MID extension or create a new midifile To overwrite an existing midifile move it to the first line of the display To create a new midifile move the NEW NAME MID item to the first line of the display 5 When the NEW NAME MID item is selected press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons You are prompted to assign a name to the new file RELL HOPIE MID DL x T Move the cursor using the DOWN and UP but tons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button 6 When you have fini
264. Send Section name Page name fol ee o A Es ed er EELSSZI sS dora oed B Selected Sequencer These indicators show if the currently selected sequencer is Seq1 or Seq2 Go to the Main page and use the A and B VOLUME VALUE buttons to select a sequencer Page This area shows the current page number A H Each pair of VOLUME VALUE buttons select a differ ent parameter of command depending on the edit page 76 Song Play operating mode Page 1 Mixer Volume PAGE 1 MIXER VOLUME PAGE 2 MIXER PAN Here you can adjust the volume for each of the 16 Here you can adjust the pan for each Song track sequencer tracks Press both VOLUME VALUE button Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between to mute unmute the corresponding track Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again A muted track remains muted even when selecting a chord tempo neasure different Song ignes mir B Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Gali Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again Mixer Pan tempo emm ox a CHAA CHa B gee Bo a ir C48 a 3 E B Cen CHAA ea fieri Ue lune C488 CH B manem GGG mw OH B a ga Baz g cena am emm B prag HBE l gq HE Frac
265. Single Off 186 Baya Mute1 Off 44 G 2 179 CastDouble O 182 MaracasPush Off 45 A2 180 Guiro Long 2 184 Baya Open Off 46 A 2 181 Guiro Short 2 219 Cabasa Up Off 47 B2 180 Guiro Long 2 190 Tabla Open Off 48 C3 198 Vibraslap O 192 Tabla Mute1 Off 49 C 3 199 Claves O 198 Vibraslap Off 50 D3 135 88 Clave O 189 Tabla Na off 51 D 3 216 216 Cuica Lo gt Cuica Lo 3 214 Triangle Mute 3 52 E3 215 215 Cuica Hi Cuica Hi O 116 BD Orch off 53 F3 202 TimbaleLo Open O 213 Triangle Open 3 54 F 3 200 Woodblock1 O 181 Guiro Short Off 55 G3 204 TimbaleLo Rim O 311 Jingle Bell Off 56 G 3 200 Woodblock1 O 180 Guiro Long off 57 A3 203 TimbaleLo Mute O 232 Marc Tree LP off 58 A 3 200 Woodblock1 O 231 Marc Tree Off 59 B3 205 TimbaleHi Edge 9 182 MaracasPush Off 60 C4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 O 122 Hand Claps Off 61 C 4 226 ChachaBell O 127 88 Claps Off 62 D4 206 TimbaleHi Rim1 O 144 DJ Scratch1 off 63 D 4 227 Mambo Bell O 145 DJ Scratch2 Off 64 E4 208208 Timbale Paila Timbale Paila O 150 DJ HitRub Off 65 F4 168 BongoLo Open Off 234 SambaWhistle O 66 F 4 225 Cowbell off 234 SambaWhistle O 67 G4 169 BongoLo Slap off 165 CongaHi Slap2 O 68 G 4 225 Cowbell off 166 CongaHeel O 69 A4 171 BongoHi Open off 161 CongaHi Open Off 70 A 4 174 BongoHi Stk2 Off 158 CongaLo Open O 71 B4 172 172 BongoHi Slap BongoHi Slap off 215 Cuica Hi O 72 C5 158 158 CongaLo OpenCongaLo Open Off 216 Cuica Lo O 73 C 5 160 CongaLoSlap off 208 Timb
266. Style Element and Chord Variation This parameter can t be edited To select a different Style Element and Chord Variation press EXIT to go back to the Main page of the Style Record mode see Main page on page 55 Position Position of the event shown in the display expressed in the form aaa bb ccc e aaa is the measure e bb is the beat e ccc is the tick each quarter beat 384 ticks You can edit this parameter to move the event to a dif ferent position Ev Event Type and values of the event shown in the display Depending on the selected event the value may change This parameter also shows the non editable End Loop marking when the end of a track is reached Event First value Second value Note Note name Velocity Ctrl Control Change number Control Change value Bend Bending value To change the event type use the C VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Event line then use the same but tons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a differ ent event type To select and edit the event s value use the F 3 and F 4 function keys and use the G VOLUME VALUE but tons or the TEMPO VALUE controls 64 Style Record mode Page 5 Event Filter Length Length of the selected Note event The value format is the same as the Position value Note If you change a length of 000 00 000 to a different value you can t go back to the original value This rathe
267. Style Record mode 59 Style Record procedure Press TRK SELECT to switch to the Style Tracks page Here you can assign the right Program to each Style track For more details see Style Tracks page on page 56 chord tempo J measure m n L M 4 Soft Beat V C M Brush 2 Fiano l E Fec Kit Guitar l 8 Aoba Strib z o HoouPianoz UoxPadl z Assign a Program to each track by using the PRO GRAM PERFORMANCE section Press START STOP to turn on its LED and enter the Step Record page See Step Record page on page 57 for more information on each parameter of this page Previous event Event to be inserted transpose Current position Step value Waiting for a keystroke The first two lines a are the latest inserted event The last two lines b are the event currently in edit ready to be inserted The Empty event marks the beginning of the pat tern when there are no events inserted It is auto matically inserted when entering the Record mode It will be removed when an event is inserted The Maaa bb ccc parameter in b is the current position This is the place where the note in edit will be inserted If you don t want to insert a note at this posi tion insert a rest instead as shown in step 7 To jump to the next measure filling the r
268. Swing 0 and Attack Level Start Level Swing 0 and Attack Start Level Swing 0 and Attack Swing and Breack Level Swing Level Swing and Breack Level Level Swing and Breack Level are set to Swing are set to Swing are set to AMS L Alternate Modulation Source This parameter specifies the source that will control the Level parameters of the amp EG See AMS Alter nate Modulation Source list on page 124 Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have For example if AMS is Velocity setting Start Level Swing Attack Level Swing and Break Point Level Swing to and setting Intensity to a positive value will cause the amp EG volume levels to increase as you play more strongly Setting Intensity to a negative values will cause the amp EG volume levels to decrease as you play more strongly With a setting of 0 the levels will be as specified on Page 16 Amp EG 99 499 Intensity value Start Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS will change Start Level If Intensity is set to a posi tive value setting this parameter to will allow AMS to increase the EG level and setting this parame ter to will allow AMS to decrease the EG level With a setting of 0 no change will occur Attack Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS will change Attack Level If Intensity is set to a pos
269. TA CREATED WITH THE PA80 PA60 PA50 Liverpool data is perfectly interchangeable with its microARRANGER Pa80 Pa60 and Pa50 counterparts The only data Liverpool can t load from Pa80 Pa60 is the following e Digital Drawbar Programs e Input 1 2 settings e VHGI Vocal Guitar Processor Board settings e ECS settings e TO HOST port setting e Audio Output routing At the same time Pa80 and Pa60 can read any data cre ated with the Livepool microARRANGER and Pa50 CARD STRUCTURE Each card and the internal memory can contain files and folders The data structure in Liverpool is slightly more rigorously determined than in a computer due to the pre configured data structure inside the instru ment s memory The diagram on the right shows the global structure of a Liverpool card FILE TYPES The following tables describe all the file and folder types the Liverpool can manage Here are the files you can read or write on the Liverpool Extension File folder type SET All the User data This is a folder containing other fold ers GBL Global Seq1 Seq2 Setup PRF Performance PCG User Program STY User Style The Liverpool can also read the following common types of data Extension File type MID Midi file Standard MIDI File SMF KAR Karaoke file JBX Jukebox MYDIR SET GLOBAL F BANKO1 GBL PERFORM BANKO01 PRF 1 1 Grand Piano
270. TERSK Things We Said Today THINGSWE Here There And Everywhere HERETHER Ticket To Ride TICKETTO Hey Bulldog HEYBULLD Tomorrow Never Knows TOMORROW Hey Jude HEYJUDE Two of us TWO OFUS Honey Pie HONEYPIE Wait WAIT Am The Walrus IAM WLR We Can Work It Out WECANWRK Feel Fine IFEELFIN When I m Sixty Four WHENIMSX If Fell IF IFELL With A Little Help From My Friends WITHALIT I m So Tired IMSOTIRE Yellow Submarine YELLOWSU I m Down IM DOWN Yer Blues YERBLUES In My Life INMYLIFE Yesterday YESTERDY Should Have Known Better ISHOULD You Never Give Me Your Money YOUNEVER It Won t Be Long ITWONTBE Your Mother Should Know YOURMOTH l ve Got a Feeling IVE GOTA You re Going To Lose that Girl YOURGOIN l ve Just Seen a Face IVE JUST You ve Got To Hide Your Love Away YOUVEGOT Want You She s So Heavy All Songs are written by John Lennon Paul McCartney IWANTYOU You Can t Do That Copyright Sony ATV Music Publishing LLC All Rights Reserved YOU CANT 150 Factory Data Programs bank order
271. TT Neusorns 4 Metro OFF Meter 44 Tutorial 31 Playing a Song 3 Press the F 1 button to select the SD card SD chord E amm amnem aor E ILLI octave ing seq a m x d mop arca um Sgue sona A C HEWLHBPE MID l SD SAE OPEM CLOSE 4 Move the folder where you wish to save your Song to the first line of the display using the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Press F 3 OPEN to open it Close the current folder by pressing F 4 CLOSE 5 To create a new file move the NEW_NAME MID item to the first line of the display 6 When the NEW_NAME MID item is selected press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons You are prompted to assign a name to the new folder BEI MONE Myr Im Rag TINPTI Move the cursor using the DOWN and UP but tons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button 7 When you have finished writing a name for the new midifile press F 2 SAVE to confirm The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Need more information Go to Backing Sequence operating mode on page 82 The Reference Guide includes all the information you need PLAYING A SONG 1
272. Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Amt i i 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 E ance on page 177 074 Exc Compr Exciter Compressor This effect combines a mono type exciter and a com pressor You can change the order of the effect connec tion Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left gt WIDS Routii mE Exciter XN Compressor EQ Trim LEQ HEQ gt lt P Exciter 1 Comp H i Output Level Right o t Waina nvelope Contra gaa 7 X Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Fx 011 b X Emphatic Point 0 70 Sets the frequency range to be emphasized Fx 011 X EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 X Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 d Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 C Sensitivity 1 100 Sets the sensitivity Fx 002 C Attack 1 100 Table Sets the attack level on page 178 Fx 002 Output Level 0 100 Sets the compressor output level Fx 002 Routing XCT gt CMP CMP gt XCT 9 Switches the order of the exciter and compressor
273. This parameter is the main quantization value to be varied with the Acc Swing and Window values 3 0 32 1 4 Grid resolution in musical values a 3 after the value means triplet For exam ple when you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 division mid ii PY Acc Accuracy Accuracy percentage of quantize For example if Acc 50 and the note is 20 tics away from the coarse grid it is moved to the grid of only 10 tics 0 No accuracy The quantize is not executed 100 Maximum accuracy The note is moved exactly at the grid position Swing Asymmetry of quantization Grid axis are moved to the nearest grid axis 0 Even numbered axis are totally moved over the previous odd numbered axis 50 Axis are perfectly equidistant 72 Song Play operating mode The Write window 100 Even numbered axis are totally moved over the following odd numbered axis Swng 50 Swng 25 Swng 75 Window Area of quantize intervention bordering the grid axis 0 The quantize window corresponds to the axis No quantization happens 100 The quantize window extends to the near est window all events are quantized Win 0 Win 50 OPPP Win 100 i i i PED EP EY ED 2D amp Eh amp THE WRITE WINDOW You can save onto the internal memory a Seql Seq2 Setup There is a separate Setup f
274. Tky Mute O 54 F 3 212 Tambourin Acc2 off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 211 Tambourin Acc1 Off 211 Tambourin Acc1 O 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal O 345 Darbuka 2 Off 302 Dbk Tky Rim O 56 G 3 225 Cowbell off 225 Cowbell off 225 Cowbell off 225 Cowbell O 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 350 Darbuka D3 Off 302 Dbk Tky Rim O 58 A 3 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap off 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up O 59 B3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 117 Orch Cymb O 339 Bandir Closed Off 304 Douf Dom ak Off 60 C4 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open O 353 Hollo 2 Off 307 Douf Tek ak 2 Off 61 C 4 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open O 168 BongoLo Open off 168 BongoLo Open off 62 D4 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap O 353 Hollo 2 Off 306 Douf Tek ak 1 Off 63 D 4 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open O 64 E4 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open O 305 Douf rim ak Off 305 Douf rim ak O 65 F4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 O 344 Darbuka 1 Closed Off 328 Tabla Dom Off 66 F 4 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open O 348 Darbuka D1 4 348 Darbuka D1 4 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell O 346 Darbuka 3 4 331 Tabla Tak 4 68 G 4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell O 349 Darbuka D2 off 329 Tabla Flam O 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up O 341 Darbuka 1 Tek7 Off 330 Tabla Rim O 70 A 4 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush O 341 Darbuka 1 Tek7
275. Touch PrgChange Program Change SysExcl System Exclusive All CC All Control Change messages 0 127 Control Change message 0 127 See MIDI Controllers on page 230 for a list of available Control Change messages PAGE 10 MIDI OUT CHANNELS In this page you can assign to any MIDI OUT channel one of Liverpool s tracks Use the TRACK SELECT but ton to switch from channels 1 8 to channels 9 16 c j g ubl Midi Out Chnl Ch i UF 1 Ch SEP Ch z L ME Ch ACEI Ch S BASS Ch PIBDDZ Ch 4 UF 2 Ch SACI Channel gt GBL You can assign to each channel one of the following tracks Off No track assigned Lower Lower track Upper1 3 One of the Upper tracks Drum Drum track Perc Percussion track Bass Bass track Accl 5 One of the Auto accompaniment tracks S1 T1 16 One of Sequencer 1 tracks S2 T1 16 One of Sequencer 2 tracks SQ Tr01 16 Use these channels to send data generated by a track with the same name on either or both onboard sequencers at the same time Use this channel to send notes recognized by the Chord Recognition engine to the MIDI OUT This is useful for example to control an external Harmonizer from the Liverpool using the Lower track to play chords even if the track is in mute Chord PAGE 11 MIDI OUT FILTERS Use this page to set up to 8 filters for the MIDI data sent by the Liverpool
276. UME VALUE buttons press PAGE to select a page or press EXIT to exit the menu When in a page press EXIT to go back to current oper ating mode Style Play Song Play Song Backing Sequence chord tempo J cog Global Midi MEM General CLT Midi Out Pdl4Fzu5ld Midizet Chl Midi In PAGE 1 GENERAL CONTROLS This page contains various general parameters setting the status of the keyboard the speakers and the metro nome Speakers On Autolffi Yes amp Vel Curve Velocity Curve gt GBL This parameter sets the sensitivity of the keyboard to your touch 1 No dynamic control available Dynamic values are fixed as in a classic organ 2 9 Curves from the lightest one to the hard est one M Tune Master Tune gt GBL This is the master tuning of the instrument Use it to adapt your keyboard tuning to an acoustic instrument for example an acoustic piano 50 Lowest pitch 00 Standard pitch A4 440Hz 50 Highest pitch Scale gt GBL This parameter sets the main scale or temperament for the whole instrument apart for tracks where a dif ferent scale is selected by a Performance or STS see Scale on page 44 See Scales on page 229 for a list of available scales Note You cannot select a User scale in Global mode Key gt GBL This parameter is needed
277. Variations 2 Fills 2 Intros 2 Endings Counter In Break Synchro Start Stop Tap Tempo Reset Fade In Out Bass Inversion Manual Bass Tempo Lock Memory Accompaniment Volume Accompaniment Mute Drum Mapping Snare amp Kick Designation Single Touch General controls Master Volume Ensemble Octave Transpose Master Transpose Split Point Style Change Tracks Vol ume Quarter of Tone Assignable Slider Joystick Dial Pads 4 Assignable Pads Stop button Song Play XDS Crossfade Dual Sequencer player 2 Sequencers with separate Start Stop Pause lt lt Rewind and gt gt Fast Forward controls Balance control Lyrics data are displayed on screen Jukebox function SMF Direct Player formats 0 and 1 Song Backing Sequence Easy Record function Full featured sequencer 16 tracks SMF native format Pedals Damper Assignable continuous footswitch Realtime controllers Joystick pitch modulation Assignable slider Pads MIDI IN OUT Individual track assignement Auto setup functions MIDI Setup Audio Inputs Line impedance Audio Outputs Line impedance L MONO R PHONES Main Amplifier 2 x 5 Watt Amplifier Speakers 2 x 10 cm speakers Power Consumption 9 Watt Dimensions W x D x H 873 x 277 x 91 mm 34 37 x 10 91 x 3 58 without music stand Weight 4 2 kg 9 26 Ibs Accessories Quick Start Guide AC adapter DC12V Music
278. XIT to abort E CV Style Element Chord Variation Non editable These read only parameters show which Style Element and Chord Variation are currently selected for editing See the Main page E Style Ele ment and CV Chord Variation parameters on page 55 for information on selecting a different Style Element and Chord Variation Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected Drum Acc5 Selected track Resol Resolution This parameter sets the quantization after recording For example when you select 1 8a all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 division No quanti INIDIID 1 4 D D D 3 1 32 d 1 4 Grid resolution in musical values An a after the value means no swing A b f after the value means swing quantization S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to quantize If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to quantize If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a sin gle percussive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track Note These parameters are available only when a Drum or Percussion track is selected PAGE 2
279. a F 3 and F 4 buttons After selecting the parameter value area with the G VOLUME VALUE buttons use these buttons to select respectively the first and second value of the event in edit SEQ1 PLAY STOP button Press PLAY STOP to listen to the Song in edit Press PLAY STOP again to stop it SHIFT lt lt or gt gt Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the lt lt or gt gt button to open the Go to Measure window Go to Measure i Enter Ok Exit Cancel Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a measure and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort SHIFT PAUSE While the sequencer is running keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the PAUSE button to display the event that is currently playing This is called the Catch Locator function INSERT Press the INSERT button to insert a new event at the current shown Position The default values are Type Note Pitch C4 Velocity 100 Length 192 Note You can t insert new events in an empty non recorded Song To insert an event you must first insert some empty measures To use the Insert function press MENU and one of the F VOLUME VALUE buttons then press the PAGE button twice DELETE Press the DELETE button to delete the event shown in the display PAGE 25 EVENT FILTER This page is where you can select the event types to be shown in the Event Edit page You can access this page by pressing the PAGE button while in the Event Edit page c
280. a Hi 4 237 Yeah Off 216 Cuica Lo 4 80 G 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 230 Finger Cymbal 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 81 A5 213 Triangle Open 5 230 Finger Cymbal 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 82 A 5 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 101 HH Old Open2 Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 85 C 6 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 87 D 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off af ei e T8 M PES LE Drum Kit instruments 120 0 28 House Kit3 120 0 29 House Kit4 120 0 32 Jazz Kit 120 0 40 Brush Kit1 Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 9 A 1 23 BD Pop Kick Off 23 BD Pop Kick O 17 BD House 1 Off 79 Tom 2 Floor O 10 A 1 125 99 SD off 125 99 SD O 125 99 SD Off
281. a Program can be controlled by CC 7 volume and 11 expression The resulting level is deter mined by multiplying the values of CC 7 and 11 The Global MIDI channel is used for control 0 127 Volume level Pan Pan stereo position of the selected oscillator Em This parameter is not available when editing a Drum Program Use the individual Pan control for each key see Pan on page 110 Random The sound will be heard from a different location at each note on L001 Places the sound at far left C064 Places the sound in the center R127 Places the sound to far right Note This can be controlled by CC 10 panpot A CC 10 value of 0 or 1 will place the sound at the far left a value of 64 will place the sound at the location specified by the Pan setting for each oscillator and a value of 127 will place the sound at the far right This is controlled on the global MIDI channel Pan modulation AMS Alternate Modulation Source Selects the source that will modify pan see AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 124 This change will be relative to the Pan setting Intensity Specifies the depth of the effect produced by AMS For example if Pan is set to C064 and AMS is Note Number positive values of this parameter will cause the sound to move toward the right as the note numbers increase beyond the C4 note i e as you play higher and toward the left as the note numbers decrease i
282. a list of the available effects see Effects on page 177 ModTrk Modulating Track Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modulate an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller B gt Asend B gt A Send Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect PAGE 4 FX C D SELECT This page lets you select the C and D effects Usually the C effect is a reverb while the D effect is a modulat ing effect Effects C and D are usually reserved to Sequencer 2 and the Realtime tracks You can however create Songs using all four effects in Song mode Depending on the status of the S2 FX Mode parameter Sequencer 2 might also use the A B effect pair see page 80 Dori iempo nn i n Ji in oi E d lal 6s em xib p Select C2 D eB Compressor Reu Gate ModTsUF i BoAsendi 127 78 Song Play operating mode Page 5 FX A editing Note When playing back a Song that makes use of all four effects A D you can t edit any effect parameter These parameters appear greyed out in the display Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again Edit the Song in Song mode to permanently change the effects c D Effects assigned to the C and D effect processors Usu al
283. aLo Open off 158 CongaLo Open O 65 F4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 O 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 O 66 F 4 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open O 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open O 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell O 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell O 68 G 4 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell O 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell 9 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up O 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up O 70 A 4 102 HH Hip Off 209 Tambourin Push O 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush O 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 72 C5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 73 C 5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 75 D 5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 78 F 5 215 Cuica Hi Off 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 79 G5 215 Cuica Hi Off 215 Cuica Hi 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 80 G 5 233 Flexatone 5 233 Flexatone 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 81 A5 233 Flexatone 5 233 Flexatone 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 82 A 5 101 HH Old Open2 Off 220 C
284. abasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 85 C 6 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 87 D 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 170 Factory Data Drum Kit instruments 120 0 41 Brush V S 2 120 0 48 OrchestraK 120 0 116 Arabian Kit 1 120 0 117 Arabian Kit 2 Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 9 A 1 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 17 BD House 1 Off 17 BD House 1 O 10 A 1 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 125 99 SD Off 125 99 SD O 11 B 1 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD O 12 co 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD O 13 C 0 77 Tom 2 Hi off 37 SD Full Room Off 37 SD Full Room O 14 DO 32 SD Dry 2 Off 48 SD Processed 1 48 SD Processed 1 15 D 0 5 BD Jazz Off
285. al accompaniment tracks tracks 1 5 other than Bass Drum and Percussion To mute these tracks press both VOLUME VALUE but tons To unmute them press both buttons again To change the volume keep one of the buttons pressed E Upper 1 Program F Upper 2 Program G Upper 3 Program H Lower Program Name of the Programs assigned to the Realtime Key board tracks Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the volume of the corresponding tracks STYLE TRACKS PAGE To see and edit the Style tracks press TRACK SELECT from the main page The TRACK SELECT LED turns on P cord Cmm j Du L 1 u a m Soft Beat STS Brush 2 Pu ard 2 Pero kit Guitar l 8 fooubsss Strrgered zc o AcovPisno2 UoxPadl z Press the TRACK SELECT button once again to go back to the main page A H Style Track Programs Name of the Programs assigned to the Style tracks Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the vol ume of the corresponding tracks HOW TO SELECT PROGRAMS You can assign a different Program to each of the Real time Keyboard and Style tracks See Selecting a Pro gram on page 25 for more information After selecting a new Program save your changes into a Performance Style or STS see below The Write win dow section Note If you select a Program while grouped tracks Drum Percussion or ACC are selec
286. alance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 pos i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance on page 177 4 Effects Mono Mono Chain 064 Cmp AmpSim 065 Cmp OD HiG Compressor Amp Simulation Compressor Overdrive Hi Gain This effect combines a mono type compressor and an This effect combines a mono type compressor and an amp simulation You can change the order of the effect overdrive high gain distortion You can change the connection order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out a Routing CER Routing p Wet Dry Compressor KY wx Compressor f N Overdrive Hi Gain 3BandPEQ Compa Driver LOA ANI L3 Output Level Output Level EQTrim LEQ HEQ gt H lt Comp 5 gt Amp Simulation Filter T Output Level f Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Drive Right i i Z n k i f Sa Dry 9 f f a Toy L Envelope Control Envelope Control C Sensitivity 1 100 a C Sensitivity 1 100 Sets the sensitivity Fx 002
287. ale PythagoreanPythagorean scale based on the music theories of the great Greek philosopher and matematician It is most suitable for melodies Werckmeister Late Baroque Classic Age scale Very suit able for XVIII Century music Arabic Kirnberger Harpsichord scale very common during the XVIII Century Scale of the Indonesian Gamelan The octave is divided in 5 notes C D F G A The remaining notes are tuned as in the Equal tuning Scale of the Indonesian Gamelan The octave is divided in 7 notes all white keys when Key is C The black keys are tuned as in the Equal tuning Simulates the stretched tuning of an acoustic piano Basically an equal tuning the lowest notes are slightly lower while the highest notes are slightly higher than the standard User User scale i e scale programmed by the user for the Style Play Backing Sequence and Song Play modes The user scale can be saved to a Performance Style Perfor mance STS or Song You can t select a User scale in Global mode Slendro Pelog Stretch 230 MIDI Controllers 20 MIDI CONTROLLERS The following is a table including all Control Change cc CC Name Liverpool Function messages and their effect on various Liverpool func
288. ale Paila O 74 D5 159 CongaLoMtSlp Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 O 75 D 5 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 206 TimbaleHi Rim1 O 76 E5 161161 CongaHi Open CongaHi Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 77 F5 162 CongaHiMute Off 135 88 Clave Off 78 F 5 166 CongaHeel off 136 88 Cowbell off 79 G5 164 CongaHi Slap1 Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 80 G 5 167 CongaToe Off 196 Taiko Rim Off 81 A5 165 CongaHi Slap2 Off 195 Taiko Open Off 82 A 5 224 Agogo Bell Off 143 Zap2 Off continues on the next page continued 120 0 66 TRI Per KIT 120 0 67 i30 Perc Kit Note Sample Excl Sample Excl 83 B5 224 Agogo Bell O 119 SD Orch Roll 5 84 C6 183 182 MaracasPull gt MaracasPush Off 120 SD Orch 5 85 C 6 217 217 Shaker1 Shaker1 O 117 Orch Cymb 6 86 D6 218 218 Shaker2 Shaker2 9 117 Orch Cymb 6 87 D 6 221220 Cabasa Tap Cabasa Down Off 336 Udu f open Off 88 E6 2192221 Cabasa Up Cabasa Tap O 155 Orchestra Hit Off 89 F6 222 5223 Caxixi Hard Caxixi Soft O 155 Orchestra Hit Off 90 F 6 209 Tambourin Push O 155 Orchestra Hit Off 91 G6 2115211 Tambourin Acc1 Tambourin Acc1 O 155 Orchestra Hit Off 92 G 6 210 Tambourin Pull O 155 Orchestra Hit Off 93 A6 212 Tambourin Acc2 O 155 Orchestra Hit Off 94 A 6 2285228 Sleigh Bell5Sleigh Bell O 155 Orchestra Hit Off 95 B6 234 SambaWhistle 4 155 Orche
289. ale os ser ra REY RYXRaL 34 Page 24 Preferences controls 51 Style Record mode ss 52 The Style s structure 0 0 2 6 cece eee eee eee 52 Style Import Export 0 6 eee 53 Entering the Record mode 0 53 Listening to the Style while in Record Edit mode 53 Exit and Save AbortStyle 00 54 The Write window eene 54 List of recorded events 0 00 cece eee eee 54 Fast Delete using the control panel buttons 54 Main page saci iota ce ete ia gadis ied bias 55 Style Tracks page 6 cece eee eee 56 Step Record page 6 eee eee cece eee eee 57 Style Record procedure 00 e eee eee 58 Men igi R9 RYReRERG E hehe doles doa CES FRU 61 Edit page structure 0 cece eee eee eee 61 Page 1 Edit Quantize 008 62 Page 2 Edit Transpose 00 000s 62 Page 3 Edit Velocity 0 00 cee eee eee eee 63 Page 4 Event Edit eee erem 63 Page 5 Event Filter 0 eee eee 64 Event Edit procedure 0000000 65 Page 6 Edit Delete 00 cece eee eee 66 Page 7 Edit Delete All 0 0 cece eee eee 67 Page 8 Edit Copy lesen 67 Page 9 Style Element Controls Programs 68 Page 10 Style Element Controls Expression 68 Page 11 Style Element Controls Keyboard Range 68 Pag
290. already recorded V1 V4 Variation 1 to Variation 4 I1 I2 Intro 1 to Intro 2 F1 F2 Fill 1 to Fill 2 E1 E2 Ending 1 to Ending 2 CV Chord Variation Use the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the line and the F 2 button to select this parameter This param eter lets you select the Chord Variation to edit after selecting the Style Element this Chord Variation per tains to Style Record mode 55 Main page Note When this parameter and the assigned value is in small letters co co1 the Chord Variation is empty when it is in capitals CV CV1 it is already recorded SE V1 V4 Youcan select one of 6 Chord Variations to edit SE I1 E4 You can select one of 2 Chord Variations to edit R Recording Mode This parameters lets you select between the Realtime and the Step recording modes Use one of the E VOL UME VALUE buttons and the F 3 function button to select this parameter Change its status using the E VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls RT Realtime This methods allows you to record in realtime each pattern of the Style Stp Step Record This method allows you to enter the events one at a time See Style Record procedure below for more infor mation RL Recording Length This parameter sets the recording length in measures of the selected track Its value is always equal to or a divider of the Chord Variation Length see next parameter This is not the total length of the Ch
291. alue the gate is closed when the input signal level exceeds the Threshold The gate operation controlled by the modulation source is also reversed c Threshold d Attack d Release This parameter sets the signal level below which Gate is applied when Envelope Select is set to L R Mix L Only or R Only The Attack and Release parameters set the Gate attack time and release time Gate Threshold Output Level t s E E 3 E g 1 T 9 a Louder Eouderce input Level Gate Attack Release i USE mn Wet lu Aitacketih pm Per e Delay Time This parameter sets the delay time of the Gate input If the sound has a very fast attack increase the delay time so that the signal will be input after the Gate is opened This will pre serve the attack part of the sound 006 OD HGainWah Overdrive Hi Gain Wah This distortion effect utilizes an Overdrive mode and a Hi Gain mode Controlling the wah effec
292. ameter enables you to adjust the width of the steps 184 Effects Filter Dynamic When LFO Waveform is set to Random the LFO Step Freq parameter uses a random LFO cycle Random Filter LFO LFO Frequency LFO Step Freq Yl f Hi LFO Step Freq Step Tri Random b LFO Phase degree Offsetting the left and right phases alters how modulation is applied to the left and right channels creating a swelling affect LFO Phase degree 180 90 0 degree e BPM f Step Base Note f Times The width of an LFO step or a cycle of random LFO is obtained by multiplying the length of a note 3 selected for Step Base Note in relation to the tempo specified in BPM or the MIDI Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI by the number specified in the Times parameter j Wet Dry The effect sound s phase will be reversed when you set this parameter in the range of values from Wet to 1 99 011 Excit Enhan Stereo Exciter Enhancer This effect is a combination of the Exciter which adds a punch to the sound and the Enhancer which adds spread and presence Stereo In Stereo Out Left Wet Dry LEQ HEQ Lp Exciter EQ Trim F Delay AL Depth EQ Trim Delay e i X p Exciter x Enhancer i Righto ATI
293. amp Bell 121 1 89 Sine Pad Synth 1 Y 121 7 98 Bell Choir Synth 1 121 2 89 MasterPad Synth 1 121 0 99 Atmosphere Synth 2 Y 121 3 89 Power Synth Synth 1 121 0 100 Brightness Synth 2 Y 121 4 89 The Pad Synth 1 121 1 100 Lonely Spin Synth 1 121 5 89 Money Pad Synth 1 121 2 100 Syn Ghostly Synth 1 121 6 89 Dark Pad Synth 1 121 0 101 Goblins SFX N 121 7 89 Freedom Pad Synth 1 121 1 101 MotionRaver Synth 2 121 8 89 Analog Pad Synth 1 121 2 101 Digi IcePad Synth 1 121 9 89 Analog Pad2 Synth 1 121 0 102 Echo Drops SFX y 121 0 90 Polysynth Synth 1 Y 121 1 102 Echo Bell SFX y 121 1 90 Reso Sweep Synth 1 121 2 102 Echo Pan SFX Y 121 2 90 Sky Watcher Synth 1 121 3 102 Band Passed Synth 2 121 3 90 Syn Sweeper Synth 1 121 4 102 Pan Reso Synth 2 121 4 90 Super Sweep Synth 1 121 5 102 Moon Cycles Synth 1 121 5 90 Wave Sweep Synth 1 121 0 103 Star Theme SFX y 121 6 90 Cross Sweep Synth 1 121 0 104 Sitar Guitar Y 121 7 90 Dig PolySix Synth 1 121 1 104 Sitar 2 Guitar Y 121 8 90 Noisy Stabb Synth 1 121 2 104 SitarTambou Guitar 121 9 90 Mega Synth Synth 1 121 3 104 IndianStars Guitar 121 10 90 TecnoPhonic Synth 1 121 4 104 IndianFrets Guitar 121 11 90 Farluce Synth 1 121 5 104 Bouzouki Guitar 121 0 91 Choir Pad Synth 1 y 121 6 104 Tambra Guitar 121 1 91 Itopia Pad Synth 1 y 121 0 105 Banjo Guitar Y 121 2 91 Fresh Air Strings amp Vocals 121 1 105 BanjoKeyOff Guitar 121 3 91 Heaven Synth 1 121 2 105 Oud Guitar 121 4 91
294. an assign the Liverpool tracks to any of the MIDIIN channels Use the TRACK SELECT but ton to switch from channels 1 8 to channels 9 16 a E d f octave ea GblsMidiln Chnl Ch LF Ch SHIP Ch Z LOME Ch amp GLDOERL Ch S BAS5 Ch TiRDD Ch dF Ch Gate Channel gt GBL You can assign to each channel one of the following tracks Off No track assigned Lower Lower track Upper1 3 One of the Upper tracks Drum Drum track Perc Percussion track Bass Bass track Accl 5 One of the Auto accompaniment tracks S1 T1 16 One of Sequencer 1 tracks S2 T1 16 One of Sequencer 2 tracks Global Special channel to simulate the Liverpool s integrated controls keyboard pedals joy stick with an external keyboard or con troller MIDI messages coming on this channel are considered as being generated by Liverpool s integrated controllers On this special channel the Liverpool receives MIDI messages to remotely select Styles Performances STS and Style Ele ments See tables on page 146 and follow ing for more information on the received data Control PAGE 7 MIDI IN CONTROLS 1 This page is where you can program the Chord Recog nition channels for the internal arranger and a fixed velocity value for all notes appearing at the input chord e ca ls E la 2 LU ll S Val Lom itii i i e
295. ana ElGearPiarnc RcPiancodide El amp Granllide 5 Browse all the Programs in the selected bank using the PAGE buttons There can be various pages for each bank containing up to 8 Programs each 6 As you find the Program you are looking for select it using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons 7 If the DISPLAY HOLD LED is on press EXIT to exit this window SELECTING A STYLE A Style is a set of rhythm and accompaniment patterns You can select a Style from the internal memory or from a memory card see The DIRECT SD bank on page 40 1 Use the leftmost STYLE button to select a row of Style banks upper lower O IMER CJ C O souL amp FANE IN NHT 2 Select the STYLE bank containing the Style that you re looking for STYLE m GE al FE 0 P T LEA POP ROCK OOOO OOO 1 O souL amp FuNK JAZZ LATIN DANCE WORLD o LIVERPOOL STYLES A C C G The Style Select window appears Y chord tempo transpose i octave a style play a page Jazz Brush JazzWaltz i Med Swing Jazzialtz 2 Slow Swing 5 4 Suird SuirngBallad Food Swing 3 Each bank has one or two pages each page con taining up to eight Styles Select a page using the PAGE buttons 4 As you find the Style you are looking for select it using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons Note The new Style will enter at the next strong
296. andwidth of Band 2 Fx 006 E Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Band 3 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 2 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 Fx 006 E Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Band 3 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 3 d Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 Fx 006 E Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Band 4 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 3 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 Fx 006 E Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Band 4 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 4 5 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 Fx 006 W Frequency Bottom 0 100 Sets the lower limit of the wah center frequency Fx 009 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 4 Frequency Top 0 100 Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency Fx 009 f X Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Fx 011 W Sweep Mode Auto D mod LFO Selects the control from auto wah modulation source and LFO X Emphatic Point 0 70 Fx 009 sese 9 Sets the frequency range to be emphasized Fx 011 Src Off Tempo Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Selects the modulation source for the wah when Sweep Mode D mod Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Drez W LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz
297. animent tracks chord ES co mm cy Ty mr c B 1 m ka 1 UT BECEL Hode Tens Mm friff Trt B E MRL Tiin B amp MRF HRe T n m m MERE Tiin MiRe TOF S When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element VARIATION1 ENDING2 M Mode This setting harmonizes the notes of the Bass track or the Acc1 5 tracks to the new chord when the chord is changed Off Each time you play a new chord the cur rent notes will be stopped The track will remain silent until a new note will be encountered in the pattern Rt Retrigger The sound will be stopped and new notes matching the recognized chord will be played back Rp Repitch New notes matching the recog nized chord will be played back by rep itching notes already playing There will be no break in the sound This is very use ful on Guitar and Bass tracks T Tension Tension adds notes a 9th 11th and or 13th that have actually been played to the accompaniment even if they haven t been written in the Style pattern This parameter specifies whether or not the Tension included in the recognized chord will be added to the Acc1 5 tracks On The Tension will be added Off No Tension will be added 70 Song Play operating mode The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format 11 SONG PLAY OPERATING MODE The Song Play opera
298. aramet series ric equalizer and a wah You can change the order of the connection 058 Pa r4Eq Exc Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Parametric 4 Band EQ Exciter puo goin usos ic 4Band EQ Wah Auto Wah This effect combines a mono type four band paramet ric equalizer and an exciter Trim i Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out ran Wet Dry Right Exciter ae 3 Pus Dry gt Exciter E Trim 0 100 Non edie Sets the parametric EQ input level E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 a E Trim 0 100 Sets the parametric EQ input level Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 Fx 006 E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 1 b Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 Fx 006 E Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 1 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 Fx 006 E Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 2 t Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the b
299. arameter you can change the Tempo using the TEMPO VALUE section controls The Song will be played back using the manually selected tempo Auto The Tempo recorded to the Song will be used TRACKS 1 8 PAGE To see and edit tracks 1 8 press TRACK SELECT from the main page The TRACK SELECT LED turns on Press the TRACK SELECT button twice to go back to the main page D empo cn rd n J mge uui L D Ut octave zm ford o Pianal Pianol B B DkStrinas Buitar l B Legata StrenaEnz BrassuHern UoxPadi A H Tracks 1 8 Programs Name of the Programs assigned to tracks 1 8 Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the vol ume of the corresponding tracks TRACKS 9 16 PAGE To see and edit tracks 9 16 press TRACK SELECT once from the Tracks 1 8 page or twice from the main page The TRACK SELECT LED begins flashing Press the TRACK SELECT button again to go back to the main page chord empo mm com nuces mi yo oo od emm beh T eg e oorr B Strings UecaEns E D DkStrings Bassi 4 Legata Strneknez E BrassuHorn Strings c A H Tracks 9 16 Programs Name of the Programs assigned to tracks 9 16 Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the vol ume of the corresponding tracks LOAD SONG PAGE This page appears when you press PAGE or either the B Loa
300. ariation 4 an Up command will select Variation 1 After Variation 1 a Down command will select Variation 4 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 Up Down Style Play operating mode 49 Page 20 Style controls Drum Fill Inc Dec The next higher lower numbered Varia tion is selected When Variation 4 is reached an Inc command will select Vari ation 4 again When Variation 1 is reached a Dec command will select Variation 1 again Fill to Variation gt 1 22 gt 3 gt 4 auto matically selects one of the four available Style Variations at the end of the fill gt 1 gt 4 PAGE 21 STYLE CONTROLS WRAP AROUND KEYBOARD RANGE In this page you can program the Wrap Around func tion and the Keyboard Range for the Style tracks chord tempo n ds rw L Ut ge 1 1 EODD OL 4 11 Sb tl bWreaesRna t Prog rig Me ERGO M i2 ERi P Ripe bide ER Or Win bide ER Or avs LES Here is the edit procedure 1 Usethe VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a parameter 2 Use the F 1 F 4 buttons to move the cursor between the parameter and its status or value 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the parameter s status or value Prog Program PERF STYLE This parameter lets you select a different Program other than the one recorded into the Style Element Variations Fills Intros Endings Note This parameter is a
301. ass 121 13 61 Jazz Flute 121 1 73 Trumpet Ens 121 9 61 Old Shaku 121 1 77 Glen amp Boys 121 6 61 FluteSwitch 121 2 73 MutEnsembl2 121 4 59 FluteDyn5th 121 3 73 French Horn 121 0 60 Flute Frull 121 4 73 Syn Brass 2 121 0 63 Pan Flute 121 0 75 Brass Hit 121 25 61 Jazz Clarin 121 1 71 AttackBrass 121 8 61 Flute 2 121 9 73 BrassSect 2 121 1 61 Double Reed 121 1 68 TromboneEns 121 10 61 EnglisHorn2 121 1 69 Sax amp Brass 121 5 61 Recorder 2 121 1 74 Flute Muted 121 6 73 Nay 121 2 72 FrenchHorn2 121 1 60 Orch Flute 121 5 73 Syn Brass 3 121 1 62 WoodenFlute 121 7 73 Euro Hit 121 3 55 War Pipes 121 1 109 TightBrass2 121 12 61 ClarinetEns 121 5 71 Dyna Brass 121 14 61 Woodwinds 121 6 71 Trombones 121 11 61 Small Orch 121 1 72 Brass Band 121 16 61 Kawala 121 1 75 Brass Pad 121 3 63 Shaku 2 121 2 77 French Sect 121 2 60 Whistle 2 121 1 78 Syn Brass 4 121 1 63 Sect Winds 121 3 71 6th Hit 121 2 55 Sect Winds2 121 4 71 Power Brass 121 21 61 Clarinet G 121 2 71 Brass Expr 121 15 61 Folk Clarin 121 7 71 Dyna Brass2 121 22 61 Oboe 121 0 68 Film Brass 121 17 61 EnglishHorn 121 0 69 Brass Slow 121 18 61 Bassoon 121 0 70 ClassicHorn 121 3 60 Clarinet 121 0 71 ElectrikBrs 121 4 62 Piccolo 121 0 72 Brasslmpact 121 4 55 Flute 121 0 73 Fanfare 121 19 61 Recorder 121 0 74 Movie Brass 121 20 61 Bambu Flute 121 8 73 Sfz Brass 121 23 61 BlownBottle 121 0 76 Jump Brass 121 62 Shakuhachi 121 0 77 AnalogBras1 121 62 Whistle 121 0 78 AnalogBras2 121 63 Ocarina 121 0
302. ating mode 40 Damper Pedal Lue da sau aed deb Esctoe reco Ades 11 What s a Style ipod esit bebes bh eR BAR Fachada 40 Demo MEET E OR EAR 11 Styles and Performances oae rbecoce ipee one 40 The music stand 0 0 ccc cece eens 11 Changing and resetting the Tempo 40 The DIRECT SD bank 0 0 0 cece eee 40 Front panel 0 eee erect eee eee ees 12 Main pages sso oss duin E down baies entree Saou 41 Display and User Interface 19 Style tracks page eeeeee n B8B 41 Display controls 10322 499 eb don ead d EA AK 19 How to select Programs aso 4 SOR a eR Ret ere t 41 Interface structure oiii ers besa asus seuss 20 The Write window jecur eO ERE e ewes 42 Message windows cece ccc ccc s 21 Mentee sresti cete E bed ba roa 42 Symbols and Icons 145 cerex teret prt RR 21 Edit page structure 2 seien pburrrie ERO YET seen EP 42 Grayed out non available parameters 21 Page 1 Mixer Volume isi Reb CE rd e dona a 43 Page 2 Mixer Pan 1 eee eee 43 Rear panel esee nnn 22 Page 3 Mixer FX Send 0000 43 Page 4 Tuning Detune 00 00 c eae 44 Basic Guide Page 5 Tuning Scale 0 cece eee ee 44 Page 6 Tuning PitchBend Sensitivity 44 Basic operations elles 24 Page7 FX A B Select iansessonero Cre eie neus 44 Playing on the keyboard sisse 24 Page 8 FX C D Select ssss
303. ations where you can load new Programs from the memory card USER DK is where you can load new drum kits Each Program bank contains various pages each with up to 8 Programs You can browse them using the PAGE buttons Shortcut to see the original bank for a Performance or Program You can see the original bank where a Perfor mance or Program is contained Just keep the SHIFT button pressed and then press the lefmost button of the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section A message window will appear showing the name of the original bank Release the SHIFT button to exit the window Shortcut to see all pages of the selected bank To cycle all of the pages for a selected bank press the bank s button 45 PADS 1 4 STOP PERF gt STS These programmable pads can be used to trigger a sound effect Use the STOP button to stop a cyclic sound See List of sounds assignable to the Pads on page 228 Each Pad corresponds to a dedicated Pad track 46 TRANSPOSE PERF gt STYLE These buttons transpose the whole instrument in semi tone steps Master Transpose The transposition value is shown as a note name on the top right of the dis play transpose Press both buttons together to reset the Master Trans pose to zero 18 Front panel Note The Master Transpose has no effect on tracks set to Drum mode and even if set in a different status on the Drum and Percussion tracks See Page 14 Track Mode on page 46 and Pa
304. ave on filter A For example if AMS is Joystick Y higher settings of this parameter will allow greater change to be applied to LFO1 when you push the joystick 99 499 Parameter value Intensity to B Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have on filter B see Intensity to A PAGE 10 FILTER LFO2 Adjusts the depth of the cyclic modulation applied by LFO2 set on Page 18 LFO2 to the cutoff frequency of filters A and B For more information on the parame ters see Page 9 Filter LFO1 on page 115 nord E com J L D Filter LF zl scl Selected Qeclll Intensity to Ar HB Intensity to B T Joustick to Ar Tad PAGE 11 FILTER EG Here you can make settings for the EG that will pro duce time varying changes in the cutoff frequency of filters A and B for the selected oscillator The depth of the effect that these settings will have on the filter cut off frequency is determined by the Velocity and Intensity parameters e 5 cog Km ax Filter E Oct Selected Decii Start Level 53 Aitack Time TA Aitack Level 3 Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alternatively you can select oscillators using the F 1 F 4 buttons Filter envelope Note off Attack Level Sustain Level Note on Release Level
305. ay mode you can change the Tempo using the DIAL or the DOWN and UP buttons In any other page keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the Tempo To recall the Tempo stored in the current Style keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the DOWN or UP buttons THE DIRECT SD BANK In addition to the internal memory Styles you can have DIRECT SD Styles directly accessed from the card Just insert a card and press the DIRECT SD Style bank The card slot will read the first in alphabetical order SET folder in the card and will give you direct access to the Styles it contains no loading required Browse through the DIRECT SD Styles using the PAGE buttons You can have up to 6 pages and up to 48 DIRECT SD Styles in a card Folder DIRECT SD pages SET gt ST YLE gt USERO1 1 2 SET gt STYLE gt USERO2 3 4 SET gt STYLE gt USERO3 5 6 How to make the DIRECT SD bank To configure the DIRECT SD bank save your Styles into the first folder in the card Folders are read in alphabetical order Note The following procedures requires you overwrite the User Style banks Save these banks before proceeding to avoid loosing important data 1 Insert the card into the card slot 2 PressSD CARD and go to the Load page chord tempo m i je TI E t Ut SD 2 eof 1 page Pomme m ma md page i E rr Um tim e
306. be transposed Note The Master Transpose value is always shown in the upper right corner of the display Lr Hn Li REALTIME RECORD PROCEDURE Here is the general procedure to follow for the Real time Recording 1 Press SONG to enter the Song mode 2 Press RECORD to enter the Song Record mode You are now in the Main page of the Song Record mode and you can prepare your record ing For more details see Song Record page on page 93 tempo am RN nn i n Mem Lit L u odi EM e Record Hewson 64 Reciluerdub Trk i 985 Fetrar ni Meter 44 Sel Temro Temro Buta 3 Be sure one of the Overdub or Overwrite record ing options is selected see Rec Record mode on page 93 4 Set the tempo There are two ways of changing tempo Keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the tempo e Move the cursor to the Sel Tempo parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change tempo 92 Song operating mode 5 10 11 12 Step Record procedure Press TRK SELECT to switch to the Song Tracks 1 8 page C chord tempo comm comm j Mugen cor E D tt e ReciMeusona Pianol Pianol B B DkStringzs Guitare B Legato StrriEnsz BrazzsHorn WesPadl Press the button again to switch to the Song Tracks 9 16 page tempo
307. bell Off 136 88 Cowbell Off 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 O 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 58 A 3 198 Vibraslap O 198 Vibraslap O 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 59 B3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 60 C4 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open O 61 C 4 168 BongoLo Open off 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open O 62 D4 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap O 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 63 D 4 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open O 161 CongaHi Open O 64 E4 158 CongaLo Open off 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open O 65 F4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 66 F 4 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell O 68 G 4 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell O 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up O 70 A 4 101 HH Old Open2 Off 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush Off 101 HH Old Open2 O 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 72 C5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 73
308. button turns the Synchro Start and Synchro Stop functions on or off Press it repeatedly to turn the func tions on or off The LEDs will cycle in this order START START STOP OFF START LED ON When this LED is lit up just play a chord in the chord recognition area usually under the split point see CHORD SCANNING section on page 17 to auto matically start the Style running If you like you can turn one of the INTROs on before starting the Style START STOP LEDs ON When both LEDs are lit up raising your hand from the keyboard momentarily will stop the Style from playing If you play a chord again the Style starts again OFF All Synchro functions are turned off This button doubles as a DELETE function for the Backing Sequence and Song modes see chapters 12 and 13 It is also used to delete the selected character during text editing 24 TAP TEMPO RESET INSERT This is a double function button acting in a different way depending on the Style status stop play Tap Tempo When the Style is not playing you can beat the tempo on this button At the end the accom paniment starts playing using the tapped in tempo Reset When you press this button while the Style is in play the Style pattern goes back to the previous strong beat This button doubles as an INSERT function for the Backing Sequence and Song modes see chapters 12 and 13 It is also used to insert a character at the cursor p
309. c operations 25 Selecting a Performance The Performance Select window appears There are 8 Performances for each bank Last selected Performance tempo om ni i Ut octave eee m m page SLereoGrand Sterecirand StrirePiano Piancgstes Thin Stage Du Piano Midi Elect Piano DistElPiano 4 Select a Performance using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons 5 If the DISPLAY HOLD LED is on press EXIT to exit this window The STYLE CHANGE button When you select a Performance the Style may or may not change depending on the status of the STYLE CHANGE button When you save a Performance the current Style number is always memorized e Ifthe STYLE CHANGE LED is on the Style saved in the Performance will be selected If the STYLE CHANGE LED is off the Style doesn t change SELECTING A PROGRAM You can select a different Program i e sound to be played by a track Before selecting a Program you must select the track that you want to assign the Program to Note To assign different Programs to the Style tracks press TRACK SELECT to see the Style tracks If you select a Pro gram while grouped tracks Drum Percussion or ACC are selected the Program will be assigned to the last selected track Each Style Element Variations Fills can have dif ferent Programs so your selection might be automati cally reset when selecting a different Element
310. ce between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Dm ance on page 177 Eds oe d LFO Frequency Hz d Envelope Amount Hz Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 q y y ws p Ami O0 SUD e Depth e Envelope Amount These parameters set the modulation via an envelope input signal level The LFO speed is obtained by adding the LFO Frequency value to the Envelope Amount value multiplied by the input signal The LFO modulation depth is obtained by adding the Depth value to the Envelope Amount value multiplied by the input signal level e The following example indicates that the Depth is 0 with an LFO Frequency of 1 0Hz and the maxi mum input and that the Depth is 100 with a Fre quency of 8 0Hz with zero input LFO Frequency Hz 28 0 Envelope Amount Hz 7 0 198 Effects Mod P Shift Depth 100 Envelope Amount 100 Depth 0 100 Shimmer Sets the depth of LFO modulation Dze Level Dry Envelope FO Frequency Hz 8 0 Src Off Tempo m Envelope Amount Hz 7 0Hz f Depth 100 e Selects the modulation source of the depth of modulation y Envelope Amount 100 Louder Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the depth of modula tion Time Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between
311. ce folder is left unchanged For example if the USERO3 Style bank exists on the target folder but not in the source folder it is left untouched after copying the other banks When you decide not to overwrite data existing on the target folder is left unchanged therefore are not copied The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort the copy Copying a single file You can copy a single file from a generic folder to a dif ferent folder The file must reside on the root the main highest folder in the card hierarchy or into a generic folder You can t copy single files from a SET folder 1 2 3 Insert the card into the card slot Press F 1 to scan the card and show the file list Move the folder containing the file you wish to copy to the first line of the display If it is con tained in another folder use the F 3 OPEN but ton to open it Press F 4 CLOSE to go back to the previous hierarchic level Press F 3 OPEN to open the folder containing the file to copy Move the file to copy to the first line of the display Once the file is on the first line press F 2 COPY to confirm its selection The window s header changes from Copy from to Copy to ehoro Demo ni L ti ABE octavo n Dl wg pl page Cards Copo amp current dir ILILE SET EJ ETHNIC SET It Sb COPY OPEN CLOSE Move the target folder to the first
312. ce mode You must be in the main page of the mode If you are in Record mode go back to the Playback mode 2 Press SHIFT DELETE 3 The Delete Song message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort 13 SONG OPERATING MODE The Song operating mode is the full featured onboard sequencer where you can create from scratch or edit a Song You can also use this mode to edit the initial parameters of a Standard MIDI File either made with an external sequencer or with Liverpool own Song and Backing Sequence modes You can save the edited Song as a Standard MIDI File MID file and playback it either in Song Play Back ing Sequence or Song mode For a practical example of Song editing see Editing a Song on page 32 Note Songs on the internal SSD cannot be edited TRANSPORT CONTROLS While in Song mode use the SEQ1 transport controls for the Song playback See SEQUENCER TRANS PORT CONTROLS SEQ1 and SEQ2 on page 18 for more information MASTER VOLUME AND SEQUENCER VOLUME You can use the MASTER VOLUME and ACC SEQ VOLUME sliders to set the volume See Master Vol ume Sequencer Volume BALANCE on page 71 Move the BALANCE slider to the center or the left for the maximum volume of the sequencer Song mode relies on Sequencer 1 THE SONGS AND THE STANDARD MIDI FILE FORMAT The native Song format for Liverpool is the Standard MIDI File See The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format on page
313. chord or a second voice see Chords and second voices below 7 After inserting a new event you may go back by pressing the button This will delete the previ ously inserted event and set the step in edit again 8 When finished recording press SEQ1 PLAY STOP to turn off its LED The Main page of the Song Record mode appears again chord J Eu measure nn n J D i i DiE D e Record Newson ReciQverdub Trkil 385 SE ca Metros Ord Resol Meter 4 4 Sel Tempo Tempo Auto 9 From the Main page of the Song Record mode press RECORD to exit the Record mode While in the Main page of the Song mode you may press SEQ1 PLAY STOP to listen to the Song or select the Save Song command to save the Song to the card Chords and second voices With Liverpool you are not obliged to insert single notes in a track There are several ways to insert chords and double voices For more information see the Chords and second voices in Step Record mode sec tion on page 60 of the Style Record mode chapter Song operating mode 93 Song Record page SONG RECORD PAGE While in the Song mode press RECORD to enter the Song Record mode The Song Record page appears tempo measure nmi n E nye tot E d id l e kecord iMewsonad Reci werdub Trk l Sos E Metino Gnd Rezol 4 Meter 444 Sel Teneo Teneo Auto
314. ck All All tracks of the selected Style Style Ele ment or Chord Variation Drum Acc5 Single track of the selected Style Style Ele ment or Chord Variation Style Record mode 67 Page 7 Edit Delete All PAGE 8 EDIT COPY Here you can copy a track Chord Variation or Style Element inside the same Style or from a different one Furthermore you can copy a whole Style Warning The Copy operation deletes all data at the target location overwrite chord tempo measure r Ja mg orc D Lom i octave m s D Edit Cory ES From F i ai Soft Bast From Li Tesui Duz Tek DEUM Trk GRLIM After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Note If you copy too many events on the same tick the Too many events message appears and the copy operation is aborted Note When you copy over an existing Chord Variation Pro gram Change data is not copied to leave the original Pro grams unchanged for that Chord Variation When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element VARIATIONI ENDING2 From Style Use the first parameter to select the source Style to copy the track Chord Variation or Style Element from From to Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the source a
315. cks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again chord tempo mm e fixer Pan Cae Caen B B Can Can B Can Can Can Can B que oot Cm Mixer Pan B Crea Cad Cen Cre D Cen Cen B Ced Cre B Pan 64 Hard Left 00 Center 63 Hard Right Off The direct uneffected signal does not go to the outputs only the FX signal is heard for this track PAGE 3 MIXER FX BLOCK This page lets you select a pair of effect processor AB or CD for each of the Song track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again md Cum amm o nues OQ IC D 1 am e Mixer Fa Block Fa re FB E a pe FE gE RE E PB FB o EEXU omo emm comm s ques ID OO octave e Mixer FX Block Fa B m FB i U BE pg 2 BE AE PAGE 4 MIXER FX SEND A B OR C D This page lets you set the level of the track s direct uneffected signal going to the A and B or C and D Internal FX pair Go to the previous page Page 3 Mixer FX Block to select an FX pair Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 measure am J mye BILE D octave
316. compounds or flammable polishes KEEP THIS MANUAL After reading this manual please keep it for later refer ence KEEPING FOREIGN MATTER OUT OF YOUR EQUIPMENT Never set any container with liquid in it near this equipment If liquid gets into the equipment it could cause a breakdown fire or electrical shock Be careful not to let metal objects get into the equip ment If something does slip into the equipment unplug the AC adapter from the wall outlet Then contact your nearest Korg dealer or the store where the equipment was purchased THE FCC REGULATION WARNING FOR USA This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide rea sonable protection against harmful interference in a resi dential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interfer ence by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation betwe
317. cording On1 Metronome on with a one bar precount before starting recording On2 Metronome on with a two bar precount before starting recording 94 Song operating mode Step Record page Resol Resolution Use this parameter to set the quantization during recording Quantization is a way of correcting tim ing errors notes played too soon or too later are moved to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid set with this parameter thus playing perfectly in time Hi No quantization applied A 1 32 2 1 8 Grid resolution in musical values For example when you select 1 16 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 16 division When you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division No quanti wie NDE D me 2 DE D we iD D D Meter This is the meter or time signature of the Song You can edit this parameter only when the Song is empty i e before you begin recording anything To insert a meter change in the middle of the Song use the Insert Measure function see page 102 Sel Tempo Select Tempo Select this parameter to use the TEMPO VALUE con trols to set the tempo Note You can always change the Tempo when other param eters are selected by keeping the SHIFT button pressed and rotating the DIAL Note The tempo is always record in overwrite mode old data is replaced by the new data Tempo Tempo mode This parameter sets the way tempo events are read Record
318. cts Here is the edit procedure 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F 1 F 4 buttons to select a parameter for that track 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the parameter s value Parameters 000 No effect Only the direct uneffected sig nal goes to the outputs 127 100 effect The direct uneffected and effected signals go to the outputs with the same level PAGE 3 MIXER FX SEND C D This page lets you set the level of the track s direct uneffected signal going to the C and D Internal FX processors Note You can access this page only while editing the Sequencer 2 and the S2 FX Mode parameter is set to CD Mode see page 80 Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 tempo measure i B IE B J lean Mixer FE Send page EID i m a r ner fe 39 CBG Dima Ciga Dima B B Cle eae Cile Dima B B Criit DIA Cipa Dima n Crib Dime Ciia Dima B f chord ly measure transpose jn rfc 0 1I cun biz m pw u pL ae m omm age mn H i 5A a E rt ey i B pues 0 58 Cien pisa B Po Cie Dez Cie D50 Clif G58 Ciga Se E B Crise D50 Cribs Dia 16 Here is the edit procedure 1 Usethe VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F 1 F 4 buttons to select a parameter for that track 3 Use the TEMP
319. d When its LED is on the MEMORY button keeps the Lower track held until the next note or chord is played When off the Lower track is not sustained when raising the hand from the keyboard The chord is always kept in memory Lower Velocity Control gt GBL Set this parameter to trigger a Fill or a Break simply by playing louder with your left hand When playing on the Lower track with a velocity higher than 95 the selected Style Element will start For this function to work the SPLIT Keyboard Mode and LOWER Chord Scanning Mode must be selected Off The function is turned off Break Fill 1 Fill 2 When playing with a velocity higher than 95 on the Lower track the selected ele ment is automatically triggered You can start or stop the Style by playing harder on the keyboard Start Stop 52 Style Record mode The Style s structure 10 STYLE RECORD MODE By entering the Style Record mode you can create your own Styles or edit an existing Style Note LIVERPOOL STYLES cannot be edited THE STYLE S STRUCTURE The term Style relates with music sequences auto matically played by the arranger of the Liverpool A Style consists of a predefined number of Style Ele ments E Liverpool features ten different Style Ele ments Variation 1 4 Intro 1 2 Fill 1 2 Ending 1 2 When playing these Style Elements can be selected directly from the control panel using the correspond ing buttons To explain the
320. d Single Touch board track set Setting a part of the cur tings rent Style Current Style Style track settings Current Style Perfor Master Transpose mance 2 If you are saving a Performance you can change its name Select the Perf name line Move the cursor using the DOWN and UP but tons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button 3 Press ENTER to save the settings in memory The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort MENU From any page press MENU to open the Style Play edit menu This menu gives access to the various Style Play edit sections When in the menu select an edit section using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons select an edit page using PAGE or press EXIT to exit the menu When in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Style Play operating mode chore tempo J nu L Em 1 hare Style Play MEMLU Fe Miner RT es Tuning Stale Chrls Effects Pad Track Edit Preferences Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE Select an edit section from the Menu and or use the PAGE buttons to reach the desired page Press EXIT to go back to the main page of t
321. d Song buttons while you are in the main page Note Songs on the internal SSD cannot be edited Press EXIT to go back to the Main page of the Song operating mode without selecting a Song i chord tempo cm oo gu ES Load Song oa y BALLADS T t MVSsoHas HYSONG MID T SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE A C File folder Move the file or folder to be selected to the first line of the display To select a file press the F 2 LOAD but ton To open a folder press the F 3 OPEN button The Y symbol identifies a folder E F Scroll Up Scroll the list up G H Scroll Down Scroll the list down TEMPO VALUE section These controls scroll the list up or down F 1 SD Press this button after replacing a card in the card slot The new card will be read and the file list shown on the display will be updated F 2 LOAD Load the Song at the first line of the display F 3 OPEN Opens the selected folder file whose name begins with the Y symbol F 4 CLOSE Closes the current folder returning to the parent upper folder SAVE SONG PAGE The new or edited Song is contained in RAM and is lost when turning the instrument off The Song is also lost when you overwrite it in Backing Sequence Record mode or when switching to the Song Play mode You must save to a card any Song you wish to preserve The Song is saved as a Standard MIDI File
322. d TiteClos 1 130 99 HH Close 1 92 HH2 Closed1 1 93 HH2 Closed2 1 43 G2 133 88 Tom Off 273 Wind Off 82 Tom Processed Off 82 Tom Processed O 44 G 2 103 HH AlpoClose off 100 HH OldClose2 O 88 HH1 Foot 1 94 HH2 Foot 1 45 A2 133 88 Tom Off 296 Amp Noise O 82 Tom Processed Off 82 Tom Processed O 46 A 2 101 HH Old Open2 1 131 99 HH Open 1 96 HH2 Open 1 96 HH2 Open 1 47 B2 133 88 Tom Off 139 Real El Tom O 82 Tom Processed off 82 Tom Processed O 48 C3 133 88 Tom Off 139 Real El Tom O 82 Tom Processed off 82 Tom Processed O 49 C 3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 O 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 O 50 D3 133 88 Tom off 139 Real El Tom O 82 Tom Processed off 82 Tom Processed O 51 D 3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 O 52 E3 108 CymbalReverse off 108 CymbalReverse off 106 China Cymbal off 106 China Cymbal Off 53 F3 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz O 54 F 3 212 Tambourin Acc2 off 212 Tambourin Acc2 O 212 Tambourin Acc2 off 212 Tambourin Acc2 O 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal Off 278 Xylophone Spectr Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 56 G 3 136 88 Cowbell off 136 88 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 O 58 A 3 198 Vibraslap Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 59 B3 113 R
323. d like a ring modulator e Resolution f Output Level If you set a smaller value for the Resolution parameter the sound may be distorted The volume level may also be changed Use Output Level to adjust the level Effects 187 Pitch Phase Mod 015 Analog Rec Stereo Analog Record PITCH PHASE MOD This effect simulates the noise caused by scratches and Pitch phase modulation effects dust on analog records It also reproduces some of the modulation caused by a warped turntable 016 Chorus Stereo In Stereo Out Stereo Chorus EQ w erea Analog Record f waron This effect adds thickness and warmth to the sound by Simulation modulating the delay time of the input signal You can add spread to the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other BN e EQ Trim Pre EQ Right Stereo In Stereo Out Um Lefto V Faros LEQ HEQ 7 IX xZ Chorus a Speed RPM 33 1 3 45 78 EQ Trim 1 Sets the r p m of a record H Flutter 0 100 LEa HEQ gt Sets the modulation depth E EQ Trim Se n Noise Density 0 100 Right Wet Dry Sets the noise density Noise Tone 0 100 Ceo Ti Sine Sets the noise tone Noise Level 0
324. d tracking will apply to the range below the specified note number Tracking High Keyboard tracking will apply to the range above the specified note number Ramp This parameter specifies the angle of keyboard tracking 99 499 Angle value Here is how cutoff frequency is affected by keyboard location and the Ramp setting Intensity to A and Intensity to B 50 Cutoff frequency A High Ramp 99 High Ramp 62 High Ramp 0 Low Ramp 99 High Ramp 43 Low Ramp 43 High Ramp 99 Low Ramp 0 Low Ramp 62 Key Low Key High Key Low Ramp 99 Ramp Low Ramp High If Intensity to A and Intensity to B are set to 50 Ramp Low is set to 62 and Ramp High is set to 62 the angle of the change in cutoff frequency will correspond to the keyboard location pitch This means that the oscillation that occurs when you increase the Resonance A will correspond to the key board location If you set Ramp Low to 43 and Ramp High to 43 the cutoff frequency will not be affected by keyboard location Use this setting when you do not want the cutoff frequency to change for each note Tracking to A B These parameters specify the note numbers at which keyboard tracking will begin to apply and set the Intensity to A and Intensity to B parameters to specify the depth and direction of the change applied to filters A and B For the range of notes between Key Low and Key High the cutoff frequ
325. deter mined by the sign positive or negative of the Ramp Low or Ramp High setting The direction of the effect will be deter mined by the sign of the Ramp Low set ting and by the opposite sign of the Ramp High setting 50 for a setting of 50 and 50 for a setting of 50 Ramp Low will have no AMS effect The sign of the Ramp High setting will determine the direction of its effect Program operating mode 125 AMS Alternate Modulation Source list 0 The sign of the Ramp Low setting will JS Y amp AT 2 Joy Stick Y amp After Touch 2 determine the direction of its effect The effect will be controlled by the joystick Y verti Ramp High will have no AMS effect cally upward and by after touch data received via MIDI In this case the effect of after touch will be only half of the specified intensity JS Y amp ATI2 Joy Stick Y amp After Touch 2 is The effect will be controlled by the joystick Y verti cally downward and by after touch data received via MIDI In this case the effect of after touch will be only half of the specified intensity example of Amp Keyboard Track settings Key Low Key High Note Number A AMS Amp KTrk max AMS Intensity positive value zero lp c Depth and direction of modulation max Y 4 AMS Amp KTrk max AMS Intensity positive value zero Depth and directi
326. di Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO O Yes X No 232 Parameters 21 PARAMETERS Control panel and operating modes parameters The following table shows the parameters you can save to memory when pressing the WRITE button in the various operating modes and edit environments Single Touch Style Setting STS Performance Seq1 Seq2 Global Setup Page Parameter Performance Note Control Panel Master Volume Slider Acc Seq Volume Slider Assignable Slider m Y function Selected Mode E Memory EE E Bass Inversion za Manual Bass Split Point Y Not saved to card Groove Quantize Tempo Lock E Single Touch Selected Style Number Y General parameter Synchro Start Stop zu E Fade In Out m Style Element V1 V2 V3 V4 Fill 1 2 Count In Intro 1 2 Ending 1 2 Ensemble On Off Chord Scanning Keyboard Mode Style Change Perf Program Program Change K y Octave Transpose Y y Master Transpose Y Y General parameters Tempo Y y Display Hold Style Play Mode Main Program Y Y Y Play Mute status Y Y Y Volume General parameters Lj a J l l l 2j 2j I Separate tracks S te
327. di f octave EOD Doh e Ie see page a ea StereoGrand String ianc Fiastra Thin Stage Dua Piana Midi Select a Performance with the VOLUME VALUE buttons Go ahead and try out the different Performances We provided 160 of them for you 3 Select Performance 1 1 Grand Piano again As above press Performance bank 1 and use the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to select Performance 1 1 4 Unmute the Upper 2 track Press both F VOLUME VALUE but tons The Upper 2 track will be E selected and unmuted The Play icon will appear surrounded by the selected track frame and accompanied by the pointing arrow You will hear the Dark Pad Program play together with the Grand Piano Ka E n d rt L li m 1 Che iB Lami Pii B LTI ii Drum Perc Grand Piana M Fret Based Dark Pad amp Acon 14 9 StrinasErnez Analog Sir M Press the F VOLUME VALUE buttons 5 Press SPLIT on the KEYBOARD MODE section and play Now the keyboard is split in two parts the Lower part on the left and the Upper part on the right The Ana logStr Program is playing on the Lower part while the Grand Piano and the Dark Pad are playing on the Upper part oO KEYBOARD MODE SPLIT FULL UPPER o o CHORD S LOWER o DISPLAY HOLD Oo 6 Set the split point Not happy with the current split point Keep the SPLIT POI
328. dulate an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller D gt Csend D gt C Send Amount of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect PAGE 10 FX A EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the A effect usually a reverb chord J tempo d Fip Gs m ut Ut e FREA Edit hali fi Res Time secl 3 7 dg High Dame K 38 Pre Dlu Lngd Fre Dla Thru Celie dH Use the E F and G H VOLUME VALUE button pairs to scroll the parameter list Use the A D VOLUME VALUE button pairs to select and edit a parameter Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to edit the selected parameter Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again Edit the Song in Song mode to permanently change the effects Parameters See Effects on page 177 for a list of available parame ters for each effect type PAGE 11 FX B EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the B effect usually a modulating effect For more details see Page 10 FX A editing above PAGE 12 FX C EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the C effect For more details see Page 10 FX A editing above PAGE 13 FX D EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the D effect For more deta
329. e as you play lower Negative values of this parameter will have the opposite effect 99 99 Parameter value PAGE 13 AMP MODULATION These settings allow you to apply modulation to amp for each oscillator to modulate the volume chora temo J L o octave Are Mad Oecd FR Selected Dzclli Tracking Lou C3 Tracking High Bid Ram Lou TS Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alternatively you can select oscillators using the F 1 F 4 buttons Amplifier keyboard tracking These parameters let you use keyboard tracking to adjust the volume of the selected oscillator Use the Key and Ramp parameters to specify how the volume will be affected by the keyboard location that you play Tracking Low High These settings specify the note number at which key board tracking will begin to apply The volume will not change between Tracking Low and Tracking High C 1 G9 Lowest Highest note in the range Tracking Low Keyboard tracking will apply to the range below the specified note number Tracking High Keyboard tracking will apply to the range above the specified note number Ramp These parameters specify the angle of keyboard track ing 99 499 Angle value Here is an example of volume changes produced by keyboard location and Ramp settings Volume Ramp Low 99 Ramp High 99
330. e 180 degree Sets the lower limit of the frequency range for the effect on the right channel Switches the LFO phase difference between left and right gt Fx 009 LFO1 Frequency Hz 0 02 30 00Hz R Manu Top R Manual Top 0 100 Sets the LFO1 speed D Sets the upper limit of the frequency range for the effect on the right channel Sre Off Tempo gt Fx 009 Selects the modulation source of LFO1 amp 2 speed Sweep Mode EG D mod Amt 30 00 30 00 Determines whether the flanger is controlled by the envelope generator or by Sets the modulation amount of LFO1 speed the modulation source Fx 022 Dyz LFO2 Frequency Hz 0 02 30 00Hz c Src 3 Off Tempo Sets the LFO2 speed Ds Selects the modulation source that triggers the EG when EG is selected for d Sweep Mode or modulation source that causes the flanger to sweep when Amt 30 00 30 00 D mod is selected for Sweep Mode Sets the modulation amount of LFO2 speed EG Attack 1 100 Depth1 0 100 Sets the EG attack speed Fx 022 Sets the depth of LFO1 modulation Dz EG Decay 1 100 Src Off Tempo Sets the EG decay speed Fx 022 Selects the modulation source of LFO1 amp 2 modulation depth Resonance 100 100 Amt 100 100 Sets the resonance amount Fx 023 Sets the modulation amount of LFO1 modulation depth f High Damp 0 100 Depth2 0 100 Sets the resonance damping amount in the high range Fx 023 i Sets the depth of LFO2 modulation Dgr Wet Dry
331. e b Note Interval b Note Fine The OSC Mode parameter selects the oscillator operation mode When Note Key Follow is selected the oscillator s frequency is determined based on the note number allowing you to use it as an octaver The Note Interval parameter sets the pitch offset from the original note number by semitone steps The Note Fine parameter allows you to fine tune in steps of cents d Envelope Pre LPF This parameter sets the upper limit of the frequency range to which very low harmonics are added Adjust this parameter if you do not want to add lower harmonics to the higher range Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left gt o Wet Dry Talking Modulator A U E O Righto Saree sau Sweep Mode race mie Dane Gee LFO Sweep Mode D mod LFO a Switches between modulation source control and LFO control pie Manual Voice Control Bottom 1 49 Center 51 99 Top Voice pattern control b Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls the voice pattern Voice Top A U E O Selects a vowel sound at the top end of control gt d Voice Center A U E O Selects a vowel sound in the center of control gt 5 Voice Bottom A l U E O Selects a vowel sound at the bottom end of control gt LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Fx 009 Des f Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of
332. e selected 1 16 Selected source and target tracks SIE The left S E parameters are the starting and ending measure to copy For example if 5 1 and E 4 the first four measures are copied S The right S parameter is the first of the target mea sures T Number of times the copy must be executed Song operating mode 103 Page 23 Edit Copy PAGE 24 EVENT EDIT Enter this page from the Menu of the Song mode The Event Edit page allows you to edit each event in a sin gle track See Event Edit procedure on page 105 for more information on the event editing procedure chora tempo Mes ao i Cm e Evert Edit oa Trk 1 Position 001 01 EX It Eur Note Bl 34 Biss ix N Event Type First value Second value Trk Track Track in edit To select a different track press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to open the Go To Track window Go to Track 1 Enter Ok Exit Cance Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a track and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort 1 16 One of the ordinary tracks of the Song These tracks contains musical data like notes and controllers Master This is a special track containing Tempo changes Meter changes Scale and Trans pose data and the effect parameters Position Position of the event shown in the display expressed in the form aaa bb ccc e aaa is the measure e
333. e 12 Style Element Controls Chord Variation Table 00 000 e eee 69 Page 13 Style Controls Mode Tension 69 Song Play operating mode 70 The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format 70 Transport controls siscirisreritiariti ariii 70 MIDI Clock 0 0 0 ccc ccc cece eens 70 Switching between sequencers during editing 70 Selecting a Song composing its progressive number 70 Realtime and sequencer tracks 04 70 Master Volume Sequencer Volume BALANCE 71 Effects in Song Play mode 0 eee ee 71 Groove Quantize window 0 cece eens 71 The Write window 0 0 e cece eee eee eee 72 Main page cnt iano a aes ee RR ea s 73 Tracks 1 8 page 0 6 73 Tracks 9 16 page lisse ee nn 74 Song Select page 6 cece eee eee eee 74 The Lyrics page s ene nad i e nana eee 74 Playing a Jukebox file sees 74 Meri reete e a UH oe RS 75 Edit page structure 0 cece cece eee eee eee 75 Page 1 Mixer Volume 00 sees 76 Page 2 Mixer Pan eese 76 Page 3 Mixer FX send A B 0 006 76 Page 3 Mixer FX send C D 00 0005 77 Page 4 FX A B Select 0 00 c cece eee 77 Page 4 FX C D Select 0 00 cece 77 Page 5 FX A editing 5 cece eee 78 Page 6 FX B editing 00 eee eee 78 Page 5 FX C editing 0 0 0 0
334. e Adds one or more octaves to the melody Dual This option adds to the melody line a sec ond note at a fixed interval set with the Note parameter When selecting this option a transposition value appears 24 24 semitones to the original note Brass Typical Brass section harmonization Reed Typical Reed section harmonization Trill This option trills the melody note You can set the trill speed by using the Tempo parameter see below Note You must play at least two notes with this option The played note is repeated in sync with the Tempo parameter see below When playing a chord only the first note is repeated Echo As the Repeat option but with the repeated notes fading away after the time set with the Feedback parameter see below Fifths Repeat Dyn amics PERF STS This parameter sets the velocity difference between the right hand melody and the added harmonization notes 10 0 Tempo PERF STS Note This parameter only appears when the Trill Repeat or Echo options are selected Subtracted velocity value Note value for the Trill Repeat or Echo Ensemble options This is in sync with the Metronome Tempo Feedback PERF gt STS Note This parameter only appears when the Echo option is selected This parameter sets how many times the original note chord is repeated by the Echo option PAGE 20 STYLE CONTROLS DRUM FILL In this page you can select various general parameters for
335. e Modulation Source 1 Time This parameter specifies the source that will control the Time parameters of the amp EG see AMS Alter nate Modulation Source list on page 124 With a set ting of Off there will be no modulation Strongly played note with Attack Decay Slope and Release Time Swing at Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS1 will have For example if AMSI T is Amp KTrk the Amp Keyboard Track settings see Amplifier keyboard tracking on page 118 will control the EG Time parameters With positive values of this parameter positive values of Ramp Ramp Setting will cause EG times to be lengthened and negative values of Ramp Ramp Setting will cause EG times to be shortened The direction of the change is specified by Attack Time Swing Decay Time Swing Slope Time Swing and Release Time When AMSI T is Velocity positive values will cause EG times to lengthen as you play more strongly and negative values will cause EG times to shorten as you play more strongly With a setting of 0 the EG times will be as specified by the Amp envelope parameters see page 120 Attack Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction of the effect that AMS1 will have on Attack Time With positive values of Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMSI to
336. e Threshold level When recording is completed reverse playback starts imme diately 043 L C R Delay This multitap delay outputs three Tap signals to the left right and center respectively You can also adjust the left and right spread of the delay sound Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Effects 205 ER Delay e High Damp e Low Damp These parameters set the damping amount of high range and low range The tone of the delayed sound becomes darker and lighter as it feeds back g Spread This parameter sets the pan width of the effect sound The stereo image is widest with a value of 50 and the effect sound of both channels is output from the center with a value of 0 044 Cross Delay Stereo Cross Delay This is a stereo delay and can by used as a cross feed back delay effect in which the delay sounds cross over between the left and right by changing the feedback routing Left o Wet Stereo In Stereo Out Input Level D mod L Delay Left o Wet Dry High Damp Low Damp High Damp Low Damp Delay jet ibus Dco Delay H 4 7_ 1 H m Stereo Cross X ree Spread Input Level D mod oy Level Input Level D mod High Damp
337. e as you play higher notes and negative values will cause the pitch to fall as you play higher notes With a value of 0 there will be no change in pitch and the C4 pitch will sound regardless of the keyboard location you play The diagram shows how the Pitch Slope and pitch are related Pitch C4 C5 Key 1 0 2 0 JS X This parameter specifies how the pitch will change when the joystick is moved all the way to the right A setting of 12 produces 1 octave of change For example if you set this to 12 and move the joystick all the way to the right the pitch will rise one octave above the original pitch 60 412 Maximum pitch change in semitones JS X This parameter specifies how the pitch will change when the joystick is moved all the way to the left A set ting of 12 produces 1 octave of change For example if you set this to 60 and move the joystick all the way to the left the pitch will fall five octaves below the original pitch This can be used to simulate the downward swoops that a guitarist produces using the tremolo arm 60 412 Maximum pitch change in semitones Pitch slope value Pitch modulation AMS Alternate Modulation Source This parameter selects the source that will modulate the pitch of the selected oscillator See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 124 Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect produced by AMS With a set
338. e center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type 300 10 00kHz Effects 181 Filter Dynamic 007 Param 4B Eq Stereo Parametric 4 Band EQ This is a stereo 4 band parametric equalizer You can select peaking type or shelving type for Band 1 and 4 The gain of Band 2 can be controlled by dynamic mod Q 0 5 10 0 9 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 ulation Gain dB 18 18dB Stereo In Stereo Out Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 Mid2 Cutoff Hz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type 500 20 00kHz h Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 gt Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 Direct Mix 0 50 Sets the amount of the dry sound mixed to the distortion i Speaker Simulation Off On Switches the speaker simulation on off Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dae Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a Wah The Wah parameter switches the wah effect on off a Sw This parameter sets how the wah effect is switched on and off via the modulation source When Sw Moment the wah effect is usually turned off It is turned on only when you press the pedal or operate the joy
339. e differences between the Style in play and the same Style being edited for example resetting the Drum Mapping may lead to some instrument s replacement After editing the Style please save it see Exit and Save Abort Style below Then edit the Style Per formance to adjust the track s settings Tempo Vol ume Pan FX Send see page 43 and following in the Style Play operating mode chapter and save it by pressing the WRITE button e Select New Style to start from a new empty Style A default Style Performance will be recalled When finished recording you will save the new Style onto a User Style location After recording the Style please save it see Exit and Save Abort Style below Then edit the Style Performance to adjust the track s settings Tempo Volume Pan FX Send see page 43 and following in the Style Play operating mode chapter and save it by pressing the WRITE button Note After a record or edit operation the Style is rewritten in memory When you press START STOP there is a delay before you can actually listen to the Style This delay is higher with a Style containing more MIDI events Note While in Record mode all footswitches are dis abled LISTENING TO THE STYLE WHILE IN RECORD EDIT MODE While you are in Record Edit mode you can listen to the selected Chord Variation or to the whole Style depending on the page you are in To select a Chord Variation go to the Main page
340. e display using the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Press F 3 OPEN to open it Close the current folder by pressing F 4 CLOSE 4 Whenin the selected folder you can save the Song over an existing file or create a new file To overwrite an existing file move it to the first line of the display To create a new file move the NEW NAME MID item to the first line of the display 5 When the NEW NAME MID item is selected press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons You are prompted to assign a name to the new folder tons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button 6 When you have finished writing a name for the new midifile press F 2 SAVE to confirm The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort REALTIME RECORDING PAGE While you are in Backing Sequence mode press RECORD then one of the A VOLUME VALUE but tons to access the Realtime Recording mode The RECORD LED turns on measure S nn n 1mness Dui E D LU octave Reg Hetoni Style Soft Beat us Perf 1 1 Petro Pf ResolsHi RT Padi REC Sel Tempo CheAoot REC Backing Sequence operating mode 85 Realtime Recording page Style This non ed
341. e inserted E transpose Current position Step value Waiting for a keystroke a section Previously inserted event You may delete this event and set it in edit again by pressing the lt button b section Event to be inserted See the following parameters for information on each element of this section M Measure This is the position of the event note rest or chord to be inserted Style Record mode 57 Step Record page Meter Meter of the current measure This parameter can t be edited You can set the Meter in the Main page of the Style Record mode before actually starting recording see step 6 on page 58 for more information key This is a prompt asking for a note or chord to be played on the keyboard to enter an event on the cur rent step Step value Length of the event to be inserted Use the NOTE VALUE buttons on the lower left area of the control panel to change this value VARIATION FILL COUNT IN BREAK ENDING o2 O3 O1 20 O O1 20 O1 O4 OOOO OOO OO e J J A A A m Saan Note value Dot Augments the selected note by one half of its value Triplet 3 Makes the selected note a triplet note V Velocity Set this parameter before entering a note or chord This will be the playing strength i e velocity value of the event to be inserted KBD Keyboard Y
342. e modulation amount of LFO step speed Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 009 eer BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the BPM MIDI 40 240 tempo and notes Fx 009 eje d Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009 MAL BPM MIDI 40 240 Base Note rere yey dy 3 do e Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009 010 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Base Note 3 25 2 Js J 4 4 Times x1 x16 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Times x1 x16 e Manual l 0 100 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied POUR uem Step Base Note A As A Da D 45 J ds J 0 ept 3 s Selects the type of notes to specify the LFO step speed Sets the depth of LFO modulation D27 f Fx 010 gg t Src Off Tempo Times x1 x32 Selects the modulation source for the LFO modulation depth Sets the number of notes to specify the LFO step speed Fx 010 Amt 100 4100 Manual 0 100 Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth g Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Resonance 100 100 k Depth 0 100 J Sets the resonance amount tt Sets the depth of LFO modulation High Damp 0 100 Resonance 100 100 Sets the res
343. e sample on off Yes The sample is assigned to the selected key No The sample is not assigned The sample assigned to the next highest assigned key is used instead MS Hi Lo Bank Num Use these parameters to select a different multisample drum kit for each of the High and Low layers For more information see MS Hi Lo Bank Num on page 108 H L Level These parameters specify the level of each multisam ple For more information see H L Level on page 109 H L Transpose These parameters transpose the selected multisample Use them to change the pitch of the selected key 0 No transposition applied 64 663 Transpose value in semitones H L Tune Use these parameters to fine tune the assigned sample 0 No fine tuning 99 499 Fine tuning value in cents 1 100 of a semitone H L Reverse The multisample will be played in reverse For more information see H L Reverse on page 108 H L Use Offset These parameters specify the point where the multi sample s will begin to play For more information see TH L Use Offset on page 109 H L Cutoff These parameters set the cutoff frequency for the filter applied to the selected sample H L Resonance These parameters set the resonance for the filter applied to the selected sample H L Attack These parameters are an offset to the selected sample s EG Attack 110 Program operating mode Page 3 Pitch H L Decay These parameters are
344. e selected the type of data required press F 2 SAVE to confirm the selection The content of the target card appears chord J C i J EuD a Card Save C pf MEWLMEME SET 3 LILE SET CI ETHICA SET u I SAVE OPEN CLOSE At this point you can Create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 139 e Save onto an existing SET folder If you are saving into an existing folder move the desired SET folder to the first line of the display using the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Once the target folder is selected press F 2 SAVE to save the files The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Warning After confirming all data in the target folder is deleted When the operation is completed the Wait indi cator disappears the source page comes back in Card Edit environment 137 Page 2 Save the display and you may perform further saving operations Saving a single bank You can save a single User bank with a single opera tion A bank corresponds to a button on the control panel of the instrument i e a button of the STYLE sec tion 1 Insert the target card into the card slot 2 The whole content All of the internal memory is already selected Press F 3 OPEN to open the All folder A list of User data types appear each type is a
345. e sound approaches and the pitch is lowered when the sound goes away This parameter sets this pitch variation f Pan Depth This parameter sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound With larger values the sound seems to come and go from much further away With positive values the sound moves from left to right with negative values the sound moves from right to left Doppler Pitch Pan Depth 2 8 ase Pan Depth value Pitch Depth Pan Depth f value Higher Original Pitch r Lowe Pan Depth lt lt ee RR RR PR gt gt gt Louder Volume Louder 196 Effects Pitch Phase Mod 031 Scratch This effect is applied by recording the input signal and moving the modulation source It simulates the sound of scratches you can make using a turntable Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Lan A Wet Dry Scratch Rec Control Scratch F Right gt S A sins Scratch Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for simulation control ag Bide b Response 0 100 Sets the speed of the response to the Scratch Source gt Envelope Select D mod Input Selects whether the start and end of recording is controlled via the modula tion source or the input signal level gt Dm c Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls record
346. e sound when played above that limit H L Reverse The multisample will be played in reverse In the case of Flash ROM multisamples that were originally speci fied to loop the multisample will be played back in one shot reverse mode If the multisample was origi nally set to reverse it will playback without change Yes The multisample will playback in reverse No The multisample will play back normally H L Use Offset These parameters specify the point where the multi sample s will begin to play For some multisamples this parameter will not be available Yes The sound will begin from the offset loca tion pre determined for each multisample No The sound will start from the beginning of the multisample waveform H L Level These parameters specify the level of each multisam ple 0 127 Multisample level Note Depending on the multisample high settings of this parameter may cause the sound to distort when a chord is played If this occurs lower the level Velocity Switch This is the velocity value dividing the High and Low layers for the selected oscillator Notes struck harder than this value will be played by the High multisample V Zone Top Bottom Velocity Zone Here you can specify the velocity range for the selected oscillator Note You cannot set the Bottom Velocity higher than the Top Velocity nor the Top Velocity lower than the Bottom Velocity 0 127 Assigned velocity Octave Use this parameter
347. e sound will become darker when the EG levels set by Filter EG Level and Time parameters are in the area and brighter when they are in the area 99 99 Parameter value EG Intensity to B Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that the time varying changes created by the filter EG will have on the filter B cutoff frequency see EG Intensity to A 99 99 Parameter value EG AMS Alternate Modulation Source Selects the source that will control the depth and direc tion of the effect that the time varying changes pro duced by the filter EG will have on the cutoff frequency of filters A and B See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 124 Value of the Velocity to A parameter Intensity to A Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have on filter A For details on how this will apply refer to EG Intensity to A Program operating mode 115 Page 9 Filter LFO1 Intensity to B Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have on filter B For details on how this will apply refer to EG Intensity to A Note The sum of the settings for Velocity to A B Inten sity to A B and AMS Intensity to A B will determine the depth and direction of the effect produced by the filter EG Filter A B modulation AMS1 fA B Alternate Modulation Source for filter A B Selects the source that will control modulat
348. e the F 1 F 4 buttons to select one of the available oscillators Program operating mode Edit page structure ERASE PROGRAM OSCILLATOR You can initialize any parameter value by using one of the following shortcuts e While in the Basic page keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the DELETE button to initialize the whole Program to a default status e While in an edit page where the Osc abbrevia tion appears in the upper right area of the display keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the DELETE button to initialize the currently selected oscillator to a default status After you press the shortcut the Init osc message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort THE WRITE WINDOW This page appears when you press the WRITE button Here you can save the Program into a User Program location in memory S e L Em PROG WRITE to E Hamer Grand Piano Tor LUi di fempty gt 1 Select a name and a location then press ENTER to save the Program 2 The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Warning If you write over an existing User Program the Program will be deleted and replaced by the one you are saving overwrite Please save to card any Pro gram you don t want to lose Name Use this parameter to change the Program s name Press the right A VOLUME VALUE button to enter editing Modify the
349. e the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the tempo At this point if you want to do a Realtime Record ing go on reading Realtime Record procedure below Otherwise if you prefer to do a Step Record jump to Step Record procedure on page 59 Realtime Record procedure 1 When still in the Main page of the Style Record mode press one of the E VOLUME VALUE but tons to select the R parameter Use these but tons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the RT Realtime recording mode mg m Pu fn Press TRK SELECT to switch to the Style Tracks page Here you can assign the right Program to each Style track For more details see Style Tracks page on page 56 B tempo CD Emm m n E M is m pm mig s Soft Beat bli 0ui lt Brush 2 Pianodl 2 E Fers Kit Guitaral z abas Strrafrs zc BcouPianoz UosPadl facs If you like you can set the tempo again from this page just use the TEMPO VALUE controls Assign a Program to each track by using the PRO GRAM PERFORMANCE section If needed set the Octave Transpose for each track Note The Octave Transpose will affect only the notes coming from the keyboard and not from the arranger Select the track to put in record Its status icon will begin flashing Note When entering the Record mode the last selected track is already in record When you press START STOP after entering the Reco
350. e with the correct Programs TRANSPORT CONTROLS You can use the separate transport controls for each of the two onboard sequencers Use the SEQ1 controls for Sequencer 1 and SEQ2 controls for Sequencer 2 See SEQUENCER TRANSPORT CONTROLS SEQ1 and SEQ2 on page 18 for more information MIDI CLOCK In Song Play mode the MIDI Clock is always generated by the internal sequencer even if the Clock parameter is set to External see Clock on page 128 Liverpool transmits only the MIDI Clock message generated by Sequencer 1 SWITCHING BETWEEN SEQUENCERS DURING EDITING When you enter Edit mode you can edit the selected sequencer s parameters Go to the main page of Song Play mode and select the S1 A buttons or S2 B but tons to select the sequencer you wish to edit see Main page on page 73 SELECTING A SONG COMPOSING ITS PROGRESSIVE NUMBER Each Song on a card up to 9 999 has a progressive number assigned You can see this number before the Song s name in the Song Select page STYLE section doubles as a numeric keypad You can use it for composing the 4 digit number corresponding to the Song you wish to select the folder selected in the Song Select page will become the current folder This way you can speed up the Song retrieval Selecting a Song in the Song Select page 1 Openthe Song Select page 2 Select the card or the internal SSD and open the folder containing the Song to be selected Thi
351. eStickDry O 72 SideStickDry off 72 SideStickDry Off 21 AO 47 SD Yowie Off 47 SD Yowie O 46 SD Big Rock Off 47 SD Yowie Off 22 A 0 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 O 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 Off 23 BO 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 24 C1 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 25 Ci 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll T 119 SD Orch Roll T 26 D1 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps O 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 27 D 1 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 O 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 28 E1 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White O 281 Noise White off 281 Noise White Off 29 F1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 30 F 1 145 DJ Scratch2 T 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 32 G 1 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 O 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 33 A1 249 Click Off 249 Click O 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 34 ATH 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open O 213 Triangle Open off 213 Triangle Open off 35 B1 19 BD Hip 1 Off 13 BD Squash O 12 BD Tight Off 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 36 C2 29 BD Deep 88 Off 17 BD House 1 O 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 24 BD Dance 99 Off 37 C 2 121 FingerSnaps Off 242 Comp Voice Noise O 72 SideStickDry Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 38 D2 66 SD Vintage5 Off 125 99 SD Off 48 SD Proc
352. ect balance of the chorus flanger Fx 010 020 Sets the delay time D Tap1 Time msec 0 680msec Depth 0 100 Sets the Tap1 delay time Sets the depth of LFO modulation g Tap1 Level 0 100 Feedback 100 100 Sets the Tap1 output level Fx 045 Sets the feedback amount Fx 020 D Tap2 Time msec 0 680msec f F EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the Tap2 delay time Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 h Feedback Tap2 100 100 F Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Sets the Tap2 feedback amount Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 g D Mt Delay Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB f Sets the multitap delay effect balance Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 i High Damp 0 100 F Cho FIng Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Sets the damping amount in the high range Fx 043 Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger Fx 010 020 h Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger Fx 060 mod e Dz Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet P Src Off Tempo Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Duz Amt 100 100 i Src Off Tempo Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Table Selects the modulatio
353. ed into the connector on the back of the instrument 3 and is not damaged 4 there are no problems with the mains Is the power switch turned ON If the power still does not turn on contact your dealer or the nearest KORG Service Center No sound Is a jack connected to the HEADPHONES connector This would disable the internal speakers 22 Check the connections of your amp or mixer 22 Make sure that all the components of the amplifying system are turned on Are the MASTER VOLUME or ASSIGN SLIDER sliders of the Liverpool set to a position other than 0 12 Is the Local parameter set to Off Turn it On 128 Is the Speaker parameter set to Off Turn it On 126 Is the Attack parameter value too high Set it to a lower value to let the sound start faster Is the Volume 43 parameter too low Set it to a higher value 45 Lowest note are not played When the SPLIT button is lit up the keyboard will be divided into the Lower part low notes below the split 24 point and the Upper part high notes above the split point Is the Lower track muted Unmute it Wrong sounds Do the USER banks contain modified data Load the appropriate data for the Song or the Style you wish to 134 playback Has one of the USER Drum Kits been modified Load the appropriate Drum Kits 134 Have the Styles or Performances been modified Load the appropriate data Styles or Performances 134 Sound does not stop Make sure that the damper switch polarity parameter is set correctly
354. ed that you have the same Styles in the same locations When saving a Song created in Backing Sequence mode all Chord Acc data is preserved and can be loaded later to be edited using the Chord Acc Step Mode Here is how to enter the Chord Acc Step Mode and execute your editing 1 Press B SEQ to enter the Backing Sequence mode Backing Sequence operating mode 83 Chord Acc Step recording 2 Press RECORD You will be prompted to select the Realtime Recording mode or the Chord Acc Step Mode chord tempo measure sara ma n J Ge ut C ILLI am Pt j oe a i Xt Realtime Recording ChordAoc Ster Meee 3 Press one of the B Chord Acc Step Mode VOL UME VALUE buttons to enter the Step Mode The Chord Acc Step mode page appears see Chord Acc Step Recording page on page 86 chord tempo measure nn i E n d LILI 6 Lu octave Phe eme ee mm __ Lorie Hoe ster MAG GL AO Temeor 12a 4 Stole Une Bossa Perf 1 1 ZE DPF C Fai C S 4 Select the M easure parameter and go to a differ ent position into the Song using the TEMPO VALUE controls or the A VOLUME VALUE but tons Alternatively you can move the locator using the lt gt and lt lt gt gt buttons See Transport controls on page 87 5 Select the parameter type to
355. edal or operate the joy stick Slow fast will alternate each time the value of the modulation source exceeds 64 When Sw Moment the speed is usually slow It becomes fast only when you press the pedal or operate the joystick When a value for the modulation source is less than 64 slow speed is selected and when the value is 64 or higher fast is selected c Manual Speed Ctrl If you wish to control the speaker rotation speed manually not switching between Slow and Fast select the modulation Effects 203 Mod P Shift source in the Manual Speed Ctrl field If manual control is not necessary set this field to Off d Horn Acceleration e Rotor Acceleration On a real rotary speaker the rotation speed is accelerated or decelerated gradually after you switch the speed The Horn Acceleration parameter sets the speed at which the rotation is accelerated or decelerated g Mic Distance g Mic Spread This is a simulation of stereo microphone settings Rotary Speaker Mic Placement Mic Spread Microphone se Microphone Mic Distance Mic Distance sy x P Rotary Speaker Top View 204 Effects ER Delay ER DELAY Early reflection and delay effects 041 Early Refl Early Reflections This effect is only the early reflection part of a reverber ation sound and adds presence to the sound You can select one of the four decay curves
356. effect bal ance on page 177 070 Lim Par 4Eq Limiter Parametric 4 Band EQ This effect combines a mono type limiter and a four band parametric equalizer You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Effects 217 Mono Mono Chain 071 Lim ChorFlg Limiter Chorus Flanger This effect combines a mono type limiter and a chorus flanger You can change the order of the effect connec tion Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Routing Wet Dry Limiter YON Chorus Flanger Limiter Limiter H I Bc he Chorus Flanger x frim D EQ Trim LEQ HEQ E Normal iGain Adjust f Gain Adjust i Output Mode i i Feedback Wot Invert isses e iCho FIng T Righto Xo Righte i i A L gt Envelope Control Very L Envelope Control FO Tri T Sine NEEDY L Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 L Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Fx 003 Sets the signal compression ratio Fx 003 a a Threshold dB 40 0dB Threshold dB 40 0dB Sets the level above which the compressor is applied
357. ei Ke 8 M PE LE Drum Kit instruments 171 continued 120 0 41 Brush V S 2 120 0 48 OrchestraK 120 0 116 Arabian Kit 1 120 0 117 Arabian Kit 2 Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 89 F6 356 Ramazan DVL1 3 175 Djembe Open 3 90 F 6 358 Ramazan DVL3 3 301 Dbk Tky Open 3 91 G6 355 Kup 2 5 312 Bells Open 5 92 G 6 83 Tom Jazz Hi 5 323 Sagat HalfOpen 5 93 A6 355 Kup2 5 324 Sagat Close 5 94 A 6 354 Kup 1 Off 351 Davul Off 95 B6 2 BD Dry 3 Off 5 BD Jazz Off 96 C7 354 Kup 1 Off 361 Tef 3 Off 172 Factory Data Drum Kit instruments 120 0 50 Bdrum amp Sdrum 120 0 56 SFX Kit 120 0 64 Percus Kit1 120 0 65 Latin P Kit Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 0 C 1 257 Tribe Off 1 Cit 1 142 Zap1 Off 2 D 1 133 88 Tom Off 3 D 1 123 88 BD Off 4 E 1 123 88 BD Off 5 F 1 22 BD Hip 4 Off 6 F 1 23 BD Pop Kick Off 7 G 1 19 BD Hip 1 Off 8 G 1 18 BD House 2 Off 9 A 1 28 BD Pop 99 Off 10 A 1 123 88 BD Off 11 B 1 138 FM El Tom Off 12 co 28 BD Pop 99
358. elect the various edit pages STEP RECORD PROCEDURE The Step Record allows you to create a new Song by entering the single notes or chords in each track This is very useful when transcribing an existing score or needing a higher grade of detail and is particularly suitable to create drum and percussion tracks 1 While in the Main screen of the Song mode press RECORD to enter the Song Record mode The Main page of the Song Record mode will appear cma gu neasure nn i n j Mugen OO L d Ul e Record NewSong 4 Reciluerdun Trk l ga Si E Hetrosni ResaltA Meters 44d Sel Teneo Tempo Auto 2 Use the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Rec Recording Mode parameter Use these but tons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the Step Dub Step Overdub or the StepOwr Step Overwrite recording mode The Step Overdub mode lets you add events to the existing events The Step Overwrite mode will overwrite all existing events 3 Press SEQ1 PLAY STOP to turn its LED on and enter the Step Record page See Step Record page on page 94 for more information on each parameter of this page Previous event Event to be inserted er fo J nue C D I Pus 4 c Shee Lhe 1 FE Waiting for a keystroke The first two lines a are the latest inserted event The second two lines b are
359. elects the modulation source of the sampling frequency Amt 48 00k 48 00kHz Sets the modulation amount of the sampling frequency LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed D Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of the sampling frequency LFO modulation Drez d Src Off Tempo Selects the LFO modulation source of the sampling frequency Amt 100 100 Sets the LFO modulation amount of the sampling frequency e Resolution 4 24 Sets the data bit length Output Level 0 100 Sets the output level gt Das f Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the output level Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the output level Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dz Src Off Tempo g Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a Pre LPF If a sampler with a very low sampling frequency receives very high pitched sound that could not be heard during playback it could generate pitch noise that is unrelated to the original sound Set Pre LPF to ON to prevent this noise from being generated If you set the Sampling Freq to about 3kHz and set Pre LPF to OFF you can create a soun
360. ell Off 71 B4 59 SD Hip 6 g 298 Swish Terra O 215 Cuica Hi off 200 Woodblock1 Off 72 C5 48 SD Processed O 258 GunShot 1 O 216 Cuica Lo Off 201 Woodblock2 Off 73 Cit5 50 SD Dance O 269 MachineGun Off 208 Timbale Paila Off 225 Cowbell Off 74 D5 52 SD Noise O 270 Laser gun Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 182 MaracasPush Off 75 D 5 62 SD Vintage1 O 271 Explosion O 206 TimbaleHi Rim1 Off 227 Mambo Bell Off 76 E5 47 SD Yowie O 252 Dog O 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 77 F5 70 SD Chili O 253 Gallop Off 135 88 Clave Off 217 Shaker1 Off 78 F 5 139 Real El Tom O 250 Bird 1 O 136 88 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 79 G5 125 99 SD O 259 Rainstick O 121 FingerSnaps Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 80 G 5 124 88 SD O 272 Thunder Off 196 Taiko Rim Off 220 Cabasa Down Off continues on the next page Factory Data 173 Drum Kit instruments continued 120 0 50 Bdrum amp Sdrum 120 0 56 SFX Kit 120 0 64 Percus Kit1 120 0 65 Latin P Kit Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 81 A5 124 88 SD O 273 Wind Off 195 Taiko Open Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 82 A 5 125 99 SD O 281 Noise White Off 143 Zap2 Off 334 Tambourin Mute2 Off 83 B5 55 SD Hip2 Oo 274 Stream Off 119 SD Orch Roll 5 333 Tambourin Open 5 84 C6 44 SD BrushTap2 O 275 Bubble Off 120 SD Orch
361. ell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 85 C 6 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 87 D 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off Factory Data Drum Kit instruments 165 120 0 3 AcousticKit 120 0 4 Std Kit4 120 0 8 Room Kit1 120 0 9 HipHop Kit1 Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 9 A 1 17 BD House 1 Off 17 BD House 1 g 13 BD Squash Off 13 BD Squash O 10 A 1 125 99 SD off 125 99 SD O 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 9 11 B 1 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD O 123 88 BD off 123 88 BD O 12 co 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD O 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD O 13 C 0 38 SD Off Center Off 38 SD Off Center O 56 SD Hip 3 Off 56 SD Hip 3 O 14 D0 49 SD CrackerRoom Off 48 SD Processed 1 58 SD Hip 5 Off 58 SD Hip 5 O 15 D 0 6 BD Pillow Off 27 BD Amb Rocker O 25 BD Ambi Kick off 25 BD Ambi Kick O 16 E0 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 12 BD Tight O 11 BD Gated Off 11 BD Gated O 17 F0 40 SD Amb Piccolo off 39
362. emain ing beats with rests press the gt gt button To change the step value use the NOTE VALUE buttons on the lower left area of the control panel VARIATION FILL COUNT IN BREAK ENDING o2 O3 20 o O1 20 JO OC C9 C9 CJ C JI J 1 gt A zu ol O4 O1 Insert a note rest or chord at the current position To insert a single note just play it on the key board The inserted note length will match the step length You may change the velocity and relative duration of the note by editing the V Velocity and D Duration parameters See V Velocity and D Duration on page 57 60 Style Record mode Style Record procedure To insert a rest just press the REST button Its Inserting a chord with notes with different velocity length will match the step value values You can make the upper or lower note of a To tie the note to be inserted to the previous one chord for example louder than the remaining ones to press the TIE button A note will be inserted tied make the most important note emerge from the chord to the previous one with exactly the same name Here is how to insert a three note chord You don t need to play it on the keyboard again 1 Editthe Velocity value of the first note To insert a chord or a second voice see Chords 2 Press the first note and keep it pressed and second voices in Step Record mode below 3 Edit the Velocity value of the second note
363. empo d Src Off Tempo g Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Selects the modulation source of feedback amount Amt 100 100 Amt L 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Sets the modulation amount of the left channel feedback ance on page 177 R Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount for the right channel Dzer a BPM b Rhythm Pattern e n ma Amt R 100 100 With the tempo specified by the BPM parameter or the Sets the modulation amount of the right channel feedback MIDI Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI the length of one High Damp 0 10096 beat equals the feedback delay time and the interval Sets the damping amount in the high range Fx 043 between taps becomes equal Selecting a rhythm pattern will g Low Damp 0 100 automatically turn the tap outputs on and off When BPM is Sets the damping amount in the low range Fx 043 set to MIDI the lower limit of the BPM is 44 Input Level Dmod 96 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the input level Fx 037 Dze7 h Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level Fx 037 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 p i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect
364. en 2 Metrar ni Eine Sates Fesal Meter 44 C w WITtSth HE dis alle E p amp On On Off When exiting the RT recording mode is auto Press C Press G continue holding C Release G and C matically selected You may press START STOP to Ex 3 listen to the Style Press START STOP again to stop the playback To enter the Step Record mode again select the Stp recording mode and press START STOP 11 From the Main page of the Style Record mode Seotme A stepTine D sotme press RECORD to exit the Record mode You will u j e be prompted to assign a new name to the Style T ok da and select a memory location where to save it See PressFandC Release F mE The Write window on page 54 for information continue holding C continue holding C on how to save a Style Step Time Step Time Step Time ixl e Ed e m e Chords and second voices in Step Record mode Off On Off With Liverpool you are not obliged to insert single aleasa G din Release D continue holding C continue holding C continue holding C notes in a track There are several ways to insert chords and double voices Lets look at some Inserting a chord When the key prompt appears in Step Time Step Time gt the display play a chord instead of a single note The Te J event s name will be the first note of the chord you on off Press E Release E and C pressed followed by the
365. en the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit differ ent from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV techni cian for help Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the user s authority to operate this equipment NOTICE REGARDING DISPOSAL EU ONLY When this crossed out wheeled bin symbol is displayed on the product owner s manual bat tery or battery package it signifies that when you wish to dispose of this product manual package or battery you must do so in an approved manner Do not discard this product manual package or battery along with ordinary household waste Disposing in the correct manner will prevent harm to human health and potential damage to the environment Since the correct method of disposal will depend on the applicable laws and regulations in your locality please con tact your local administrative body for details If the battery contains heavy metals in excess of the regulated amount a chemical symbol is displayed below the crossed out wheeled bin symbol on the battery or battery package IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used If you have purchased this product via the internet through mail order and or via a telepho
366. ency will change according to the keyboard location pitch 99 499 Parameter value Filter EG modulation Changes in cutoff frequency Note on Note on Note on T Note off Softly played Strongly played Strongly played Setting to Setting to Velocity to A This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that velocity will have on the time varying changes created by the filter EG as set on Page 11 Filter EG to control the filter A cutoff frequency With positive values playing more strongly will cause the filter EG to produce greater changes in cutoff frequency With negative values playing more strongly will also cause the filter EG to produce greater changes in cutoff frequency but with the polarity of the EG inverted 99 99 Velocity to B This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that velocity will have on the time varying changes created by the filter EG to control the filter B cutoff frequency see Velocity to A 99 99 Value of the Velocity to B parameter EG Intensity to A Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that the time varying changes created by the filter 1 EG will have on the filter A cutoff frequency With positive settings the sound will become brighter when the EG levels set by Filter EG Level and Time parameters are in the area and darker when they are in the area With negative settings th
367. end 100 100 X Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Fx 011 a A i Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Fx 011 X Emphatic Point 0 70 X Emphatic Point 0 70 Sets the frequency range to be emphasized Fx 011 R Sets the frequency range to be emphasized 2Fx011 quency Tang p c XI EQ Trim 0 100 X EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 c i Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 X Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB X Pre LEQ Gain dB 45 415dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 P LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz e F Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the LFO speed Sets the delay time LFO Waveform Triangle Sine F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Selects LFO Waveform y lich Sped P Manual 0 100 LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Selects LFO Waveform P Depth 0 100 F Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation i g Sets the depth of LFO modulation Resonance 100 100 g Feedback 100 100 Sets the resonance amount Fx 023 Sets the feedback amount gt Fx 020 P Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet F Cho Fing Wet Dry W
368. ent on page 27 for more information Note While in Backing Sequence mode you can t record the SYNCHRO FADE IN OUT TAP TEMPO RESET ACCOMPANIMENT VOLUME controls 8 Play your music You can even stop the Style by press ing START STOP If you stop the Style while record ing start it again with the START STOP button 9 When finished recording your performance press the left PLAY STOP button The RECORD LED will turn off and you will go back to the Playback page see How to playback a Song before The recorded Song will be automatically converted to the Standard MIDI File format 10 At this point you can edit the Song in Song mode see Song operating mode on page 89 or save it to a card see Save Song page on page 84 Warning The recorded Song is in RAM Random Access Memory and will be deleted when turning the instrument off or entering Record again either in Backing Sequence or Song mode Save the Song to the card if you wish to preserve it CHORD ACC STEP RECORDING While in the Backing Sequence operative mode you can enter the Chord Acc Step Mode to create or edit the Style Chord Acc part of a Song This mode lets you enter chords even if you are not a keyboard player or fix any error made playing chords or selecting Style controls during the Realtime Recording mode You can edit only Songs created on the Liverpool micro ARRANGER Pa50 Pa60 or Pa80 Backing Sequence mode provid
369. ent gt gt Fast Forward Goes to the next measure and fill the remaining space with rests Song operating mode 95 Menu MENU While in any page press MENU to open the Song edit menu This menu gives access to the various Song edit sections When in the menu select an edit section using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons select an edit page using PAGE or press EXIT to exit the menu When in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Song operating mode chord as om om j mue 00 E o 00 41 e Sona Edit MEM Mixer Tun Transp lel Effects DelADut Ins Track Edit Cory Duantize Event Edit Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE Select an edit section from the Menu and or use the PAGE buttons to reach the desired page Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Song mode All edit pages share the same structure Song icon Page header Page number Track status icons Song icon When on this icon indicates that the instrument is in Song mode Page header The header shows the name of the current edit page Usually the header is divided in a first word identify ing the section name e g Mixer FX Send is a Mixer section page and a second word referring to t
370. eo Limiter The Limiter regulates the input signal level It is similar to the Compressor except that the Limiter compresses only signals that exceed the specified level to lower unnecessary peak signals The Limiter applies a peak ing type EQ to the trigger signal which controls the degree of the Limiter effect allowing you to set any band width to be covered This effect is a stereo limiter You can link left and right channels or use each chan nel individually TDry Gain Adjust Limiter AL 7 Stereo In Stereo Out Lefto u Envelope Control o b Envelope Select Limiter 4 imi L Gain Adjust Righto Sra 7Dry Pie Envelope Select L R Mix L Only R Only L R Individually a Selects from linking both channels controlling only from left channel only from the right channel or controlling each channel individually EN Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 b Sets the signal compression ratio gt e Threshold dB 40 0dB Sets the level above which the compressor is applied gt Attack 1 100 Sets the attack time gt d Release 1 100 Sets the release time gt Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB Sets the output gain gt Dz Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the output gain Amt 63 63 Sets the modulation amount of the output gain Side PEQ Insert Off On
371. ep Mode L Dly Bottom msec L Delay Bottom 0 0 50 0msec Sets the lower limit of the delay time on the left channel Fx 009 a L Dly Top msec L Delay Top 0 0 50 0msec Sets the upper limit of the delay time on the left channel Fx 009 R Dly Bottom msec R Delay Bottom 0 0 50 0msec Sets the lower limit of the delay time on the right channel Fx 009 b R Dly Top msec R Delay Top 0 0 50 0msec Sets the upper limit of the delay time on the right channel Fx 009 Sweep Mode EG D mod Determines whether the flanger is controlled by the envelope generator or by the modulation source pz Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that triggers the EG when EG is selected for Sweep Mode or modulation source that causes the flanger to sweep when D mod is selected for Sweep Mode gt EG Attack 1 100 Sets the EG attack speed gt d EG Decay 1 100 Sets the EG decay speed gt S Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount Fx 020 f High Damp 96 0 100 Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range Fx 020 Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Fx 010 020 nes Src Off Tempo 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 c Sweep Mode c Src This parameter switches the flan
372. er Transpose will not change Off The lock is turned off When selecting a Style or Performance the Master Trans pose value may change according to the data memorized into the Performance or Style Performance PAGE 24 PREFERENCES CONTROLS In this page you can set various general parameters for the Style chord tempo il L D CID x za Pref Ctl obl Em ChedkecMode Ore Finger Scale Mode RT Tracks Menor Modes Chord Uelocity CtliStant ztog Note These settings are stored in the Global file After changing these settings press WRITE to save them into the Global The Write Global window will appear see The Write window on page 126 Chord Recognition Mode gt GBL This parameter sets how chords are recognized by the auto accompaniment engine Please note that when in Full or Upper Chord Scanning mode the Fingered 3 mode is always selected and you must always play at least three notes to let a chord be recognized Fingered 1 Play one or more notes according to the selected Chord Scanning Mode A full Major chord will be recognized even if only a single note is played Fingered2 You must always play three or more notes for a full chord to be recognized If you play just one note a unison will be played If you play a suspended 5th a suspended chord will be played The full chord will be recognized when you play t
373. er are deter mined by the Frequency Top and Frequency Bottom set tings Sweep Mode D mod Frequency 4 Frequency Top 75 Wah Higher Bottom 60 Higher ES Bottom 25 amp Woo Top 30 Higher Dz Higher_ Dz Higher 1 Zero Max Zero Max Sweep Mode Auto Frequency Frequency Wah Top 75 Bottom 75 Wah Wah Y Envelope Higher Higher e Bottom 25 Top 25 Woo N Envelope Time Envelope Time b Sweep Mode This parameter changes the wah control mode Setting Sweep Mode to Auto will select an auto wah that sweeps according to envelope changes in the input signal level Auto wah is frequently used for funk guitar parts and clav sounds When Sweep Mode is set to D mod you can control the fil ter directly via the modulation source in the same way as a wah pedal When Sweep Mode is set to LFO the effect uses LFO to sweep in cycle c Envelope Sens Envelope Sensitivity This parameter sets the sensitivity of auto wah Increase the value if the input signal is too low to sweep Reduce the value if the input signal is so high that the filter is stopped temporar ily c Envelope Shape This parameter determines the sweep curve for auto wah Envelope Shape Level Envelope Value 0 100 gt value 0 100 Time d LFO Frequency Hz e BPM MIDI Sync When BPM MIDI Sync Off t
374. er value Filter B Frequency B Cutoff Frequency B This parameter specifies the cutoff frequency of filter B This parameter will be displayed when Filter Type is set to Low Pass amp High Pass High Pass Level This filter cuts the low frequency range that lies below the cutoff frequency By cutting the lower overtones it lightens the tone 1 i 12dB oct Frequency 00 99 Cutoff frequency value PAGE 8 FILTER MODULATION These settings let you apply modulation to the cutoff frequency Frequency of the filter for the selected oscillator to modify the tone J L octave Filter Mod Osc FR Selected Qecll Tracking Lou BS Tracking High F5 Rame Lows 4814 When Filter Type is Low Pass Resonance parameters for filter B will not be editable greyed out Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alternatively you can select oscillators using the F 1 F 4 buttons Filter keyboard tracking Tracking Low High These settings specify keyboard tracking for the cutoff frequency of the filter for the selected oscillator The way in which the cutoff frequency is affected by the keyboard location you play can be specified by the Tracking Low Tracking High Ramp Low and Ramp High parameters C 1 G9 Lowest Highest note in the range Tracking Low Keyboar
375. ernate Modulation Source 1 2 These parameters select the source that will control the pitch EG Level parameters AMS Alternate Modu lation Source list on page 124 Intensity AMS1 2 Intensity These parameters specify the depth and direction of the effect applied by AMS1 With a setting of 0 the levels specified by Start Attack Decay Release Level will be used For example if AMS1 is Joystick Y pushing the joy stick to turn it on will change the Level parameters of the Pitch EG As the absolute value of Intensity is increased the pitch EG levels will change more greatly when the joystick is released The direction of the change is specified by Start Level Swing and Attack Level Swing When the key pressure is released the pitch EG levels will return to their own settings If AMS1 is set to Velocity increasing the absolute value of Intensity will produce increasingly wider change in pitch EG levels for strongly played notes The direction of the change is specified by Start Level Swing and Attack Level Swing As you play more softly the pitch change will draw closer to the pitch EG levels 99 499 Parameter value Start Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction of change in Start Level caused by AMS1 2 If Intensity is a positive value a setting of will raise the EG level and a setting of will decrease it W
376. ero Max Zero Max Higher 038 PitchShift Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the input signal You can select from three types Fast quick response Medium and Slow preserves tonal quality You can also create an effect in which the pitch is gradually raised or dropped using the delay with feedback Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Dry Input Level High Damp Pitch Shifter Delay T4 prek Post Feedback Position Feedback Input Level Right E AT Mode Slow Medium Fast Switches Pitch Shifter mode Pitch Shift 1 2tone 24 24 Sets the pitch shift amount by steps of a semitone gt D Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of pitch shift amount gt Amt 24 24 Sets the modulation amount of pitch shift amount gt Fine cent 100 100cent Sets the pitch shift amount by steps of a cent gt Dz Amt 100 100cent Sets the modulation amount of pitch shift amount gt Delay Time msec 0 1000msec Sets the delay time Feedback Position Pre Post Switches the feedback connection gt Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Input Level Dmod 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the input level Fx 037 Drz Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for
377. es Off The sequencers Tempo are not linked Each sequencer uses its own Tempo Link Measure The two sequencers Tempo are linked together The Tempo data written into the Songs are ignored Adjust the Tempo using the TEMPO VALUE controls Start one of the sequencers by pressing its own PLAY STOP control Then start the other sequencer by pressing the other PLAY STOP control the second sequencer starts at the next measure The two sequencers Tempo are linked together The Tempo data written into the Songs are ignored Adjust the Tempo using the TEMPO VALUE controls Start one of the sequencers by pressing its own PLAY STOP control Then start the other sequencer by pressing the other PLAY STOP control the second sequencer starts at the next beat quarter or octave depending on the Song s Time Signature S2 FX Mode gt GBL This parameter selects the effects mode for Sequencer 2 When a 4 effects Song is loaded all four effects are used independently from this setting Link Beat AB The A and B effect pair is used Sequencer 2 shares its effects with Sequencer 1 CD The C and D effect pair is used Note When this parameter is set to CD Sequencer 2 shares its effects with the Realtime Keyboard tracks so these effects can be changed either selecting a Song for Sequencer 2 or select ing a Performance unless the Performance FX Mode parameter is set to Off see below Performance FX Mode gt GBL This
378. es a mono type limiter and a multi tap delay You can change the order of the effect con Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left A nection Routing Wet Dry Limiter Y x Phaser UT ii BM Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o ii Wet D H Limiter jL gt Phaser Limiter o Multitap Delay ad H rem Normal Gain Adjust Output Mode Resonance Wet Invert Feedback Phaser Wet Dry Limiter Z H Delay Right UB Gain Adjust High Damp 1 Envelope Control LEO Tr Sine d MtDiy Wet Dry Right i i i Wet Dry L Ratio 4 0 1 50 0 1 Inf Envelope Control Sets the signal compression ratio Fx 003 a Threshold dB 40 0dB P j L Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the level above which the compressor is applied Fx 003 Sets the signal compression ratio SFX 003 L Attack 1 100 a Threshold dB 40 0dB b BE Edid Sets the level above which the compressor is applied Fx 003 Release 1 100 Sets the rel ti Fx 003 L Attack 1 100 Sere e een 2 Sets the attack time Fx 003 L Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB b c Hm Release 1 100 Sets the limiter output gain Fx 003 Seis the release time 3Fx 003 z A e Oe ee o I
379. ess Exit While trying to create a new directory an error occurred Media Write Protected Press Exit The card is physically protected Remove the protec tion and try again Memory full This message appears in Backing Sequence mode when the memory for recording a Song is full No Card Unformatted Sh Enter to Format Either there is no card in the drive or the card is unfor matted Insert a card and try again or press SHIFT ENTER to start formatting the card Not a Pa series or Corrupted File The file you are trying to load is not compatible with Liverpool or Pa series instruments Error messages amp Troubleshooting 239 Error messages Not Enough Space on Media There is no more space to load save or copy data The card operation will be aborted Replace the card and use an empty card to save your data Should this mes sage appear during loading the SSD Solid State Disk based internal memory is full Nothing to Rename Press Exit There are no items to rename Overwrite Existing File Yes No You are writing data on an existing SET folder or on a file of type MID or JBX Overwrite on Backup Enter Exit Press ENTER YES to overwrite files carrying the same name on the target device or EXIT NO to avoid over writing any file Overwrite on Copy Enter Exit Press ENTER YES to overwrite files carrying the same name on the target device Press Exit NO to avoid overwriting any file
380. essed Off 51 SD Rap Off 39 D 2 127 88 Claps Off 127 88 Claps O 127 88 Claps off 337 Alkis off 40 E2 61 SD Tiny O 125 99 SD off 47 SD Yowie Off 55 SD Hip 2 Off 41 F2 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 139 Real El Tom Off 76 Tom 1 Floor Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 42 F 2 129 88 HH Open 1 99 HH Old TiteClos 1 93 HH2 Closed2 1 97 HH OldClose1 1 43 G2 75 Tom 1 Hi O 139 Real El Tom Off 76 Tom 1 Floor Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 44 G 2 102 HH Hip O 103 HH AlpoClose Off 94 HH2 Foot 1 102 HH Hip Off 45 A2 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 139 Real El Tom Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 46 A 2 98 HH Old Open1 1 101 HH Old Open2 1 91 HH1 Sizzle 1 98 HH Old Open1 1 47 B2 75 Tom 1 Hi O 139 Real El Tom Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 48 C3 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 139 Real El Tom Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 49 C 3 132 88 Crash Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 50 D3 75 Tom 1 Hi O 139 Real El Tom Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 51 D 3 113 Ride Edge 2 O 113 Ride Edge 2 O 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 52 E3 108 CymbalReverse Off 108 CymbalReverse O 106 China Cymbal Off 108 CymbalReverse Off 53 F3 114 Ride Jazz O 114 Ride Jazz off 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Off 54 F 3 212 Tambourin Acc2 O 212 Tambourin Acc2 off 212 Tambourin Acc2 off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal O 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 56 G 3 136 88 Cowbell Ofi 225 Cowbell off 225 Cow
381. et 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Sets the phaser effect balance Fx 010 023 i Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger Fx 010 020 Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Selects the phaser output mode Fx 060 Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger Fx 060 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dz Da Sre Off Tempo Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 ance on page 177 Effects 221 Mono Mono Chain 078 Exc MTapDly 079 OD HG Amp S Exciter Multitap Delay Overdrive Hi Gain Amp Simulation This effect combines a mono type exciter and a multi This effect combines a mono type overdrive high gain tap delay distortion and an amp simulation You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out
382. f 39 SD Jazz Ring Off 39 D 2 122 Hand Claps Off 127 88 Claps Off 127 88 Claps Off 40 E2 37 SD Full Room O 38 SD Off Center Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 41 F2 79 Tom 2 Floor O 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 42 F 2 90 HH1 Open 2 1 86 HH1 Closed1 1 92 HH2 Closed1 1 43 G2 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 44 G 2 94 HH2 Foot 1 88 HH1 Foot 1 94 HH2 Foot 1 45 A2 78 Tom 2 Lo O 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 46 A 2 89 HH1 Open 1 1 89 HH1 Open 1 1 89 HH1 Open 1 1 47 B2 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 48 C3 77 Tom 2 Hi O 77 Tom 2 Hi off 77 Tom 2 Hi off 49 C 3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 50 D3 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 51 D 3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 O 52 E3 106 China Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal O 53 F3 114 Ride Jazz off 114 Ride Jazz off 114 Ride Jazz O 54 F 3 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal O 56 G 3 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell O 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 58 A 3 198 Vibraslap O 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 59 B3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 O 60 C4 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 61 C 4 168 BongoLo
383. f guitar amplifiers It is also effective for organ and drum sounds V f wa TDry Amp Simulation Filter o Amp Simulation Filter By Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Right o o fet Dry Amplifier Type Selects the type of guitar amplifier SS EL84 6L6 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Duez b Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 178 Effects Filter Dynamic 002 Compressor Stereo Compressor This effect compresses the input signal to regulate the level and give a punchy effect It is useful for guitar piano and drum sounds This is a stereo compressor You can link left and right channels or use each chan nel separately Stereo In Stereo Out Lefto gt o Wet Dry EQTrim LEQ HEQ 3 ge Lo HP Compressor Output Level elope Control 7o j Output Level JAH gt Compressor L a EQTrim LEQ HEQ Right naib Envelope Control Envelope Select L R Mix L R Individually a Determines whether the left and right channels are linked or used separately z b Sensitivity 1 100 Sets the sensitivity gt Attack 1 100 Sets the attack level gt d EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the
384. f notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Pre Delay msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the delay time from the original sound Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Dz f Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the LFO modulation depth Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth High Low Split Point 1 100 g Sets the frequency split point between the low and high range gt Feedback 100 100 Sets the feed back amount of the chorus block h High Damp 0 100 Sets the high range damping amount of the chorus block Low Level 0 100 i Sets the low range output level i High Level 0 100 Sets the high range chorus output level Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Do Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 g High Low Split Point This parameter sets the frequency that splits the high and low range Only the high range will be sent to the chorus block h Feedback Sets the feedback amount of the chorus block Increasing the feedback will allow you to use the effect as a flanger 018 MTap Ch Dly Multitap Chorus Delay This effect has four chorus blocks with a different LFO phase You can create a complex stereo image by set ting each bloc
385. ff 101 HH Old Open2 Off 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 72 C5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 73 C 5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 75 D 5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 78 F 5 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 79 G5 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 80 G 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 81 A5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 82 A 5 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 85 C 6 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 87 D 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 88 E6 243 Stadiu
386. ffect processors Usu ally A is the reverb while B is the modulating effect chorus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see Effects on page 177 ModTrk Modulating Track Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modulate an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller B gt Asend B gt A Send Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect PAGE 9 FX C D SELECT This page lets you select the C and D effects Usually the C effect is a reverb while the D effect is a modulat ing effect Standard MIDI Files usually require two effects only You can however assign all four effects to a Song see Page 3 Mixer FX Block on page 96 j Tue ai yc a ane ia E pm mou md Lh page e Fe DD Select Fa Cz p 23 Compressor Rew Gate ModTillP 1 BiBeendilzr Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again Edit the Song in Song mode to permanently change the effects C D Effects assigned to the C and D effect processors Usu ally C is the reverb while D is the modulating effect chorus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see Effects on page 177 ModTrk Modulating Track Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can mo
387. file a file with the JBX extension instead of a single Song This lets you play a list of Songs without multiple selec tions chord iempo measure transpose J nem i E a tt octave m4 har mii Tre ex S MEDLEY JB E Sit5undag Pianoel 0 Saino sona Bultar l 0 Lurics StrnaEnsz M UoPadi m Note The Jukebox file can be assigned to the Sequencer 1 only Note To create a Jukebox file go to the Jukebox page see page 79 Warning Should you delete a Song included into the Juke box list currently in play the sequencer will stop and the No Song message will appear At this point press SHIFT gt gt Seq1 to go to the next Song and press PLAY STOP again Transport controls When you select a Jukebox file Sequencer 1 transport controls are slightly different than with single Songs lt lt and gt gt Pressed alone these buttons are the Rewind and Fast Forward commands Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press these buttons to scroll to the previous or next Song in the Jukebox list Pauses the Song at the current position Press PAUSE or PLAY STOP to start the Song playing again PLAY STOPStarts or stops the current Song When you stop the Song the sequencer goes back to measure 1 of the current Song If the Jukebox page is open you can start from the Song at the first line of the dis play See Page 9 Jukebox
388. g Wet Dry 3 Band PEG Wah Auto Wah Amp Simulation Driver E N NANI s ry ME nee ME Dly Wet Dry Wah Amp Simulation Filter B Mode Overdrive Hi Gain i F Drive nun mite Right I gt o rt eal eros O Drive Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Davee Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion LEG a Drive 1 100 Sets the degree of distortion Fx 006 W Frequency Bottom 0 100 O Output Level 0 50 Sets the lower limit of the wah center frequency Fx 009 Sets the overdrive output level Fx 006 ze a SSS Frequency Top 0 100 b Src Off Tempo Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency Fx 009 Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level W Sweep Mode Auto D mod LFO Amt g 50 50 Selects the control from auto wah modulation source and LFO Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level Fx 009 ry moi b S Daz O Low Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Src Off Tempo p Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type Selects the modulation source for the wah when Sweep Mode D mod Gain dB 18 18dB W LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 Sets the LEO speed O Mid1 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz W Resonance 0 100 Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Sets the resonance amount d d Q eee 0 5 10 0 Low Pass Filter Off On Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 Fx 006 Switches the wah low pass f
389. ge Fx 043 ets the damping amount in the low range gt Input Level Dmod 100 100 Input Level Dmod 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the input level Fx 037 D ze Sets the modulation amount of the input level Fx 037 Drez h f Src Off Tempo Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level Fx 037 Selects the modulation source for the input level Fx 037 i Spread 50 50 g ko 0 50 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound Fx 043 ets the width of the stereo image of the effect soun gt Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dm mode D i Src Off Tempo h Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 ance on page 177 206 Effects ER Delay 045 M Tap Delay Stereo Multitap Delay The left and right Multitap Delays have two taps respectively Changing the routing of feedback and tap output allows you to create various patterns of com plex effect sounds
390. ge 124 LFO1 can be modulated by LFO2 Intensity AMS1 Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMSI F will have When this parameter is set to a value of 16 33 49 66 82 or 99 the LFO fre quency being can be increased by a maximum of 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 times respectively or decreased by 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 32 or 1 64 respectively For example if AMS1 F is Note Number positive values of this parameter will cause the oscillator LFO to speed up as you play higher notes Negative values will cause the oscillator LFO to slow down as you play higher notes This change will be centered on the C4 note If AMSI F is set to JS Y raising the value of this parameter will cause the oscillator LFO1 speed to increase as the joystick is moved away from yourself With a setting of 99 moving the joystick all the way away from yourself will increase the LFO speed by approximately 64 times 99 499 Intensity value AMS2 F Alternate Modulation Source2 Intensity AMS2 Intensity Make settings for a second alternate modulation source that will adjust the frequency of the oscillator LFO1 see above AMSI F Alternate Modulation Source1 and Intensity AMS1 Intensity PAGE 18 LFO2 Here you can make settings for the LFO2 which is the second LFO that can be applied to the selected oscilla tor See Page 17 LFO1 for more information on the parameters val
391. ge 7 Track Mode on page 78 b Lowers the Master Transpose a semitone Raises the Master Transpose a semitone 47 OCTAVE gt PERF STYLE STS These buttons transpose the selected track in steps of a whole octave 12 semitones max 2 octaves The trans position value is shown in octaves on the top right area of the display transpose r f Press both buttons together to reset the Octave Trans pose to zero Note The Octave Transpose has no effect on tracks set to Drum mode and even if set in a different status on the Drum and Percussion tracks Lowers the selected track an octave Raises the selected track an octave 48 BALANCE slider In Song Play mode this slider balances the volume of the two on board sequencers When fully on the left only Sequencer 1 can be heard When fully on the right only Sequencer 2 can be heard When in the middle both sequencers will play at full volume 49 SEQUENCER TRANSPORT CONTROLS SEQ1 and SEQ2 The instrument is equipped with two sequencers Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 each with its own set of transport controls lt lt and gt gt Rewind and Fast Forward commands If you use them while the Song is in play they make it scroll back or forward When pressed once these buttons move the Song to the previous or following measure When kept pressed they make the Song scroll continuously until you release them In Jukebox mode Sequencer 1
392. ger control mode With Sweep Mode EG the flanger will sweep using the enve lope generator This envelope generator is included in the envelope flanger and not related to the Pitch EG Filter EG or Amp EG The Src parameter selects the source that starts the enve lope generator If you select for example Gate the envelope generator will start when the note on message is received When Sweep Mode D mod the modulation source can control the flanger directly Select the modulation source using the Src parameter mn The effect is off when a value for the modulation source specified for the Src parameter is smaller than 64 and the effect is on when the value is 64 or higher The Envelope Generator is triggered when the value changes from 63 or smaller to 64 or higher d EG Attack d EG Decay Attack and Decay speed are the only adjustable parameters on this EG Effects 191 Pitch Phase Mod 023 Phaser 024 RandomPhser Stereo Phaser Stereo Random Phaser This effect creates a swell by shifting the phase It is This is a stereo phaser The effect uses a step shape very effective on electric piano sounds You can add waveform and random LFO for modulation creating a spread to the sound by offsetting the phase of the left unique phasing effect
393. gs setto Release Level Swings set to AMS1 2 T Use this parameter to select the source that will control the Time parameters of the filter EG See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 124 Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS1 2 T will have For example if AMS1 2 T is set to FltKTr the EG Time parameters will be controlled by the Keyboard Tracking settings With positive values of this parameter positive values of Ramp will lengthen the EG times and negative values of Ramp will shorten the EG times The direction of change is speci fied by Attack Time Swing Decay Time Swing Slope Time Swing and Release Time Swing With a setting of 0 the times specified by Frequency A Cutoff Frequency A will be used If AMS1 2 T is set to Velocity positive values of this parameter will cause EG times to lengthen as you play more strongly and negative values will cause EG times to shorten as you play more strongly 99 499 Intensity value Attack Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS1 2 T will affect the attack time With positive values of Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMS to lengthen the time and setting this parameter to will allow AMS to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no change Decay Time S
394. gt STS Attack time This is the time during which the sound goes from zero at the moment when you strike a key to it s maximum level Decay time Time to go from the final Attack level to the beginning of the Release Release time This is the time during which the sound goes from the sustaining or Decay phase to zero The Release is triggered by releasing a key Filter cutoff This sets the sound bright ness Resonance Use the Filter Resonance to define the width of the frequency range affected by the Filter Decay Release Cutoff 46 Style Play operating mode Page 14 Track Mode Vibrato Rate Speed of the Vibrato Vibrato Depth Intensity of the Vibrato Vibrato Delay Delay time before the Vibrato begins after the sound starts Drum tracks When a track is set in Drum Mode like the Drum and Percussion tracks you can adjust the volume for each of the Drum and Percussion categories Kick V Kick drums volume Snare V Snare drums volume Tom V Toms volume HiHat V Hi Hat volume CymbalV Ride Crash and other cymbals volume Percus1V Classic percussion set volume Percus2V Ethnic percussion set volume SFX V Special effects volume Reset You can reset the parameters value by keeping the SHIFT button pressed while pressing one of the selected track VOLUME VALUE buttons After you press the above button combination the Reset window appears RESET NO Cance SHETH ES A1 Pre
395. h page Filter lisci Em Selected Dscill Tyre LPF Resonant Trim 33 Fresuerncy Br P Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alternatively you can select oscillators using the F 1 F 4 buttons Filter Type This parameter selects the type of filter Low Pass Res onant Low Pass amp High Pass for the selected oscilla tor When the Low Pass amp High Pass filter type is selected the filter B will be activated Low Pass Resonance 24 dB octave low P pass filter with resonance Low Pass amp High Pass 12 dB octave low pass filter and 12 dB octave high pass ET filter in series A Trim Use this parameter to adjust the level at which the audio signal output from the selected oscillator is input to filter A Note If this value is raised the sound may distort if Reso nance is set to a high value or when you play a chord 00 99 Trim level Frequency A Cutoff Frequency A This parameter specifies the cutoff frequency of filter A This is a filter that cuts the high frequency region above the cutoff frequency This is the most common type of filter 1 12dB oct and is used to cut part of the overtone 1 components making an originally bright 1 1 L 1 Low Pass Level 24dB oct timbre sound more mellow darker When the Filter Type is Low Pass Frequency Resonance the cutoff will have a steeper slope 00 99 Resonance A The resonance
396. hat Style Press RECORD to enter the Style Record mode You are prompted to select either the Current Style or a New Style E emm n CoG E me m I rerom Current Style Meu Style Select Current Style if you want to edit the cur rent Style or make a new Style starting from an existing one Select New Style if you want to start from scratch with an empty Style After you select your preferred option the Main page of the Style Record mode will appear Ku neasure nn FIL ut C M q E n Lu Eni CUCL RRT PLZ CU Len Metro Grd Resolsf Meter 44 Come HTT Sth Use the A VOLUME VALUE buttons and the F 1 and F 2 function keys to select the E Style Ele ment and CV Chord Variation parameter Note For more information on the Style Elements and Chord Variations and the Style structure in general see The Style s structure on page 52 Use the RL Recording Length parameter to set the length in measures of the pattern to step record Select this parameter using the E VOL UME VALUE buttons and the F 4 function button Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to set the value Use the Meter parameter to set the Style s meter You can edit this parameter only if you selected the New Style option when entering the Record mode Set the tempo Keep the SHIFT button pressed and us
397. he Drum Kit A most recent extension is the GM2 that further expands the Programs database The Liverpool is soundwise compatible with the GM2 standard THE GLOBAL CHANNEL Any channels with the Global option assigned see Page 6 MIDI IN Channels on page 128 can simulate the Liverpool integrated keyboard When the Liverpool is connected to a master keyboard transmission should take place over the Global channel of the Liverpool 36 MIDI The Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels The MIDI messages received over a Global channel and not over a standard channel are affected by the buttons of the KEYBOARD MODE section as well from the split point Therefore if the SPLIT button LED is lit up the notes that arrive to the Liverpool over this channel will be divided by the split point into the Upper above the split point and Lower below the split point parts The notes that arrive to a Global channel are used for the chord recognition of the automatic accompaniment If the KEYBOARD MODE is SPLIT only the notes below the split point will be used These notes will be combined with the ones of the special Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels THE CHORD 1 AND CHORD 2 CHANNELS You can set two special Chord channels see page 129 to send to the Liverpool notes for the chord recogni tion The notes will be combined with the notes that go through the channel set as Global Global notes are rec ognized only under the split point if the SP
398. he LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 009 cg BPM MIDI 40 240 e Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009 gt Base Note 3 25 2 Js J 2 4 o Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Step Base Note A As A D D Ja J ds J o Selects the type of notes to specify the LFO step speed gt ae Times x1 x32 Sets the number of notes to specify the LFO step speed gt Manual 0 100 9 Sets the filter center frequency Depth 0 100 Sets the modulation depth of filter center frequency h Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of filter modulation Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of filter modulation i Resonance 0 100 Sets the resonance amount Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 gt Dmc Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a LFO Waveform c LFO Frequency Hz d LFO Step Freq Frequency Hz When LFO Waveform is set to Step Tri LFO is a step shape triangle waveform The LFO Frequency parameter sets the original triangle waveform speed Changing the LFO Step Freq par
399. he LFO speed uses the LFO Frequency parameter setting When BPM MIDI Sync On the LFO speed follows the BPM Base Note and Times settings e BPM e Base Note e Times One cycle of LFO sweep is obtained by multiplying the length of a note 3 selected for Base Note in relation to the tempo specified in BPM or the MIDI Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI by the number specified in the Times parame ter Effects 183 Filter Dynamic 010 Random Filt Stereo Random Filter This stereo band pass filter uses a step shape waveform and random LFO for modulation You can create a spe cial effect from filter oscillation Stereo In Stereo Out Left gt i f Wet Dry Filter A Filter E M Right Li ane Saabs LFO Waveform Step Tri Random Selects LFO Waveform gt LFO Phase degree 180 180 7 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right gt LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed gt Dmic Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source used for both LFO speed and step speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed LFO Step Freq Frequency Hz 0 05 50 00Hz Sets the LFO step speed speed that changes in steps gt Dz d Amt 50 00 50 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO step speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of t
400. he Style Play mode All edit pages share the same structure Style Play icon Page header Page number C umm 1 27 A Style Play icon When on this icon indicates that the instrument is in Style Play mode Page header The header shows the name of the current edit page As a general rule the header is divided into a first word identifying the section name e g Mixer FX Send is a Mixer section page and a second word referring to the page name e g FX Send Section name Page name Page number This area shows the current page number A H Each pair of VOLUME VALUE A H buttons selects a different parameter of command depending on the edit page After selecting a parameter you can change its value by pressing one of the two buttons in a pair or using the TEMPO VALUE controls PAGE 1 MIXER VOLUME This page lets you set the volume for each of the Real time Keyboard or Style tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Real time Keyboard tracks to the Style tracks and vice versa m cr UM EIS e 5 Y p m 0 cog A e 9 Kt mau g gu mz 8 amp u m5 Z C mummums 116 mummumm 117 Volume PERF STYLE STS Track s volume 0 127 MIDI value of the track s volume PAGE 2 MIXER PAN
401. he page name e g FX Send Section name Page name ERN ADM Page This area shows the current page number 96 Song operating mode Page 1 Mixer Volume A H Each pair of VOLUME VALUE buttons select a differ ent track parameter of command depending on the edit page Track status icons A series of icons near each track show the track s status gt Selected track or parameter When this symbol appears you can execute any available operation on the selected item Track in play or already recorded no icon The track is in mute or does not contain data PAGE 1 MIXER VOLUME Here you can adjust the volume for each of the 16 sequencer tracks Press both VOLUME VALUE button to mute unmute the corresponding track A muted track remains muted even when selecting a different Song Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again nord D empo neasure jJ nue Di D g tt MILL 4 e Mixer Volume FR mmn GSA maman GZA B B ne B frc oom GEE n BIA oom 117 B chord tempo cam em J Fijos EH i E e Mixer Uslume ew Ba wind GSA TT TT GFE B Era gaz AOA mammam SE E B GIA mmm 117 c PAGE 2 MIXER PAN Here you can adjust the pan for each Song track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tra
402. his Setup on the card together with the Global data MAIN PAGE Press SONG PLAY to access this page from another operating mode Note When switching from Style Play to Song Play the Song Setup is automatically selected and various track parameters may change Press EXIT NO to access this page from the Menu or any of the Song Play edit pages To see the Song s tracks use the TRACK SELECT but ton to switch from the main page showing the Real time tracks to the other tracks Pressed a first time you will see tracks 1 8 enlightened TRACK SELECT LED a second press will show tracks 9 16 flashing TRACK SELECT LED pressed again you will go back to the Realtime tracks TRACK SELECT LED switched off Selected Sequencer Song Play icon Page header Measure number 5i Pianc l oer Guitare Lurics Shrek VosFPadi Song select commands Realtime Keyboard tracks Song Play icon When on this icon shows that the instrument is in Song Play mode Page header This line shows the currently selected sequencer and the assigned Song Sl Song Name or S2 Song Name When no Song is assigned to the current sequencer this line shows only the selected sequencer number S1 or S2 depending on the selected sequencer When no sequencer or Song is selected only the No Song text appears Press either A S1 or B S1 to switch between Sequencer
403. hord am mma way o n J nyem uu cog eda n 11 ra T EIIB e Edit Eu Filter 3 Hote DPF BELL OFF Prod IOF PRPL OFF Corl OFF Bend DPP Teeter OFF Fact CFF Turn On the filter for all event types you do not wish to see in the Event Edit page Note Notes Prog Program Change values Ctrl Control Change events T Meter Tempo and Meter changes Master Track only Aftt Mono Channel Aftertouch events PAft Poly Aftertouch events Bend Pitch Bend events PaCtl Controls exclusive of the Liverpool like the FX and Scale settings These controls are recorded to the Master Track and saved as System Exclusive data EVENT EDIT PROCEDURE The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each sin gle MIDI event of the selected track You can for exam ple replace a note with a different one or change its playing strength Here is the general event editing pro cedure 1 While in the Main page of the Song mode load the Song to edit see Main page on page 89 If a Song is already loaded or just recorded this step is not needed Press MENU and use one of the H VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Event Edit section The Event Edit page appears see Page 24 Event Edit on page 103 for more information an am emm myc OC G 43 octave e Evert Edit eat Trk 1 Position GALE Bae
404. hout using Automatic Accompaniment 7 Stop it OK you could say Oh that s easy I know how to do it I can just press that big red START STOP button again Yes you are perfectly right But that s the easy way Let us suggest a more colorful way PRESS ENDING1 OR ENDING2 An ending is instantaneously called and will begin playing to lead the Style to a colorful end As usual ENDINGI is pre programmed while ENDING2 asks for your chord progression FILL COUNT IN BREA INTRO Or 20 o O 20 OO ooo oo IRIATION os In Sync What if I want to avoid all that START STOP stuff I mean I prefer to have my hands free for playing music Good point The SYNCHRO button is there right for this purpose 1 While the Style is stopped press the SYN CHRO button The SYNCHRO START LED begins blinking The Syn chro Start function is enabled SYNCHRO AP TEMPO START STOP SET o o INSERT INTRO O1 20 oo O START um 2 Playachord on the keyboard You must play a chord for the chord recognition engine Usually it will be to the left of the split point but it depends on the CHORD SCANNING section see CHORD SCANNING section on page 17 The Style starts 3 Stopthe Style using your chosen method Need more information Go to Style Play operating mode on page 40 The Ref erence Guide includes all the information you need PLAYING IN REALTIME Without using Au
405. hree or more notes Fingered3 You must always play three or more notes for a chord to be recognized One Finger You can also compose a chord using a sim plified chord playing technique f you play only one note a Major chord is recognized Play the root note plus a white key on the left for a 7th Ex C3 B2 Play the root note plus a black key on the left for a Minor chord Ex C3 Bb2 Play the root note plus a white and a black key on the left for a Minor 7th Ex C34 B2 Bb2 Style Play operating mode 51 Page 24 Preferences controls Scale Mode gt GBL This parameter determines which tracks will use the selected alternative scale see Scale on page 44 Realtime tracks The scale will only affect the Realtime Keyboard tracks Upper tracks The scale will only affect the Upper 1 3 Realtime Keyboard tracks All Tracks The scale will affect all tracks Realtime Style Pads Memory Mode gt GBL This parameter sets the way the MEMORY button works Chord When its LED is on the MEMORY button keeps the recognized chord in memory When its LED is off the chord is reset when raising the hand from the keyboard Chord Lower When its LED is on the MEMORY button keeps the recognized chord in memory and keeps the Lower track held until the next note or chord is played When its LED is off the chord is reset when raising the hand from the keyboard and the Lower track is not sustaine
406. ide Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 O 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 60 C4 134 88 Conga Off 171 BongoHi Open O 171 BongoHi Open off 171 BongoHi Open O 61 C 4 134 88 Conga Off 168 BongoLo Open O 168 BongoLo Open off 168 BongoLo Open O 62 D4 134 88 Conga Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap O 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 63 D 4 134 88 Conga Off 161 CongaHi Open O 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open O 64 E4 134 88 Conga Off 158 CongaLo Open O 158 CongaLo Open off 158 CongaLo Open O 65 F4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 O 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 O 66 F 4 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open O 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open O 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell O 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell O 68 G 4 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell O 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell 9 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up O 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up O 70 A 4 182 MaracasPush off 182 MaracasPush O 182 MaracasPush off 182 MaracasPush O 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 72 C5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 73 C 5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 75 D 5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves O 199 Claves off 199 Claves off 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 off 200 Woodbloc
407. identifies a folder E F Scroll Up Scroll the list up Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these buttons to jump to the previous alphabetical sec tion G H Scroll Down Scroll the list down Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these buttons to jump to the next alphabetical sec tion TEMPO VALUE section These controls scroll the list up or down F 1 SD Press this button after replacing a card in the card slot The new card will be read and the file list shown on the display will be updated F 2 LOAD Load the Song at the first line of the display F 3 OPEN Opens the selected folder file whose name begins with the Y symbol F 4 CLOSE Closes the current folder returning to the parent upper folder SAVE SONG PAGE The recorded Song is contained in RAM and is lost when turning the instrument off The Song is also lost when you overwrite it in Record mode or when switching to the Song Play mode You must save to a card any Song you wish to preserve 1 If you are in Record mode RECORD LED on stop the sequencer and press RECORD to go back to the Backing Sequence Playback page 2 Select the Save Song button The Save Song page appears chord tempo J J mem oic g IELI c Save Sond MEWLMANE MID LES Sb SAVE OPEN CLOSE 3 Move the folder where you wish to save your Song to the first line of th
408. ils see Page 10 FX A editing above Song operating mode 99 Page 10 FX A editing PAGE 14 TRACK EASY EDIT In this page you can edit the main parameters of the Programs assigned to each track Note All values are relative to the value of the original Pro gram You can also change the volume for each class of Drums and Percussions if the selected track is set in Drum mode see below Page 15 Track Mode Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again chord E Cap um dL page Em E B B B B 5 A B Attack B Attack 8 D e amm com PED TES foi E d 1 octave e Track Easy Edit Fa B Attack 8 Attack 8 3 Attack B Attack H 4 Attack B Attack 8 E B Attack 10 Attack 6 t Here is the edit procedure 1 Usethe VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F 1 F 4 buttons to select a sound parame ter or its value For the Drum and Percussion tracks see below the Drum tracks section 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the sound parameter or its value Parameters Attack Attack time This is the time during which the sound goes from zero at the moment when you strike a key to it s maximum level Decay Decay time Time to go from the final Attack level to the beginning of the Release
409. ilter on and off Gain dB _ ne 18 18dB e A Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 Selects the type of guitar amplifier O Mid2 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Routing WAH gt AMP AMP gt WAH Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Switches the order of the wah and amp simulation connection e Q I 0 5 10 0 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 Fx 006 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Gain dB 18 18dB Dz Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 Src Off Tempo D Tap1 Time msec 0 680msec g Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Sets the Tap1 delay time Amt 100 100 f Tap1 Level 0 100 Tab e Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Sets the Tap1 output level Fx 045 ance on page 177 D Tap2 Time msec 0 680msec Sets the Tap2 delay time g Feedback 100 100 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount D Mt Delay Wet Dry Dry 2 98 98 2 Wet Sets the multitap delay effect balance h High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Fx 043 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dz i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177
410. imiter to respond to any frequency band f Trigger Monitor Setting this parameter On will cause the trigger signal to be output instead of the effect sound Use this parameter to check the trigger signal with EQ applied Usually set this to Off Effects Filter Dynamic 004 MBandLimit Multiband Limiter This effect applies the Limiter to the low range mid range and high range of the input signal You can con trol dynamics for each range to adjust the sound pres sure of the low range mid range and high range in a different way from the EQ 179 Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Lefto fl o Band Pass Filters Wet Dry 1 Lo Limiter Vf Envelope Control Mid Low Offset E tx Nie gt Limiter Gf Envelope Control Gain Adjust High Mid Offset gt 5 gt Limiter Vf Envelope Control Right High Offset uos a Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Fx 003 b Threshold dB 40 0dB Sets the level above which the compressor is applied Fx 003 Attack 1 100 Sets the attack time Fx 003 d Release 1 100 Sets the release time Fx 003 Low Offset dB 40 0dB e r Gain of the low range trigger signal gt f Mid Offset dB 40 0dB Gain of the mid range trigger signal High Offset dB 40 0dB 9 Gai
411. ine the way chords are recognized by the arranger LOWER Chords are detected below the split point The number of notes you should play to form a chord is defined by the Chord Scanning Mode parameter see Chord Recognition Mode on page 51 UPPER Chords are detected above the split point You must always play three or more notes to let the arranger recognize a chord FULL both LEDs on Chords are detected on the full keyboard range You must always play three or more notes to let the arranger recognize a chord OFF No chords will be detected After pressing START STOP only the Drum and Percus sion accompaniment tracks can play 40 KEYBOARD MODE section PERF gt STS These buttons define how the four Keyboard or Real time tracks are positioned on the keyboard SPLIT The Lower track plays below the split point while the Upper 1 Upper 2 and Upper 3 tracks play above it By default selecting this keyboard mode automati cally selects the Lower chord scanning mode see Chord Recognition Mode on page 51 FULL UPPER The Upper 1 Upper 2 and or Upper 3 tracks play on the whole keyboard range The Lower track does not play By default selecting this keyboard mode automati cally selects the Full chord scanning mode see Chord Recognition Mode on page 51 41 STYLE CHANGE This button turns the Style Change function on or off ON When you select a Performance the Style could change according to which Sty
412. ing you can even use up to 4 effects A D Inter nal FX Processors but this will be useful only when reading the Song back on the Liverpool only since other General MIDI compliant instruments use only 2 effects Need more information Go to Song operating mode on page 89 The Refer ence Guide includes all the information you need THE ARABIC SCALE You can program an Arabic scale in real time by assigning a footswitch or a pad the Quarter Tone function Another way of changing the scale is assigning it to a Performance or Single Touch Setting STS but this is the most convenient way to change the pitch in real time 1 Program a footswitch to be the Quarter tone switch Simply go to the Global environment and reach Page 3 Assignable Pedal Footswitch Assignable Slider There you will find the P S Pedal Switch parame ter to which you can assign the Quarter tone function Press WRITE to save the Global status in memory see The Write window on page 126 2 Lower some note pitches Keep the Quarter tone pedal pressed The keyboard will not play at this time Press the notes you want to lower a quarter of tone Release the pedal 3 Play with your new scale The notes you pressed are now lowered of a quarter of tone 4 Resetthe original scale Press the Quarter tone pedal again All pitches will be reset and the scale selected by the Performance STS or Style Performance will be recalled Need m
413. ing 1 89 Ending 2 90 Break Count IN 91 Fade IN OUT 92 Memory 93 Bass Inversion 94 Manual Bass 95 Tempo Lock 96 Single Touch 97 Style Change SINGLE TOUCH SETTINGS STS Note You can remotely select Single Touch Settings STS on the Liverpool by sending it Bank Select MSB CC 0 Bank Select LSB CC 32 and Program Change messages on the Control channel see page 129 If a Style is already selected just send the Program Change message CC 0 CC 32 PC STS PC STS PC STS PC STS The same as the Style to which the STS pertains 64 STS 1 65 STS2 66 STS3 66 STS 4 INTERNAL SONG Song name Across the Universe File name ACROSS Song name Will lar ei Ke aY M PE LE Internal Song File name WILL All I ve got to do ALL_IGOT Julia JULIA All My Loving ALL_MYLV Lady Madonna LADY_MAD All You Need is Love ALL_YOUN Let It Be LETITBE And Love Her AND_ILOV The Long And Winding Road LONGWIND And Your Bird Can Sing AND_YOUR Lovely Rita LOVELY Back in the USSR BACK_IN Lucy In The Sky With Diamonds LUCY_IN The Ballad Of John And Yoko BALLADJY Magical Mystery Tour MAGICAL oj OLN DM om AJ wl v Because BECAUSE Martha My Dear MARTHA o Being For The Benefit Of Mr Kite BEINGFOR Maxwell s Silver Hammer MAXWELLS Blackbird BLACKBRD Michelle
414. ing when Envelope Select is set to D mod gt Threshold 0 100 d Sets the recording start level when Envelope Select is set to Input e S Response 0 100 Sets the speed of the response to the end of recording gt Direct Mix Always On Always Off Cross Fade f RET Selects how a dry sound is mixed gt Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 panre Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a Scratch Source b Response The Scratch Source parameter enables you to select the modulation source that controls simulation The value of the modulation source corresponds to the playback position The Response parameter enables you to set the speed of the response to the modulation source Scratch Source Start Playback Position End Recorded Sound Scratch Source Tscfatcht mode JS X la i Ribbon Max iZero JS Y i i j JS Y Zero t Mex etc c Envelope Select c Src d Threshold When Envelope Select is set to D mod the input signal will be recorded only when the modulation source value is 64 or higher When Envelope Select is set to Input the input signal will be recorded only when its level is over the Threshold value The maximum recording time is
415. insert edit or delete at the current position If an arrow appears next to a parameter the shown event has been inserted at the current position 6 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to modify the selected event Delete it using the DELETE button When editing a parameter without the arrow next to it a new event is inserted 7 Exit the Chord Acc Step Mode by pressing the RECORD button 8 Press START STOP to listen to the results of your editing If they are fine save the Backing Sequence on a card MAIN PAGE BACKING SEQUENCE PLAY This is the main page of the Backing Sequence mode To access this page from another operating mode press the B SEQ button 84 Backing Sequence operating mode Load Song page Note When in this page the keyboard doesn t play Backing Sequence icon Page header Gm Uu chord mem Oi eE B Li MED Li lle TP Neusonz Metros OFF 5 Meter 44 Sel Temro Teneo Auto Save Son Backing Sequence icon When on this icon indicates that the instrument is in Backing Sequence mode Page header This header shows the name of the selected Song B Load Song Use these buttons to select a Song ie a Standard MIDI File The Song Select page opens and you can select a Song see below Load Song page C Save Song This command saves the recorded Song as a Standard MIDI File The file is automatical
416. inserted Use the DELETE button to delete the event shown in the display When the editing is complete you may select a dif ferent track go to step 6 When finished editing the whole Song press EXIT to go back to the Main page of the Song mode and select the Save Song command to save the Song the card See Save Song page on page 91 for more information on saving a Song 105 106 Program operating mode Main page 14 PROGRAM OPERATING MODE The Program operating mode is where you can lis ten to individual Programs and edit them To select a Program see the Basic operations chapter In this mode the selected Program can always be played across the full keyboard range To automatically select the Program to be assigned to the last selected track keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the PROGRAM button Hint This is useful to see the Bank Select Program Change numbers when programming a Song on an external sequencer Note The Program uses the same Scale of the latest selected Performance or STS MAIN PAGE Here is the main page of the Program operating mode Tempo Page header Program icon L 8 fand eis Grour Piana MIDI CC BB ii DC 32 3 P B Program icon When turned on this icon shows that the instrument is in Program mode Page header This line shows the selected Program name Use the TEMPO VALUE controls or the P
417. ion Source list on page 124 Intensity As the absolute value of this setting is increased the effect of AMS on LFOT will increase Negative values will invert the LFO waveform 99 499 Intensity value PAGE 15 AMP LFO2 These parameters let you use LFO1 see Page 17 LFO1 on page 121 and LFO 2 see Page 18 LFO2 on page 123 to control the selected oscillator volume See Page 14 Amp LFO1 for more information on parameter s editing e J cog eae LFOS ecl Selected scil Intensity H AME Joystick Intensity A PAGE 16 AMP EG These parameters let you create time varying changes in the volume of the selected oscillator chora tempo cm e Ame EG Osc Selected scili Start Level a Attack Time TS Attack Level 95H Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alternatively you can select oscillators using the F 1 F 4 buttons 120 Program operating mode Page 16 Amp EG Amp envelope Amplifier EG Attack Level Note off Note on Break Point Volume Sustain Level Attack Decay Slope Release Time Time Time Time Start Attack Break Sustain Release Level These parameters are the level of the envelope segment 0 99 Level value Start Level This parameter specifies the volume level at note o
418. ion of the filter A cutoff frequency See AMS Alternate Modula tion Source list on page 124 Note The filter B parameters will be displayed when Filter Type on page 113 is Low Pass amp High Pass Intensity Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS1 will have When AMS1 is JS X a positive value for this parameter will cause the cutoff frequency to rise when the joystick is moved toward the right and fall when the joystick is moved toward the left With a negative value for this parameter the opposite will occur This value is added to the setting of the Filter A Fre quency AMS2 Alternate Modulation Source2 Selects the source that will control modulation of the filter A cutoff frequency see AMS Alternate Modula tion Source list on page 124 Intensity Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that the selected source will have see Intensity on page 115 PAGE 9 FILTER LFO1 Here you can use the filter LFO to apply cyclic modula tion to the cutoff frequency of the filter for the selected oscillator to create cyclical changes in tone NL eu Cog i tor rid ir B Selected Cecil Intensity to Bi Intensity to E m Josstick Y to As i Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alternatively you can select oscillators using the F 1 F 4 buttons Intensity to A S
419. itable parameter shows the selected Style If no Style is selected the name will be empty You can select a different Style using the STYLE section see Selecting a Style on page 26 0 99 This non editable parameters shows the remaining recording space in memory as a percentage Perf or STS Performance or STS This non editable parameter shows the selected Perfor mance or STS depending on the last item selected If no Performance or STS is selected the name will be empty You can select a different Performance using the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section see Select ing a Performance on page 25 To select one of the four STS for the current Style use the F 1 F 4 buttons Resol Resolution Use this parameter to set the quantization during recording Quantization is a way of correcting timing errors notes played too soon or too later are moved to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid set with this parameter thus playing perfectly in time Hi No quantization applied 4 1 32 1 8 Grid resolution in musical values For example when you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 division md i D Sel Tempo Select Tempo Select this parameter to use the TEMPO VALUE sec tion to select the Tempo When you select this parame ter the VALUE LED turns off Metro Metronome This parameter sets the metronome mode during recording
420. ith a setting of 0 there will be no change Attack Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction of change in Attack Level caused by AMS1 2 If Intensity is a positive value a setting of will raise the EG level and a setting of will decrease it With a setting of 0 there will be no change Pitch EG Time modulation Pitch EG changes Time AMS Velocity Intensity 7 positive value Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off A note played softly with Attack A note played strongly with Anote played strongly with AMS T Alternate Modulation Source This parameter selects the source that will control the Time parameters of the pitch EG see AMS Alter nate Modulation Source list on page 124 Intensity AMS T Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have on the Time parameters With a setting of 0 the pitch EG times will be just as specified by the Attack Decay Release Time settings The alternate modulation value at the moment that the EG reaches each point will determine the actual value of the EG time that comes next For example the decay time will be determined by the alternate modulation value at the moment that the attack level is reached When this parameter is set to values of 16 33 49 66 82 or 99 the specified EG times will speed up as much as 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 times respectively or slowed dow
421. ition and press SHIFT DELETE Note All events on the very first tick M001 01 000 like Perf Style Tempo Chord Style Element selection cannot be deleted Style This is the last selected Style To insert a Style change at the current position follow the standard selecting pro cedure using the buttons of the STYLE section Note Any Style Change inserted after the beginning of the measure i e to a position other than Mxxx 01 000 will be effective at the following measure For example if a Style Change event has been inserted at M004 03 000 the selected Style will be effectively selected at M005 01 000 This works exactly as in Style Play mode Note When inserting a Style Change you may also insert a Tempo Change at the same position A Style Change will not automatically insert the Style s Tempo DELETE When the Style parameter is selected and the side arrow showing that a Style Change event has been selected at the cur rent position appears next to it press DELETE to delete the Style Change at the current position Note If the side arrow doesn t appear the event was not selected at the current position and will not be deleted SHIFT DELETE When the Style parameter is selected press SHIFT DELETE to delete all Style Change events starting from the current position to the end of the Song To delete all Style Change events in the Song go back to the M001 01 000 position and press S
422. ity Do not leave an SD MMC card where it is accessible by infants or children who might place it in their mouth and swallow it Carefully read and observe the owner s manual included with your SD MMC card Write protecting an SD card SD cards have a write protect switch that prevents the data from being overwritten accidentally and lost If you set the card s switch to the protected setting it will be impossible to write or erase data on the card or to format it If you need to save edited data on the card move the switch back to its original unprotected set ting Write protect Switch Protected l Inserting exchanging cards Inserting a card Insert the card making sure that it is oriented correctly The gold contacts should be facing down and the angled corner to your right S2 A ii Removing a card Press the card inward and release it and the card will pop out Note Before you can use an SD card you must format it on the Liverpool The card may not work if it was formatted on another device SD card 132 Card Edit environment Loading data created with the Pa80 Pa60 Pa50 Organizing your data into separate folders We suggest to organize your data into separate folders instead of saving many files into the root i e the main level of the card This allows for faster accesses to the card thus a quicker response of the Liverpool to your CARD commands LOADING DA
423. k s delay time depth output level and pan individually You can also fix some of the chorus blocks to combine the chorus and delay effects Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out uis Feedback f Wet Dry Tap Delay Level Tap2 Delay Fas Soy 4 _Tap3 Delay Svar So 1 Tap4 Delay pm Pa Right o 0 degree Wet Dry 180 degree 90 degree 270 degree pue 44 7 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 13 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Tap1 000 msec 0 570msec Sets the Tap1 LFO phase 0 degrees delay time Depth 0 30 Sets the Tap1 chorus depth b Level 0 30 Sets the Tap1 output level Pan L6 L1 C R1 R6 Sets the Tap1 stereo image Tap2 180 msec 0 570msec Sets the Tap2 LFO phase 180 degrees delay time Depth 0 30 Sets the Tap2 chorus depth C Level 0 30 Sets the Tap2 output level Pan L6 L1 C R1 R6 Sets the Tap2 stereo image Tap3 090 msec 0 570msec Sets the Tap3 LFO phase 90 degrees delay time Depth 0 30 Sets the Tap3 chorus depth d Level 0 30 Sets the Tap3 output level Pan L6 L1 C R1 R6 Sets the Tap3 stereo image Tap4 270 msec 0 570msec Sets the Tap4 LFO phase 270 degrees delay time Depth 0 30 Sets the Tap4 chorus depth e Level 0 30 Sets the Tap4 output level Pan L6 L1 C R1 R6 Sets the Tap4 stereo image Tap1 Feedback
424. k internal memory 3 Move the file or folder that you want to erase to the first line of the display If the file or folder you are looking for is in another folder use the F 3 OPEN button to open it Press F 4 CLOSE to go back to the previous hierarchic level Press F 2 ERASE to delete the selected item The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort When the operation is completed the Wait indi cator disappears you are kept on the Erase page and you may perform further erase operations PAGE 5 FORMAT The Format function lets you initialize a card Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to reach this page chord tempo transpose m na i tt octave LIT T page Lat diront E 5d 5b Card FORET Warning When formatting a card all data it contains is lost SD Card This is a very fast format command This command rewrites just the FAT File Allocation Table of the card without actual reformatting of all sectors 1 2 Insert a card into the card slot Press F 2 FORMAT to select the formatting com Card Edit environment 141 Page 5 Format 3 Press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons You are prompted to assign a name to the new folder tons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT b
425. k1 O 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 O 200 Woodblock1 off 200 Woodblock1 off 78 F 5 215 Cuica Hi 4 239 Uhh O 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 79 G5 215 Cuica Hi 4 237 Yeah O 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 80 G 5 233 Flexatone 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 81 A5 233 Flexatone 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 82 A 5 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down O 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell O 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree O 231 Marc Tree off 231 Marc Tree off 85 C 6 178 CastSingle off 178 CastSingle O 178 CastSingle off 178 CastSingle Off 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 87 D 6 342 Darbuka 1 DumOp 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium O 243 Stadium off 243 Stadium off 168 Factory Data Drum Kit instruments 120 0 24 Electro Kit 1
426. ks inside a series of Chord Variations inside a series of Style Ele ments inside the Style itself You don t need to record all Chord Variations for all Style Elements It is often only necessary to record just a Chord Variation for each Style Element Exceptions are the Intro 1 and Ending 1 where we suggest to record both a Major and minor Chord Variations STYLE IMPORT EXPORT You can use Korg s Style To Midi application to exchange Styles between your computer and the Liver pool through the Standard MIDI File SMF format The application is freely downloadable from http www korgpa com Please read the included instruc tions ENTERING THE RECORD MODE While in the Style Play operating mode press RECORD Note LIVERPOOL STYLES cannot be edited The following page will appear in the display chord tempo n Vit L oO N Hamsa mer Current Style Heu Style e Select Current Style to edit the current Style If it is a Factory Style you will not be able to save it on the original location you will select a User Style instead Style Record mode 53 Style Import Export When editing an existing Style the original Style Performance is recalled but the following parame ters are reset to their default values Drum Map ping 0 Snare amp Kick Designation Off Program Original Keyboard Range Original This means that you can hear som
427. l tracks selected apart for Drum tracks 1 16 Selected track Value Value of the transpose in semitones S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to transpose If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be posi tioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to transpose If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum track PAGE 19 EDIT VELOCITY Here you can change the Velocity value for the notes chord ENS GEH mz J nues Goi jc B 04 rmsd ble Tae thy page e Edit Uslocity Em Trk 3 Malue B 500l Al gaa EBBI BI 192 BEottom l 1 Tor C8 After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected 1 16 Selected track Value Velocity change value 102 Song operating mode Page 20 Edit Delete S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to edit If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be
428. lating the tone via dynamic modulation you can create an interesting effect that sounds as if the guitar or synthesizer is talk ing Righto OSC Mode Note Key Follow Fixed a Determines whether the oscillator frequency follows the note number or whether it is fixed gt Note Interval 48 0 Sets the pitch difference from the note number when OSC Mode Note Key p Follow gt Note Fine 100 100 Fine adjustment of the oscillator frequency Fixed Frequency Hz 10 0 80 0Hz Sets the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode Fixed Drez Src Off Tempo c Selects the modulation source for the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode Fixed Amt 80 80Hz Sets the oscillator frequency modulation amount when OSC Mode Fixed Envelope Pre LPF 1 100 d Sets the upper limit of the frequency range for which very low harmonics are added gt Envelope Sens Envelope Sensitivity 0 100 Sets the sensitivity with which very low harmonics are added e Envelope Shape 100 100 Sets the oscillator s volume envelope curve Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Daz Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a OSC Mod
429. lation amount of the effect bal Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet ance on page 177 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 mode D lt h Output Mode i Routing Src Off Tempo 1 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 When Wet Invert is selected the right channel phase of the Xe Te chorus flanger effect sound is inverted This creates pseudo m 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal stereo effects and adds spread ance on page 177 However if a mono input type effect is connected after this effect the left and right sounds may cancel each other elimi nating the chorus flanger effects When Routing is set to FLNG CMP Output Mode will be set to Normal 6 Effects Mono Mono Chain 068 Cmp Phaser Compressor Phaser 069 Cmp MTapDly Compressor Multitap Delay This effect combines a mono type compressor and a multitap delay You can change the order of the effect This effect combines a mono type compressor and a phaser You can change the order of the effect connec tion connection Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Wet Mono I
430. le These read only parameters show which Style Element and Chord Variation are currently selected for editing See the Main page E Style Ele ment and CV Chord Variation parameters on page 55 for information on selecting a different Style Element and Chord Variation Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected After deletion the selected Chord Variation will remain empty Drum AccbSelected track Ev Event Type of MIDI event to delete All All events The measures are not removed from the Chord Variation All notes in the selected range All duplicate notes When two notes with the same pitch are encountered on the same tick the one with the lowest velocity is deleted After Touch events Note This kind of data is automatically removed during recording Pitch Bend events Program Change events excluding the bundled Control Change 00 Bank Select MSB and 32 Bank Select LSB Note This kind of data is automatically removed during recording All Control Change events for example Bank Select Modulation Damper Soft Pedal CC00 32 CC127 Single Control Change events Double Control Change numbers like 00 32 are MSB LSB bundles Note Some CC data are automatically removed during recording See the table on page 54 for more information on the allowed data Note Dup Note A Touch P Bend PrChange C Change S E Start End Use these parameters to set
431. le number is memorized onto the Perfor mance OFF When you select a Performance the Style and Style track settings remain unchanged Only Realtime Keyboard tracks settings are changed 42 lgszhtuehi Press this button to use the PROGRAM PERFOR MANCE section to select a Performance 43 lihi Ith5a Press this button to use the PROGRAM PERFOR MANCE section to select a Program and assign it to the selected track Front panel 17 44 PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section PERF gt STYLE STS Use these buttons to open the Program Select or Perfor mance Select window and select a Program or a Perfor mance See Selecting a Program on page25 or Selecting a Performance on page25 For a list of available Programs see Programs Program Change order on page 157 The leftmost button selects the upper or lower row of Program or Performance banks Press it until you ve selected the row that you re looking for After both LEDs have consecutively turned on press the button again to turn them off UPPER LED ON Upper row of Programs or Performances selected LOWER LED ON Lower row of Programs or Performances selected On the front panel Program banks are identified by the instrument names while Performance banks are identified by numbers 1 10 0 bank 10 A note about Program banks and names Programs from PIANO to SEX are standard Programs the user can t directly modify Programs USER1 and USER2 are loc
432. lect the first and second value of the parameter Use the G VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to modify the selected value ru Mone P e re Event Type First value Second value If a Note event is selected use the D VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Length line and use 66 Style Record mode 13 14 15 16 Page 6 Edit Delete the same buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event s length Beat Tick Measure e After having modified the shown event you may scroll to the next event with the H VOLUME VALUE buttons Scroll to next or to the previous event with the E F VOLUME VALUE buttons Scroll to previous You may use the SHIFT lt lt or gt gt shortcut to go to a different measure see SHIFT lt lt or gt gt on page 64 As described in step 4 you may press START STOP and play some chords to listen how the pat tern sounds after your changes Press START STOP again to stop the pattern running Use the INSERT button to insert an event at the Position shown in the display a Note event with default values will be inserted Use the DELETE button to delete the event shown in the display When the editing is complete you may select a dif ferent track go to step 7 or a different Style Ele ment and Chord Variation press EXIT to go back to the Main page of the Style Record mode then go to step 2 When finished editing the whole Style pre
433. lengthen the time and setting it to will allow AMSI to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no effect Decay Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction of the effect that AMS1 will have on Decay Time With positive values of Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMSI to lengthen the time and setting it to will allow AMSI to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no effect Program operating mode 121 Page 17 LFO1 Slope Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction of the effect that AMS1 will have on Slope Time With positive values of Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMSI to lengthen the time and setting it to will allow AMSI to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no effect Release Time This parameter specifies the direction of the effect that AMS1 will have on Release Time With positive values of Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMSI to lengthen the time and setting it to will allow AMSI to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no effect AMS2 Alternate Modulation Source 2 This is another alternate modulation source for the Amp EG See above AMS1 parameters PAGE 17 LFO1 In this and the next page you can make settings for the LFO that can be used to cyclically modulate the Pitch Filter and Amp of each oscillator There are two LFO
434. ll play an altered F dhiddlilhidd PAGE 3 ASSIGNABLE PEDAL FOOTSWITCH ASSIGNABLE SLIDER This page lets you program the Assignable Pedal Foot switch and the Assignable Slider f chord tempo transpose E n J octave 38 Dare Fer Pa Pedal Fol See page 227 for a list of the assignable functions The first functions are switch type functions while the remaining starting from Master Volume are continu ous like functions P S Pedal Switch gt GBL Continuous pedal or footswitch connected to the ASSIGNABLE PDL SW connector Sid Slider gt GBL Function assigned to the ASSIGNABLE SLIDER on the front panel Damper Pol Damper Polarity gt GBL Polarity of the Damper pedal Pedal Sw Pol Pedal Footswitch Polarity gt GBL Polarity of the Assignable pedal or footswitch PAGE 4 MIDI SETUP MIDI channels can be automatically configured by selecting a MIDI Setup Each of them assigns the best values to various MIDI parameters to allow an easier connection with a particular MIDI controller chord am i a bia Cb ea Disidi Setup Fa Default Accordion 1 Master ked Becordion 2 Sequencer 1 Accordion 3 SexJencen z Extern Sey 128 Global edit environment Page 5 MIDI Controls Note After selecting a MIDI Setup you can appl
435. llet amp Bel 121 0 2 ElGranPiano Piano Y 121 0 13 Xylophone Mallet amp Bel Y 121 1 2 ElGrandWide Piano V 121 0 14 TubularBell Mallet amp Bel Y 121 2 2 M1 Piano Piano 121 1 14 Church Bell Mallet amp Bel Y 121 3 2 90 s Piano Piano 121 2 14 Carillon Mallet amp Bel Y 121 4 2 2000 sPiano Piano 121 3 14 ChurchBell2 Mallet amp Bel 121 5 2 ChorusPiano Piano 121 0 15 Dulcimer Mallet amp Bel Y 121 6 2 PianoLayers Piano 121 1 15 Santur Mallet amp Bel 121 0 3 Honky Tonk Piano y 121 0 16 Drawb Organ Organ 1 N 121 1 3 Honky Wide Piano N d 121 1 16 DetDrawbOrg Organ 1 Y 121 0 4 ELPiano 1 E Piano Y 121 2 16 It60 sOrgan Organ 1 Y 121 1 4 DetunedEP 1 E Piano Y 121 3 16 DrawbOrgan2 Organ 1 Y 121 2 4 EP1Veloc sw E Piano Y 121 4 16 DarkJazzOrg Organ 1 121 3 4 60 sElPiano E Piano Y 121 5 16 IperDarkOrg Organ 1 121 4 4 Vintage EP E Piano 121 6 16 FullDrawbar Organ 1 121 5 4 Pro Dyno EP E Piano 121 Y 16 DWGS Organ Organ 1 121 6 4 ProStage EP E Piano 121 8 16 Jazz Organ Organ 1 121 7 4 Studio EP E Piano 121 9 16 GospelOrgan Organ 1 121 8 4 R amp B E Piano E Piano 121 10 16 Good Old B Organ 1 121 9 4 ThinElPiano E Piano 121 11 16 VOX Legend Organ 1 121 10 4 DynoTine EP E Piano 121 12 16 ArabianOrg Organ 1 121 11 4 ClubElPiano E Piano 121 0 17 Perc Organ Organ 1 Y 121 0 5 ElPiano 2 E Piano Y 121 1 17 Det PercOrg Organ 1 Y 121 1
436. llet amp Bel 121 3 124 Door SFX Y 121 3 112 GarbageMall Mallet amp Bel 121 4 124 Scratch SFX Y 121 0 113 Agogo Drum amp Perc N 121 5 124 Wind Chime SFX Y 121 0 114 Steel Drums Mallet amp Bel N 121 0 125 Helicopter SFX Y 121 1 114 Warm Steel Mallet amp Bel 121 1 125 Car Engine SFX Y 121 0 115 Woodblock Drum amp Perc N 121 2 125 Car Stop SFX Y 121 1 115 Castanets Drum amp Perc Y 121 3 125 Car Pass SFX Y 121 0 116 Taiko Drum Drum amp Perc Y 121 4 125 Car Crash SFX Y 121 1 116 Concert BD Drum amp Perc Y 121 5 125 Siren SFX Y 121 0 117 Melodic Tom Drum amp Perc Y 121 6 125 Train SFX Y 121 1 117 MelodicTom2 Drum amp Perc N 121 7 125 Jetplane SFX Y 121 2 117 Rev Tom Drum amp Perc 121 8 125 Starship SFX Y 121 0 118 Synth Drum Drum amp Perc N 121 9 125 Burst Noise SFX Y 121 1 118 Rhyt BoxTom Drum amp Perc N 121 0 126 Applause SFX Y 121 2 118 Electr Drum Drum amp Perc N 121 1 126 Laughing SFX Y 121 3 118 Rev Snare Drum amp Perc 121 2 126 Screaming SFX Y 121 0 119 Reverse Cym Drum amp Perc N 121 3 126 Punch SFX Y 121 1 119 Dragon Gong Drum amp Perc 121 4 126 Heart Beat SFX Y 121 0 120 GtFretNoise SFX N 121 5 126 Footsteps SFX Y 121 1 120 GtrCutNoise SFX Y 121 6 126 Stadium SFX 121 2 120 AcBassStrng SFX Y 121 0 127 Gun Shot SFX Y 121 3 120 VoxWahChick Guitar 121 1 127 Machine Gun SFX y 121 0 121 BreathNoise SFX N 121 2 127 Lasergun SFX Y 121 1 121 Flute Click Woodwind N 121 3 127 Explo
437. ly 99 499 Intensity value Start Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS will affect Start Level When Intensity has a posi tive value a setting of for this parameter will allow AMS to raise the EG level and a setting of will allow AMS to lower the EG level With a setting of 0 there will be no change Attack Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS will affect Attack Level When Intensity has a posi tive value a setting of for this parameter will allow AMS to raise the EG level and a setting of will allow AMS to lower the EG level With a setting of 0 there will be no change Break Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS will affect Break Point Level When Intensity has a positive value a setting of for this parameter will allow AMS to raise the EG level and a setting of will allow AMS to lower the EG level With a setting of 0 there will be no change Program operating mode Page 11 Filter EG Filter EG Time modulation Filter 1 EG changes Time AMS Velocity Intensity a positive value Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off Softly played note with Attack Strongly played note with Strongly played note with Decay Slope and Release Attack Decay Slope and Attack Decay Slope and Level Swings set to Release Level Swin
438. ly C is the reverb while D is the modulating effect chorus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see Effects on page 177 ModTrk Modulating Track Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modulate an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller D gt Csend D gt C Send Amount of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect PAGE 5 FX A EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the A effect usually reverb for Sequencer 1 cma E measure J ge UL d Idi u A Edit i541 Pa Mix mod source JS d Mix mod amt 127 Reverb Time norseg HF Parring 38 4 It Use the E F and G H VOLUME VALUE button pairs to scroll the parameter list Use the AAD VOLUMME VALUE button pairs to select and edit a parameter Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to edit the selected parameter Note When playing back a Song that makes use of all four effects A D you can t edit any effect parameter These parameters appear greyed out in the display Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again Edit the Song in Song mode to permanently change the effects Parameters See Effects on page 177 for a list of available parame ters for each effect type PAGE 6
439. ly added the MID extension After pressing this command the Save Song page appears see Save Song page on page 84 D Select Tempo Select this parameter to use the TEMPO VALUE sec tion to select the Tempo When you select this parame ter the VALUE LED turns off F Metro Use these buttons to turn the metronome on off during playback G Meter This non editable parameter shows the starting meter or time signature of the selected Song H Tempo mode This sets the Tempo change mode Man ual When the cursor is on the D Select Tempo parameter you can change the Tempo using the TEMPO VALUE section controls The Song will be played back using the manually selected tempo Auto The Tempo recorded into the Song will be used instead LOAD SONG PAGE This page appears when you press PAGE or either the B Load Song buttons while you are in the main page Note Songs on the internal SSD cannot be selected Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Backing Sequence operating mode without selecting a Song chord c3 mm ine Da E a IC Pe octave Load Song ii C p amp BALLADS It C3 MYSOHGS MRSONG MID H SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE A C File folder Move the file or folder to be selected to the first line of the display To select a file press the F 2 SELECT but ton To open a folder press the F 3 OPEN button The J symbol
440. ly use the A B pair while the C D pair is reserved to the Realtime keyboard tracks e When using both sequencers at the same time and the S2 FX Mode is set to C D Mode see page 80 Sequencer 1 uses the A B pair while Sequencer 2 uses the C D pair sharing it with the Realtime keyboard tracks GROOVE QUANTIZE WINDOW You can apply a realtime groove quantization to Sequencer 1 Groove quantization is a way of changing the music groove during the playback moving notes to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid Please feel free to experi ment this function is a great source of musical invention Song Play operating mode 71 Master Volume Sequencer Volume BALANCE While in Song Play press GQQUANTIZE The following window will appear gt measure nn i LL t chord Ku gne r3 ca Groove Duantize Enable On HStartidhn Bec Co dB HMDunati n tunatxon Res n Mdeiuc o 1868 Press EXIT to exit this window Enable Enables disable the quantize It is automatically set to Off each time the instrument is turned on or when selecting a different Song NStart Note Start Enables disables the quantization of the Note On event i e beginning of the note NDurat Note Duration Enables disables the quantization of the Note Off event i e the length of the note Res Resolution Coarse quantize grill resolution
441. m Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 166 Factory Data Drum Kit instruments 120 0 10 Jungle Kit 120 0 11 Techno Kit1 120 0 12 Room Kit2 120 0 13 HipHop Kit2 Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 9 A 1 13 BD Squash Off 21 BD Hip 3 Off 13 BD Squash Off 13 BD Squash O 10 A 1 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 O 11 B 1 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD O 12 co 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD O 13 C 0 56 SD Hip 3 Off 56 SD Hip 3 Off 56 SD Hip 3 Off 56 SD Hip 3 9 14 DO 58 SD Hip 5 Off 58 SD Hip 5 Off 58 SD Hip 5 Off 58 SD Hip 5 O 15 D 0 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 25 BD Ambi Kick O 16 E0 11 BD Gated off 11 BD Gated O 11 BD Gated off 11 BD Gated O 17 F0 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo O 18 F 0 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 19 GO 6 BD Pillow Off 6 BD Pillow O 6 BD Pillow off 6 BD Pillow off 20 G 0 72 SideStickDry Off 72 Sid
442. me Liverpool Bank GM2 121 8 18 PercShorDec Organ 1 121 3 27 Chorus Gtr Guitar 121 9 18 Perc Wheels Organ 1 121 4 27 Vintage S Guitar 121 10 18 Jimmy Organ Organ 1 121 5 27 ProcesElGtr Guitar 121 0 19 ChurchOrg 1 Organ 2 N 121 6 27 SingleCoil Guitar 121 1 19 ChurchOcMix Organ 2 N 121 7 27 NewStra Gtr Guitar 121 2 19 DetunChurch Organ 2 N 121 8 27 Guitarish Guitar 121 3 19 PipeMixture Organ 2 121 9 27 L amp REI Gtr Guitar 121 4 19 ChurchPipes Organ 2 121 10 27 L amp REI Gtr2 Guitar 121 5 19 Full Pipes Organ 2 121 11 27 Country Nu Guitar 121 6 19 Pipe Tutti Organ 2 121 12 27 FunkyWhaSw Guitar 121 7 19 PositiveOrg Organ 2 121 0 28 MutedGuitar Guitar y 121 0 20 Reed Organ Organ 2 N 121 1 28 FunkyCutGtr Guitar y 121 1 20 Puff Organ Organ 2 N 121 2 28 MuteVeloGtr Guitar y 121 2 20 Small Pipe Organ 2 121 3 28 Jazz Man Guitar y 121 3 20 FlautoPipes Organ 2 121 4 28 R amp R Guitar Guitar 121 0 21 Accordion Accordion Y 121 5 28 Stra Chime Guitar 121 1 21 Accordion 2 Accordion Y 121 6 28 CleanMutGtr Guitar 121 2 21 Akordeon Accordion 121 7 28 RhythmE Gtr Guitar 121 3 21 Musette 1 Accordion 121 8 28 Clean Funk Guitar 121 4 21 Musette 2 Accordion 121 9 28 Disto Mute Guitar 121 5 21 MusetteClar Accordion 121 0 29 OverdriveGt Guitar Y 121 6 21 Fisa 1648 Accordion 121 1 29 Guitar Pinch Guitar Y 121 7 21 Fisa 16 4 Accordion 121 0 30 DistortionG Guitar Y 121 8 21 Fisa Master Accordion
443. measure nn i n Duces wi E d O Rect Hewson B Strings UocaEns DkStrirngds Bassi D Legato Strngerez BrazzsHorn Strinds2 E If you like you can set the tempo again from these pages just use the TEMPO VALUE controls Assign the right Program to each track Select the track to put in record Its status icon will automatically begin flashing While the status icon is flashing press PLAY STOP to begin recording Depending on the Metro option you selected a 1 or 2 bars precount may play before the recording actually begins When it begins play freely f you selected the Auto Punch recording mode the recording will begin only when reaching the Start point If you selected the Pedal Punch recording mode press the pedal when you want to begin recording Press it again to finish recording Note The Punch functions will not work on an empty Song At least one track must already be recorded When finished recording press PLAY STOP to stop the sequencer Select a different track and go on recording the whole Song When finished recording the new Song press RECORD to exit the Record mode The Song will be saved in memory Warning Save the Song to a card to avoid it is lost when turning the instrument off Note When exiting the Record mode the Octave Transpose is automatically reset to 0 Edit the new Song press the MENU page and s
444. modulation amount of pitch variation Pan Depth 100 100 Sets the panning of the moving sound gt Dzer f Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of panning Am 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of panning Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 D227 Src Off Tempo g Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Am 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a LFO Mode a Src b LFO Sync The LFO Mode parameter switches LFO operation mode When Loop is selected the Doppler effect will be created repeatedly If LFO Sync is set to On the LFO will be reset when the modulation source specified with the Src parame ter is turned on When LFO Mode is set to 1 Shot the Doppler effect is cre ated only once when the modulation source specified in the Src field is turned on At this time if you do not set the Src parameter the Doppler effect will not be created and no effect sound will be output m The effect is off when a value for the modulation source specified for the Src parameter is smaller than 64 and the effect is on when the value is 64 or higher The Doppler effect is triggered when the value changes from 63 or smaller to 64 or higher e Pitch Depth With the Doppler effect the pitch is raised when th
445. more information We recommend you to consider each MIDI Setup as a starting point you can freely tweak Once you have selected the most appropriate MIDI Setup for the con nection to be made you can modify the parameters as necessary and save the Global in the memory with the Write function see The Write window on page 126 CONNECTING LIVERPOOL TO A MASTER KEYBOARD You can control the Liverpool with a master keyboard or any other MIDI keyboard You only need to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the master keyboard to the MIDI IN connector of the Liverpool The master key board will become the integrated keyboard of the Liv erpool if it transmits over the same channel programmed as Global in the Liverpool If the master keyboard transmits over the Global channel of the Liverpool the split point and the status of the KEYBOARD MODE section in the control panel will affect the notes received from the master keyboard Connections and settings To connect the master keyboard to the Liverpool follow this procedure 1 Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the master keyboard to the MIDI IN connector of the Liver pool 2 Program the master keyboard to transmit over the Global channel of the Liverpool see Page 6 MIDI IN Channels on page 128 For information on the master keyboard program ming see the user s manual of the master keyboard
446. mpo Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Selects the phaser output mode Fx 060 Amt 100 100 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 ance on page 177 Drez i Output Mode r Src Off Tempo Wh pm tl rti lected th iahieh ph f th J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 en Wet Invert is selected the right channel phase o e ar f Amt 100 100 chorus flanger effect sound is inverted This creates pseudo Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal stereo effects and adds spread ance on page 177 062 P4Eq TapDly Parametric 4 Band EQ Multitap Delay This effect combines a mono type four band paramet ric equalizer and a multitap delay Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Parametric 4Band EQ Multitap Dela High Damp 1 H Delay 7 Mt Dly Wet Dry Effects Mono Mono Chain 063 Cmp AutoWah Compressor Wah Auto Wah 213 This effect combines a mono type compressor and a wah You can change the order of the connection
447. msec Sets the delay time from the dry sound Fx 052 b Pre Delay Thru 96 0 100 Sets the mix ratio of non delay sound Fx 052 e ER Level 0 100 Sets the level of early reflections gt d Reverb Level 0 100 Sets the reverberation level gt EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB i Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Da Src Off Tempo g Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 c ER Level d Reverb Level These parameters set the early reflection level and reverb level Changing these parameter values allows you to simulate the type of walls in the room That is a larger ER Level simu lates a hard wall and a larger Reverb Level simulates a soft wall Reverb Room Type Dry ER Early Reflections Reverb Louder Time Pre Delay Thru Pre Delay Reverb Time Effects 214 Mono Mono Chain 059 Par4Eq Wah MONO MONO CHAIN Parametric 4 Band EQ Wah Auto Wah Effects that combine two mono effects connected in This effect combines a mono type four band p
448. mua 17 B Mixer Pan ES Gua uum emm enun a caa C8 3 dp E a Do C438 C8 D EET CERNERET E RN D Cog C8 VOlpbe e id B CG C488 D H mmm HH mmm HA tg D ga 4 Pan D GDA mammam HSE B 64 Hard Left B mmm GGA wanmaan 1 B 00 Center 63 Hard Right Off The direct uneffected signal does not go to the outputs only the FX signal is heard for this track PAGE 3 MIXER FX SEND A B This page lets you set the level of the track s direct uneffected signal going to the A and B Internal FX processors usually assigned to Sequencer 1 Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 chord tempo cam cm J nea wile d it a ex ixer Fx Send Aiga E50 BilBa Bina B B Ariz Bree Alga Bin B B Aril B56 A ibe 6 58 Arlee Bros A ie Brod B tempo J measure cmm ignes oE D tt Mixer FA Send B RnB B Se Aripa BSA E Bri27 B28 Arloa B 5a m AIG E S Arie E SB E p Rug ese Arie BSA B Note When playing back a Song that makes use of all four effects A D you can t edit any effect parameter These parameters appear greyed out in the display Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again Edit the Song in Song mode to permanently change the effe
449. n Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out bet A Wet 1D Let Routi Wet Dry z jet Dry outing et Dry Compressor pur em O99mpressor KON Multitap Delay EQ Trim LEQ HEQ EQ Trim LEQ HEQ Feedback M gt lt Comp Lal gt Phaser t gt H lt _H Comp Toutout Leva eR eis i i mE oat invert Output Level Mt Dly Wet Dry Phaser Wet Dry Right L gt Righto j i Ae L Envelope Contral LFO Ti Sine e t Envelope Contral Wer y C Sensitivity 1 100 C Sensitivity 1 100 Sets the sensitivity Fx 002 Sets the sensitivity Fx 002 C Attack 1 100 C Attack 1 100 Table Sets the attack level on page 178 Fx 002 Table Sets the attack level on page 178 Fx 002 b Output Level 0 100 Output Level 0 100 Sets the compressor output level Fx 002 Sets the compressor output level Fx 002 C EQ Trim 0 100 C EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 C Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB C Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 d Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 P LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz D Tap1 Time msec 0 680msec Sets the LFO speed Sets the Tap1 delay time e LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Tap1 Level
450. n F Bend Soale 5 B PE 2 SoH PE 2 5 4 D o FE 2 SoH PE 2 SoH D PE Z Sos PE 2 SoH B B PE 2 Sos PE 2 SoH fe PB end This parameters shows the Pitch Bend range for each track in semitones 01 12 Maximum positive negative pitchbend range in semitones 12 1 octave Off No pitchbend allowed Sc ale This parameter lets you activate deactivate the alternative scale for each track See Page 6 Tuning Scale on page 97 for more information on selecting an alternative scale Yes The track is tuned according to the alter native scale No The track is tuned according to the Global scale see Scale on page 126 PAGE 8 FX A B SELECT This page lets you select the A and B effects Usually the A effect is a reverb while the B effect is a modulat ing effect Standard MIDI Files usually require two effects only You can however assign all four effects to a Song see Page 3 Mixer FX Block on page 96 temo cmp om nue Dui LE B I octave mii PS Gm _ age Fe AB Select a A 2 E 23 Compressor Reu ate ModT iLUP l1 EoBsendil2 Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again Save the Song to permanently change the effects A B Effects assigned to the A and B e
451. n If you want the note to begin at a loud level set this to a high value Attack Level This parameter specifies the volume level that will be reached after the attack time has elapsed Break Level This parameter specifies the volume level that will be reached after the decay time has elapsed Sustain Level This parameter specifies the volume level that will be maintained from after the slope time has elapsed until note off occurs Attack Decay Slope Release Time These parameters specify the time over which the vol ume change will occur 0 99 Time value Attack Time This parameter specifies the time over which the volume will change after note on until it reaches the attack level If the start level is 0 this will be the rise time of the sound Decay Time This parameter specifies the time over which the vol ume will change from when it reaches the attack level until it reaches the break point level Slope Time This parameter specifies the time over which the vol ume will change from when it reaches the break point level until it reaches the sustain level Release Time This parameter specifies the time over which the vol ume will change after note off until it reaches 0 Amp EG Level modulation Amp 1 EG changes Level AMS Velocity Intensity a positive value Note on Note on Note on Is NA lA Softly played note when Start Strongly played note when Strongly played note when Level
452. n You will obtain the same pattern of phasing each time you play You can also control the Phaser directly using the modulation source 026 BiphaseMod Stereo Biphase Modulation This stereo chorus effect adds two different LFOs together You can set the Frequency and Depth parame ters for each LFO individually Depending on the set ting of these LFOs very complex waveforms will create an analog type unstable modulated sound Stereo In Stereo Out Left o X fw Dry Stereo In Stereo Out gt Phaser mene usos x g N Chorus Flanger HN 2 Resonance 7 High Damp i High Damp i Feedback Phaser V i High Damp f Chorus Flanger H7 N Right Wet Dry re DSS pe NS E Right m4 o EG Attack Decay Sweep Mode 180 degree Wet Dry L Manu Bottom L Manual Bottom 0 100 Sets the lower limit of the frequency range for the effect on the left channel EGER Ec Fx 009 aveform riangle Sine a Selects LFO1 waveform L Manu Top L Manual Top 0 100 a Sets the upper limit of the frequency range for the effect on the left channel LFO2 Waveform Triangle Sine Fx 009 Selects LFO2 waveform R Manu Bottom R Manual Bottom 0 100 p LFO Phase Sw 0 degre
453. n to 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 32 or 1 64 of the original time For example if AMS is set to Velocity increasing the absolute value of Intensity will allow strongly played notes to increase the changes in pitch EG Time values The direction of the change is specified by Attack Time Swing and Decay Time Swing As you play more softly the pitch EG times will more closely approach the actual settings of the pitch EG 99 499 Parameter value Attack Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS will affect the Attack Time parameter With positive values of Intensity a setting of will cause the time to be lengthened and a setting of will cause the time to be shortened With a setting of 0 there will be no change Decay Time Swing Specify the direction in which AMS will affect the Decay Time With positive values of Intensity a setting of will cause the time to be lengthened and a setting of will cause the time to be shortened With a setting of 0 there will be no change Program operating mode Page 7 Filter PAGE 7 FILTER Here you can make settings for the filters that will be used by the oscillators You can select either a 24 dB octave low pass filter with resonance or a series con nection of a 12 dB octave low pass filter and a 12 dB octave high pass filter chora E cog u a TE mis E
454. n of the high range trigger signal gt Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB Sets the output gain Fx 003 D ze h Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the output gain Amt 63 463 Sets the modulation amount of the output gain Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dasz Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 e Low Offset dB f Mid Offset dB g High Offset dB These parameters set the gain of the trigger signal For example if you do not want to apply compression to the high range reduce the High Offset value down below the Threshold level In this way the high range limiter will not respond and compression will not be applied 180 Effects Filter Dynamic 005 Gate Stereo Gate This effect mutes the input signal if its level is lower than the specified level It also reverses the on and off operation of the gate and uses Note On and Off mes sages to turn the gate on and off Stereo In Stereo Out Lett V A Wet Dry Delay Gate 7 Envelope Control Envelope Control x Delay Gate y Wet Dry Gatessill
455. n page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 222 Effects Mono Mono Chain 081 OD HG Phser Overdrive Hi Gain Phaser This effect combines a mono type overdrive high gain distortion and a phaser You can change the order of the effect connection 080 OD HG ChoFIl Overdrive Hi Gain Chorus Flanger This effect combines a mono type overdrive high gain distortion and a chorus flanger You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Routing Overdrive Hi Gain y N Chorus Flanger 3 Band PEQ 3 Band PEQ Driver ZANAN Chorus Flanger Driver ZI NV x Normal T Suva Normal Output Level g H 9 Output Mode utp Un eve Output Mode Ef Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Feedback i Wet Invert Ef Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Resonance Wvatinvert Drive ICho FIng Wet Dry Drive Phaser Wet Dry Right i Right i S i Dra 7Dry 2 Wet Dry LFO Tri Sine Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left gt o Routing Wet Dry __ Overdrive Hi Gain V N LFO Tri Sine O Drive Mode Overdrive
456. n play on the full range of the keyboard When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element VARIATIONI ENDING2 To copy the settings of this page to another Style Ele ment keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the button of the target Style Element Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range for the corresponding track PAGE 12 STYLE ELEMENT CONTROLS CHORD VARIATION TABLE This is the page where you can assign a Chord Varia tion to each recognized chord When a chord is recog nized the assigned Chord Variation will be automatically selected by the arranger to play the accompaniment chord eas comm am nu BILE a E M I octave sin SECLI ChTable Ul FS Mai DU 11 6 QU 1 MP QU d MES QUIM When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element VARIATIONI ENDING2 E F Scroll Up G H Scroll Down Use these buttons to scroll the available parameters in the display Chords Chord Variation Use these parameters to assign a Chord Variation to each of the enlisted chords Style Record mode 69 Page 12 Style Element Controls Chord Variation Table PAGE 13 STYLE CONTROLS MODE TENSION In this page you can set the Retrigger mode for the Style tracks and activate deactivate the Tension for the Accomp
457. n source of the effect balance on page 177 ance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 226 Effects Mono Mono Chain 089 Rev Gate Reverb Gate This effect combines a mono type reverb and a gate Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left nec eee Reverb C EQ Trim Pre Delay Lap LH Reverb LEQHEQ Gate Righto Input Reverb Mix i Input f 2 Envelope Control velope Select R Reverb Time sec 0 1 10 0sec Sets the reverberation time High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range b R Pre Delay msec 0 200msec Sets the delay time of the reverb sound and gate control signal 7 R EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 R Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 d Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 R Reverb Balance Sets the reverb effect balance Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet G Envelope Select D mod Input Switches between modulation source control and input signal control 2 Src Off Gate2 Dmpr Selects the modulation source that controls the gate when Envelope Select is set to D mod gt G Input Reverb Mix Dry 1 99
458. n t be edited or inserted To insert a Meter change use the Insert function in the Edit section and insert a series of measures with the new meter Existing data can then be copied or entered to these measures b To edit the Quarter Tone settings select the first value then select the scale s degree to edit Edit the second value to change the tuning of the selected note of the scale c When selecting a different effect number during this edit default settings will be assigned to this event To change the event type use the C VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Event line then use the same but tons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a differ ent event type To select and edit the event s value use the F 3 and F 4 function keys and use the G VOLUME VALUE but tons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Length Length of the selected Note event The value format is the same as the Position value Note If you change a length of 000 00 000 to a different value you can t go back to the original value This rather uncommon zero length value may be found in the drum and percussion tracks of Songs made in Backing Sequence mode Transport navigation and editing controls E F and H VOLUME VALUE buttons These buttons are the Scroll to previous event and Scroll to next event controls They corresponds to the scroll arrows shown on the screen G VOLUME VALUE buttons Use these buttons to select the corresponding parame ter value are
459. n the MODE section to go to the desired operative mode CONNECTING THE LIVERPOOL TO AN EXTERNAL SEQUENCER You can program a new Song on an external sequencer using Liverpool as a multi timbral expander Connections and settings In order to connect the Liverpool to a computer you need to have a computer with the MIDI interface 1 Connect the Liverpool and the computer as in the following diagram MIDI OUT ll mini in EE EE MIDI IN MIDI OUT 2 Press GLOBAL and go to Page 5 MIDI Con trols Set the Local parameter to Off see page 128 MIDI 37 Connecting the Liverpool to a MIDI accordion 3 Goto Page 4 MIDI Setup see page 127 Select the Ext Seq Setup Note The settings can change when new data is loaded from a card To protect the settings from loading use the Global Protect function see Global Protect on page 143 4 Press WRITE select Global and press ENTER to save the Global The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort 5 Set the Upper 1 track in play and press FULL UPPER in the KEYBOARD MODE section This way you can transmit to the external sequencer on the full keyboard range 6 At this point the notes played on the Upper 1 track go from the MIDI OUT of the Liverpool to the MIDI IN of the computer MIDI inte
460. n the keyboard to enter an event on the cur rent step Step value Length of the event to be inserted Use the NOTE VALUE buttons on the lower left area of the control panel to change this value VARIATION o2 O3 FILL COUNT IN BREAK ENDING O4 O1 20 Oo O1 20 COO OOOO OC J J 25 A oA dus Note value Dot Augments the selected note by one half of its value Triplet 3 Makes the selected note a triplet note V Velocity Set this parameter before entering a note or chord This will be the playing strength i e velocity value of the event to be inserted KBD Keyboard You can select this parameter by turning all counter clockwise the dial When this option is selected the playing strength of the played note is recognized and recorded 1 127 Velocity value The event will be inserted with this velocity value and the actual playing strength of the note played on the keyboard will be ignored D Duration Relative duration of the inserted note The percentage is always referred to the step value 5076 Staccato 8576 Ordinary articulation 100 Legato Buttons used in Step Record mode TIE button Ties the note to be inserted to the previous note REST button Inserts a rest NOTE VALUE buttons Select the step value SEQ1 PLAY STOP button Exits the Step Record mode lt Previous step Goes to the previous step erasing the inserted ev
461. n you have different Programs assigned to the same track in different Style Elements and the internal level of these Programs is different chord E c mm f ny au pr m M M octave rpm age SECLL Express U1 fi Mt Ualue 188 Value 18 i Ualue 188 Value 1e m 8 Walue 188 Value la m Malue lee ialue 188 m When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element VARIATIONI ENDING2 To copy the settings of this page to another Style Ele ment keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the button of the target Style Element Value Use this parameter to set the Expression value for the corresponding track PAGE 11 STYLE ELEMENT CONTROLS KEYBOARD RANGE The Keyboard Range automatically transposes any pat tern note that would otherwise play too high or too low in pitch compared to the original acoustic instrument when transposed by the arranger This will result in a more natural sound for each accompaniment instru ment For example the lower limit for a guitar is E2 If you play a chord under the E2 the transposed pattern could exceed this limit and sound unnatural A Bottom limit set to E2 for the guitar track will solve the prob lem transpose Bottom Top Note The Keyboard Range is ignored while recording The selected track ca
462. n you select 1 8a all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 division No quanti 1 4 2 D D J 1 32 J 1 4 Grid resolution in musical values An a after the value means no swing A b f after the value means swing quantization S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to quantize If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be posi tioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to quantize If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a sin gle percussive instrument in a Drum track Note These parameters are available only when a Drum track is selected Song operating mode 101 Page 17 Edit Quantize PAGE 18 EDIT TRANSPOSE Here you can transpose the Song a track or a part of a track chord tempo J Gm luce JE iH uL i P T ECIE MN Edit iransP ose Es Trk 9 Malue B 5001 01 006 ERAL Gi 192 Bottomit 1 Tor CS After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All Al
463. name C4 standing for the center C and a number 60 being the equivalent for C4 A Note Off message is often used to say the note has been released In some case a Note On with value 0 is used instead Together with the Note On message a Velocity value is always sent This value tells the instrument how loud the note must play Pitch Bend PB You can generate this message acting on the joystick X movement The pitch is translated up or down Program Change PC When you select a Program a Program Change message is generated on the channel Use this message together with Control Change 00 and 32 to remotely select Liverpool data from a sequencer or a master keyboard Control Change CC This is a wide array of mes sages controlling most of the instrument parameters Some examples e CCOO or Bank Select MSB and CC32 or Bank Select LSB This message pair is used together with the Program Change message to select a Program e CCO01 or Modulation This is the equivalent of pressing up the joystick A vibrato effect is usually triggered on e CCO7 or Master Volume Use this controller to set the channel s volume MIDI 35 What is MIDI e CC10 or Pan This one sets the channel s position on the stereo front e CC64 or Damper Pedal Use this controller to sim ulate the Damper pedal Tempo Tempo is a global MIDI message that is not tied to a particular channel Each Song include
464. nd display param eters These buttons are used to select the correspond ing parameter or command in the display to change the parameter s value or to change the volume of the corresponding track While you are on the main page these buttons can select a track change the track s volume or mute unmute a track See VOLUME VALUE MUTE A H buttons on page 15 for more information F 1 F 4 buttons When in an Edit page these buttons may be used when there are four parameters in a row as in the following example chord tempo ri I Je C i style play SINGLE TOUCH SETTING First select the line using a VOLUME VALUE A H button Then select a column using the F 1 F 4 func tion button be used also to select one of the page commands appearing in the last line of the display Er emm ni C ti e Et octave style play Card Loar E C3 MEWMANE SET it Cy LIVE SET 3 ETHHICH SET i4 Sb LORD OPEN CLOSE J C See SINGLE TOUCH SETTING F 1 F 4 FUNCTION KEYS buttons on page 16 for more information PAGE The PAGE buttons select the previous or next edit page When selecting a Style or a Program they select a different page of Styles or Programs See PAGE on page 15 for more information MENU The M
465. nd target Style Elements or Chord Variations Note You can t copy from a Variation to a different Style Element or vice versa because of their different structure All All Style Elements i e the whole Style You can t change the target that is auto matically set to All Var1 End2 Single Style Element V1 CV1 E2 CV2 Single Chord Variation From to Track Use these parameters to select the source and target track to copy All All tracks of the selected Style Style Ele ment or Chord Variation Drum Acc5 Single track of the selected Style Style Ele ment or Chord Variation 68 Style Record mode Page 9 Style Element Controls Programs Copying on a Chord Variation with a different length You can copy a Chord Element on a different Chord Element with a different length Just keep in mind the following e Ifthe source length is a divider of the target length the source Chord Variation will be multiplied to fit the target Chord Variation For example if the source is 4 measures long and the target 8 mea sures the source will be copied two times pann _ yy i 2 s 4 D 2 I8 4 e If the source length is not a divider of the target length the source Chord Variation will be copied for as many measures as can fit the target Chord Variation For example if the source is 6 measures long and the target 8 measures the source will be copied once then the fist 2 measures will be cop ied to fit the remaining
466. ne sale you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in which you reside WARNING Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase other wise your product may be disqualified from the manufac turer s or distributor s warranty DATA HANDLING Data stored in memory may occasionally be lost due to incorrect user action Be sure to save your important data to a memory card KORG will not be responsible for damages caused by data loss LCD DISPLAY Some pages of the manuals show LCD screens along with an explanation of operation and functionality All sound names parameter names and values are merely examples and may not always match the actual display that you are working on TRADEMARKS Mac the Mac logo and the Audio Units logo are trade marks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation registered in the U S and other countries All product names and company names are the trade marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners COPYRIGHT WARNING This professional device is intended only for use with works for which you yourself own the copyright for which you have received permission from the copy right holder to publicly perform
467. new Song edit a Standard MIDI File In general turn the speakers off change the Damper polarity Select the Arabic Scale 91 89 126 127 34 TABLE OF CONTENTS Introduction MIDI eee ee eee 35 What is MIDI 0 ccc eee eens 35 Welcome ee cece eee eee eee eens 8 Midifiles o on ununun nanana arrere 35 Usef l NKS eR GL AEE ERES 8 The General MIDI standard sss 35 About this manual 0 0 ccc eee eee ee 9 The Global channel 2c ccccccccccceccees 35 Loading the operating system 00 9 The Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels 36 Reloading the Factory Data 4 eese eher eme eras 9 The Control channel 000 000 cece ee eee 36 Start UD aoaea a tena nee act i dac dara 10 MIDI Setup viai ae Aces Sy RON QT V aes LRL ostio Deut ese onesies sic 36 Connecting the AC power adapter 10 Connecting Liverpool to a Master keyboard 36 Turning the instrument on and off 10 Connecting the Liverpool to a MIDI accordion 37 Controlling the Volume 000005 10 Connecting the Liverpool to an external sequencer 37 The BALANCE slider L L L LLL 10 Playing another instrument with the Liverpool 38 Headphones 66 e cece een eens 10 Audio Outputs 0 eee eee 11 Reference Guide Audio Inputs oe esee d a baci wee eave as 11 MIDI connections u 00000 e cece eee ee 11 Style Play oper
468. ng When finished recording the Chord Variation select a different Chord Variation or Style Element to go on recording the whole Style When finished recording the new Style press WRITE or RECORD to save it in memory The Write page will appear iempo n L p 2 Ut 21 4 Wee to Style name HewBossa To UBi Bi Bossa Abort To change the Style s name press the right A VOLUME VALUE button to enter editing and modify the name using the UP DOWN buttons to move the cursor and the DIAL to select a charac ter Press INSERT to insert a character at the cursor position or DELETE to delete it To select a different location in memory press one of the B VOLUME VALUE buttons then select a location with these buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Press ENTER to confirm or one of the D Abort VOLUME VALUE buttons to abort the save The Are you sure message will appear in the display Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort After press ing ENTER you will exit from the Record mode If you press EXIT while in the Write page you will go back to the previous Style Record page without any change Step Record procedure 1 When still in the Main page of the Style Record mode press one of the E VOLUME VALUE but tons to select the R parameter Use these but tons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the Stp recording mode ure pm
469. ng sound with a changing pitch similar to the siren of an passing ambulance Mixing the effect sound with the dry sound will create a unique chorus effect Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out teft Wet Dry Doppler Pan Depth Right Pus Dry LFO mede CTrigger 5 o LFO Mode 1 Shot LFO Mode Loop 1 Shot Switches LFO operation mode gt Dyz a Src Off Tempo When LFO Mode is set to 1 Shot this modulation source triggers the LFO E LFO Sync Off On Switches between LFO reset on and off when LFO Mode is set to Loop 0 02 20 00Hz Fx 009 Dawe LFO Frequency Hz Sets the LFO speed Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx009 cer BPM MIDI 40 240 d Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009 Base Note 4 45 D dJa 4 43 d 0 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Effects 195 Pitch Phase Mod Pitch Depth 0 100 Sets the pitch variation of the moving sound Dze Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of pitch variation Amt 100 100 Sets the
470. nspose pattern notes when play ing a chord that does not exactly match to the original chord of a Chord Variation For example if you only recorded a Chord Variation for the CMaj chord when a CMaj7 is recognized on the keyboard the arranger must transpose some notes to create the missing 7th Note To conform to Korg specifications it is advisable to set the NTT to No Transpose on the Intro 1 and Ending 1 Root The root note in CMaj C is transposed to the missing notes 5th The 5th note in CMaj G is transposed to the missing notes All original patterns must be programmed on the Maj7 or min7 chords When loading old Korg i Series instruments this option is automatically selected No Transp No transposition applied The pattern will always play as recorded This is the stan dard setting of Intro 1 and Ending 1 in Korg s original Styles i Series As recorded with NTT Root or 5th When you play a CM7 When you play a CM7 Key Chord CMaj with NTT Root with NTT Sth TUA A DIIS As recorded with NTT i Series When you play a CMaj When you play a CM7 Key Chord CMY with NTT i Series with NTT i Series TEM MEM T STYLE TRACKS PAGE While in the main Style Record page press TRACK SELECT to jump to this page Here you can see and select any Style track Style Element Chord Variation in Style in record edit record edit Piana Guitare Shengense AcouPiano2 UosPadli
471. nt of the effect bal ance on page 177 b D mod Modulation When the modulation source is used for control this parame ter reverses the left and right modulation direction e LFO Sync e Src f L LFO Phase degree f R LFO Phase degree The LFO can be reset via a modulation source The Src parameter sets the modulation source that resets the LFO For example you can assign Gate as a modulation source so that the sweep always starts from the specified point L LFO Phase and R LFO Phase set the phase obtained when the left and right LFOs are reset In this way you can create changes in pitch sweep for the left and right channels individually mj The effect is off when a value of the modulation source specified in the Src parameter is 63 or smaller and the effect is on when the value is 64 or higher The LFO is triggered and reset to the L LFO Phase and R LFO Phase settings when the value changes from 63 or smaller to 64 or higher 047 Dynam Delay Stereo Dynamic Delay This stereo delay controls the level of delay according to the input signal level You can use this as a ducking delay that applies delay to the sound only when you play keys at a high velocity or only when the volume level is low Stereo In Stereo Out Left o gt o Wet Dry High Damp Low Damp i Vi Delay NHZ 1 2g Feedback Spread High Damp Low Dam
472. nt operat ing mode press STYLE PLAY to recall the Style Play mode If the TRACK SELECT LED is on press TRACK SELECT to turn it off and see the Realtime tracks This operating mode is automatically selected when the instrument is turned on PROGRAM Program mode to play single Sound Pro grams on the keyboard or edit them Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons together to select the Demo mode This mode lets you listen to some Demo Songs to let you hear the sonic power of the Liverpool 6 GLOBAL This button recalls the Global edit environment where you can select various global settings This edit envi ronment overlaps any operating mode which will still remain active in the background Press EXIT to go back to the underlying operating mode 7 SDCARD This button recalls the Card edit environment where you can execute various operations on files and cards Load Save Format etc This edit environment overlaps any operating mode that still remains active in the background Press EXIT to go back to the under lying operating mode 8 MEMORY TIE This button turns the Lower and Chord Memory func tions on or off Go to the Page 24 Preferences con trols edit page Style Play mode see page 51 to decide if this button should be a Chord Memory only or a Lower Chord Memory button When it works as a Lower Chord Memory ON The sound to the left of the split point and the chord for the automatic accom
473. o Poly Yes When the same note is played repeatedly the previous note will be silenced before the next note is sounded so that the notes do not overlap No When the same note is played repeatedly the previous note will not be silenced before the next note is sounded Legato This parameter is available when the Mode parame ter is set to Mono Yes Legato is on When multiple note on s occur the first note on will retrigger the sound and the second and subsequent note on s will not retrigger When legato is on multiple note on s will not retrigger the voice If one note is already on and another note is turned on the first voice will continue sounding The oscillator sound envelope and LFO will not be reset and only the pitch of the oscillator will be updated This setting is effective for wind instrument sounds and analog synth type sounds No Legato is off Notes will always be retrig gered when note on occurs When legato is off multiple note on s will retrigger the voice at each note on The oscillator sound envelope and LFO will be reset and retriggered according to the settings of the Program Note If Legato is On certain multisamples or keyboard locations may produce an incorrect pitch Priority This parameter is available when the Mode parame ter is set to Mono It specifies which note will be given priority to play when two or more notes are played simultaneously Low Lowest note will take
474. o chord option press F 1 to select the Name part of the Chord then use the TEMPO VALUE section to select the very last value C B Off Note If you replace a chord with a different one please remember that the Lower track will not be automatically changed Transport controls While in Step Mode you can use various control panel buttons to accomplish the editing procedure 88 Backing Sequence operating mode How to delete a whole Song lt lt or gt gt Rewind or Fast Forward Use these buttons to move to the previous or following measure These commands are effective even if the M easure parameter is not selected lt or gt Previous or Next Step Use these button to go to the previous or next step 1 8 or 192 ticks If an event is located before the previous or next step the locator stops on that event For exam ple if you are positioned on M001 01 000 and no event exists before M001 01 192 the gt button moves to the M001 01 192 location If an event exists on M001 01 010 the gt button stops to the M001 01 010 location These commands are effective even if the M easure parameter is not selected SHIFT lt or gt Previous or Next Event Keep the SHIFT button pressed while pressing the lt or gt button to move to the previous or next recorded event HOW TO DELETE A WHOLE SONG You can delete a whole Song with the simple SHIFT DELETE button sequence 1 Enter the Backing Sequen
475. ockShuffle 6 Al Swing 6 Unpl Swing 8 7 RockBallad2 7 HipHop Funk 1 7 Big Band 9 8 Half Time 8 HipHop Soul 8 FastBigBand 10 9 Rock 6 8 9 MotownShufl 9 LatinBigBnd 11 10 Abbey Road 10 PopBallad 2 10 BigBnd Fox 12 11 Surf Rock 11 RhythmBlues 11 Fusion 13 12 Pop Shuffle 1 12 Soul 1 12 Ragtime Pno 14 13 BluesShuffl 13 Memphis 13 Dixieland 15 14 60 s Rock 14 Motown 1 14 Hollywood 16 15 Rock amp Roll 15 Gospel 15 Broadway CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank LATIN CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank Dance CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank WORLD 1 0 12 0 UnplugBossa 0 13 0 HouseGarage 0 14 0 OberkrWaltz 2 1 DiscoChaCha 1 House 1 OberkrPolka 3 2 Beguine 2 Dream 2 Cajun 4 3 Mambo 3 Techno 3 Zydeco 5 4 Salsa 4 Underground 4 Bluegrass 6 5 Disco Samba 5 Progressive 5 Country3 4 7 6 Merengue 6 Jungle 6 Orleans 8 7 Cumbia 7 Rap 7 Jig 9 8 Rumba 8 Hip Hop 8 Norteno 10 9 Gypsy 9 Disco 70 9 Quebradita 11 10 Engl Tango 10 80 s Dance 10 Tejano 12 11 Latin Rock 11 Love Disco 11 Tarantella 13 12 Calypso 12 Disco Party 12 Vahde 14 13 Lambada 13 Disco Funky 13 Oriental 15 14 Meneito 14 Disco Gully 14 Roman 16 15 Macarena 15 Twist 15 Ciftetelli CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank AMBIENT CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank User 1 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank User 2 1 0 15 0 New Age 0 17 0 Foxtrot 3 0 18 0 16Beat John 2 1 Color Beat 1 Hully Gully 1 8 Beat John 3 2 8Bt Analog 2 2 Mazurka 3 2 2Bt Country 4 3 8BeatGroove 3 Polka 3 3 Bajon 5 4 Windy Beat 4 It Val
476. oed eee n 146 Style Elements 223 33b does pte REOR eds 148 Single Touch Settings STS 004 148 Internal SONG ss ose gos Be coils eerte ce etes 149 Programs bank order 0000 150 Programs Program Change order 157 Drum Kits sas reete ERR rates 163 Drum Kit instruments eee eee 164 Performances sese 176 MIDI Setup ae RAP ERTSG hhedu s ideis 176 Effects lop rers irt been ane 177 Diagrams icc isekxa e ee PC ERES CHR 177 Dynamic Modulation sources 004 177 Filter Dynamic iie ee e mt ee 177 Pitch Phase Mod 0 0 cee cee eee eee 187 Mod JP Shift ins oki RR ERE ee es RE 197 ER Delay i c eee hme her RRERR RE ERES E 204 Reverb cslasi 4 mee RR P REPRECPb Gee Y 210 Mono Mono Chain 0c cece eee eee 211 Assignable parameters 227 List of functions assignable to the Footswitch 227 List of functions assignable to the Pedal or Assignable Slider 2 du rei ida e Pe Sede a exa epu 228 List of sounds assignable to the Pads 228 List of functions assignable to the Pads 229 SCALES d PP 229 MIDI Controllers 0 000 0c eee eee 230 MIDI Implementation Chart 0 231 Parameters aici wok da we Ge lus E Roy eX 232 Recognized chords 235 Error messages amp Troubleshooting 237 Error messages eos ieee emm eher edm is 237
477. of the Record Edit mode see E Style Element and CV Chord Variation on page 55 When you are in the Quantize Transpose Veloc ity or Delete pages you can listen to the selected Chord Variation Press START STOP to check how it works Press START STOP again to stop the playback When you are in the Delete All Copy Style Ele ment Controls or Style Control pages you can listen to the whole Style Press START STOP and play some chords to do your tests Select any Style Element using the control panel buttons VARIATION 1 4 INTRO 1 2 FILL 1 2 END ING 1 2 Press START STOP again to stop the playback Note When doing the above tests the Fingered 3 Chord Scanning mode is automatically selected 54 Style Record mode Exit and Save Abort Style EXIT AND SAVE ABORT STYLE When finished editing you can save your Style in memory or abort any change Press WRITE or RECORD to go to the Write page see The Write win dow on page 54 Note When saving the Style in memory Liverpool automat ically compresses it to reduce its size and save memory Hint Save often while recording to avoid accidentally los ing your Style THE WRITE WINDOW This page appears when you press the WRITE or RECORD button while in Record mode Here you can save the recorded or edited Style in memory transpose chord tempo i L D 4 Gone eg 1 Write to Style name Hew
478. og 19 Timpani 4 54 CongaLow 89 RekDomAk 124 H Gallop 20 Orch Hit 55 CongaHi 90 OpenBells 125 Birds 1 21 BrassFall 56 CongaSlap 91 Sagat 1 126 Birds 2 22 Ch Bell 57 CongaMute 92 Sagat 2 127 Thunder 23 JingleBel 58 Tamb Acc1 93 Davul 128 Sea Shore 24 WindChim1 59 Tamb Acc2 94 Ramazan 1 129 River 25 WindChim2 60 Tamb Push 95 Ramazan 2 130 Bubble 26 WindChim3 61 TambOpen 96 Ramazan 3 131 Cat 27 VibraSlap 62 Castanet1 97 Kup 1 132 Lion 28 RainStick 63 Castanet2 98 Kup 2 133 PhoneRing 29 Scratch 1 64 Aah 99 Kup 3 134 Applause 30 Scratch 2 65 Uuh 100 Kup4 135 Wind 31 Scratch 3 66 Yeah 1 101 Baya 1 136 Starship 32 Scratch 4 67 Yeah 2 102 Baya 2 137 Jetplane 33 Scratch 5 68 Hit It 103 Laughing 138 Siren 34 Scratch 6 69 Hollo 1 104 Scream 139 Cosmic 35 DistSlid1 70 Hollo 2 105 Punch LIST OF FUNCTIONS ASSIGNABLE TO THE PADS You can assign the following functions to the Pads and use them as switch controls Function Meaning StyleUp Selects the next Style StylDown Selects the previous Style PerfUp Selects the next Performance PerfDown Selects the previous Performance ProgUp Selects the next Program ProgDown Selects the previous Program Punchl O Turns the Punch Recording on off FxA Mute Mute of the Internal FX A FxB Mute Mute of the Internal FX B FxC Mute Mute of the Internal FX C FxD Mute Mute of the In
479. on will also be less For example if AMS is set to Joystick Y positive values of this parameter will cause the volume to increase when you push the joystick However if the EG settings etc have already raised the volume to its maxi mum level the volume cannot be increased further With negative values of this parameter the volume will decrease when the joystick is pushed 99 99 Intensity value PAGE 14 AMP LFO1 These parameters let you use LFO1 see Page 17 LFOT on page 121 and LFO 2 see Page 18 LFO2 on page 123 to control the volume of the selected oscillator f chord tempo J E g octave e Hur LFOL sci Selected zciii Intenzitu i Hiis Joystick Intercity 4 Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alternatively you can select oscillators using the F 1 F 4 buttons Program operating mode 119 Page 14 Amp LFO1 Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that LFO1 will have on the volume of the selected oscillator Negative values will invert the LFO waveform 99 99 Intensity value Amplifier LFO1 modulation AMS Alternate Modulation Source Use this parameter to select a source that will control the depth by which LFO1 will modulate the volume of the selected oscillator See AMS Alternate Modula t
480. on of modulation max Y 4 AMS Amp KTrk 0 max AMS Intensity positive value aro RN d Depth and direction of modulation max Y 4 AMS Amp KTrk 0 max AMS Intensity positive value zero o Depth and direction of modulation max Y 126 Global edit environment The Write window 15 GLOBAL EDIT ENVIRONMENT The Global edit environment is the place where you can set most of the Liverpool global functions i e func tions overriding any operating mode This edit envi ronment overlaps the current operating mode Style Song Play Song Backing Sequence THE WRITE WINDOW Open this window by pressing the WRITE button while one of the Global pages is in the display Here you can save various global settings Among the global settings saved with this page are also the Preference parameters of the Style Play and Song Play mode plus the Global Protect parameter of the Card mode The Split Point is also saved here TED E mm f cog laite ee a We Le LOCAL Lo jJ Press Enter io store ihe Global While this page is on the display press ENTER twice The parameters are saved to the Flash ROM and will stay in memory even when turning the instrument off MENU From any page press MENU to open the Global edit menu This menu gives access to the various Global edit pages When in this menu select a section using the VOL
481. on source of LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 009 eje BPM MIDI 40 240 e Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 009 Base Note 2 25 2 435 J d3 d 0 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 f Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount gt g High Damp 0 100 Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range gt Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Fx 010 Dese h Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 b LFO Shape Changing the LFO waveform shape controls the peak sweep of flanging effects LFO Shape LFO Shape 0 100 LFO Shape 0 100 g Feedback h Wet Dry The peak shape of the positive and negative Feedback value is different The harmonics will be emphasized when the effect sound is mixed with the dry sound if you set a posi 190 Effects Pitch Phase Mod tive value for both Feedback and Wet Dry and if you set a negative value for both
482. onance damping amount in the high range gt Sets the resonance amount Fx 023 Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet High Damp 0 100 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on pa e 177 Sets the resonance damping amount in the high range Fx 023 Fx 010 D a Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet h Ste Off Tempo Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Fx 010 023 Drez Amt 100 100 i Sre Off Tempo Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 ance on page 177 Amt 100 100 g Resonance h Wet Dry Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 The peak shape of the positive and negative Feedback value is different The harmonics will be emphasized when the effect sound is mixed with the dry sound if you set a positive value for both Resonance and Wet Dry and if you set a negative value for both Resonance and Wet Dry g High Damp 95 This parameter sets the amount of damping of the resonance in the high range Increasing the value will cut high range har monics 192 Effects Pitch Phase Mod 025 Envel Phser Stereo Envelope Phaser This stereo phaser uses an envelope generator for mod ulatio
483. ongs contained in the same folder F 3 Ins Inserts a Song at the cursor position i e the first line of the display All subsequent Songs are moved to the next higher numbered slot You can add up to 127 Songs in a list Note A Jukebox list can include only Songs contained in the same folder F 4 Del This command let s you delete the Song on the first line of the display Pressed while keeping SHIFT pressed the whole Jukebox list is deleted The instrument asks for a confirmation with the Are you sure message press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort The Jukebox file name changes to NEW_NAME JBX PAGE 10 PREFERENCES In this page you can set various general parameters chord au amm nn t n J ZIP eas DiE d I2 I Preferencesisnl E Link tode ref S2 FX Mode iD Perf Fx Moe Co Use the A D VOLUME VALUE button pairs to select a parameter Note These settings are stored in the Global file After changing these settings press WRITE to save them into the Global The Write Global window will appear see The Write window on page 72 Note You can always start both sequencers simultaneously Start both sequencers simultaneously by keeping SHIFT held down while pressing one of the PLAY STOP controls Link Mode gt GBL The two onboard Sequencers can work each with a dif ferent Tempo Off or use the same Tempo Link mod
484. ongs on com puter Even though it is not essential you usually set the bass on channel 2 melody on channel 4 drum kit on channel 10 control for an external voice harmonizer on channel 5 38 MIDI Playing another instrument with the Liverpool PLAYING ANOTHER INSTRUMENT WITH THE LIVERPOOL You can use the Liverpool as the master controller for your MIDI setup 1 Connect Liverpool s MIDI OUT to the other instru ment s MIDI IN 2 Set up the other instrument s tracks to the same channels you want to play from Liverpool For example if you wish to play the Upper 1 and Upper 2 tracks with the other instrument s sound set the other instrument to receive on the same channels of the Upper 1 and Upper 2 tracks by default channels 1 and 2 3 Set the general volume of the other instrument with its own volume controls 4 Mute unmute any track right from the Liverpool front panel Set each track s volume using Liver pool own VOLUME VALUE controls 5 Play on Liverpool s keyboard The Keyboard Liverpool s physical keyboard can drive up to 4 tracks via the MIDI OUT Upper 1 3 and Lower MIDI out put channels are set in Global mode see Page 10 MIDI OUT Channels on page 130 As a default situation Default Setup each of Liver pool Realtime Tracks transmit on these channels Track Out Channel Upper1 1 Upper2 2 Upper3 3 Lower 4 When a track is in mute it can t transmit any MIDI
485. ontrols both of the Sequencers tracks excluding the Realtime Keyboard tracks e By default you can use the ASSIGN SLIDER to control the keyboard tracks volume This slider is user assigna ble but is set to the Keyboard Expression parameter by default eo o EEEEREEEE 1 THE BALANCE SLIDER The BALANCE slider sets the relative volume of the two onboard sequencers Sequencer1 and Sequencer 2 e Move it fully left to set Sequencer 1 to the maximum level and Sequencer 2 to zero e Move it fully right to set Sequencer 1 to zero and Sequencer 2 to the maximum level e Move it to the center to set both Sequencers at the same level Note When turning the instrument on move this slider to the center to avoid starting a Song at the minimum level HEADPHONES You can connect a pair of headphones to the rear panel headphone jack PHONES stereo mini jack You can use headphones with an impedance of 16 2000 500 recommended Use a headphone distributor to con nect more than one pair of headphones AUDIO OUTPUTS You can send the sound to an external amplification system instead of the internal speakers This is useful when recording or when playing live Stereo Connect two mono cables to the L MONO amp RIGHT OUTPUTS Connect the other end of the cables to a stereo channel of your mixer two mono channels two powered monitors or the TAPE AUX input of your audio system Don t use the PHONO inputs of your audio system
486. ooking for use the TRACK SELECT button to scroll up or down the tracks and find the hidden ones O MUTE Selected track amp TRK SELECT SSS SEQUENCER Mute unmute Press both VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to mute or unmute a track For example if you are on the main page that appears after turning the instrument on and you want to mute the Upper 1 track press the E UPPER1 ACC2 buttons together VOLUME VALUE UPPER 1 ACC 2 L L UPPER 2 ACC 3 JST J The mute play status is shown by the relevant icon in the display m Play status the track plays on the key board no icon Mute status the track doesn t play on the keyboard Solo While in the Style Play Song Play and Song modes you can solo one of the tracks Just keep the SHIFT button pressed and press both VOLUME VALUE buttons corresponding to the track you wish to solo To exit the solo mode keep the SHIFT button pressed again and press both VOLUME VALUE buttons corre sponding to the soloed track SELECTING A PERFORMANCE A Performance is a set of Programs and settings for the Keyboard and Style tracks that makes selecting com plex combinations live fast and easy When the STYLE CHANGE LED is on a Performance can also select a different Style It is always advisable to use Performances rather than single Programs when playing even a solo sound since a Performance lets you select the right effects transposition
487. operation 1 2 3 B Insert the source card into the card slot Press F 1 to scan the card and show the file list Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the SET folder con taining the item you wish to load Move the folder to the first line of the display If the folder you are looking for is in another folder use the F 3 OPEN button to open it Use the F 4 CLOSE button to go back to the parent folder Press F 3 OPEN to open the SET folder A list of User data appears Global Performance Pro gram Style tempo cm n i E egg octave Card Load c P C3 PERFORM It I PROGRAM I STE H SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the data type you are looking for to the first line of the display Press F 3 OPEN to open the selected folder A list of User banks appears tempo J transpose n Ew tt octave Card Load C p ta USERGL STY i C3 USEREC STY C3 USEREG ST H SD LOD OPEM CLOSE Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the desired bank to the first line of the display 135 136 8 Press F 3 OPEN to open the selected bank A list PAGE 2 SAVE k nds Miel doe In this page you can save User data from the internal Deor tempo ranspose memory to a
488. or each of the two onboard sequencers This Setup memorizes the Internal FX settings the Internal External status of each track and the Play Mute status of each track When a new Song is selected the saved Setup is automatically recalled and all parameters are reset e Globally setting the Internal FX parameters allows you for example to assign to all Songs a Reverb suitable for the venue where you are performing without having to modify any of the Songs This is true only for non Liverpool Songs e Globally setting the Internal External status allows you for example to send the Piano track of all Songs to a dedicated expander just set globally the Piano track to the External mode e The Play Mute status allows you to globally mute tracks that you don t want to play during a show for example the melody track This is ture only for non Liverpool Songs For more information on the Internal FX settings for the Song Play mode see Page 3 Mixer FX send A B or Page 3 Mixer FX send C D and following on page 76 Here is the procedure to save the Seq14Seq2 Setup in memory 1 Press WRITE The Write page appears e tempo D unm m nn n Brice Uu LE d i octave ex RITE Fress Enter to Store the Seq 12 Setup 2 Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort If you confirm the Setup is saved into the Global You may then save t
489. or has happened Record Aborted There is not enough memory to enter the Style Record Song Record or Backing Sequencer Record mode Style Play Corrupted Style Perform Save It Again The Style Performance was damaged Press WRITE and select the Current Style option to save it to mem ory again Style Select Fails Liverpool was not able to complete the operation Style Record Arranger is Running Press Exit While in Style Record mode this message may appear when you try to select a different track or execute an edit operation while the Arranger is running Low memory The space in the SSD the space where User Styles are stored is going low Exit Record then load some banks of smaller Styles before entering Record again Style Copy Failed Press Exit Liverpool was not able to complete the Copy operation Style Delete Failed Press Exit Liverpool was not able to complete the Delete opera tion Style Save Failed Press Exit Liverpool was not able to complete the Save operation Style Select Failed Press Exit Liverpool was not able to complete the selection SMF Import Failed Press Exit There was an error while reading the Standard MIDI File with the Import SMF function The file may be cor rupted Backing Sequence Mode Too Many Styles Press Exit You have recorded the maximum number of Styles allowed depending on the memory 10 to 15 Style changes Song Play Cannot Load JBX File to
490. ord Variation but just of the current track For example you may have a Chord Variation eight measures long with a drum pat tern repeating each two measures If so set the CV Len parameter to 8 and the RecLen parameter to 2 before starting recording the Drum track When saving the Style or executing any edit operation on the Style the 2 measures pattern will be extended to the full 8 measures length of the Chord Variation Warning If you assign CVLen a value lower than RecLen the value of RecLen is not immediately updated in the display Therefore you are still free of changing the value of CVLen before the measures exceeding its value are deleted see warning in CVLen Chord Variation Length below However if you press START STOP to begin recording the real RecLen value is changed to the new one even if the display still shows the old value For example you may have CVLen 4 and RecLen 4 If you set CVLen to 2 and press START STOP to begin recording RecLen is still shown as 4 but it is in reality set to 2 and recording will cycle for just 2 measures After you press START STOP to stop recording RecLen is updated to 2 and all measures after the sec ond measure are deleted CVLen Chord Variation Length This parameter sets the total length in measures for the selected Chord Variation When playing a Style this will be the length of the accompaniment pattern to be cycled when the chord corresponding to the Cho
491. ore information As stated you can assign an alternative scale to a Per formance or STS Go to Page 5 Tuning Scale on page 44 and give also a look to the Scale Mode parameter see page 51 8 MIDI WHAT IS MIDI Here is a brief overview of MIDI as related to the Liv erpool If interested you may find more information on the general use of MIDI in the various specialized mag azines and books In general MIDI stands for Musical Instruments Digital Interface This interface lets you connect two musical instruments or a computer and various musical instruments Physically MIDI is composed of three different connec tors The MIDI IN receives data from another device the MIDI OUT sends data to another device the MIDI THRU sends to another device exactly what was received on the MIDI IN this is useful to daisy chain more instruments Channels and messages Basically a MIDI cable transmits 16 channels of data Think to each MIDI channel as a TV channel the receiver must be set on the same channel of the trans mitter The same happens with MIDI messages when you send a Note On message on channel 1 it will be received on channel 1 only This allows for multitim bricity you can have more than one sound playing on the same MIDI instrument There are various messages but here are the most com monly used Note On This message instructs an instrument to play a note on a specific channel Notes have both a
492. ose wn MEM P Card Save e c C3 USERBI STY it Py USERB2 STH J USERBG STH EL E OPEN CLOSE Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the bank containing the file to save to the first line of the display 6 7 8 10 11 12 Once you have selected the bank press F 3 OPEN to gain access to the single files transpose D38 Gpoxwes N SAE OPEN CLOSE Once you have selected the file that you want to save press F 2 SAVE to confirm the selection The content of the target card appears in the display chord tempo transpose nt L ti er Ut octave Card Saue ERES O Jh fa HEWLHRHE SET i CI LIVE SET 3 ETHHICA SET il SAE OFEN CLOSE At this point you can Create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 139 e Save onto an existing SET folder saved data is merged with the existing data on the card If you are saving into an existing folder move the desired SET folder to the first line of the display using the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Press F 2 SAVE to confirm A list of files on the target device appears Only files of the selected type are shown transpose chord tempo js n
493. ose Off 45 A2 139 Real El Tom Off 133 88 Tom Off 123 88 BD Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 46 A 2 89 HH1 Open 1 1 129 88 HH Open 1 131 99 HH Open 1 97 HH OldClose1 1 47 B2 139 Real El Tom O 133 88 Tom off 139 Real El Tom Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 48 C3 139 Real El Tom Off 133 88 Tom Off 139 Real El Tom O 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 49 C 3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 132 88 Crash Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 50 D3 139 Real El Tom O 133 88 Tom off 139 Real El Tom O 77 Tom 2 Hi off 51 D 3 113 Ride Edge 2 O 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 52 E3 108 CymbalReverse Off 106 China Cymbal Off 108 CymbalReverse Off 108 CymbalReverse Off 53 F3 114 Ride Jazz O 114 Ride Jazz off 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Off 54 F 3 212 Tambourin Acc2 O 282 Noise FM Mod Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off 56 G 3 225 Cowbell Ofi 136 88 Cowbell off 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 O 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 58 A 3 198 Vibraslap O 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 59 B3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 60 C4 171 BongoHi Open Off 134 88 Conga Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open O 61 C 4 168 BongoLo Open off 134 88 Conga Off 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open O
494. osi tion during text editing 25 WRITE CARD IN USE In Style Play mode this button opens the Write win dow that lets you save all the tracks onto a Perfor mance the Realtime Keyboard tracks in a Single Touch Setting STS or the accompaniment tracks onto a Style Performance See The Write window on page 42 In the Global edit environment press it to save Global parameters in memory See The Write window on page 126 This button s LED works as a CARD IN USE indica tor and turns on when the card slot is in use 26 ENSEMBLE gt PERF STS This button turns the Ensemble function on or off When on the right hand melody is harmonized with the left hand chords Note The Ensemble function works only when the keyboard is in SPLIT mode and the LOWER Chord Scanning mode selected 27 RECORD This button sets the instrument in Record mode depending on the current operating mode 28 MENU This button opens the Menu page for the current oper ating mode or edit environment After opening a menu you can jump to one of the edit pages by press ing the corresponding VOLUME VALUE buttons or browse them using the PAGE buttons Otherwise go back to the main page of the current operating mode or close the edit environment by pressing the EXIT button Front panel 15 See the relevant chapter devoted to each operating mode or edit environment to see their maps in detail 29 PAGE After pre
495. ou can load any Standard Midi File files with the MID or KAR extension 3 Press PLAY STOP to start the playback 4 Press PLAY STOP again to stop the playback The playback is automatically stopped at the end of the Song REALTIME RECORDING MODE While in Backing Sequence mode you can record a new Song in realtime mode ie recording exactly what you play Realtime Keyboard tracks will be Song tracks 1 4 Pads will be Song tracks 5 8 while Style tracks will be Song tracks 9 16 1 Enter the Backing Sequence mode 2 Press RECORD You will be prompted to select the Realtime Recording mode or the Chord Acc Step Mode as cm oo mem Dai E a ILLI octave Record FH Realtime Recording Chard4 Bcc Steg Fade 3 Press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Realtime Recording mode The Realtime Recording page appears see Realtime Recording page on page 85 chord tempo eas re transpose tne e D Cu Packing soa m m Lg WI mpm D uw EP pe HO Rd A onn Shuler Soft Beat aa Perf i i Metrot ResolsHi RT Padi REC Sel Tempo CheAoct REC 4 The last selected Style is currently selected Should it not be the right one select a different Style to start recording with See Selecting a Style on page 26 5 The last selected Performance or STS is currently
496. ou can select this parameter by turning all counter clockwise the dial When this option is selected the playing strength of the played note is recognized and recorded Velocity value The event will be inserted with this velocity value and the actual playing strength of the note played on the keyboard will be ignored D Duration Relative duration of the inserted note The percentage is always referred to the step value 1 127 50 Staccato 85 Ordinary articulation 100 Legato Buttons used in Step Record mode TIE button Ties the note to be inserted to the previous note REST button Inserts a rest NOTE VALUE buttons Select the step value START STOP button Exits the Step Record mode lt Previous step Goes to the previous step deleting the inserted step gt gt Fast Forward Goes to the next measure and fill the remaining space with rests 58 Style Record mode Style Record procedure STYLE RECORD PROCEDURE There are two different methods for recording a Style Realtime and Step Realtime Recording allows you to record Style pat terns in realtime Step Recording allows you to create a new Style by entering the single notes or chords in each track This is very useful when transcribing an existing score or needing a higher grade of detail and is particularly suitable to create drum and percussion tracks Preparing to record 1 2 If you like to edit an existing Style select t
497. ource of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 c Shimmer This parameter sets the amount of shimmering of the LFO waveform Increasing this value adds more shimmering mak ing the chorus effect more complex and richer Ensemble LFO Level x Shimmer Time Effects 189 Pitch Phase Mod 020 Flanger Stereo Flanger This effect gives a significant swell and movement of pitch to the sound It is more effective when applied to a sound with a lot of harmonics This is a stereo flanger You can add spread to the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other Stereo In Stereo Out Left ka TDry Flanger_ __ x x H z Feedback i High Damp Flanger MS E Right Dears GILFO Phase GEO THTSine gt LFO Shape Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the delay time from the original sound LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform b LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed gt 6 LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Fx 009 Die d Src Off Tempo Selects the modulati
498. owOct Lower Octave gt GBL Octave transposition of data received on the MIDI IN for the Lower track For example if you select the 1 value a received C4 will play a C5 on the Liverpool Octln Octave In gt GBL Enables disables the octave transposition of data received via MIDI On Data received via MIDI can be transposed according to the selected Octave Transpo sition For example if the Octave Transpo sition is 1 a received C4 will actually play a C5 Off Data received via MIDI can t be trans posed by the Octave Transposition applied to the track For example if the Octave Transposition is 1 a received C4 will still play a C4 Mute In gt GBL Use this parameter to determine if a muted track can still play data received via MIDI On No data received via MIDI on a muted track can be played by Liverpool Off Data received via MIDI on a muted track can still play on the Liverpool 130 Global edit environment Page 9 MIDI IN Filters PAGE 9 MIDI IN FILTERS Use this page to set up to 8 filters for the MIDI data received by the Liverpool chord EK J Cw labi Tex Fi 14 m em Bol Midiln Filt fs Sus Excl Pitch Bernd Mona Touch OFF B8 Bark Sel OFF i Hodi Ch OFF Filters gt GBL Selected MIDI IN filters Off No filter Pitch Bend Pitch Bend MonoTouch Mono or Channel After Touch PolyTouch Poly After
499. p a Delay X O pg if y i o iFB Out Wet Dry 3 Envelope 7 Attack Release Threshold Right o Control Target Effects 207 ER Delay High Damp 96 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Fx 043 h Low Damp 96 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range Fx 043 i Spread 100 100 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound Fx 043 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Dins a Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 Control Target None Out FB Selects from no control output and feedback gt a Polarity Reverses level control gt Threshold 0 100 Sets the level to which the effect is applied gt b Offset 0 100 Sets the offset of level control gt Attack 1 100 Sets the attack time of level control d Release 1 100 Sets the release time of level control gt 5 L Delay Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Sets the delay time for the left channel f R Delay Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Sets the delay time for the right channel Feedback 100 100 g Sets the feedback amount a
500. p Record procedure 00 cece eee 92 Song Record page cece eee ees 93 Step Record page 06 cece eee cee ees 94 Men iore ded RE doe HR Hte de RW d Ha mr deus 95 Edit page structure 0 eee eee ee eee 95 Page 1 Mixer Volume 000 ce eee eee 96 Page 2 Mixer Pan 1 eee eee 96 Page 3 Mixer FX Block 0 0 0 600 e eee eee 96 Page 4 Mixer FX Send A B or C D 97 Page 5 Tuning Detune 0 00 eee 97 Page 6 Tuning Scale n nananana nannaa 97 Page 7 Tuning PitchBend Scale 98 Page 8 FX A B Select 0 eee eee 98 Page 9 EX C D Select 0 eee eee eee 98 Page 10 FX A editing 000 c eee 99 Page 11 FX Bediting eee eee 99 Page 12 FX C editing 0 eee eee 99 Page 13 FX D editing 0 c cee neces 99 Page 14 Track Easy edit 000000 99 Page 15 Track Mode 0 cece eee eee 100 Page 16 Track Internal External 100 Page 17 Edit Quantize 000000 8 101 Page 18 Edit Transpose 0000005 101 Page 19 Edit Velocity 0 000000 101 Page 20 Edit Delete 0 200 a ee 102 Page 21 Edit Cut Measures 00 102 Page 22 Edit Insert Measures 102 Page 23 Edit Copy 0 eee eee ee eee 103 Page 2
501. pae Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 Am 100 100 Right gt Wet Dry 4 E Trim 0 100 Sets the parametric EQ input level E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 b Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 1 E Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 2 P Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 2 E Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Band 3 d Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 3 E Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Band 4 S Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 4 D Tap1 Time msec 0 680msec i Sets the Tap1 delay time Tap1 Level 0 100 Sets the Tap1 output level Fx 045 D Tap2 Time msec 0 680msec Sets the Tap2 delay time g Feedback 100 100 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount D Mt Delay Wet Dry Dry 2 98 98 2 Wet Sets the multitap delay effect balance h High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Fx 043 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the b
502. pani ment are kept in memory even when you raise your hand from the keyboard OFF The sound and chords are released as soon as you raise your hand from the key board This button doubles as a TIE function for the Song mode see chapter 13 9 BASS INV REST This button turns the Bass Inversion function on or off ON The lowest note of a chord played in inverted form will always be detected as the root note of the chord Thus you can specify to the arranger composite chords such as Am7 G or F C OFF The lowest note is scanned together with the other chord notes and is not always considered as the root note This button doubles as a REST function for the Song mode see chapter 13 10 MAN BASS This button turns the Manual Bass function on or off Note When you press the MAN BASS button the Bass track volume is automatically set to the maximum value The volume is automatically set back to the original value when the MAN BASS button is deactivated ON The automatic accompaniment stops play ing apart for the Drum and Percussion tracks and you can manually play the Bass track on the Lower part of the key board You can start the automatic accom paniment again by pressing one of the CHORD SCANNING buttons OFF The bass track is automatically played by the Style 11 SPLIT POINT lt GBL Keep this button pressed to open the Split Point win dow While this window is open you can set the split
503. pecifies the depth and direction of the modulation that LFO1 set on Page 17 LFO1 will have on the cutoff frequency of filter A Negative settings will invert the phase 99 499 Parameter value 116 Program operating mode Page 10 Filter LFO2 Intensity to B Specify the depth and direction of the modulation that LFO1 will have on the cutoff frequency of filter B see Intensity to A Change in cutoff Low setting High setting 99 499 Parameter value Joystick Y to A By moving the joystick in the Y direction toward your self you can control the depth at which LFO1 modu lates the cutoff frequency of filter A This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the control Higher settings of this parameter will produce greater increases in the effect of LFO1 on the filter when the joystick is moved toward yourself 99 499 Parameter value Joystick Y to B By moving the joystick in the Y direction toward your self you can control the depth at which LFO1 modu lates the cutoff frequency of filter B This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the control see Joystick Y to A Filter LFO1 modulation AMS Alternate Modulation Source Select a source that will control the depth and direction of cutoff frequency change for both filters A and B See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list Intensity to A Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will h
504. perating mode icon Page header EB tempo transpose n D D octave Card Load CC I MEWMANE SET iit I LIVE SET I ETHHIEB SET LE Sp LOAD OFEN CLOSE Card content Page commands Operating mode icon When in the Card Edit environment one of the operat ing modes is still active in the background The operat ing mode icon shows which mode is currently active Press EXIT to go back to the current operating mode from any of the Card pages Card Edit environment 133 File and folder size display Page header This line shows the Card page you are in Card content These lines show the content of the current folder Move the item to select to the first line using the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Use the Page commands F 1 F 4 on the last line to execute an operation on the selected file or folder The L1 symbol before a name identifies a folder i e a folder containing other files Page commands You can use these commands to browse through files and folders and to execute data transfer commands load save Commands may be different in any Card page Use the F 1 F 4 buttons to select the corre sponding command NAVIGATION TOOLS When in a Card page you can use any of the following commands to browse through the files and folders or through the list of commands E F Scroll Up Scroll the list up Keep SHIFT
505. po transpose AY eared Loe C i NEWNAME SET it fo LIVE SET fo ETHMICH SET E SD LOAD OFEN CLOSE Loading all the User data You can load all the User data Performances User Pro grams User Styles Global with a single operation 1 2 3 Insert the source card into the card slot Press F 1 to scan the card and show the file list Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the SET folder con taining the data you wish to load Move the folder to the first line of the display If the folder you are looking for is in another folder use the F 3 OPEN button to open it Use the F 4 CLOSE button to go back to the parent folder Press F 2 LOAD to confirm the selection The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort When the operation is completed the Wait indi cator disappears the source page comes back in the display and you may perform further loading operations Note Data loaded from card and data already in mem ory is merged For example if there is data in all three USER Style banks in memory USERO1 USERO2 USERO3 and there is only the USERO1 Style bank on the card the USERO1 bank is overwritten while USERO2 and USERO3 banks are left unchanged As a result you will have a STYLE folder in memory containing the USERO1 bank you just loaded and the old USERO2 and USERO3 banks Loading all data of a specified type
506. posi tioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to edit If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum track PAGE 20 EDIT DELETE This page is where you can delete MIDI events from the Song chord E cmm cm J nues DB E B tt Km e Edit Delete Trk 3 EB SHEL GL BRE Egal Gl 152 BotLomiG 1 Tor CS After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected 1 16 Selected track Master Master track This is where the Tempo Scale and Effect events are recorded Ev Event Type of MIDI event to delete All All events The measures will not be removed from the Song Note All notes in the selected range Dup Note All duplicate notes When two notes with the same pitch are encountered on the same tick the one with the lowest velocity is deleted A Touch After Touch events P Bend Pitch Bend events PrChange Program Change events excluding the bundled Control Change 00 Bank Select MSB and 32 Bank Select LSB C Change All Control Change events for example Bank Select Modulation Damper Soft Pedal CC00
507. pper tracks can play across the full key board range KORG O DISPLAY CHORD SCANNING KEYBOARD MODE HOLD LOWER UPPER R o o fe 10 Save your track configuration in a Performance That s all When you find the right sound you can press the WRITE button to save the track configuration into a Performance a Single Touch Setting STS or a Style Performance The Performance is a handy way to save Realtime tracks See The Write window on page 42 for more information 30 Tutorial Recording a Song Simultaneously recording the Style and realtime performance RECORDING A SONG Simultaneously recording the Style and realtime performance The Backing Sequence mode is a fast and effective way of recording a new Song making full use of the fea tures of the Style Play mode So arm your recorder and play live with the Styles a song will be ready in seconds 1 First enter Backing Sequence mode Press B SEQ to access the Backing Sequence mode The Realtime tracks on the keyboard will remain the same as you Selected in the Style Play mode i chord E J anew Di D a iC LI ae Hei Sores Load Sora Meteo OFF Save Song Meters ded Sel Tempo Teno Auto Don t worry about this display it s something you don t need to learn at this point You may find more information on it going to the Reference Guide see Backing Sequence operating mode on
508. priority High Highest note will take priority Last Last note will take priority PAGE 2 SAMPLE SOUND PROGRAMS The multisample s waveform on which the Program will be based can be selected here for each of the four oscillators Each oscillator can use 1 or 2 multisamples each one assigned to the High or Low layer Coa f octave Samp les Isc Selected izclii MS Hi Bark Mum ROM L3BcousticPiano B H Reverse Holl The internal Flash ROM contains 340 different multi samples preset multisamples Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alternatively you can select oscillators using the F 1 F 4 buttons MS Hi Lo Bank Num Use these parameters to select a different multisample for each of the High and Low layers You can use veloc ity to switch between the two multisamples Reverse Offset and Level can be adjusted independently for the High and Low multisamples The first line shows the bank ROM while the second line is for selecting the multisample The Program number appears at the end of the second line The multisample you select for the High layer will be triggered by velocities higher than the value of the Velocity Switch parameter see page 109 If you do not wish to use velocity switching set the switch to a value of 001 and select only the High multisample Note Each multisample has an upper limit and may not produc
509. puts Effect level PAGE 20 FX1 EDITING In this page you can edit the effected assigned to the FX1 A or C effect processor usually reverb See the Effects chapter for more information PAGE 21 FX2 EDITING In this page you can edit the effected assigned to the FX2 B or D effect processor usually modulating effect See the Effects chapter for more information Program operating mode AMS Alternate Modulation Source list 124 AMS ALTERNATE MODULATION SOURCE LIST Fit KTrk Filter Keyboard Track Fit KTrk Filter Keyboard Track Fit KTrk 0 Filter Keyboard Track 0 Fit KTrk 0 Filter Keyboard Track 0 Amp KTrk Amp Keyboard Track Amp KTrk Amp Keyboard Track Amp KTrk 0 Amp Keyboard Track 0 Amp KTrk 0 Amp Keyboard Track 0 Note Number Note number JS Y amp AT 2 Joy Stick Y amp After Touch 2 JS Y amp AT 2 Joy Stick Y amp After Touch 2 9 Joystick Y vertical downward Ass Pedal Assignable foot pedal CC 04 CC 18 CCH18 CC 17 CC H17 CC H19 CCHI9 CC 20 CC 20 CC 21 CC 21 Damper Ddamper pedal CC 64 CC 65 Portamento switch CC 65 Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal CC 66 CC 80 CC 80 CC 81 CC 81 CC 82 CC 82 CC 83 CC 83 Tempo Off Do not use Alternate Modulation Pitch EG Pitch EG Filter EG Filter EG within the same oscillator Amp EG Amp EG within the same oscillator LFO1 LFO1 within the same oscillato
510. r LFO2 LFO2 within the same oscillator Filter keyboard tracking within the same oscillator Filter keyboard tracking within the same oscillator Filter keyboard tracking within the same oscillator Filter keyboard tracking within the same oscillator Amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator Amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator Amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator Amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator Polyphonic After Touch transmitted from the Liverpool only as sequence data CC 01 direction CC 02 Velocity Velocity Poly AT Poly After Touch Channel AT Channel After Touch After Touch Channel After Touch Joystick X Joystick X horizontal axis Joystick Y Joystick Y vertical upward direction Joystick Y Joystick Y vertical downward Joystick Y vertical upward direction and After Touch direction and After Touch Tempo tempo data from Sequencer 1 clock or external MIDI clock a After Touch data can only be received via MIDI or create as a MIDI event in Song Record Step Recording mode Fit KTrk Filter Keyboard Track Fit KTrk Filter Keyboard Track Fit KTrk 0 Filter Keyboard Track 0 Fit KTrk 0 Filter Keyboard Track 0 Amp KTrk Amp Keyboard Track 0 4 Amp KTrk Amp Keyboard Track Amp KTrk 0 Amp Keyboard Track 0 4 Amp KTrk 0 Amp Keyboard Track 0 The direction of the effect will be
511. r o Routing DECI AMP AMP2DECI 086 AmpS Tremol Switches the order of the wah and amp simulation connection Amp Simulation Tremolo Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 This effect combines a mono type amp simulation and mod Dz a tremolo f Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Wet Mono Iri Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Amt 100 100 Lett Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Tremolo ance on page 177 Amp Simulation Filter gt Tremolo 085 Decim Cmp Decimator Compressor Md x i Wet Dry 1 x FO Tri Sin Vintage Up Down gt LFO Shape This effect combines a mono type decimator and a e iolipt ow ro Stare compressor You can change the order of the effect con nection A Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 Selects the type of guitar amplifier Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out T LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Vintage Up Down Left gt Selects LFO Waveform Fx 032 Routing Wet Dry b Decimator Compressor LFO Shape 100 100 i Pi i Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed Fx 020 Resolution Output Level LZP Decimator f Comp T LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz
512. r uncommon zero length value may be found in some drum or percussion tracks Transport navigation and editing controls E F and H VOLUME VALUE buttons These buttons are the Scroll to previous event E F and Scroll to next event H controls They corre sponds to the scrolling arrows shown on the screen G VOLUME VALUE buttons Use these buttons to select the corresponding parame ter value area F 3 and F 4 buttons After selecting the parameter value area with the G VOLUME VALUE buttons use these buttons to select respectively the first and second value of the event in edit START STOP button Press START STOP and play some chords on the key board to test the pattern in edit Press START STOP again to stop the pattern running SHIFT lt lt or gt gt Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the lt lt or gt gt button to open the Go to Measure window Go to Measure 1 Enterz k Exit Cancel Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a measure then press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort INSERT Press the INSERT button to insert a new event at the current shown Position The default values are Type Note Pitch C4 Velocity 100 Length 192 After inserting an event use the C VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Event line and the same buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a different event type DELETE Press the DELETE button to delete the event shown in the display PAGE 5
513. r occurred during Erase Erase operation aborted Error while converting Press Exit While trying to load Korg i series data some errors occurred The original file is probably corrupted or its structure is too different from Liverpool or Pa series data Error while formatting medium An error was reported when formatting the medium card The format procedure has been aborted Try again If formatting a card replace the card and try again Error while Writing Press Exit An error was reported while writing on the medium card The procedure has been canceled Select a differ ent medium and try again Existing Files Not Copied Press Exit After a Copy procedure no Overwrite selected all files sharing the same name have not been copied Factory Styles Protected Press Exit The SET file you just loaded included some banks of Factory Styles Fast Format Failed Full Format Enter Exit The Fast Format procedure failed Press ENTER to go on with a Full Format procedure slower File is protected You have tried to write over a read only or system file Liverpool can t write over this kind of files Should you need to write over one of these file use a personal com puter to change the file s properties then try again Read your computer s user s manual File Dir Already Existing Press Exit During a Rename or New Dir operation you were try ing to use an existing name Use a different name File in Use Pres
514. rSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps O 121 FingerSnaps off 121 FingerSnaps off 27 D 1 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 O 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 28 E1 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White O 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 29 F1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 30 F 1 145 DJ Scratch2 T 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 32 G 1 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 O 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 33 A1 249 Click Off 249 Click O 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 34 ATH 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open O 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 35 B1 15 BD Dance 2 Off 29 BD Deep 88 Off 21 BD Hip 3 Off 21 BD Hip 3 Off 36 C2 138 FM El Tom O 29 BD Deep 88 off 25 BD Ambi Kick off 13 BD Squash off 37 C 2 141 PR House06 Off 126 88 Rimshot O 141 PR House06 off 319 Rek Jingle off 38 D2 139 Real El Tom Off 124 88 SD O 61 SD Tiny Off 65 SD Vintage4 Off 39 D 2 127 88 Claps Off 127 88 Claps O 127 88 Claps Off 127 88 Claps Off 40 E2 58 SD Hip 5 O 124 88 SD off 125 99 SD Off 51 SD Rap Off 41 F2 139 Real El Tom Off 133 88 Tom Off 257 Tribe Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 42 F 2 90 HH1 Open 2 1 128 88 HH Close 1 130 99 HH Close 1 99 HH Old TiteClos 1 43 G2 139 Real El Tom O 133 88 Tom off 82 Tom Processed off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 44 G 2 94 HH2 Foot 1 129 88 HH Open 1 96 HH2 Open Off 103 HH AlpoCl
515. ratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 30 F 1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit O 32 G 1 142 Zap1 off 142 Zap1 O 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 O 33 A1 249 Click Off 249 Click O 249 Click Off 249 Click O 34 A 1 213 Triangle Open off 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open O 35 B1 28 BD Pop 99 off 21 BD Hip 3 O 5 BD Jazz Off 6 BD Pilow O 36 C2 24 BD Dance 99 Off 11 BD Gated O 4 BD SoftRoom off 5 BD Jazz O 37 C 2 141 PR House06 off 73 SideStickAmb O 73 SideStickAmb off 73 SideStickAmb O 38 D2 47 SD Yowie Off 31 SD Dry 1 O 31 SD Dry 1 Off 43 SD BrushTap1 O 39 D 2 127 88 Claps Off 127 88 Claps off 127 88 Claps Off 42 SD BrushHit O 40 E2 59 SD Hip 6 Off 52 SD Noise O 39 SD Jazz Ring Off 45 SD BrushSwirl Q 41 F2 139 Real El Tom Off 139 Real El Tom O 84 Tom JazzFloor Off 85 Tom Brush Hi O 42 F 2 128 88 HH Close 1 128 88 HH Close 1 92 HH2 Closed1 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 43 G2 139 Real El Tom Off 139 Real El Tom O 84 Tom JazzFloor off 85 Tom Brush Hi O 44 G 2 128 88 HH Close 1 129 88 HH Open Off 94 HH2 Foot 1 94 HH2 Foot 1 45 A2 139 Real El Tom Off 139 Real El Tom O 83 Tom Jazz Hi off 85 Tom Brush Hi Ofi 46 A 2 129 88 HH Open 1 129 88 HH Open 1 91 HH1 Sizzle 1 95 HH2 FootOpen 1 47 B2 139 Real El Tom O 139 Real El Tom off 83 Tom Jazz Hi off 85 Tom Brush Hi O 48 c3 139
516. rd Variation is recognized on the keyboard Warning If you reduce the Chord Variation Length after recording any measure after the selected length will be deleted Be very careful when setting the CVLen to a lower value after recording 56 Style Record mode Style Tracks page Metro Metronome This is the metronome heard during recording Off No metronome click will be heard during recording A one bar precount will be played before starting recording On1 Metronome on with a one bar precount before starting recording On2 Metronome on with a two bar precount before starting recording Resol Resolution This parameter sets the quantization during recording 3 32 2 1 8 Grid resolution in musical values For example when you select 1 16 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 16 division When you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division No quanti 1 16 D D D 1 8 D D Meter This is the meter time signature of the Style You can edit this parameter only when the Style is empty i e before you begin recording anything Original Key Chord This is the track s original key and chord Use the D VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the line and the F 1 and F 2 buttons to switch from the key chord name and the key chord type Maj min When in Style Play mode this chord will be played back exactly as it was recorded without any NTT processing see below To record j
517. rd mode you can immediately start recording If you like you can try your part before recording e Set the track in mute by pressing both corre sponding VOLUME VALUE buttons the status icon disappears Press START STOP to play back the other tracks if already recorded and practice on the keyboard When you have finished practicing press START STOP to stop the arranger and unmute the track by pressing both VOLUME VALUE buttons the track will be in record again While the status icon is flashing press START STOP to begin recording Depending on the Metro metronome option you selected a 1 or 2 bars precount may play before the recording actually begins When it begins play freely The pattern will last for some measures according to the RecLen value then restart Since the recording will happen in overdub you can add notes on any following passage This is 10 very useful to record different percussive instru ments at any cycle on a Drum or Percussion track Note While recording the track s Keyboard Range see page 68 is ignored and the track can play over the whole keyboard range The Local parameter see Local on page 128 is also automatically set to On to allow playing on the keyboard When finished recording press START STOP to stop the arranger Select a different track and go on recording the whole Chord Variation Note You can select a different track only when the arranger is not runni
518. ream O 213 Triangle Open 3 170 BongoLo Stk Off 54 F 3 9 BD Terminator Off 256 Punch O 181 Guiro Short O 170 BongoLo Stk O 55 G3 15 BD Dance 2 off 255 Heart Beat O 311 Jingle Bell O 173 BongoHi Stk1 Off 56 G 3 138 FM El Tom Off 248 Footsteps 2 O 180 Guiro Long O 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 57 A3 133 88 Tom off 247 Footsteps 1 O 232 Marc Tree LP O 174 BongoHi Stk2 Off 58 A 3 29 BD Deep 88 Off 244 Applause O 231 Marc Tree O 202 TimbaleLo Open O 59 B3 16 BD Dance 3 Off 260 DoorCreak O 182 MaracasPush off 211 Tambourin Acc1 Off 60 C4 33 SD Dry 3 Off 261 DoorSlam Off 122 Hand Claps Off 208 Timbale Paila Off 61 C 4 37 SD Full Room Off 145 DJ Scratch2 O 127 88 Claps off 205 TimbaleHi Edge off 62 D4 38 SD Off Center Off 231 Marc Tree O 144 DJ Scratch1 O 208 Timbale Paila O 63 D 4 39 SD Jazz Ring Off 262 Car Engine O 145 DJ Scratch2 O 205 TimbaleHi Edge Off 64 E4 31 SD Dry 1 Off 263 Car Stop O 150 DJ HitRub off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 65 F4 41 SD Paper Off 264 Car Pass O 234 SambaWhistle O 206 TimbaleHi Rim1 Off 66 F 4 65 SD Vintage4 off 265 Car Crash Off 234 SambaWhistle Off 318 Rek dom ak Off 67 G4 69 SD Brasser O 254 Crickets Off 165 CongaHi Slap2 Off 318 Rek dom ak Off 68 G 4 47 SD Yowie O 266 Train O 166 CongaHeel off 318 Rek dom ak Off 69 A4 49 SD CrackerRoom O 281 Noise White O 161 CongaHi Open Off 319 Rek Jingle Off 70 A 4 46 SD Big Rock O 267 Helicopter Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 227 Mambo B
519. record broadcast sell and duplicate or in connection with activities which constitute fair use under copyright law If you are not the copyright holder have not received permis sion from the copyright holder or have not engaged in fair use of the works you may be violating copyright law and may be liable for damages and penalties If you are unsure about your rights to a work please con sult a copyright attorney KORG TAKES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY INFRINGEMENT COMMITTED THROUGH USE OF KORG PRODUCTS THE BALANCE SLIDER When turning the instrument on please be assured the BALANCE slider is set to the cen ter This sets both Sequencer 1 SEQ1 and Sequencer 2 SEQ2 to their maximum level This will avoid you start a Song without hearing anything gt lt ____ SEQ 1 l SEQ 2 HOW TO Keyboard Select a Sound Program select a Performance play a Sound Program across the whole keyboard as with a piano Split the keyboard in two add sounds to the right hand mute unmute sounds Style Play mode Select a Style Start stop the Style Select a Fill or a Break Select a Style Variation see the Style tracks create a new Style Song Play mode play a Song Standard MIDI File see the Lyrics see the Song tracks Start both Sequencers at the same time Backing Sequence mode Fecord a new Backing Sequence Song Song mode Fecord a
520. rent Style option Delete all data Continue Enter Exit Formatting will delete all data on the card you are ready to format Be sure you have a copy of all data you wish to preserve Delete Destin Files Failed Press Exit The file you were trying to overwrite could not be deleted Destination File Exists Press Exit The file you are trying to copy already exists on target Directory Full Press Exit You reached the maximum folder number for the root of the selected card Delete some files or replace the card Directory Not Empty Press Exit You were trying to delete a directory still containing files Delete these files then delete the directory Directory not found Press Exit The directory is not in the current card The card has probably been replaced before finishing the card opera tion Insert the card again and try again Card Full Press Exit The selected medium card is full Delete files you are not interested to keep or replace the card with an empty one Then try again Card not empty Sh Enter to Format During a Backup you inserted a card containing some data Please replace it with an empty one or press SHIFT ENTER to start formatting the card Card write protected The card is write protected Move the protection tab to close the hole and try again Be sure there aren t data you don t want to overwrite Otherwise replace the card with an empty one Erase Failed Press Exit An erro
521. ress will show tracks 9 16 flashing TRK SELECT LED pressed again you will go back to the Main page TRK SELECT LED switched off Song icon Page header Bar number J nus O C OG m Hewhong 4 Load Sona Hetro Dff Save Song Heter 4 amp 4 Sel Tempo Tempo Auta Song icon When on this icon shows that the instrument is in Song mode Page header This line shows the selected Song name Bar number This counter shows the current bar number position of the selected Song B Load Song Use these buttons to select a Song ie a Standard MIDI File The Song Select page opens and you can select a Song see below Song Select page C Save Song This command saves the edited Song as a Standard MIDI File After pressing this command the Save Song page appears see Save Song page on page 91 D Select Tempo Select this parameter to use the TEMPO VALUE sec tion to select the Tempo When you select this parame ter the VALUE LED turns off Note The tempo is always record in overwrite mode old data is replaced by the new data F Metro Use these buttons to turn the metronome on off during playback 90 Song operating mode Tracks 1 8 page G Meter This non editable parameter shows the starting meter or time signature of the selected Song H Tempo mode This sets the Tempo change mode Man ual When the cursor is on the D Select Tempo p
522. rface The notes generated by the computer i e a Song played by its sequencer are sent thru the MIDI OUT of the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN connec tor of the Liverpool The Local Off When the Liverpool is connected to an external sequencer we recommend you to set the Liverpool in Local Off mode see Local on page 128 to avoid that the notes are simultaneously played by the keyboard and by the MIDI events sent by the external sequencer When the Liverpool is in Local Off the Liverpool key board transmits data to the external sequencer but not to the internal sound generation The sequencer will receive the notes played on the Liverpool keyboard Upper 1 and send them to the selected track of the song The track will transmit the data to the internal sound generation of the Liverpool Note In order to send data to the Liverpool sound genera tion the MIDI Thru function must be activated in the external sequencer normally active the name may be differ ent according to the type of sequencer For more information refer to the instructions manual of the sequencer The programs The Song that is played back by the computer sequencer can select the Liverpool Programs through the MIDI messages Bank Select MSB and Bank Select LSB bank selection two messages and Program Change program selection For a list of Programs and MIDI values see Programs Program Change order on page 157 A suggestion for those who program s
523. rocessed Off 15 D 0 O0 BD Dry 1 O 6 BD Pillow Off 6 BD Pillow Off 16 E0 12 BD Tight O 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 17 FO 31 SD Dry 1 O 39 SD Jazz Ring Off 42 SD BrushHit Off 18 F 0 87 HH1 Closed2 1 87 HH1 Closed2 1 87 HH1 Closed2 1 19 G0 2 BD Dry 3 O 0 BD Dry 1 Off 5 BD Jazz Off 20 G 0 73 SideStickKAmb O 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry Off 21 A0 120 SD Orch 7 32 SD Dry2 7 69 SD Brasser 7 22 A 0 119 SD Orch Roll 7 49 SD CrackerRoom T 32 SD Dry2 Off 23 BO 74 DrumStickHit O 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 24 C1 120 SD Orch T 120 SD Orch T 120 SD Orch 7 25 Ci 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll T 119 SD Orch Roll 7 26 D1 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 27 D 1 143 Zap2 O 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 28 E1 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 29 F1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 T 145 DJ Scratch2 7 30 F 1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 T 145 DJ Scratch2 7 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit O 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 32 G 1 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 33 A1 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 34 ATH 213 Triangle Open O 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 35 B1 2 BD Dry3 Off 12 BD Tight Off O0 BD Dry 1 Off 36 C2 0 BD Dry 1 Off 10 BD Tubby Off 10 BD Tubby Off 37 C 2 73 SideStickAmb O 73 SideStickAmb Off 73 SideStickAmb Off 38 D2 32 SD Dry 2 O 38 SD Off Center Of
524. roup playing an Open Hi Hat will stop the Closed Hi Hat playing None No Exclusive Group assigned The selected key will not be stopped by any other key 1 127 Exclusive Groups assigned to the selected key When you play this key all other keys assigned to the same Exclusive Group will be stopped and this key will be stopped by other keys assigned to the same Exclu sive Group Pan This parameter sets the position in the stereo panorama of the selected key Send FX1 This parameter sets the FX1 send level for of the selected key Send FX2 This parameter sets the FX2 send level for of the selected key PAGE 3 PITCH Here you can make pitch settings for each oscillator These settings specify how keyboard location will affect the pitch of each oscillator and select the controllers that will affect the oscillator pitch and specity the depth of control You can also specify the amount of pitch change produced by the Pitch EG and by LFO1 and LFO2 switch portamento on off and specify how it will apply chora transpose j L 8 octave mobi Hee Fitcon Degni ES Selected Decl Slore HL Joystick 4 2 Joustick 5 Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alternatively you can select oscillators using the F 1 F 4 buttons Slope Normally you will leave this parameter at 1 0 Positive values will cause the pitch to ris
525. rum Acc5 Selected track Value Velocity change value 127 S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to be modified If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to be modified If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track Note These parameters are available only when a Drum or Percussion track is selected Style Record mode 63 Page 3 Edit Velocity PAGE 4 EVENT EDIT The Event Edit page allows you to edit each event in a single track See Event Edit procedure on page 65 for more information on the event editing a chord J tempo measure r my Sae 2 L M Em E Jer t Edit e ug Trk DRUM Eui CCLI Position BBl 81 B888 It Es Mete FAS 72 Lafai Bea pa age WL Event Type First value Second value Trk Track Track in edit To select a different track press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to open the Go To Track window Go to Track DRUM Enterik Exit Cance Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a track and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort E CV Style Element Chord Variation Selected
526. s folder will be used also in the Main and Lyrics page 3 Compose the 4 digit number corresponding to the Song you wish to select for example if the Song is number 1043 dial 1 0 4 3 cong number After the fourth digit has been inserted the window automatically disappears and the Song is selected e If the Song number is just 1 2 or 3 digit long dial the number then press ENTER to confirm for example if the Song is number 52 dial 5 2 ENTER Note If no Song corresponds to the dialed number the Song not available message appears Press any button to make it disappear Selecting a Song in the Main page While the 51 or S2 field is selected compose the number corresponding to the Song you wish to select The cur rent folder is the one selected in the Song Select page Selecting a Song in the Lyrics page Compose the number corresponding to the Song you wish to select The current folder is the one selected in the Song Select page REALTIME AND SEQUENCER TRACKS The Liverpool is equipped with a double sequencer Each Song can play a maximum of 16 tracks for a total of 32 sequencer tracks In addition you can play on the keyboard with four additional Realtime tracks Upper 1 3 and Lower You can edit the Volume Mute status and Program selection for these tracks on the main page of the Song Play mode When you enter Song Play mode from the Style Play mode the Realtime tracks are the same a
527. s 1 8 and Song tracks 9 16 The TRACK SELECT LED shows the current page view MUTE SOLO VALUE Off Main page Realtime tracks or Song con trols On 2nd page Style tracks or Song tracks 1 8 Flashing 3rd page Song tracks 9 16 32 SINGLE TOUCH SETTING F 1 F 4 FUNCTION KEYS buttons While in the main page of the Style Play or Backing Sequence mode these buttons select a Single Touch Setting each Each of the Styles includes a maximum of four Single Touch Settings STS to automatically con figure the Realtime tracks and effects at the touch of a finger When the SINGLE TOUCH LED is lit an STS is automatically selected when selecting a Style In Edit mode these buttons double as function keys to select the corresponding items in the display 33 SHIFT With this button held down pressing certain other but tons will access to a second function 34 TEMPO VALUE section The DIAL and the DOWN and UP buttons can be used to control the Tempo assign a different value to the selected parameter in the display or scroll a list of files in the Song Select and Card pages The VALUE LED shows the status of this section DIAL Turn the dial clockwise to increase the value or tempo Turn it counter clockwise to decrease the value or tempo When used while pressing the SHIFT button this control always acts as a Tempo control DOWN and UP DOWN decreases the value or tempo UP increases the value or tempo
528. s Exit The file you tried to delete is in use by another proce dure Wait for the procedure to be completed then try again Files in Use Not Deleted Press Exit This message may appear during an Erase operation Files used by other procedures have not been erased Files in use have not been overwritten This message may appear during a Copy with Over write operation Files used by other procedures have not been copied File Is Protected Press Exit You were trying to overwrite a protected file File Not Found Press Exit The file is not in the current medium The card has probably been replaced before finishing the card opera tion Insert the card again and try again Format Completed Press Exit Formatting has been successfully completed Format aborted Press Exit Format operation aborted Format failed Press Exit An error occurred during Format Format operation aborted Illegal name Press Exit The name is not allowed on Liverpool Insert an SD card and press Enter While saving the operating system Save OS on page 142 or executing a Backup procedure see Backup Data on page 142 Liverpool asks for a card Invalid Copy Parameter Press Exit The copy operation was not possible Maybe you were trying to copy a file over itself or copying nested fold ers Load Failed Press Exit The Load procedure has not been executed Try again or try with different files Make New Dir Failed Pr
529. s MIDI Clock and assigns tempo gt ae High Damp 0 100 L Delay Base Note A D D 252 454 Sets the damping amount in the high range Fx 043 Selects the type of notes to specify the delay time for TapL C gt ae Low Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range Fx 043 b Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes to specify the delay time for TapL gt LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform Leve 0 50 d Sets the output level of TapL LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed Fx 020 C Delay Base Note J ds D 5 J Js N e Selects the type of notes to specify the delay time for TapC A LFO Phase degree 180 180 ES eer Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 034 i E C Times x1 x16 Panning Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the number of notes to specify the delay time for TapC gt Sets the panning speed Leve 0 50 Panning Depth 0 100 Sets the output level of TapC Sets the panning width D R Delay Base Note D D D Ja J dd o g Src Off Tempo Selects the type of notes to specify the delay time for TapR Selects the modulation source for the panning width gt ae Amt ae 100 100 d Times x1 x16 Set the modulation amount of the panning width Sets the number of notes to specify the delay time for TapR E Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Leve 0 50 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Sets
530. s Tempo data Lyrics Lyrics are non standard MIDI events made to display text together with the music Liverpool can read many of the available Lyrics format on the market MIDIFILES Midifiles or Standard MIDI Files SMF are a practical way of exchanging songs between different instru ments and computers Liverpool has the SMF format as its default song format so reading a song from a com puter or saving a song that a computer software can read is not a problem at all Liverpool sequencers are compatible with the SMF in format 0 all data in one track it is the most common format and 1 multitrack It can read the SMF in Song Play mode and modify save them in Song mode It can save a Song in SMF 0 format in the Backing Sequence or Song mode When in Song Play mode the Liverpool can also dis play SMF lyrics in Solton M Live Midisoft Tune1000 and compatible Edirol GMX HitBit XF formats and the chord abbreviations of SMF in Solton M live Midi soft GMX and XF format THE GENERAL MIDI STANDARD Some years ago the musical instruments world felt a need for some further standardization Then the Gen eral MIDI Standard GM was born This extension of the basic MIDI sets new rules for compatibility between instruments e A minimum of 16 MIDI channels was required e A basic set of 128 Programs correctly ordered was mandatory e The Drum Kit had a standard order e Channel 10 had to be devoted to t
531. s always active The current operating mode is indicated by the lit LED on the STYLE PLAY B SEQ SONG PLAY SONG or PROGRAM button in the MODE section The relevant icon lights up in the display An operating mode is divided into a main page the page where you usually play a Style a Song or a Pro gram a menu and a series of edit pages Press MENU to access the Menu Use the MENU and PAGE buttons to browse across the various edit pages Press EXIT to go back to the main page E 8 Bassi Guitaral Tunina Effects Track Edit O Acc 1 5 Stergerez M UosPadt ii octave L octave style play J pau BoszaMova ST51 Style Plas Menu 4 we Drum Perc Piani E Mixer RT Ctrls Sty Ctrls Treut Pad Preferences Main page Menu EXIT NO Edit pages PAGE Edit environment See diagram at the bottom of this page When you press GLOBAL or SD CARD an edit environment overlaps the current operating mode Press EXIT to go back to the current operating mode An edit environment is made up of a menu and a series of edit pages Use the MENU and PAGE buttons to browse across the various edit pages Selecting windows When you press one of the STYLE or PROGRAM PERFORMANCE buttons you open a selecting window This window closes after selecting one of the items in it or after pressing EXIT If the DISPLAY HOLD LED is light up
532. s the Style Play mode A quick way to select Programs and Effects for the Realtime tracks is choosing a different Performance MASTER VOLUME SEQUENCER VOLUME BALANCE While the MASTER VOLUME slider controls the gen eral volume of the instrument you can use the ACC SEQ VOLUME slider to control only the Sequencer s tracks volume This lets you adjust the Sequencer s vol ume alone while the Realtime Keyboard tracks are not affected by this slider Use the BALANCE slider to mix between Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 Move it to the center for the maxi mum volume of both sequencers EFFECTS IN SONG PLAY MODE The Liverpool is equipped with four effect processors or DSPs Digital Signal Processors In Song Play mode you can have two or four effects at the same time depending on the midifile you are reading Note When playing back a Song that makes use of all four effects A D you can t edit any parameter devoted to the effects These parameters appear greyed out in the display e A Song created on the Liverpool in Song or Back ing Sequence mode can use up to 4 effects usu ally 2 reverbs 2 modulating effects each track may use the A B or C D pair e A Standard MIDI File will only use 2 effects usu ally 1 reverb 1 modulating effect This lets you use the remaining 2 effects for the Realtime tracks e When using both sequencers at the same time and the S2 FX Mode is set to A B Mode see page 80 they on
533. separate folder chord tempo J Er Card Save r pn acer I Cy PERFORM Cy PROGRAM I4 SAJE OPEN CLOSE 3 Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the data type you are looking for to the first line of the display 4 Once the data type is selected press F 3 OPEN to open the folder and gain access to the separate banks tempo transpose ni L i ev 41 Card save Ca USERS ST it I LSE Y 3 USERS STY Hu SAVE OPEM CLOSE 5 Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the bank to save to the first line of the display 6 Once you have selected the bank that you want to save press F 2 SAVE to confirm the selection 7 The content of the target card appears chord tempo J c ni c ti atl Card Save b C MELLMANE SET i C3 LIUE SET I ETHHICH SET id AE OPEN CLOSE At this point you can e Create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 139 Save onto an existing SET folder 8 If you are saving into an existing folder move the desired SET folder to the first line of the display 138 10 11 Card Edit environment Page 2 Save using the E H Scroll buttons or the T
534. shed writing a name for the new midifile press F 2 SAVE to confirm The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Play Mute status saved with the Song When saving a Song the Play Mute status is saved with the Song This status is preserved when playing back the same Song in Song Play mode Song operating mode 91 Save Song page Master Transpose saved with the Song When saving a Song the Master Transpose value is saved with the Song Since this value is saved as Sys tem Exclusive data it is preserved when playing back the Song in Song Play mode Hint Since the Master Transpose is a global parameter load ing a Song with a non standard transposition may result in unwanted transposing when loading other Songs that do not contain their own transposition data To transpose a Song it is advisable to use the Edit Transpose function you can access this function by pressing the MENU button and one of the E VOLUME VALUE buttons see Page 18 Edit Transpose on page 101 You may also lock the Master Transpose for various tracks to avoid unwanted transposition See Page 2 Master Trans pose on page 127 of the Global chapter As a general rule you should use the Master Transpose TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel when you need to transpose the Realtime tracks together with the Song You should use the Edit Transpose function Song Edit mode when only the Song has to
535. si tion and press SHIFT DELETE Note All events on the very first tick M001 01 000 like Perf Style Tempo Chord Style Element selection cannot be deleted SE Style Element This is the Style Element i e a Variation Fill Intro or Ending The length of the selected Style Element is always shown on the measure counter at the top of the display measure riri I ecce This will let you know where to place the following Style Element Change For example if you inserted an Intro event lasting for 4 measures you can insert 4 empty measure after this event and a Variation event at the end of the Intro beginning at the 4th empty mea sure Off means that the accompaniment will not play at the selected position only the Realtime tracks will play Hint Insert a Style Element Off event exactly where the auto accompaniment must stop at the end of the Song Chord Use the D VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Chord line Use the F 1 F 4 buttons to select the part of the chord you wish to edit p Ri E NE MN o a E Di Name Type Tension Extension Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to modify the selected parameter You can also play a chord and it will be automatically recognized While recognizing a chord the status of the BASS INV button will be con sidered No chord means that the accompaniment will not play at the current position apart for the Drum and Percussion tracks To select the N
536. sion SFX Y 121 0 122 Seashore SFX Y 121 1 122 Rain SFX Y DRUM KITS The following table enlists all Liverpool Factory Drum Kit Programs in order of Bank Select Program Change number Legend The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely select the Programs CC00 Control Change 0 or Bank Select MSB CC32 Control Change 32 or Bank Select LSB PC Program Change af ei Ke 8 M PES LET Drum Kits 163 CCO00 CC32 PC Name GM2 120 0 27 House Kit2 120 0 28 House Kit3 120 0 29 House Kit4 120 0 30 31 remap to 24 120 0 32 Jazz Kit Y 120 0 33 39 remap to 32 120 0 40 Brush Kit1 Y 120 0 41 Brush V S 2 120 0 42 47 remap to 40 120 0 48 OrchestraK Y 120 0 49 remap to 48 120 0 50 Bdrum amp Sdrum 120 0 51 remap to 116 120 0 52 55 remap to 48 120 0 56 SFX Kit Y 120 0 57 63 remap to 56 120 0 64 Percus Kit1 120 0 65 Latin P Kit 120 0 66 TRI Per KIT 120 0 67 i30 Perc Kit 120 0 68 71 remap to 64 120 0 72 115 remap to 0 120 0 116 Arabian Kit 1 120 0 117 Arabian Kit 2 120 0 118 127 remap to 0 CCO00 CC32 PC Name GM2 120 0 0 Std Kit1 Y 120 0 1 Std Kit2 120 0 2 Std Kit3 120 0 3 AcousticKit 120 0 4 Std Kit4 120 0 5 7 remap to 0 120 0 8 Room Kit1 Y 120 0 9 HipHop Kit1 120 0 10 Jungle Kit 120 0 11 Techno
537. son5ths 121 1 86 Cat Lead 121 9 87 Freedom Pad 121 7 89 Pan Reso 121 4 102 Noble Pad 121 5 97 Square Rez 121 11 80 Mellow Pad 121 4 95 Rezbo 121 11 81 Lonely Spin 121 1 100 Auto Pilot 121 14 38 Cinema Pad 121 5 95 MetallicRez 121 4 84 VirtualTrav 121 1 88 Square Bass 121 7 87 Syn Ghostly 121 2 100 Syn Pianoid 121 12 81 MotionOcean 121 1 96 Brian Sync 121 5 84 Moon Cycles 121 5 102 Arp Twins 121 6 84 Farluce 121 11 90 Arp Angeles 121 2 88 Bell Pad 121 6 98 Big amp Raw 121 8 87 Bell Choir 121 7 98 Caribbean 121 2 96 Warm Pad 121 0 89 Lead Square 121 0 80 Sweep Pad 121 0 95 Lead Saw 121 0 81 Soundtrack 121 0 97 Calliope 121 0 82 Sine Pad 121 1 89 Chiff 121 0 83 Itopia Pad 121 1 91 Charang 121 0 84 Big Panner 121 4 63 Fifths Lead 121 0 86 Dance ReMix 121 10 91 Bass amp Lead 121 0 87 Rave 121 6 97 New Age Pad 121 0 88 ElastickPad 121 7 97 Polysynth 121 0 90 Moving Bell 121 5 98 BowedGlass 121 0 92 Bank Synth 2 MetallicPad 121 0 93 Old Portam 121 3 80 Sel 121 2 33 Power Saw 121 5 31 Atmosphere 121 0 99 Octo Lead 121 6 31 Brightness 121 0 100 ElectroLead 121 2 87 Leadsgquare 121 s9 Rich Lead 121 3 87 Lead Sing Ted in ThinAnaLead 121 4 87 Lead Saw 2 Tet 1 81 Dance bead 121 7 30 LeadSawPuls 121 2 81 Wave Lead 121 5 80 LeadDblSaw 121 3 81 Sine Wave 121 6 80 Seg Analog 151 a Synchro Cit 121 2 84 Wire Leag isi j a Wild Arp 121 6 55 Sort wa iid 1 EspressLead 121 5 87 Bank Bass HipHop Lead 121 6 87 Acous Bass 121 0 32 Analog Lead 121 7
538. source selected in AUTO FADE Src as a decrease the shimmering speed trigger to automatically fade in the modulation amount When BPM MIDI Sync is set to On you cannot use this Stereo In Stereo Out Lette fo The Fade in Rate parameter specifies the rate of fade in Ww i The Fade in Delay parameter determines the time from ibrato AutoFade modulation source ON until the fade in starts The following is an example of fade in where the LFO speed is increased from 1 0Hz to 4 0Hz when a note on message NENNEN n ZEE is received mine A AUTOFADE Src Gate1 LFO Frequency Hz 71 0 Wet Dry ne LEO Sap LFO Frequency Mod AUTOFADE Amt 3 0 AutoFadef Fade In Delay gt LFO Frequency m The effect is off when a value for the dynamic modulation source specified for the AUTOFADE Src parameter is smaller than 64 AUTOFADE Src Off Tempo d i Selects the modulation source that starts AutoFade gt pwc and the effect is on when the value is 64 or higher The AutoFade a function is triggered when the value changes from 63 or smaller to Fade In Rate 1 100 64 or higher Sets the rate of fade in gt gner AUTOFADE AutoFade b Fade In Delay msec 00 2000msec AUTGFADE o a Sets the fade in delay time gt LFO Frequency Hz 1 0 7 Gate1 Signal LFO
539. speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 009 as BPM MIDI 40 240 Effects 197 Mod P Shift b LFO Phase degree This parameter determines the difference between the left and right LFO phases A higher value will simulate the auto pan effect in which the sound is panned between left and right 033 EnvelTremol Stereo Envelope Tremolo This effect uses the input signal level to modulate a ste reo tremolo You can simulate a tremolo effect that becomes deeper as it fades out while the level gets lower fe 1 Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o 4 n Tremolo F gt Tremolo Righto f FO Phase Wet Dry LFO Tri SinVintage LFO Shape F Envelope ff Envelope Shape Ehvelope Sens Envelope Sens Envelope Sensitivity 0 100 Sets the envelope sensitivity of the input signal Envelope Shape 100 100 Sets the envelope curve shape of the input signal LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Vintage Selects LFO Waveform b LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed Fx 020 LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 032 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz
540. ss WRITE to open the Write Style page chord Femo com em a J nu oic B LM tt octave xu WEITE Lo Style name Groove Bld To Uai Foxtrot 3 Abort Use the A or E VOLUME VALUE buttons to enter the Text Editing mode Use the UP and DOWN buttons to move the cursor and the dial to select a character Use the B VOLUME VALUE buttons to select a target location The name of the Style already existing at the selected location is shown after the Style Bank Location number Warning If you select an existing Style and confirm writing the older Style is deleted and replaced by the new one Save the Styles you don t want to loose on a card before overwriting them Press ENTER to save the Style to the internal mem ory or one of the D VOLUME VALUE buttons Abort to delete any changes made in Style Record mode When the Are you sure message appears press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to go back to the Write Style page PAGE 6 EDIT DELETE This page is where you can delete single elements or MIDI events out of the Style Elid Cua ch Eus Hote 5001 601 066 EBGI G1 192 BottomG 1 Tor CE After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort E CV Style Element Chord Variation Non editab
541. ss ENTER YES to reset the currently selected track Keep SHIFT pressed and press ENTER YES to reset all tracks Press EXIT NO to abort and keep all parameters unchanged VES Trk PAGE 14 TRACK MODE This page lets you set the polyphony mode for each track Diner c umm ni cog es EM Track Made cH wE Hono Right 0 Poly Poly m o Foly m Poly m en niu cog II EuD 1 Track Hode Drum Mono Fight 2 ie Drum Poly bc Fal Fal z Poly Poly cz Parameters Drum PERF STYLE gt STS This is a Drum Percussion track No Mas ter or Octave Transpose applies to this track You can set a different volume for each class of percussive instruments see Page 13 Track Easy edit on page 45 Poly Tracks of this kind are polyphonic ie they can play more than one note at the same time Mono Tracks of this kind are monophonic i e each new note stops the previous note Mono Right A Mono track but with priority assigned to the rightmost highest note PAGE 15 TRACK INTERNAL EXTERNAL This page lets you set the Internal or External status for each track It is very useful to let a Style track drive an external expander or play a digital piano with one of Liverpool s Realtime tracks
542. ssing MENU to open a menu use these but tons to browse the edit pages of an operating mode or editing environment Press EXIT to go back from an edit page to the main page of the current operating mode or to close the Global or Card Edit environment In addition you can use these buttons to select a differ ent page in a Style Select or Program Select window 30 VOLUME VALUE MUTE A H buttons PERF STYLE STS Within this user s manual each button pair is marked with an alphabetic letter A H See Display and User Interface on page 19 for more details io u m Bossa Pro AST 3 MHP DrumPerc MusetteClan 0 Class Piano Ac Piano G Rccome 1 5 Ac Piano i3 Strings A corresponding track name is printed over each but ton pair These names show the corresponding track the button pair affects in the main page of the Style Play mode e The left half is for the main page where you can see the Realtime tracks and the Style tracks grouped together VOLUME VALUE DRUM PERC DRUM C OMM J BASS PERC C OO 0D ACC BASS MEC __ ACC1 ir n m Wig Drum Perc Class Fiano Zi 1 5 e The right half is for the Style tracks page where you can see each of the accompaniment tracks VOLUME VALUE C fe ko Standard Kit Latin Perc am Fretless lt om o AcGuiter MUTE See Symbols and Icons on page 21 Use
543. ssor for the Realtime Key board tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Real time Keyboard tracks to the Style tracks and vice versa transpose chord tempo M L i tl octave Mixer Fa Send Wi cue ba qm Aria E28 Cee D M S cim tte p C i D 58G gm chord com ruit L oO Ut nat T Mixer FR Send Hilda B56 Arlee Bigi 2 Eo Arif B20 Aiea B 5a Ec amp All B EB Alga B50 z A ljg 6 56 Algi B zH fcs To select a parameter and edit its value 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F 1 F 4 buttons to select one of the effect processors 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the value Send level PERF STYLE STS 000 No effect Only the direct uneffected sig nal goes to the outputs 127 100 effect The direct uneffected and effected signals go to the outputs with the same level 44 Style Play operating mode Page 4 Tuning Detune PAGE 4 TUNING DETUNE This page is the place where you can set the fine tuning for each track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Real time Keyboard tracks to the Style tracks and vice versa tempo transpose y R T Em
544. ssssseeee 45 Selecting muting unmuting and soloing a track 24 Page 9 FX A editing o3 assis ied ibe dn ia 45 Selecting a Performance sssssss 25 Page 10 EX B editing 0 cc0cesseeeeess 45 Selecting a Program 1 cee eee 25 Page 11 EX C editing 121 scis nnn 45 Selecting a Style i isesceiee er 26 Page 12 FX D editing 25oiuiscotebre Erb RETE 45 Selecting a Single Touch Setting STS 26 Page 13 Track Easy edit 00 45 Changing all keyboard tracks at once 26 Page 14 Track Mode 0005 46 Shortcut to see the original bank for a Style Page 15 Track Internal External 47 Performance or Program 6000s eee 26 Page 16 R T controls Damper 00005 47 prr M TERES 27 Page 17 RT controls Joystick esse 47 Playing a Style Automatic Accompaniment 27 Page 18 R T controls Dynamic range 48 Playing in Realtime Page 19 R T controls Ensemble E 48 Without using Automatic Accompaniment 28 Page 20 Style controls Drum Fill 49 Recording a Song Simultaneously recording t Page 21 Style controls he Style and realtime performance 30 Wrap Around Keyboard Range 49 Playing a Song MINER 31 Page 22 Pads e RE 50 Editing aSong 0 c0cccceeeeeeeeeee ee 32 Page 23 Preferences Lock 00 50 The Arabic Sc
545. st of data and useful infor mation for the advanced user Within the manual you will find the following abbrevi ations gt PERF The parameter can be saved onto a Perfor mance by pressing the WRITE button The parameter can be saved onto the cur rent Style Performance by pressing the WRITE button The parameter can be saved onto a Single Touch Setting by pressing the WRITE but ton STYLE STS The parameter can be saved onto a Global setting by going to the Global environ ment see Global edit environment on page 126 and pressing the WRITE button GBL Welcome About this manual LOADING THE OPERATING SYSTEM Your Liverpool can be constantly updated as new ver sions of the operating system are released by KORG You can download the operating system from http www korgpa com Please read the Readme file included with the operating system itself You can see which version of the operating systems is installed in your Liverpool by keeping the SHIFT but ton pressed and pressing the ENTER and EXIT buttons together The operating system version number will appear in the display Press EXIT to close the message window To load a new system follow these instructions 1 Copy the three operating system s files in the root of an SD card These are the needed files BLIVR SYS NBLIVR SYS LIVR LZX 2 Turn the instrument off and insert the card con taining the operating system into the card slot
546. st the Thresh old value Assignable parameters 227 List of functions assignable to the Footswitch 19 ASSIGNABLE PARAMETERS LIST OF FUNCTIONS ASSIGNABLE TO THE FOOTSWITCH The following functions can be assigned to a foot Function Meaning Style Change Same functions of the control panel buttons with the same name Single Touch Style Up Selects the next Style Style Down Selects the previous Style Perform Up Selects the next Performance switch Function Meaning Off No function assigned Start stop Play Stop Seq1 Play Stop Seq2 Synchro Tap tempo Rst Tempo lock Intro 1 Ending 1 Intro 2 Ending 2 Fill 1 Fill 2 C In Break Variation 1 Variation 2 Variation 3 Variation 4 Variation up Variation down Fade in out Memory Bass inversion Manual Bass Same functions of the control panel buttons with the same name Perform Down Selects the previous Performance Program Up Selects the next Program Program Down Selects the previous Program Upper 1 Mute Mute of the Upper 1 track Upper 2 Mute Mute of the Upper 2 track STS Up Selects the next STS STS Down Selects the previous STS STS1 Selects the STS 1 STS2 Selects the STS 2 STS3 Selects the STS 3 STS4 Selects the STS
547. status Master Transpose Volume 2 2 1 Pan FX Block FX Send Detune 2 2 1 Scale 9 Key Note Detune Scale Yes No Pitch Bend Range ej l FX Select A B C Dy Modulation Track FX Feedback Send B gt A or D gt C FX Parameters A B C D Easy Program Edit Track Mode LE ed ad SE ee ed ee ae ae ae ed we Internal External Mode a Saved as SysEx data b For this Program to be used in a Style the Prog parameter should be set to Orig in the Style Play mode See Prog Program on page 49 c Not all Control Change messages are allowed in Styles Please see List of recorded events on page 54 for more information Recognized chords 235 22 RECOGNIZED CHORDS The following pages show the most important chords recognized by the Korg Pa80 when the selected Chord Recog nition mode is Fingered 2 see Chord Recognition Mode on page 51 Recognized chords may vary with a differ ent Chord Recognition modes Major Major 6th 3 note 2 note 4 note 2 note Tee Ta i T H 11
548. stra Hit Off 96 C7 234 SambaWhistle 4 155 Orchestra Hit Off 97 C 7 229 RapSleighBell O 155 Orchestra Hit Off 98 D7 234 SambaWhistle 4 155 Orchestra Hit Off 99 D 7 231 Marc Tree 5 155 Orchestra Hit Off 100 E7 234 SambaWhistle 4 155 Orchestra Hit Off 101 F7 312 Bells Open 5 155 Orchestra Hit Off 102 F 7 259 Rainstick Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 103 G7 235 Chinese Gong Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 104 G 7 250 Bird 1 Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 105 A7 250 Bird 1 Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 106 A 7 251 Bird 2 Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 107 B7 279 Cricket Spectrum Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 108 C8 231 Marc Tree Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 109 C 8 290 Dist Slide1 Off 110 D8 214 Triangle Mute 3 111 D 8 213 Triangle Open 3 112 E8 233 Flexatone Off 113 F8 312 Bells Open Off 114 F 8 223 Caxixi Soft Off 115 G8 179 CastDouble Off 115 G 8 179 CastDouble Off 117 A8 121 FingerSnaps Off 118 A28 121 FingerSnaps Off 119 B8 236 Metal Hit Off 120 C9 236 Metal Hit Off af ei eT 8 M PEL Drum Kit instruments 175 176 Factory Data Performances PERFORMANCES All Performances are user editable Use the following table as a model for your own Perfomance lists Note You can remotely select Performances on the Liverpool by sending it Bank Select MSB CC 0 Bank Select LSB CC 32 and Program Change messages on the Control channel see page 129
549. t Dzer Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the depth of modulation Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the depth of modulation f Pan L 1 99 99 1 R Sets the panning effect sound and dry sound separately gt Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 gt Dz Src Off Tempo g Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a Pitch Shift cent e Depth These parameters set the amount of pitch shift and amount of modulation by means of the LFO Pitch Shift Mod Pitch Shift Depth Pitch LFO Waveform Triangle Depth value Higher Pitch Shift value Original Pitch LFO Waveform Square Depth value Lower f Pan g Wet Dry The Pan parameter pans the effect sound and dry sound to the left and right With L the effect sound is panned left and the dry sound is panned right With a Wet Dry Wet setting the effect and dry sound will be output in a proportion of 1 1 040 RotarySpeak Rotary Speaker This effect simulates a rotary speaker and obtains a more realistic sound by simulating the rotor in the low range and the horn in the high range separately The effect also simulates the stereo microphone settings
550. t the 3 band EQ and the amp simulation will allow you to create versatile distortion sounds This effect is suitable for guitar and organ sounds Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o gt Wet Dry Mode Overdrive Hi Gain 7 Drive PreLow cut j 3 Band PEQ H Wah H Driver AANA N Amp Simulation F Output Level Direct Mix Right poor Wah Off On Switches Wah on off gt Dm Src Off Tempo a Selects the modulation source that switches the Wah on and off Sw Toggle Moment Selects the switching mode for the modulation source that switches the Wah on and off Wah Sweep Range 10 10 Sets the range of Wah gt Dez b Wah Sweep Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls the Wah gt Drive Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Switches between overdrive and hi gain distortion Drive 1 100 Sets the degree of distortion d Pre Low cut 0 10 Sets the low range cut amount of the distortion input gt Output Level 0 50 Sets the output level gt Dmic Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the output level Amt 50 50 Sets the modulation amount of the output level Low Cutoff Hz 20 1 0kHz i Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type Gain dB 18 18dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 Mid1 Cutoff Hz Sets th
551. t environment The Write window 0000 cece eee eee hu Page1 Generalcontrols Page 2 Master Transpose Page 3 Assignable Pedal Footswitch Assignable Slider 006 Page 4 MIDISetup essere Page 5 MIDI Controls 004 Page 6 MIDI IN Channels Page 7 MIDI IN Controls 1 Page 8 MIDI IN Controls 2 Page 9 MIDI IN Filters Page 10 MIDI OUT Channels Page 11 MIDI OUT Filters Card Edit environment The WRITE CARD IN USE LED eren Supported cards 0 Loading data created with the Pa80 Pa60 Pa50 Card structure 2 0 0 eee Eiletypes 2er enr he et metre File and folder size display Page structure ssa eens ee ede heme Navigation tools 0 0 00000 133 lul Me 134 Pagel Load 22 222 oput IRE eaae CES eR 134 Page 2 Sav wai cedsis eem bh rna Ih he IR eig 136 Page 3 COPY izssexevunaddG eet Pa bb e c Padus 139 Page4 Br se cenci este ns se ete eem etos 140 Page5 Format sss 141 Page 6 New Dir i e sees ehh eem metit 141 Page7 Rename 0 eee eee eee 141 Page Utilities 1 sre ot ene ete 142 Page 9 Utilities 2 sess 143 Appendix Factory Data 0 cee ee eee 146 OtyleS cesse e eene ae e gau e
552. t pages share the same structure Program icon Page header Oscillator in edit Page number d Samples Selected MS Hi BarkHum LoBcousticPiana Parameters Parameters value Program icon When switched on this icon shows that the instrument is in Program mode Page header The header shows the name of the current edit page Oscillator in edit When in an edit page where selecting an oscillator is required this area shows the selected oscillator Use the F 1 F 4 buttons to select one of the four available oscillators Page number This area shows the current page number Parameters Select an edit parameter using the A D VOLUME VALUE buttons You can scroll the parameter list using the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons Parameter value Use the A D VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the parameter value THE COMPARE FUNCTION While in edit you can compare the current Program with its original values You cannot edit the Program while you are in Compare mode e Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press ENTER to enter the Compare function The PROGRAM LED begins flashing Play on the keyboard to lis ten to the original Program e Press SHITF ENTER again to exit the Compare mode and return to the edited Program HOW TO SELECT OSCILLATORS While in an edit page requiring an oscillator to be selected for editing us
553. ted the Program will be assigned to the last selected track 42 Style Play operating mode The Write window THE WRITE WINDOW Open this window by pressing the WRITE button Here you can save all track settings into a Perfor mance the Realtime Keyboard track settings into a Single Touch Setting or the Style track settings into the current Style Performance chord oD n OM C i ETTET z iii TON Pert Mame Stereotrand Perf HiBl 1 SterecGrand STS Herd Current Style 1 Select the kind of object you want to save your tracks into Select the Perf No line to save all tracks and the current selected Style settings into a Perfor mance Use the corresponding VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE section controls to select a Performance location in memory The name of the Performance already at the target des tination will be shown Select the STS No line to save the Realtime Keyboard tracks into a Single Touch Setting STS Use the corresponding VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE section controls to select a Single Touch Setting number Select the Current Style line to save the Style tracks into the current Style Performance If you select you save to this location Performance All track settings Selected Performance selected Style number Master Transpose STS Realtime Key Selecte
554. ternal FX D Fx Mute Mute of all Internal FXs Upp1Mute Mute of the Upper 1 track Upp2Mute Mute of the Upper 2 track Upp3Mute Mute of the Upper 3 track Low Mute Mute of the Lower track DrumMute Mute of the Drum track PercMute Mute of the Percussion track BassMute Mute of the Bass track Acc1Mute Mute of the Acc1 track Acc2Mute Mute of the Acc2 track Acc3Mute Mute of the Acc3 track Acc4Mute Mute of the Acc4 track Acc5Mute Mute of the Acc5 track Acc Mute Mute of all Acc tracks Mel Mute Mute of the Song s track 4 usually the Melody track Drum amp Bas Mute of all tracks apart for track 2 usually Bass and 10 usually Drum QuarterT Quarter Tone on off Fx CC12 Standard FX controllers Fx CC13 Assignable parameters 229 List of functions assignable to the Pads SCALES The following is a list of scales or tunings you can select in Style Play Scale on page 44 and Global Scale on page 126 modes Equal Equal tuning the standard scale for mod ern Western music It is made of 12 identi cal semitones Pure Major Major chords in the selected key are per fectly tuned Pure Minor Minor chords in the selected key are per fected tuned An arabic scale using quarters of tone Set the Key parameter as follow C for the rast C bayati D scale D for the rast D bayati E scale F for the rast F bayati G scale G for the rast G bayati A scale Ad for the rast Bb bayati C sc
555. the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Doe 034 Auto Pan m f Src Off Tempo Ste reo Auto Pan Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 This Auto Pan effect pans sound between left and right Tabig Sets Ihe modulationiamountot the effect bal It is stereo and shifting the left and right LFO phases ance on page 177 from each other will simulate the sound of the left and a LFO Shape right channels crossing over each other by turns or You can change the panning curve by modifying the LFO chasing each other waveform b LFO Phase Stereo In Stereo Out Left This parameter determines the difference in the left and right LFO phases When you change the value gradually from 0 the sound from the left and right channels will chase each other around If you set the parameter to 180 or 180 the sound from each channel will cross over each other You need to input different sounds to each channel in order Right e d eio for this parameter to be effective Stereo Auto Pan LFO Phase CLFO Phase 0 degrees LFO Phase 90 degrees LFO Phase 180 degrees LFO Waveform Triangle Sine ED Selects LFO Waveform gt a a ee ri LFO Shape 100 100 RD f ED lt Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed Gy C
556. the input level Fx 037 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Daz Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 100 100 Effects Mod P Shift 201 a Mode This parameter switches the pitch shifter operating mode With Slow tonal quality will not be changed too much With Fast the effect becomes a Pitch Shifter that has a quick response but may change the tone Medium is in between these two If you do not need to set too much pitch shift amount set this parameter to Slow If you wish to change the pitch significantly use Fast b Pitch Shift 1 2tone b Src b Amt c Fine cent c Amt The amount of pitch shift will use the value of the Pitch Shift plus the Fine value The amount of modulation will use the c Amt value plus d Amt Modulation Source is used both for Pitch Shift and Fine e Feedback Position f Feedback When Feedback Position is set to Pre the pitch shifter out put is again input to the pitch shifter Therefore if you specify a higher value for the Feedback parameter the pitch will be raised or lowered more and more each time feedback is repeated If Feedback Position is set to Post the feedback signal will not pass through the pitch shifter again
557. the starting S and ending E points of the range to delete If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to delete If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track Note These parameters are available only when the All or Note option is selected PAGE 7 EDIT DELETE ALL This function lets you quickly delete a selected Style Element or Chord Variation or the whole Style reset ting it to the default parameter s values y ey UO IL _ M acm C i m n 1 age Edit Delete All Del Willi Trk Bll After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element VARIATIONI ENDING2 Del Delete Use this parameter to select the whole Style a single Style Element or a single Chord Variation All All Style Elements i e the whole Style When Del All and Trk All the whole Style is deleted and all parameters set to the default status Varl End2 Single Style Element V1 CV1 E2 CV2 Single Chord Variation Trk Tra
558. these buttons to perform various operations on the commands and functions appearing in the display SELECTING Use each button pair to select the corre sponding item in the display i e a track a parameter or a command Use either the left or right button in a pair 16 Front panel VOLUME While you are in the main pages of any operating mode select a track and use these buttons to change the track s vol ume Use the left button to decrease it or the right button to increase it Press both buttons in a pair to mute the corresponding track Press both buttons again to unmute the track While in the Style Play Song Play and Song modes you can solo one of the tracks Just keep the SHIFT button pressed and press both of the VOLUME VALUE buttons corresponding with the track you wish to solo To exit the solo mode keep the SHIFT but ton pressed again and press both the VOLUME VALUE buttons corresponding to the soloed track Use each button pair to change the corre sponding parameter s value The left but ton decreases the value the right button increases it 31 TRACK SELECT Depending on the operating mode this button switches between the various tracks view STYLE PLAY MODE Switches between the Realtime tracks and the Style tracks SONG PLAY MODE Switches between the main page showing the Realtime Keyboard tracks Song tracks 1 8 and Song tracks 9 16 SONG MODE Switches between the main page Song track
559. ting mode is where you can listen to Songs played directly from the card or the internal SSD and play along with the Song on the four Real time Keyboard tracks Upper 1 3 Lower Since the Liverpool is equipped with two onboard sequencers you can play two Songs at the same time This is very useful to mix between two Songs during a live perfor mance THE SONGS AND THE STANDARD MIDI FILE FORMAT The native Song file format of the Liverpool is the Stan dard MIDI File SMF an universal standard set by all manufacturers You can read these files with any musi cal instrument or computer A difference could be in the sound played by each track If you recorded a Song with the Liverpool Song mode using only General MIDI programs you can play the same Song on virtually any other musical instrument or computer If you used KORG native pro grams you cannot reproduce the same sounds on instruments from other brands When you read SMFs in Song Play mode there is no problem reading files made using only General MIDI sounds Sounds could be different when playing a Song made on a different instrument despite the wide compatibility of Liverpool with other non standard formats differences may arise If so go to the Song operating mode and load the SMF Then manually reassign the non matching Programs replacing them with similar Programs on the Liver pool Then save the SMF again and you will be able to play it in Song Play mod
560. ting of 0 no mod ulation will be applied With a setting of 12 00 the pitch will change up to one octave For example if you set AMS to Joystick Y and push the joystick the pitch will rise if this parameter is set to a positive value or fall if this parameter is set to a neg ative value The range is a maximum of one octave 12 00 12 00 Parameter value Pitch EG modulation EG Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the modulation that the pitch EG specified on Page 6 Pitch EG will apply to the pitch With a setting of 12 00 the pitch will change a maximum of 1 octave 12 00 12 00 Parameter value EG AMS EG Alternate Modulation Source This parameter selects the source that will modulate the pitch EG of the selected oscillator See AMS Alter nate Modulation Source list on page 124 Intensity AMS Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have For example if you set AMS to Velocity and set this value to 12 00 the veloc ity will control the range of pitch change produced by the pitch EG in a range of 1 octave As you play more softly the pitch change will draw closer to the pitch EG levels Pitch change level Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off Softly played Strongly played with Intensity Pitch EG setting a positive value Strongly played with a negative
561. tion Transmitted Recognized Remarks Default 1 16 1 16 Memorized Basic Channel Changed 1 16 1 16 Default 3 Mode Messages X X Altered dociekeieeieiereee Note 0 127 0 127 Number True Voice FEO III III 0 127 Note On O 9n V 1 127 O 9n V 1 127 Velocity Note Off X V 64 X Poly Key Oo Oo Sequencer data only A Aftertouch Mono Channel Oo Oo Sequencer data only A Pitch Bend Oo Oo 0 32 Oo Oo Bank Select MSB LSB A 1 2 O O Modulations A 64 O O Damper A 6 Oo Oo Data Entry MSB A 38 X Oo Data Entry LSB A Control 7 11 oO O Volume Expression A Change 10 91 93 o o Panpot A B or C D FX Block Send A 71 72 73 O O Harmonic Content EG time Release Attack A 74 75 O O Brightness Decay Time A 76 77 78 O O Vibrato Rate Depth Delay A 98 99 Oo Oo NRPN LSB MSB A 100 101 Oo Oo RPN LSB MSB A 1 120 121 X O All sounds off Reset all controllers A Program O 0 127 O 0 127 A Change True onon 0 127 System Exclusive Oo Oo 2 Song Position x x System Song Select x X Common Tune X X System Clock Oo Oo 3 Real Time Commands 0 0 3 Local On Off X X A All Notes Off X O 123 127 ux Messages Active Sense 0 0 Reset X x A Sent and received when MIDI Filters In and Out are set to Off in Global mode N 1 LSB MSB 00 00 Pitch Bend range 01 00 Fine Tune 02 00 Course Tune otes x2 i 2 Includes Inquiry and Master Volume messages 3 Transmitted only when the Clock Send parameter Global page 6 is set to Mi
562. to go back to the Event Edit page Press the A VOLUME VALUE button Trk to select the track to edit The Go To Track window appears Go to Track DRUM Enterzk Exit Cancel Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a track and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort The list of events contained in the selected track in the Style Element and Chord Variation selected on step 2 will appear in the display The first step or Measure Start is currently shown Since it contains an initialization event it is not editable and appears in grey ie written with a ghost character Fuzitica seni ni scuwj DT Eus TP ii iim Press one of the H VOLUME VALUE buttons Scroll Down arrow to go to the next step This is usually a note that you can edit cx D enpo mm com LM Event Edit Em Trk DRUM Ez CHAR CUI Position 2661 81 68 It Es Hote Fus Fe Lenght BGG Ha gaa El For more information on the event types and their values see Page 4 Event Edit on page 63 Use the B VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Position line Use these buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event s position Measure Use the C VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Event line You may use the C VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event type Use the G VOLUME VALUE but tons and the F 3 and F 4 function keys to respec tively se
563. to select the L or H param eter for that track 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the parameter s value L H PERF STS This parameter pair sets the Lower and Higher dynamic range for the track 0 Lowest velocity value 127 Highest velocity value PAGE 19 R T CONTROLS ENSEMBLE This page lets you program the Ensemble function This function harmonizes the right hand played mel ody with the left hand recognized chords D empo am m rid DT Nd i E CEEE T page RT Chi Ensemble E Dual UP1ihMormal Dun i Z UPA ORE Hobes B UPS Ot Up1 Up3 PERF STS Right hand Upper tracks Off There is no harmonization on this track Normal This track is included in the harmoniza tion Mute This track only plays the Ensemble notes but not the original note E nsemble PERF STS Harmonization type Duet Adds a single note to the melody Close Adds a closed position chord to the mel ody Open 1 Adds an open position chord to the mel ody Open 2 As the above but with a different algo rhythm Block Block harmonization very typical of jazz music Power Ensemble Adds a fifth and an octave to the melody as heard in hard rock Fourths LO Typical of jazz this option adds a perfect fourth and a minor seventh under the mel ody Fourths UP As the above but with notes added over the melody This adds a series of Fifths below the orig inal note Octav
564. tomatic Accompaniment As soon as you turn your Liverpool on it is in Style Play mode and you can play it in realtime Please fol low me 1 Play on the keyboard When you turn the Liverpool on Performance 1 1 is automatically selected Performance bank number cma am mi L tl COED m ii prumPerc Grand Piano 0 Fret Bass Dark Pad D Accore 145 StringzEnez Analog Ste m This sets the Realtime Keyboard tracks for you In this case you get the Upper 1 track playing on the full key board range with the Grand Piano Program selected As you may know there are four available Realtime tracks Upper 1 3 and Lower Upper Realtime tracks may play on the full range of the keyboard the selected KEYBOARD MODE shall be FULL UPPER Otherwise the Lower track plays on the left of the Split Point and the Upper tracks on the right KEYBOARD MODE shall be SPLIT If you are not satisfied with this setting at startup you can simply select another Performance Or change the track s settings as you will see in this tutorial and save them into Performance 1 1 You ll soon see how to do it 2 Select a different Performance Is the PERFORM LED on oiia PERSQRM If so press one of the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE buttons and select a Performance with the VOLUME VALUE buttons on the side of the display chord temo emu i L 4
565. tomatically selected Therefore if you wish your parame ters to stay unchanged save your preferred default settings into Performance 1 see The Write window on page 42 and turn these locks on Note These settings are stored in the Global file After changing these settings press WRITE to save them into the Global The Write Global window will appear see The Write window on page 126 Pads gt GBL Sounds or functions assigned to the Pads Scale gt GBL When this lock function is On the Scale parameter does not change when selecting a different Perfor mance Style or Single Touch Setting Auto Octave gt GBL This lock lets the instrument automatically transpose the Upper tracks when switching between the FULL UPPER and the SPLIT Keyboard modes On When switching to the FULL UPPER or SPLIT Keyboard Mode the Upper tracks transposition is left unchanged Off When switching to the FULL UPPER Key board Mode the Upper tracks Octave Transpose is automatically set to 0 When switching to the SPLIT Keyboard Mode the Upper tracks Octave Transpose is automatically set to 1 M Trnsp Master Transpose gt GBL The Master Transpose value is memorized into the Per formance or Style Performance To prevent the Master Transpose to be automatically changed when selecting a Style or Performance this lock should be set to On On Default The lock is engaged When selecting a Style or Performance the Mas t
566. tr Bass 121 4 34 Taiko Drum 121 0 116 Bass Mute 121 5 34 Melodic Tom 121 0 117 Dr Octave 121 16 38 Synth Drum 121 0 118 Nasty Bass 121 6 39 Reverse Cym 121 0 119 30303 Bass 121 5 38 Dragon Gong 121 1 119 Stein Bass 121 3 34 Castanets 121 1 115 Euro Bass 121 4 39 Concert BD 121 1 116 Jungle Rez 121 5 39 MelodicTom2 121 1 117 30303Square 121 6 38 Rhyt BoxTom 121 1 118 Bass Square 121 7 38 Electr Drum 121 2 118 Phat Bass 121 7 39 Rev Tom 121 2 117 SynBass Res 121 8 38 Rev Snare 121 3 118 Clav Bass 121 3 38 i30Perc Kit 120 0 67 Hammer 121 4 38 Bank SFX AttackPulse 121 3 39 Goblins 121 0 101 ai Bass 38 Echo Drops 121 0 102 FIUNT 121 12 38 Star Theme 121 0 103 PEE 39 GtFretNoise 121 0 120 Digi ala 121 BH BreathNoise 121 0 121 angl pass 121 ls en Seashore 121 0 122 FORI Bass 121 2 id Bird Tweet 121 0 123 Digi Bass 2 Ted 19 iud AcBassStrng 121 2 120 Bank Drum amp Perc Telephone 121 0 124 Std Kit1 120 0 0 Helicopter 121 0 125 Std Kit2 120 0 1 Applause 121 0 126 Std Kit3 120 0 2 Gun Shot 121 0 127 Std Kit4 120 0 4 SynthMallet 121 1 98 AcousticKit 120 0 3 Echo Bell 121 1 102 Room Kit1 120 0 8 Echo Pan 121 2 102 Room Kit2 120 0 12 GtrCutNoise 121 1 120 Jungle Kit 120 0 10 Rain 121 1 122 HipHop Kit1 120 0 9 Thunder 121 2 122 HipHop Kit2 120 0 13 Wind 121 3 122 Techno Kit1 120 0 11 Stream 121 4 122 Techno Kit2 120 0 14 Bubble 121 5 122 Techno Kit3 120 0 15 Dog 121 1 123 Power Kit1 120 0 16 HorseGallop 121 2 123 Power Kit2 120 0 17
567. track Pan eparate tracks FX Send Level Detune A oj N gt 4 Scale Key Note Detune 6 Pitchbend Sensitivity FX Select A B C D 7 8 Modulating Track B gt A or D gt C Send 9 12 FX Parameters A B C D 13 Easy Program Edit 14 Track Mode 15 Track Internal External Damper Expression Joystick X Joystick Y 18 Dynamic Range Ensemble Track Ensemble Type 19 Dynamic Tempo Feedback V1 V4 Drum Map Kick Designation Snare Designation Fill 1 2 General parameters Separate tracks Ol22222l2l2l2 2 I D2 2222 e2 2 2 2 Qo oug F 5 9 ooo gv VgL General parameters eje 2 H 2 P2fl w ggg PIE 222a aa a a a a Aaaa Jeg eje 2 2 22 2 i i D Separate tracks m Only Realtime tracks General parameters 20 Only Style tracks Program Original On globally 21 Wrap Around Only Style track Keyboard Range Original Off My style tracks 22 4 es 4 e eee 4 A a M a A a fs l 212 2 2 2 2 2 I l Parameters 233 Single Touch Style Seq1 Seq2 Page Parameter Performance Setting STS Performance Global Setup Note Pad 1 4 V Y Volume N N E 22 Pan y Y C Send Level V N E i D Send Level Y N i Pad Lock EI Scale Lock J
568. track goes over the lower or higher limit set by this hidden parameter it is trans posed to play into the programmed range Off No Keyboard Range used PAGE 22 PADS This page lets you select a different sound or function for each of the four PAD buttons tempo cx J nu L Fd Fags E l Crash 1 Volume le z Ride 1 Paride Ehina C Send 166 4do 5tylele D Send 166 1 4 PERF STS Each of the four PAD buttons See List of sounds assignable to the Pads on page 228 and List of func tions assignable to the Pads on page 229 Note Function names are preceded by an asterisk Volume PERF STS Volume for each of the four Pad tracks Pan PERF STS Pan for each of the four Pad tracks 64 Fully Left 00 Centered 63 Fully Right C Send PERF STS Send level to the C Internal FX processor usually reverb for each of the four Pad tracks D Send PERF gt STS Send level to the D Internal FX processor usually mod ulating effect for each of the four Pad tracks PAGE 23 PREFERENCES LOCK You can lock various functions to avoid they can be changed when selecting a different Performance Style or Single Touch Setting EIS j DM L 1 COD pn t I S M 7 page Fref Lock Obli k H Trrise n Fads OFF Scale 20h Rutanict Or Hint When turning the instrument on Performance 1 is au
569. trings amp Vocals 121 6 38 30303Square Bass 121 3 52 OhSlowVoice Strings amp Vocals 121 7 38 Bass Square Bass 121 4 52 Take Voices Strings amp Vocals 121 8 38 SynBass Res Bass 121 5 52 TakeVoices2 Strings amp Vocals 121 9 38 Digi Bass 1 Bass 121 6 52 Oooh Choir Strings amp Vocals 121 10 38 Digi Bass 2 Bass 121 le 52 Aaah Choir Strings amp Vocals 121 11 38 Digi Bass 3 Bass 121 8 52 Mmmh Choir Strings amp Vocals 121 12 38 BlindAsABat Bass 121 9 52 Oh AhVoices Strings amp Vocals 121 13 38 Jungle Bass Bass 121 10 52 Slow Choir Strings amp Vocals 121 14 38 Auto Pilot Synth 2 121 11 52 Grand Choir Strings amp Vocals 121 15 38 Hybrid Bass Bass 121 12 52 Choir Light Strings amp Vocals 121 16 38 Dr Octave Bass 121 13 52 StringChoir Strings amp Vocals 121 0 39 SynthBass 2 Bass y 121 0 53 Voice Oohs Strings amp Vocals y 121 1 39 Attack Bass Bass y 121 1 53 Humming Strings amp Vocals Y 121 2 39 Rubber Bass Bass y 121 2 53 Doolally Strings amp Vocals 121 3 39 AttackPulse Bass y 121 3 53 Airways Strings amp Vocals 121 4 39 Euro Bass Bass 121 0 54 Synth Voice Strings amp Vocals Y 121 5 39 Jungle Rez Bass 121 1 54 AnalogVoice Strings amp Vocals Y 121 6 39 Nasty Bass Bass 121 2 54 Vocalesque Strings amp Vocals 121 7 39 Phat Bass Bass 121 3 54 Vocalscape Strings amp Vocals 121 8 39 PoinkerBass Bass 121 4 54 ClassicVox Strings amp Vocals 121 0 40 Violin Strings amp Vocals y 12
570. tting of 12 00 a Level setting of 99 would raise the pitch one octave and a Level setting of 99 would lower the pitch one octave 99 99 Start Level Specifies the amount of pitch change at note on Parameter value Attack Level Specifies the amount of pitch change when the attack time has elapsed Release Level Specifies the amount of pitch change when the release time has elapsed Attack Decay Release Time These parameters specify the time over which the pitch change will occur 0 99 Parameter value Attack Time Specifies the time over which the pitch will change from note on until it reaches the pitch specified as the attack level Decay Time Specifies the time over which the pitch will change after reaching the attack level until it reaches the nor mal pitch Release Time Specifies the time over which the pitch will change from note off until it reaches the pitch specified as the release level Pitch EG Level modulation Pitch EG change level AMS JS Y Velocity Intensity positive value Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off Ad A note played softly with A note played strongly with A note played strongly with Start Level Swing set at 0 Start Level Swing set to 0 Start Level Swing set to 0 Attack Level Swing setto Attack Level Swing setto Attack Level Swing set to the Joystick pulled on the Joystick pulled on the Joystick pulled on AMS1 2 L Alt
571. tween the Realtime Keyboard tracks and the Style tracks use the TRACK SELECT button Selected STS or Style Play icon Selected Style Performance cord jJ nu L Ut soft Beat LEES FinlEacs z2 Du Pad Z Hccore l pSteinmasEnzz Analog Str Accompaniment backing tracks grouped Realtime Keyboard tracks Style Play icon When on this icon indicates that the instrument is in Style Play mode Selected Style Currently selected Style Selected STS or Performance The last selected Single Touch Setting STS or Perfor mance A Drum Perc grouped tracks Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the volume of both Drum and Percussion tracks grouped together at the same time To mute these tracks press both VOLUME VALUE buttons To unmute press both buttons again To change the volume select the track then keep one of the buttons pressed B Bass track Program name Name of the Program assigned to the Bass backing track Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the volume of the Bass track To mute this track Style Play operating mode 41 Main page press both VOLUME VALUE buttons To unmute press both buttons again To change the volume select the track then keep one of the buttons pressed C Acc 1 5 grouped tracks Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the volume of the instrument
572. ue However in Frequency modulation the LFO cannot be selected as a modulation source in AMSI or AMS2 PAGE 19 EFFECTS Here you can select two effects for the whole Program switch them on off and specify chaining tempo mm J CoG f octave a al page amm gota Fel 53 RechmthHallli Send 56 Fe 16 Chorus Send alh Note For details on the effects refer to the Effects chapter FX1 2 Use these parameters to select the effect type for effect 1 2 See the Effects chapter for more information Note If 000 No Effect is selected the output from the mas ter effect will be muted Send Send level for each effect Program operating mode 123 Page 18 LFO2 Drum samples have their own send level settings see Send FX1 and Send FX2 on page 110 Use this parameter to adjust the general offset of the Drum Pro gram 000 127 Chain 2 gt 1 Use this parameter to send the output of effect 2 to the input of effect 1 000 127 Level of the signal exiting the effect 2 going back to the effect 1 Send to Master This parameters allows you to decide if the direct effected signal must go to the Master or just the effected signal Yes Only the effected signal will be sent to the Audio Outputs The direct non effected signal will not be sent No Both the effected signal and direct signals will be sent to the Audio Out
573. ulation amount of the Tap2 feedback amount f High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Fx 043 Low Damp 96 0 100 g Sets the damping amount in the low range Fx 043 Input Level Dmod 96 100 100 h Sets the modulation amount of the input level Fx 037 Dez Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level Fx 037 Spread 100 100 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound Fx 043 Drez i Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect sound s stereo image width Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect sound s stereo image width Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Da Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 a Mode You can change how the left and right delay signals are panned by modifying the routing of the left and right delay as shown in the figure above You need to input different sounds to each channel in order for this parameter to be effective d Tap1 Level This parameter sets the output level of Tap1 Setting a differ ent level from Tap2 will add a unique touch to a monotonous delay and feedback 2 Modulation Mode LFO D mod Switches between
574. unds on page 177 i R Pre Delay msec 0 0 50 0msec Dz Sets the delay time for the right channel E h Src Off Tempo Depth 0 100 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Dz Amt 100 100 Src Off Tempo Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal 9 Selects the modulation source of the LFO modulation depth ance on page 177 Amt 100 100 b Flutter Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth This parameter enables you to set the depth of the modula p EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 178 tion caused by a warped turntable n Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 415 0dB e Click Level Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 178 i This parameter enables you to set the level of the click noise Pre HEQ Gain dB cu CEDE that occurs once every rotation of the turntable This simula Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 178 tion reproduces record noise and the noise generated after Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet the music on a vinyl record finishes Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 177 Fx 010 Daz Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 177 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 177 e L Pre Delay msec f R Pre Delay
575. urin Acc2 off 212 Tambourin Acc2 O 212 Tambourin Acc2 off 212 Tambourin Acc2 O 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal off 107 Splash Cymbal O 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 56 G 3 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell O 225 Cowbell Off 136 88 Cowbell O 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 O 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 O 58 A 3 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap O 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap O 59 B3 114 Ride Jazz off 113 Ride Edge 2 O 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 O 60 C4 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open O 171 BongoHi Open off 171 BongoHi Open O 61 C 4 168 BongoLo Open off 168 BongoLo Open O 168 BongoLo Open off 168 BongoLo Open O 62 D4 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap O 163 CongaHiMtSlap off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 63 D 4 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open O 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 64 E4 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open O 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open O 65 F4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 66 F 4 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open O 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell O 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell O 68 G 4 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell O 224 Agogo Bell off 224 Agogo Bell O 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up O 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up O 70 A 4 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush O 182 MaracasPush O
576. ust one Chord Variation for a Style Element the suggested original key chord is maj7 Be very careful to play the 7th note i e with a Cmaj7th key chord the B to avoid the lack of notes or a bad NTT conversion when playing different chords Note To conform to Korg specifications it is advisable to record both the Major and minor Chord Variations for the Intro 1 and Ending 1 Style Elements When you select a track the original key chord assigned to the selected track will be activated All recorded tracks will play back on that key chord For example if the original key chord for the Acc1 track is A7th when selecting the Acc1 tracks all the remaining tracks will play according to the A7th key chord In the above example you will record the Accl track in the AMajor key with notes that will comply with the A7th chord This is the pattern that will be recalled exactly as it was recorded when playing an A7th chord Copying the Key Chord value to all other tracks of the same Chord Variation While in this page you can keep the SHIFT button pressed while pressing one of the D VOLUME VALUE buttons to copy the Key of the cur rently selected track to all other tracks of the same Chord Variation This function is useful to speed up pat tern programming and to avoid having different tracks in different keys within the same Chord Variation NTT The Note Transposition Table NTT determines how the arranger will tra
577. utomatically set to On each time you assign a Program to any of the Style tracks either from the front panel or via MIDI Original Style tracks always use the original Pro grams If you assign a different Program to a Style track it may be reset to the orig inal one when selecting a different Style Element On You can assign different Programs to each Style track and save them in a Perfor mance or Style Performance This becomes the only track s Program for all Style Ele ments 50 Style Play operating mode Page 22 Pads W Wrap Around PERF gt STYLE The wrap around point is the highest register limit for the backing track The accompaniment patterns will be transposed according to the detected chord If the chord is too high the Style tracks might play in a regis ter that is too high and therefore unnatural If how ever it reaches the wrap around point it will be automatically transposed an octave lower The wrap around point can be set for each track in semitone steps up to a maximum of 12 semitones rela tive to the chord root This value will be the interval between the key specified by the Style Element and the wrap around point 1 12 Maximum transposition in semitones of the track referred to the original key of the pattern KR Keyboard Range PERF gt STYLE This parameter is an on off switch for the Key Range parameter memorized into the Style Or iginal The Keyboard Range is used When a
578. utton Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button 4 Press F 2 CREATE to confirm The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort PAGE 7 RENAME Use the Rename function to change the name of a folder or a file To preserve data structure consistence you can t rename single files inside a SET folder or the SET folder name extension Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to reach this page mand 3 The Delete all data message appears in the dis play press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort 4 The Press F 4 to continue message appears in the display press F 4 to confirm formatting or EXIT to abort PAGE 6 NEW DIR The New Dir function lets you create a new folder in any of the cards or inside any generic folder You can t create or open SET folders since these are reserved folders to be created with a Save operation Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to reach this page Port tempo EF i etl octave CODD m mc Pn Men Dip Lacie Lr le 59 i 5p CREATE OPEN CLOSE New folder procedure 1 Inserta card into the card slot 2 Press F 1 to scan the card chord Kr emm niI ti e ETE rum ais ee pm m ns page Card Rename NIS fy GISET SET It c3 LIVE SET I ETHJICH SET It Sp REMAME OPEN CLOSE
579. will be set to the PLAY status 10 Listen to the Song When back in the Backing Sequence Play page press PLAY STOP SEQ1 to listen to the new Song How smart were you If the Song is fine you can switch to the Song mode and do some editing Or you can save it as seen below and play it in Song Play mode 11 Deleting one of the tracks or the whole Song and record again That s easy 1 Press RECORD to enter Record mode cora tempo mm amnem Dd eE d cu arm oun g Kio Iw m REC s esos Style Soft Beat 295 Ferf 1 1 Hetro DP P Resal Hi RT Fad REC Sel Tempo CheAnc REC 2 Set the track to delete and set the REC status to record 3 Set the track you want to listen to during recording to PLAY status If you don t want to delete it but you don t want to listen to it set the track to MUTE status 4 Start recording again If you are recording the RT track you can t use the Style controls 5 Press PLAY STOP SEQ1 to finish the Song and exit Recording mode 12 Time to save your Song If you don t save your Song it will be lost when you turn the instrument off or switch to the Song Play mode You must save to a card any Song you wish to preserve 1 Insert your SD card into the card slot 2 Inthe Backing Sequence Play page select the Save Song parameter E tempo amm Cm mile g J mem uud u teu octave T
580. wing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS1 2 T will affect the decay time With positive values of Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMS to lengthen the time and setting this parameter to will allow AMS to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no change Slope Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS1 2 T will affect the slope time With positive values of Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMS to lengthen the time and setting this parameter to will allow AMS to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no change Release Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS1 2 T will affect the release time With positive val ues of Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMS to lengthen the time and setting this parameter to will allow AMS to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no change 117 Program operating mode Page 12 Amp PAGE 12 AMP These parameters control the volume and pan of the selected oscillator CoO P octave a HF Decl Selected Qsc 1 ii Level 128 Pari Leti ANS Hate Murikee ld Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alternatively you can select oscillators using the F 1 F 4 buttons Level Volume of the selected oscillator Note The volume of
581. x Sax N 121 9 80 Gliding Sq Synth 2 121 1 65 Alto Breath Sax 121 10 80 Sine Switch Synth 2 121 2 65 SaxEnsemble Sax 121 11 80 Square Rez Synth 2 121 3 65 BreathyAlto Sax 121 0 81 Lead Saw Synth 2 y 121 4 65 AltSaxGrowl Sax 121 1 81 Lead Saw 2 Synth 2 y 121 0 66 Tenor Sax Sax N 121 2 81 LeadSawPuls Synth 2 y 121 1 66 Tenor Noise Sax 121 3 81 LeadDblSaw Synth 2 y 121 2 66 Soft Tenor Sax 121 4 81 Seq Analog Synth 2 y 121 3 66 TenorBreath Sax 121 5 81 Power Saw Synth 2 121 4 66 Tenor Growl Sax 121 6 81 Octo Lead Synth 2 121 5 66 Folk Sax Sax 121 7 81 Seq Lead Synth 2 121 0 67 BaritoneSax Sax N 121 8 81 PhatSawLead Synth 2 121 1 67 Barit Growl Sax 121 9 81 Glide Lead Synth 2 121 2 67 BreathyBari Sax 121 10 81 Fire Wave Synth 2 121 0 68 Oboe Woodwind N 121 11 81 Rezbo Synth 2 Factory Data Programs Program Change order 161 CC00 CC32 PC Name Liverpool Bank GM2 CC00 CC32 PC Name Liverpool Bank GM2 121 12 81 Syn Pianoid Synth 2 121 10 91 Dance ReMix Synth 1 121 0 82 Calliope Synth 2 y 121 0 92 BowedGlass Synth 1 y 121 0 83 Chiff Synth 2 Y 121 0 93 MetallicPad Synth 1 Y 121 0 84 Charang Synth 2 y 121 1 93 Cosmic Synth 1 121 1 84 Wire Lead Synth 2 y 121 0 94 Halo Pad Synth 1 Y 121 2 84
582. y When Control Mode Manual the Resonance parameter sets the intensity of resonance If the Resonance parameter has a negative value harmonics will be changed and reso nance will occur at a pitch one octave lower When Control Mode LFO the intensity of resonance var ies according to the LFO The LFO sways between positive and negative values causing resonance to occur between specified pitches an octave apart in turn When Control Mode D mod the resonance is controlled by the dynamic modulation source If JS X or Ribbon is assigned as the modulation source the pitch an octave higher and lower can be controlled similar to when LFO is selected for Control Mode a LFO D mod Invert When Control Mode LFO or D mod the controlled phase of either Voice 1 or 2 will be reversed When the resonance pitch is set for Voice 1 Resonance has a positive value Voice 2 will resonate at a pitch an octave below Resonance has a negative value d Voice1 Pitch d Fine cent g Voice2 Pitch g Fine cent The Pitch parameter specifies the pitch of resonance by note name The Fine parameter allows for fine adjustment in steps of cents e High Damp h High Damp This parameter sets the damping amount of resonant sound in the high range Lower values will make a metallic sound with a higher range of harmonics 030 Doppler This effect simulates the Doppler effect of a movi
583. y any changes to each channel s settings To store the changes in memory press WRITE and save the Global in memory See MIDI on page 35 for more information on using the MIDI Setups Default This a default setting It is suitable both for programming on an external sequencer and for playing Liverpool with a master keyboard Master Kbd Select this setting when you are connect ing a mute master keyboard Sequencer 1 This setting is for playing a Song Sequencer 1 with an external instrument sounds or for listening to a Song per formed by an external sequencer using Liverpool as a sound generator Each track S1 Tr1 16 corresponds to a MIDI channel with the same number 1 16 Sequencer 2 As above but with Sequencer 2 Accordion 1 3 Select one of these settings when connect ing a MIDI Accordion This setting is for programming a Song on an external sequencer Ext Seq PAGE 5 MIDI CONTROLS This page lets you program general MIDI parameters chord E n C GblsMidi Control Local Oh Clock Internal Clock Send OFF Local The Local parameter turns the keyboard on or off Note The Local parameter is always turned on again each time you turn the instrument on On When you play on the keyboard MIDI data is sent to the internal sound genera tor and to the MIDI OUT port Off The keyboard is connected to the MIDI
584. y the USERO1 Style bank on the card the USERO1 bank is overwritten while USERO2 and USERO3 banks are left unchanged As a result you will have a STYLE folder in memory containing the USERO1 bank you just loaded and the old USERO2 and USERO3 banks Loading a single bank You can load a single bank of User data User Pro grams User Styles Performances with a single opera tion A bank corresponds to a STYLE or PROGRAM PERFORMANCE button 1 2 3 Insert the source card into the card slot Press F 1 to scan the card and show the file list Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the SET folder con taining the data you wish to load Move the folder to the first line of the display If the folder you are looking for is in another folder use the F 3 OPEN button to open it Use the F 4 CLOSE button to go back to the parent folder Press F 3 OPEN to open the SET folder A list of User data appears Global Performance Pro gram Style I i chora tempo nt Et f nls Lc Cis La AN CO PE PERFOR it C3 PROGRAM C3 STE Hu Sp LOAD OPEN CLOSE r3 Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the data type you are looking for to the first line of the display Press F 3 OPEN to open the selected folder A list of User banks appears tempo I _ it C i odi
585. yle Record and Edit e Full featured sequencer Song Record and Edit Integrated speakers for the most true sound reproduction e Wide Custom Display USEFUL LINKS Your preferred KORG dealer also carries a wide range of Korg hardware and software accessories Please ask your dealer about additional Programs Styles and other useful music materials Each KORG distributor can supply you with useful information Just give him a call for additional services In the English speaking world here are the relevant addresses USA KORG USA 316 South Service Road Mel ville New York 11747 USA Tel 1 516 333 9100 Fax 1 516 333 9108 UK KORG UK Ltd 1 Harrison Close Knowl hill Milton Keynes MK5 8PA UK Tel 01908 304600 Fax 01908 304699 UK Technical Support Tel 01908 304637 E mail info korg co uk Many KORG distributors also have their own web page on the internet where you can find infos and soft ware Useful web pages in English are the following http www korg com A place to find operating system updates and various system files for example a full backup of the factory data is at the following link http www kor a com ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual is divided in three sections e A Basic Guide containing an overview of the instrument as well as a series of practical guides named Tutorials e A Reference Guide with each page and parame ter described in detail e An Appendix with a li
586. zer2 4 Ipanema 6 5 Groove Bld 5 Slow Waltz3 5 SanbaDeSol T 6 16BtAnalog1 6 Trad Bolero 6 Ricky 8 7 16BtAnalog2 7 NewBeguine 7 Mambo 99 9 8 Fusion 8 SchlagerMx1 8 PopShuffle2 10 9 Acid Jazz 9 SchlagerMx2 9 Front Beat 11 10 NaturalBeat 10 Dance Mix 10 Long Train 12 11 UnplugLatin 11 Soca Dance 11 2000 Hits 13 12 CelticDream 12 60 s Dance 12 Questions 14 13 Classic3 4 13 70 s Disco 13 8BeatRock1 15 14 Minuetto 14 Motown 2 14 8BeatRock2 16 15 Baroque 15 Dance 80 15 JLA R amp B 148 Factory Data Style Elements Bank Direct SD CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank User 3 CC 0 CCH32 PC Page 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 0 19 0 Soul 2 0 29 31 0 15 SET 2 1 Boston Boy 3 2 6 8 JazzPop 4 3 J Pop 5 4 HipHopFunk2 6 5 Schuffle 7 6 Jazz Funk 2 8 7 Blues 9 8 6 8 Swing 10 9 The Avalon 11 10 68 R amp B 12 11 Groovin 13 12 90 s Funk 14 13 Party Funk 15 14 6 8 Blues 16 15 Fusion Funk STYLE ELEMENTS Note You can remotely select the various Style Elements on the Liverpool by sending it Program Change messages on the Control channel see page 129 PC Style Element PC Style Element PC Style Element PC Style Element PC Style Element 80 Var 1 81 Var 2 82 Var 3 83 Var 4 84 Intro 1 85 Intro 2 86 Fill 1 87 Fill 2 88 End

Liverpool Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents